Copyright: Asta Development Corp. Ltd 1988 to 1997


The PowerProject menus

Full details of the PowerProject menu commands are provided in this Help. Click on a menu below for information about the commands available in that menu.

File menu

Edit menu

Chart menu

Task menu

Histogram menu

Annotation menu

Admin menu

Window menu

Help menu

Control menu


File menu

Click on an item below for more information about the commands available in the File menu.

Start new projects

Open existing projects & MPX files

Close projects

Save a project

Select the active project

Merge an MPX file into the active project

Work with baselines

Export information about bars, charts and histograms

Produce filters to select a sub-set of information from the project and present it in a new chart window as a filter chart

Preview an item (e.g. chart or histogram) before printing

Print the active chart or histogram

Print a text report

Change your printer setup

Exit PowerProject

1, 2, 3, 4


Edit menu

Click on an item below for more information about the commands available in the Edit menu.

Undo all unsaved changes to the chart

Cut bars & annotations

Copy bars & annotations

Paste bars and annotations

Insert a new bar into the chart

Delete a selected item or group of items from the chart

View & edit details about the active project, chart, histogram, or selected bars, segments, links, columns and annotations

View & edit resource information about bars, segments and milestones

View & edit fixed cost information about bars, segments and milestones

Make global changes to a group of selected bars, segments, annotations or columns

Select bars or segments that match specific criteria

Select the bar containing the currently selected segment

Select all the bars in the active chart

Select all the bars in a summary group

View & edit details about any DDE Links in text annotations


Chart menu

Click on an item below for more information about the commands available in the Chart menu.

Open a chart

Close the active chart

Save the chart

Display the Chart Manager

Display the chart in outline

Change the chart appearance, scale, grid and column settings

Change the time unit

Save, apply and delete column layouts

Note: To print a chart, select the Print Graphics menu command from the File menu.


Task menu

Click on an item below for more information about the commands available in the Task menu.

Open an expanded bar, or expand a bar into a subchart

Assign & remove progress to segments

Assign progress up to a specific date

Set or delete a start flag

Convert segments into milestones

Create lead/lag between linked tasks

Split segments into two

Hide selected tasks

Hide unselected tasks

Show any hidden tasks

Create summary bars

Add bars to summary groups

Remove bars from summary groups

Select a link loop

Reschedule (recalculate) the whole project or the active chart


Histogram menu

Click on an item below for more information about the commands available in the Histogram menu.

Create resource histogram report definitions

Create cost centre report definitions

Close the active histogram

Save your changes to the active histogram report

Change the appearance, scale and grid settings of a histogram

Specify the date zone time unit for unlocked histograms

Edit base graphs on a histogram

Make PowerProject choose a different vertical scale for the active histogram

Switch the histogram legend on and off

Switch the Auto Update link, between a histogram and a bar chart, on and off

Lock a histogram on and off a bar chart

Note: Most of the Histogram menu commands are not available unless you have a histogram displayed in an active window or have a histogram locked onto a bar chart. When two histograms are locked onto a bar chart, the menu command affects the active histogram.


Annotation menu

Annotations are words and pictures which you can put on the bar chart or a histogram to emphasise particular points and to improve the presentation of your schedule.

To display annotations on the bar chart, check Annotations in the Miscellaneous panel on the Display tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog, then OK the dialog.

To display annotations on the histogram, check Annotations in the Miscellaneous panel on the Display tab of the Customise Histogram View dialog, then OK the dialog.

CTRL V is the shortcut for turning annotations on and off.

When annotations are displayed, you can add text, shapes and pictures to a chart or histogram.

Use the [image] button to add a text annotation. The text can be typed, or taken from the project, chart or histogram, or from another program, using tokens.

Use the [image] buttons to add shape annotations.

Pictures can be added using Import Picture to choose a graphic file created in a drawing package.

You can automatically update or move annotations by attaching them to items on the chart using different pointer shapes.

You can use the [image] button to see the Text Details, Shape/Line Details and Picture Details dialogs, to change attributes of an annotation such as its colour and scale settings.

The Annotation menu provides the following commands:

Group/Ungroup

To Front/To Back

Centre Around Hotspot

Replicate

Make Auto

Edit Autos

Add Text

Import Picture

Categories

Insert Token

Select All

Set Snapping


Admin menu

Click on an item below for more information about the commands available in the Admin menu.

Build up two libraries of codes to set the appearance of bars

Build up two libraries of codes to set the appearance of segments

Make libraries of resources to assign to tasks

Make libraries of cost centres to assign to tasks

Make a library of calendars for use in a project

Set up the Work Breakdown Numbering system for the active project

Choose the font used on bar charts, histograms and in the column sheet

Save the window positions on the desktop

Set your system defaults

Transfer codes, resources, cost centres and calendars between projects

Set up & manage access rights for users

Set your preference options to tailor PowerProject specifically to your needs

Turn the toolbars on and off


Window menu

The Window menu allows you to:

Cascade any open windows on the PowerProject desktop

Tile any open windows on the PowerProject desktop

Arrange icons of any minimised windows on the PowerProject desktop

Change the active window


Help menu

Use the commands in the Help menu to open the Help.

Help Topics

Help Pointer

Using Help

About

Customer Services


Control menu

The Control menu is a standard Windows menu that is available on the PowerProject program window, chart windows, histogram windows and dialog boxes. The Control menu appears when you click on the left-hand end of the window or dialog's title bar, or when a window has been iconised.

For more information about the commands available in the Control menu, click on one of the items below:

Restore

Move

Size

Minimize

Maximize

Close

Switch To…

Next

The Control menu is sometimes known as the System menu.


Alert

Alert

This dialog is presented when an interaction or warning is given, for example when you use the window close box after editing information, or after completing a partial reschedule.

Read the message and carry out the appropriate action.


Expanding Modelled Bars

This dialog is presented when you try to expand a bar containing a modelled allocation. You are warned that any modelled resources allocated to that bar will be made non-modelled when the bar is expanded.


Located along the top of a PowerProject owning window is the name of the program and active project. In other windows the title bar contains a bar chart title, filter chart title, or the histogram title.

To move the window, drag the title bar. (You can also move dialog boxes by dragging their title bars.)

Double-clicking on a window title bar has the same effect as the maximise window icon, or choosing either the Maximize, or Restore Window Control menu commands.

Note: If you have a histogram locked on to a bar chart, the title of the histogram is displayed on a tab on the right hand side of the histogram. Click on this tab to select which locked on histogram is active.


Minimise Icon

Clicking [image] in the upper right-hand corner of a window reduces the window to an icon. The corresponding button in Windows 3.1 is [image].

This is the same as choosing the Minimize command from the Window Control menu.

If the window is the PowerProject owning window then PowerProject itself is iconised and placed on the Windows desktop. Re-start by double-clicking on the icon or use the Restore command from the Window Control menu.

If the window contains a bar chart, filter chart, histogram, or bar chart with locked on histograms then the window is iconised onto the PowerProject desktop. If you minimise several windows, use the Window - Arrange Icons menu command to arrange the icons neatly.


Maximise Icon

Clicking [image] in the upper right-hand corner of a full window returns the active window to its size and position before you choose the Restore command from the Window Control menu. The corresponding button in Windows 3.1 is [image].

Clicking [image] in the upper-right hand corner of a small window restores the window to its full size. This is equivalent to choosing the Maximize command from the Window Control menu. The corresponding button in Windows 3.1 is [image].

The shortcut is to double-click on the window title bar.


Sizing a window

On the sides of the window, when the pointer changes shape [image] [image] you can change the size of the window by dragging or the keyboard arrow keys.

On the corners of the window when the pointer changes shape [image] you can change the size of the window by dragging or the keyboard arrow keys.

These are the same as choosing the Size command from the Window Control menu.


Window - Cascade menu command

Arranges open bar chart, filter chart, or histogram windows which are not iconised, so they overlap and you can see each window title bar.


Window - Tile menu command

Arranges open bar chart, filter chart, or histogram windows which are not iconised, so they do not overlap.


Window - Arrange Icons menu command

Arranges the icons of all minimised bar chart, filter chart, or histogram windows across the foot of the screen.


Window - Open Windows menu command

The title of each open window is listed as an command at the end of the Window menu. The active window is ticked in the menu.

To make an open window active click on the window title on the menu. If you can see part of a window on screen, then clicking on any part of it will also make it active.


Help - Help Topics menu command

This menu command opens the PowerProject Help at its Contents.


Help - Help Pointer menu command

This menu command invokes the Help pointer which you can click anywhere on the PowerProject window for information about the item clicked on.

You can also invoke the Help pointer by pressing SHIFT F1 or by clicking the [image] button in the main toolbar.


Help - Using Help menu command

This menu command opens Help explaining how to use Windows Help.


Help - About menu command

This menu command displays the PowerProject billboard which displays information including the version number and the serial number of the copy of PowerProject that you are running.


Help - Customer Services menu command

This menu command opens the PowerProject Help displaying details of how to get technical support for PowerProject.


Control menu - Restore command

This menu command returns the active window to its size and position before the last Maximize or Minimize action.

Shortcuts

The following shortcuts also restore the active window, or dialog box:

Clicking on the [image]. The corresponding button in Windows 3.1 is [image].

Double-clicking on the window title bar.


Control menu - Move command

This menu command displays a four-headed arrow pointer [image], so that you can move the active window, or dialog box using the keyboard arrows.

Shortcuts

The following shortcut also allows you to move the active window, or dialog box:

Drag the title bar.

This command is disabled if the window is maximised.


Control menu - Size command

This menu command displays a four-headed arrow pointer [image], so that you can size the active window, or dialog box using the keyboard arrows.

Shortcuts

The following shortcut also allows you to size the active window, or dialog box:

Drag the edge or corner of a window - see Sizing a window.

This command is disabled if the window is maximised.


Control menu - Minimize command

This menu command reduces the active window to an icon.

If the window is the PowerProject owning window then PowerProject itself is iconised and placed on the Windows desktop. Re-start by double-clicking on the icon or use the Restore command from the window Control menu.

If the window contains a bar chart, filter chart, histogram, or bar chart with locked on histograms, then the window is iconised onto the PowerProject desktop. The Window - Arrange Icons menu command tidies icons neatly.

Shortcuts

The following shortcut also allows you to minimise the active window:

Click on the [image] button. The corresponding button in Windows 3.1 is [image].


Control menu - Maximize command

This menu command enlarges the active window to fill the available space.

If the window is the PowerProject owning window, then PowerProject fills the screen.

If the window contains a bar chart, filter chart, histogram, or bar chart with locked on histograms, then the window is enlarged to fill the space available on the PowerProject owning window.

Shortcuts

The following shortcuts also allows you to maximise the active window:

Click on the [image] button. The corresponding button in Windows 3.1 is [image].

Double-click on the window title bar.


Control menu - Close command

This menu command closes the active window, or dialog box.

If information has been changed you are Alerted.

Shortcuts

The following shortcuts also allow you to close the active window:

Double-click on the window close box.

ALT F4 closes a PowerProject window or dialog box.

CTRL F4 closes a bar chart, filter chart, or histogram window.

See also

Chart - Close


Control menu - Switch To command

This menu command is only available on the PowerProject window and displays a list of all open programs. Use this Task List dialog box to switch or close a program on the list.

Shortcuts

The following shortcut also allows you to Switch To another program:

CTRL ESC presents the Task List dialog box.

ALT TAB allows you to switch to another program directly.

Option buttons

Task List - choose the program you want to switch to or close.

Switch To - makes the chosen program active.

End Task - closes the chosen program.

Cancel - closes the Task List dialog box without changing the program.

Cascade - Arranges open programs which are not iconised, so they overlap and you can see each title bar.

Tile - Arranges open programs which are not iconised, so they do not overlap.

Arrange Icons - Arranges the icons of all minimised programs across the foot of the screen.


Control menu - Next command

This menu command is only available on bar chart, filter chart, or histogram windows. It allows you to make the next window the active one. PowerProject determines which window is next by the order in which you opened the windows.

Shortcuts

The following shortcut also allows you to switch to the next window:

CTRL F6 makes the next open window active.


Scroll bars

A bar that appears at the right and/or bottom edge of a window whose contents aren't completely visible. Each scroll bar contains two scroll arrows and a scroll box which you can use to scroll within the window or list box. When you drag the scroll box, a popup box may appear (depending on your preference options) showing you the current chart view in relation to the whole chart.


Welcome to the PowerProject Help

This Help is here to let you get the most out of PowerProject. It contains much of the information that you will find in the PowerProject Reference manual.

The tabs available on the left can help you find you way around this Help and get to the information you want:

Use the Contents tab to open a particular section of the Help.

Use the Find tab to search the Help for any particular word or string.

Use the Index tab to look up a particular topic.

If you are new to using Windows Help, read How to use Help by selecting this command from the Help menu in this window.


Admin - Bar Library 1 menu command

This menu command lets you create a library of codes and assign a colour and a pattern to each code in each library.

The Code Library dialog is presented, where the Code Library name can be changed.

Codes are used to set the appearance of bars and segments on the bar chart, and to filter groups of similar segments when creating reports. You can also sort your report according to the codes assigned to bars.

There are four code libraries. The code library currently displayed on the bar chart is ticked in the Admin menu. You can change the library that is displayed by selecting the one you want on the Appearance tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog or by pressing CTRL A to cycle through all four libraries.


Admin - Bar Library 2 menu command

This menu command lets you create a library of codes and assign a colour and a pattern to each code in each library.

The Code Library dialog is presented, where the Code Library name can be changed.

Codes are used to set the appearance of bars and segments on the bar chart, and to filter groups of similar segments when creating reports. You can also sort your report according to the codes assigned to bars.

There are four code Libraries. The code library currently displayed on the bar chart is ticked in the Admin menu. You can change the library that is displayed by selecting the one you want on the Appearance tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog or by pressing CTRL A to cycle through all four libraries.


Admin - Seg Library 1 menu command

This menu command lets you create a library of codes and assign a colour and a pattern to each code in each library.

The Code Library dialog is presented, where the Code Library name can be changed.

Codes are used to set the appearance of bars and segments on the bar chart, and to filter groups of similar segments when creating reports. You can also sort your report according to the codes assigned to bars.

There are four code Libraries. The code library currently displayed on the bar chart is ticked in the Admin menu. You can change the library that is displayed by selecting the one you want on the Appearance tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog or by pressing CTRL A to cycle through all four libraries.


Admin - Seg Library 2 menu command

This menu command lets you create a library of codes and assign a colour and a pattern to each code in each library.

The Code Library dialog is presented, where the Code Library name can be changed.

Codes are used to set the appearance of bars and segments on the bar chart, and to filter groups of similar segments when creating reports. You can also sort your report according to the codes assigned to bars.

There are four code Libraries. The code library currently displayed on the bar chart is ticked in the Admin menu. You can change the library that is displayed by selecting the one you want on the Appearance tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog or by pressing CTRL A to cycle through all four libraries.


Admin - Resource Library menu command

This menu command lets you create a library of resources and assign titles, limits, calendars, cost information and modelling information to each. When you choose this menu command the Resource Library selector appears.

You can create permanent and consumable resources in the resource library, as well as resource groups.

Resources can be assigned to any segment in the project. An entry for a resource must appear on the Resource Library selector before it can be used later.

Once you have created and assigned resources to segments, you can:

Create histograms of resource loadings throughout the project.

Select segments using a resource as a filter item.

Create bar and segment text reports that contain information about resources loadings.

Create text annotations containing tokens to show information about resources assigned to bars and segments.

Related topics

 Permanent Resource Details dialog

 Consumable Resource Details dialog

 Permanent Resource Group Details dialog

 Consumable Resource Group Details dialog


Resource Library selector

This selector appears when you select the Admin - Resource Library menu command. Using this selector, you can:

Add a new permanent or consumable resource to the resource library.

Add a new permanent or consumable resource group to the resource library.

Edit existing resources in the resource library.

Delete existing resources from the resource library.

The resources library displays either permanent or consumable resources. Click on Permanent or Consumable to specify whether you want to display permanent or consumable resources and resource groups. Resources are displayed in alphabetical order, followed by any resource groups also displayed in alphabetical order. Resource groups can be identified by the brackets [ ] around their names.

Adding a new resource

Click on Permanent or Consumable depending on whether you want to add a permanent or a consumable resource to the Resource library.

Click on the New Resource button to display the Permanent Resource Details dialog or the Consumable Resource Details dialog to add a resource to your library.

Adding a new group

Click on the New Group button to display the Permanent Resource Group Details dialog or the Consumable Resource Group Details dialog.

Editing existing resources and groups

Select the resources or groups that you want to edit from the dialog and click on Edit to display one of the following dialogs:

Permanent Resource Details

Consumable Resource Details

Permanent Resource Group Details

Consumable Resource Group Details

Deleting existing resources and groups.

Select the resources or groups that you want to delete from the selector and click on Delete. Confirm the alert presented to delete the resources from the library. Any references to the resources or groups deleted from the library will be removed from the project.

Use the OK button to confirm any changes made to the Resource Library and leave the selector or click Cancel to abandon any changes made to the Resource Library and leave the selector.

Note: If you are working in a multi­user project and have an Access Right of NONE you will be unable to gain access to the resource library. If your Access Right is VIEW you will be able to see resource details, but be unable to change them.


Admin - Cost Centre Library menu command

This menu command lets you add, edit and delete cost centres in the Cost Centre library. The cost centre library always contains the default cost centre PROJECT. You can edit some details about the PROJECT cost centre, but you cannot change its name or delete it from the Cost Centre Library.

Choosing this command displays the Cost Centre Library selector.

Any cost you assign to a task in a project has to come from a particular cost centre, whether it is a fixed cost or a resource cost. Any entry for a cost centre must appear on the Cost Centre Library selector before it can be used later.

Once you have created cost centres and assigned costs from them to bars and segments you can:

Create histograms of cost centres throughout the project.

Select segments that have a cost from a particular cost centre assigned using a cost centre as a filter item.

Create bar and segment text reports that contain information about cost assignments.

Create text annotations containing tokens to show information about costs assigned to bars and segments.


Cost Centre Library selector

This selector is presented when you choose the Admin - Cost Centre Library menu command.

The selector lists all the cost centres currently stored in the Cost Centre library. The default cost centre PROJECT is always available and appears at the top of the list.

The selector allows you to:

Add a new cost centre

Edit existing cost centres, including the PROJECT cost centre

Delete existing cost centres

Adding a new cost centre

Click on New to display the Cost Centre Details dialog. This dialog allows you to specify a name for the cost centre and the availability of money for the cost centre.

Editing existing cost centres

Select the cost centres you want to edit from the selector and click on Edit to display the Cost Centre Details dialog.

Deleting existing cost centres

Select the cost centres you want to delete from the selector and click on Delete. Confirm the alert presented to delete the cost centres selected. If you delete a cost centre which was assigned to tasks, this cost centre is replaced by the PROJECT cost centre.

You cannot delete the PROJECT cost centre from the Cost Centre Library.

Note: If you are working in a multi­user project and have an Access Right of NONE you will be unable to gain access to the Cost Centre Library. If your Access Right is VIEW you will be able to view cost centre details, but be unable to change them.


Admin - Calendar Library menu command

This menu command allows you to create a library of calendars. You can create and edit calendars containing details of holidays and weekends. The position of holidays and weekends affects bars on the schedule.

The Admin - Calendar Library command displays the Calendar Library selector which allows you to:

Create a new calendar

Edit an existing calendar

Set holidays, weekends and overtime on a new or existing calendar

Delete a calendar from the project.

Once a calendar is open you can set:

Two types of holiday when no work can be carried out.

The working periods in a typical week by marking the regular weekends.

Overtime periods when work can be carried out.

The colour and patterns to be displayed on the chart and output for weekends, holidays and overtime.

The titles for the two types of holiday periods.

Save an existing calendar under a new name.

Print a calendar.

If possible, set up the calendar before drawing segments, as the weekends and holidays may affect the timing and sequence of segments in the project.

Related topics

Editing a calendar

SYSTEM calendar

Accessing dates on the calendar

Copying calendars

Why more than one calendar?

Saving an existing calendar under a new name

After saving a calendar

Note: If you are working in a multi­user project and have an Access Right of NONE you will be unable to gain access to the calendars. If your Access Right is VIEW you will be able to see calendars, but be unable to change them.


Admin - Work Breakdown Numbering menu command

This menu command lets you set up and manage the Work Breakdown Numbering (WBN) system for the active project.

Use Level Definitions to set up the WBN system

Use Chart Override Definition to create an overriding WBN definition for the active chart

Use Renumber to renumber the work breakdown.


WBN - Level Definitions menu command

This menu command lets you set up the Work Breakdown Numbering (WBN) system that you want to use for all the chart levels in your project. When you select this command, the Project Work Breakdown Numbering Definition dialog appears.

You can have up to ten levels of charts and subcharts in PowerProject. Each level can be given a different WBN definition, i.e. prefix and numerical range. By default, all ten levels are set up with a basic WBN definition. You can edit the default definitions to set up the WBN system that you want to use.

When you draw new bars on a chart for which there is a WBN level definition, WBN codes will be generated for the bars. You can display WBN codes on the bar chart using annotation tokens, or in the column sheet.

Bars will be given WBN codes generated from the default WBN level definitions until you set up your own definitions. To update existing bars with WBN codes generated from your WBN level definitions, you must renumber the work breakdown.


Project Work Breakdown Numbering Definition dialog

This dialog appears when your select Work Breakdown Numbering - Level Definitions from the Admin menu. Use this dialog to set up the WBN system that you want to use in the project. The Level Definitions panel displays the WBN definitions currently in use.

Level

In the Level box, enter the number of the level that you want to set up or edit. You can type the number directly into the Level box, or click on the arrow buttons to change the level number. Alternately, you can click on the level number in the Level Definitions panel. The level that you click on will be highlighted to show that it is selected.

Prefix

Enter up to six characters for the prefix of WBN codes for bars in charts on the selected level.

If you change the prefix after WBN codes have already been assigned to bars on this level, WBN codes with the new prefix will start numbering from the beginning, not continue on from the previous number. For example, if the WBN codes in a chart were UNIT01 to UNIT12, then you change the prefix to SECTION, WBN codes for new bars in the chart will start numbering from SECTION01 not SECTION13.

If you later change the prefix back to UNIT and the box labelled Work Breakdown Numbers must be unique within a chart is checked, then the WBN codes will continue numbering from UNIT13. If the box labelled Work Breakdown Numbers must be unique within a chart is cleared, then the WBN codes will start at UNIT01 again.

Range

The Range defines the valid characters that PowerProject can use in the generated string of the work breakdown code. Typical ranges might be 0 to 9, A to Z and a to z. The largest range you can specify is 0 to z. If you enter an invalid range such as 9-0, the level will be disabled.

Enter the first character in the range, then click in the next box under the Range column and enter the last character in the range.

If you change the range after WBN codes have already been assigned to bars on this level, WBN codes with the new range will start numbering from the beginning, not continue on from the previous number. For example, if the WBN codes in a chart were TASK01 to TASK12, then you change the range to A-Z, WBN codes for new bars in the chart will start numbering from TASKA not TASKM.

If you later change the range back to 0-9 and the box labelled Work Breakdown Numbers must be unique within a chart is checked, then the WBN codes will continue numbering from TASK13. If the box labelled Work Breakdown Numbers must be unique within a chart is cleared, then the WBN codes will start at TASK01 again.

Start Value

In the Start Value box, enter the character from which the generated strings should begin. By default this is the first character in the range that you have specified.

If you change the start value after WBN codes have already been assigned to bars on this level, WBN codes for new bars on this level will immediately start numbering from the new start value.

Increment

In the Increment box, enter the number of characters that you want to be left between one generated string and the next. For example, if your Range is A to Z and you set an increment of 2, the generated strings will be A, C, E, G, I, K etc. The default increment is 1.

Min. Width

In the Min Width box, enter the minimum number of characters that the generated string should contain. For example, if the generated string would be 12 but you enter a minimum width of 4, then the generated string will be 0012.

Separator

In the Separator box, enter the character that you want to use to separate WBN codes when displayed in a WBN path.

The Sample at the bottom of the dialog illustrates the WBN path that will be generated from the level definitions you have set up. You can choose to replace chart paths with WBN paths throughout PowerProject. This is done using the Chart Path Names option on the General tab of the Options dialog.

Work Breakdown Numbers must be unique within a chart

If you want each WBN code in a chart to be different, check the box labelled Work Breakdown Numbers must be unique within a chart.

OK/Cancel

To save the changes you have made on the dialog, confirm by OK. Cancel leaves the WBN level definitions unchanged.


WBN - Chart Override Definition menu command

This menu command lets you set an overriding Work Breakdown Numbering (WBN) definition for the active chart. The active chart then take its WBN codes from the overriding definition instead of from the level definition that you set up using the Work Breakdown Numbering – Level Definitions menu command.

When you select this command, the Chart Work Breakdown Numbering Override dialog appears.


Chart Work Breakdown Numbering Definition dialog

This dialog appears when you select Work Breakdown Numbering - Chart Override Definition from the Admin menu. Use this dialog to set a WBN definition for the active chart, overriding the WBN level definition.

Prefix

Enter up to six characters that you want as the prefix for WBN codes on bars in the active chart.

Range

In the Range columns, enter the first and last characters of the range that you want PowerProject to use in the generated string of the WBN code. Typical ranges might be 0 to 9, A to Z and a to z. The largest range you can specify is 0 to z.

Start Value

In the Start Value box, enter the character from which the generated strings should begin. By default this is the first character in the range that you have specified.

Increment

In the Increment box, enter the number of characters that you want to be left between one generated string and the next. By default, the increment is 1.

Min Width

In the Min Width box, enter the minimum number of characters that the generated string should contain.

Separator

In the Separator box, enter the character that you want to use to separate codes when displayed in a WBN path.

The WBN codes in the active chart do not change until you renumber the work breakdown.


WBN - Renumber menu command

The Work Breakdown Renumbering – Renumber menu command lets you renumber the work breakdown codes of a particular chart, branch, or the whole project. When you select this command, the Work Breakdown Renumbering dialog appears.

When you set up level definitions and chart overrides, WBN codes are only applied to new bars that you create. If you want to include existing bars in the numbering sequence, you will need to renumber the work breakdown.

You may also want to renumber the work breakdown if the order of the bars in your charts changes significantly, e.g. because of inserting, deleting and moving bars.

When you renumber the work breakdown, you can choose to renumber an individual chart, a branch, or the whole project. When renumbering a branch or the whole project, you can specify which chart levels to include in the renumbering.

When you renumber the work breakdown, any bars that have been set to Don’t Renumber (using the Bar tab on the Details dialog) will not be included in the incremental sequence of their chart’s level definition unless you have selected the Ignore Don’t Renumber Flags option on the Work Breakdown Renumbering dialog.


Work Breakdown Renumbering dialog

This dialog appears when you select Work Breakdown Numbering - Renumber from the Admin menu. Use this dialog to renumber the WBN codes in the active chart, branch or the whole project.

Scope

From the Scope box, choose whether you want to renumber the active chart, the branch, or the whole project. If you select Branch or Project, then the Range box is enabled.

Range

In the Range box, choose whether you want all levels in the branch or project to be renumbered, or whether only specific levels are renumbered.

To renumber specific levels, click on the Levels button and enter the numbers of the levels you want to renumber. Separate the numbers with spaces or commas, e.g. 1,2,4 or 1 2 4. Do not enter a range by typing 1-7, instead enter each individual level number: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7.

Increment

From the Increment box, choose whether you want to use the increments set with each level definition or whether you want to override them with a different increment.

Options

Check Ignore Don’t Renumber Flags if you want to renumber all the bars, including any you have previously set to Don’t Renumber. (You set bars to Don't Renumber using the Bar tab on the Details dialog.)

Check the Project-wide Unique WBNs box if you want every WBN code in the project to be unique. (This option is only available when Project is selected in the Scope group box.) If you check this option any selection you have made in the Range box is ignored because the whole project will be renumbered including any bars set to Don’t Renumber. This option is useful if you intend to create filter charts in your project because filter charts can contain bars from any chart in the project so duplicate WBN codes could arise.

OK/Cancel

Click on OK to renumber the WBN. Click on Cancel to leave the dialog without renumbering the WBN.


Admin - Chart Font menu command

This menu command lets you change the font used in chart and histogram windows to any font available in Windows. The font you choose will be used in all the projects you work on until you change the font again.

The Font Selector is presented. Through this you can choose any font available though you cannot change the font style (e.g. bold, italic) or font size.

The font is used for all bar charts and histograms in this project. It affects the font used for the bar and segment titles, as well as the date zone, column sheet and the histogram legend.The font chosen here does not affect the calendar.

If you intend to print to a plotter, the fonts you specify here will have no affect, because Windows fonts are not supported on plotters. You can select a vector font to use on a plotter by adding a line to your PPROJECT.INI file to define the PlotterFaceName. The fonts available are Roman, Modern, Plotter, and Script. For example, to set the font to Modern you would add the following line:

PlotterFaceName=Modern

Save your PPROJECT.INI file and restart PowerProject to make your changes take effect.


Admin - Save Desktop menu command

This menu command allows you to save the current layout of all open windows.

PowerProject remembers the position of windows in the order you opened them. The next time you open a chart, cost centre histogram, or resource histogram window, it is positioned exactly where the window was located before.

This is useful when you stop working, but want to be able to open charts or histograms in exactly the same position when you start using PowerProject again.

When chart windows are open from different projects, the window positions are remembered in the active project regardless of which project the windows belong to.


Admin - System Defaults menu command

This menu command lets you set information about the destination directories to which PowerProject sends your output files.

The System Defaults dialog is presented.


System Defaults dialog

Directories

You can specify the directories which PowerProject should use. The current working directory is used unless you specify a different one.

Project

Enter the directory which should be used to save projects in, and which directory to open projects from. This affects *.PDB. files.

Temporary

Enter the directory which should be used to store temporary files. Temporary files are created during filter chart generation, and deleted afterwards. This affects *.TMP files.

Note: If the drives and/or directories specified here do not exist, PowerProject may not be able to generate a filter chart.

Output

Enter the directory which should be used to store output files created by PowerProject - (*.WMF), (*.TXT) and (*.WKS).

Border

Enter the directory you use to store the border files for printing graphics - (.B files).

Screen Dimensions

Use the options in this panel to enter the dimensions of your screen. PowerProject uses the screen dimensions specified in this panel for the scales of charts and histograms. Entering the exact dimensions of your screen means that the chart and histogram scales you specify are displayed accurately on the screen.

Height

Enter the height of the screen you are using in this field.

Width

Enter the width of the screen you are using in this field.

To save the changes you have made on the dialog, confirm by OK. Cancel leaves the system defaults unchanged.


Admin - PDB Transfer menu command

The PDB Transfer menu command allows you to transfer libraries - Project Data Base information - between projects. This menu command is only available when two projects are open and all their chart windows are closed.

PowerProject lets you copy and exchange library information between two open projects. You can transfer information from the active project into the other open project, or take information from an open project into the active project. This lets you quickly build new projects.

You can transfer all or parts of any of the following items on the Transfer Project Database dialog:

Calendars

Resources

Cost centres

Code libraries

Note: If you are working in a multi­user project and have an Access Right of NONE or VIEW you will not be able to access a library or calendar. If your Access Right is EDIT you will be able to transfer the library or calendar. For more details on Access Rights see Admin - User - Why more than one user?.


Transfer Project Database dialog

Through this dialog you can choose which items to transfer and in which direction.

You must complete each of the three sections - Type, Amount, Direction.To select an option in each section, simply click on the box next to the option.

Type of item to transfer

Select an option. If you need to transfer all the items - calendar library, code libraries, resource library and cost centre library - you can choose all of them.

When you are transferring both calendars and resources PowerProject transfers the calendars first. If you transfer just resources any calendars assigned to resources are set to SYSTEM if the resource calendar is not present in the Calendar library.

Calendars

Select this option to transfer one or more calendars from a Calendar Library. Calendars with the same name are not transferred.

If the start date of the project for the transferred calendar is different from the start date of the target project, all calendar information before the target project start date is not transferred.

Resources

Select this option to transfer one or more resources from the Resource Library - see Admin - Resource Library. Resources with the same name are not transferred.

Cost Centres

Select this option to transfer one or more cost centres from a Cost Centre Library - see Admin - Cost Centre Library. Cost Centres with the same name are not transferred.

Code Libraries 1/2/3/4

Select these options to transfer codes from your chosen bar and segment code libraries - see Admin - Code libraries. If a code with the same name already exists in the target project, the code is not transferred.

Amount to transfer

Select one of the options to choose the amount of information to transfer.

All of the items

Select this option when you want to transfer all the items in a library in a project.

Some of the items

Select this option when you want to transfer selected items from a library in a project. You are presented with the relevant Selector to select the items to transfer, once you have completed the Transfer Project Database dialog and clicked on OK.

Direction of transfer

Select one of the options to choose whether to transfer into or from the active project. Both project titles are presented.

In to active project

Select this option when you want to transfer information from the other project into the active project.

Out from active project

Select this option when you want to transfer information from the active project into the other project.

Once you have chosen an option in each category - shown by the selection box being full - you can confirm the details of the transfer by clicking on OK.

To leave without transferring any items, choose Cancel.

If you have selected Amount to Transfer - Some of the Items, a Selector is presented depending on the choice you made in Type of Item to Transfer. Using the Selector(s), you can choose which set of items to transfer. If an item with the same name already exists in the project it is not transferred.


Permanent Resource Details dialog

This dialog allows you to specify a name, availability, calendar, modelling and cost information for a permanent resource.

Details

Enter the following details about the resource you are creating:

Resource name

This is the full name of the resource, for example "Engineers contracted from Engineers Inc.". This name appears on the Resource Library selector.

To change an existing name, click on the name you wish to edit to position the text cursor.

The name cannot be more than 32 characters and you cannot give the same name to more than one permanent resource or permanent resource group.

Singular short name

This is the short name (in singular format) of the resource, for example, "Engineer" This name is used for histogram legends.

To change an existing name, click on the name you wish to edit to position the text cursor.

The singular short name can be up to 16 characters long.

Plural short name

This is the short name (in plural form) of the resource, for example, "Engineers". This name is used for histogram legends.

To change an existing name, click on the name you wish to edit to position the text cursor.

The plural short name can be up to 16 characters long.

Calendar

The default resource calendar set from the General tab on the Options dialog is automatically assigned to a new resource. If another calendar is required, click on the Calendar list box to display a list of the calendars available. The calendar you have chosen is displayed. The chosen calendar affects the histogram display for this resource.

When only one calendar is available the Calendar list box is disabled.

Availability

Click in this field to locate the text cursor, and type a number between 1 and 19,999,999.99.

This represents the total of this resource available throughout the project. If the total of the resources you use at any time exceeds this limit you know that you require more resources to complete the project.

If you want a variable availability for a resource in a project, click on the Profile button to display the profile editor. This allows you enter a variable resource availability.

Default allocation

Click in this field to locate the text cursor, and type a number between 1 and 19,999,999.99.

This represents the amount of the resource that is allocated, by default, when you assign the resource to a task in the project. You can change the allocation when you actually assign a resource from the Resources dialog.

Works for

Enter the number of hours the resource works in a day. The default is that a resource works for 7.5 hours per day. The number of hours a resource works for is used if you:

Enter costing information for the resource, for example you can specify how much a resource costs per hour. Enter costing information for a resource in the Costs panel on the expanded version of the dialog. Click the Options button to display the expanded version of the dialog.

Model the assignment of the resource using a work based calculation, which uses the work rate of the resource to calculate how long the resource needs to complete work on a task. You can enter default work rate information about a resource in the Resource Modelling panel on the expanded version of the dialog. Click the Options button to display the expanded version of the dialog.

Next and Previous buttons

These buttons are only available if you selected more than one resource from the Resource Library selector and clicked on Edit to edit the resource details.

Clicking on Next saves the information you have just entered about a resource and displays the details of the next resource selected.

Clicking on Previous saves the information you have just entered about a resource and displays the details of the previous resource selected.

Appearance button

Click on the Appearance button to display the Display Appearance dialog. This dialog displays the default graph appearances for that resource. The default graph appearances are used when you include a resource in a resource histogram.

Options button

Click this button to display the expanded Permanent Resource Details dialog. The expanded dialog allows you to specify resource modelling and costing information for a resource. You can specify that all resource dialogs are expanded by default from the General tab on the Options dialog, using Admin - Options.

When the dialog is expanded this button is renamed to Hide Options. Click this button to display the unexpanded version of the dialog.

Expanded Permanent Resource Details dialog

Resource modelling

The information in the resource modelling panel is presented by default on the Permanent Resource Modelling dialog, if you model the assignment of a permanent resource using a work based calculation. For example, you may want to calculate how many resources you need to complete a task that lasts 5 days when the resource has a certain work rate. You do not have to specify modelling information for a resource.

To enter resource modelling information complete the following fields:

Default work rate.

Click in this field to locate the text cursor and enter the rate at which the resource works

Singular

Click in this field to locate the text cursor and enter the singular form of the unit in which the resource works.

Plural

Click in this field to locate the text cursor and enter the plural form of the units in which the resource works.

Per

Click on this box to display the available time units. Notice that you can have a time unit of hours here. Select the time unit you want.

For example, a bricklayer may lay 800 (default rate) bricks (units of work) per day (time unit). Enter the work unit in singular and plural form.

Costs

Permanent resource costs are assigned to a task whenever the resource is assigned. Therefore, a permanent resource cost depends on the number of resources assigned to a task and the duration of the task. You do not have to specify costing information for a resource.

To specify costing information for a resource, complete the following fields:

First use cost

Click in this field to locate the cursor and enter the first use cost of the resource, for example a call out charge. A first use cost is charged each time the resource is assigned to a task.

Normal rate

Click in this field to locate the cursor and enter the normal rate of the resource. You must also select a time unit. If you select hours as the time unit, PowerProject calculates the normal rate cost using the value entered in the Hours worked per day field, entered in the Resource Modelling panel.

Overtime rate

Click in this field to locate the cursor and enter the overtime rate of the resource. You must also select a time unit. If you select hours as the time unit, PowerProject calculates the overtime rate cost using the value entered in the Working day field.

Note: If the overtime rate of a resource is the same as its normal rate, enter the normal rate in this field, otherwise PowerProject calculates any overtime periods for this resource as having a zero cost.

Default cost centre

Click on the Default cost centre box to select the cost centre from which the resource cost will come from. You can change the cost centre a resource cost comes from when you assign the resource to a task.

Accruals

This button displays the Cost Accruals/Deferrals dialog on which you can specify how the resource costs accrue and whether or not they are deferred. For details of how to use the options available, see the Cost Accruals/Deferrals dialog.


Consumable Resource Details dialog

This dialog allows you to specify a name, initial availability, a calendar and costing information for a consumable resource.

Details

Enter the following details about the resource you are creating:

Resource name

This is the full name of the resource, for example you may want to include an order or a part number of the resource, "Tins of paint BR/98". This name appears on the Resource Library selector.

To change an existing name, click on the name you wish to edit to position the text cursor.

The full name cannot be more than 32 characters long and you cannot give the same name to more than one consumable resource or consumable resource group.

Singular short name

This is the short name (in singular format) of the resource, for example, "Tin of paint" This name is used for histogram legends.

To change an existing name, click on the name you wish to edit to position the text cursor.

The singular short name can be up to 16 characters long.

Plural short name

This is the short name (in plural form) of the resource, for example, "Tins of paint". This name is used for histogram legends.

To change an existing name, click on the name you wish to edit to position the text cursor.

The plural short name can be up to 16 characters long.

Calendar

The default calendar set from the General tab on the Options dialog is automatically assigned to a new resource.

If another calendar is required, click on the Calendar list box to display a list of the calendars available.The calendar you have chosen is displayed. The chosen calendar affects the histogram display for this resource.

When only one calendar is available the Calendar list box is disabled.

Initial availability

Click in this field to locate the text cursor, and type a number between 1 and 19,999,999.99.

This represents the number of the resource that is available at the start of the project. The availability of consumable resources after the start of the project depends on how the resource is consumed or supplied by tasks in the project.

Default allocation

Click in this field to locate the text cursor, and type a number between 1 and 19,999,999.99.

This represents the amount of the resource that is allocated, by default, when you assign the resource to a task in the project. You can change the allocation when you actually assign a resource from the Resources selector.

Hours consumed/supplied each day

Enter the number of hours for which the resource can be consumed or supplied in a day. For example, if you are creating a consumable resource that is a utility, such as water, the pumps you use may be able to pump water 24 hours a day, other consumable resources however, would be restricted by the hours worked by the resource that uses the consumable resource. For example, if a painter works 6 hours per day, then tins of paint can only be consumed for 6 hours each day.

The value you enter in this field is used if you model the assignment of the resource to a task using the Consumable Resource Modelling dialog, as the rate at which the resource is consumed or supplied can be calculated on a hourly basis.

Next and Previous buttons

These buttons are only available if you selected more than one resource from the Resource Library selector and clicked on Edit to edit the resource details.

Clicking on Next saves the information you have just entered about a resource and displays the details of the next resource selected.

Clicking on Previous saves the information you have just entered about a resource and displays the details of the previous resource selected.

Appearance button

Click on the Appearance button to display the Display Appearance dialog. This dialog displays the default graph appearances for that resource. The default graph appearances are used when you include a resource in a resource histogram.

Options button

Click this button to display the expanded Consumable Resource Details dialog. The expanded dialog allows you to specify costing information for a resource. You can specify that all resource dialogs are expanded by default from the General tab on the Options dialog, using Admin - Options.

When the dialog is expanded this button is renamed to Hide Options. Click this button to display the unexpanded version of the dialog.

Expanded Consumable Resource Details dialog

Costs

Resource costs are assigned to a task whenever the resource is assigned. Therefore, a resource cost depends on the number of resources assigned to a task and the duration of the task. You do not have to specify costing information for a resource.

To specify costing information for a resource, complete the following fields:

First use cost

Click in this field to locate the cursor and enter the first use cost of the resource, for example a delivery. A first use cost is charged each time the resource is assigned to a task.

Normal rate

Click in this field to locate the cursor and enter the normal rate of the resource per item. For example tins of paint may cost £5.00 each.

Default cost centre

Click on this box to select the cost centre from which the resource cost will come from. You can change the cost centre a resource cost comes from when you assign the resource to a task.

Accruals

This button displays the Cost Accruals/Deferrals dialog on which you can specify how the resource costs accrue and whether or not they are deferred. For details of how to use the options available, see the Cost Accruals/Deferrals dialog.


Permanent Resource Group Details dialog

This dialog allows you to specify a name, default allocation and modelling information for a permanent resource group. You specify the members of the group from the Edit Group Members dialog, accessed from this dialog using the Edit Members button.

Details

Enter the following details about the permanent resource group you are creating:

Group name

This is the full name of the group, for example "Software development group". This name appears on the Resource Library selector.

To change an existing name, click on the name you wish to edit to position the text cursor.

Type any 32 characters for the resource name.

Note: Any group names appear alphabetically underneath any permanent resource in the Resource Library. A permanent resource group name cannot be the same as a permanent resource name. Any group names have brackets around them [Software development group] to identify them from permanent resources.

Default allocation

Click in this field to locate the text cursor, and type a number between 1 and 19,999,999.99.

This represents the number of groups allocated, by default, when you assign the group to a task in the project. You can change the allocation when you actually assign a group from the Resources dialog.

Note: You cannot enter calendar and working day information for a resource group. Each member of a group uses its own calendar when assigned as a member of group.

Next and Previous buttons

These buttons are only available if you selected more than one group from the Resource Library selector and clicked on Edit to edit the resource group details.

Clicking on Next saves the information you have just entered about a group and displays the details of the next group selected.

Clicking on Previous saves the information you have just entered about a group and displays the details of the previous group selected.

Edit Members button

Click this button to display the Edit Group Members dialog. This dialog allows you to specify which resources you want to include in the group you are creating and the allocation of each resource included in the group.

Options button

Click this button to display the expanded Permanent Resource Group Details dialog. The expanded dialog allows you to specify resource modelling and costing information for the group. You can specify that all resource dialogs are expanded by default from the General tab on the Options dialog, using Admin - Options.

When the dialog is expanded this button is renamed to Hide Options. Click this button to display the unexpanded version of the dialog.

Expanded Permanent Resource Group Details dialog

The expanded version of this dialog allows you to enter resource group modelling and cost centre information.

Resource Modelling

The work rate of the group can be the same as one or more of the members of the group or it can be a different work rate. For example, if a software development group contained several programmers, who each had a work rate of so many lines of code per week, the work rate of the group would probably also be in lines of code per week.

Other groups however, may have a different work rate to one or more of the group's members. For example, a carpenter may have a work rate of joists and a tiler may have a work rate of tiles per day, but as roofing group they could have a work rate of m2 of roof per day.

To enter default group modelling information that is presented if you model the assignment of the group from the Permanent Resource Modelling dialog, complete the following fields:

Default rate.

Click in this field to locate the text cursor and enter the rate at which the group works.

Singular

Click in this field to locate the text cursor and enter the singular form of the unit in which the group works.

Plural

Click in this field to locate the text cursor and enter the plural form of the units in which the group works.

Per

Click on this box to display the available time units. Notice that you cannot have a time unit of hours here as each member of the group may work for a different number of hours each day. Select the time unit you want.

Costs

The cost of a group is made up of the costs of each of the resources included in the group. If the resources included in the group have costing information associated with them, as specified on the Permanent Resource Details dialog, this information is also assigned when the resource is assigned to a task as a member of a group.

Default cost centre

The cost of a group comes from a single cost centre, specify which cost centre you want to be presented by default when assigning the group to a task from the Default cost centre list box. You can override the cost centre you select here, when assigning the group from the Permanent Resource Modelling dialog.


Consumable Resource Group Details dialog

This dialog allows you to specify a name and default allocation for a consumable resource group. You specify the members of the group from the Edit Group Members dialog, accessed from this dialog using the Edit Members button.

Details

Enter the following details about the consumable resource group you are creating:

Resource name

This is the full name of the group, for example "Concrete group". This name appears on the Resource Library selector.

To change an existing name, click on the name you wish to edit to position the text cursor.

The resource name can be up to 32 characters long.

Note: Any group names appear alphabetically underneath any consumable resources in the Resource Library. A consumable resource group name cannot be the same as a consumable resource name. Any group names have brackets around them [Concrete] to identify them from consumable resources.

Default allocation

Click in this field to locate the text cursor, and type a number between 1 and 19,999,999.99.

This represents the number of groups allocated, by default, when you assign the group to a task in the project. You can change the allocation when you actually assign a group from the Resources dialog.

Note: You cannot enter calendar and working day information for a resource group. Each member of a group uses its own calendar when assigned as a member of group.

Next and Previous buttons

These buttons are only available if you selected more than one group from the Resource Library selector and clicked on Edit to edit the resource group details.

Clicking on Next saves the information you have just entered about a group and displays the details of the next group selected.

Clicking on Previous saves the information you have just entered about a group and displays the details of the previous group selected.

Edit Members button

Click this button to display the Edit Group Members dialog. This dialog allows you to specify which resources you want to include in the group you are creating and the allocation of each resource included in the group.

Options button

Click this button to display the expanded Consumable Resource Group Details dialog. The expanded dialog allows you to specify resource modelling and costing information for the group. You can specify that all resource dialogs are expanded by default from the General tab on the Options dialog, using Admin - Options.

When the dialog is expanded this button is renamed to Hide Options. Click this button to display the unexpanded version of the dialog.

Expanded Consumable Resource Group Details dialog

The expanded version of this dialog allows you to enter cost centre information.

 Costs

The cost of a group is made up of the costs of each of the resources included in the group. If the resources included in the group have costing information associated with them, as specified on the Consumable Resource Details dialog, this information is also assigned when the resource is assigned to a task as a member of a group.

Default cost centre

The cost of a group comes from a single cost centre, specify which cost centre you want to be presented by default when assigning the group to a task from the Default cost centre list box. You can override the cost centre you select here, when assigning the group from the Consumable Resource Modelling dialog.


Edit Group Members dialog

This dialog allows you to specify which resources you want to include in a group and how many of each resource you want to include in the group. You access this dialog using the Permanent Resource Group Details dialog or the Consumable Resource Group Details dialog.

Available list

This list displays all the permanent or consumable resources in the Resource Library, depending on whether you accessed this dialog from the Permanent Resource Group Details or the Consumable Resource Group Details dialog.

Select the resources you want to include in the group from this list.

Right Arrow button

Click on this button to move the resources you have selected from the Available list into the Members list to specify that these resources should be members of the group.

Members list

This lists all the resources you have selected to be members of the group. Alongside each resource is the ratio of the resource contained in the group.

Ratio

This column contains the amount of each resource contained in the group. For example, if you specify 0.5 as the ratio for a resource, it means that the resource only spends half of their time as a member of the group. Click on the amount of the resource included in the group and enter a different value to change the ratio for a resource.

Left Arrow button

This button is available if one or more resources is selected in the Members list. Click on this button to remove the selected resources back into the Available list. This removes the resource from the group.

Lead Member

Resource groups have no working day (hours worked per day) and no calendar although each member of the group will have a calendar The first resource you specify to make up a group is designated as Lead Member. The calendar and working day of the lead resource are taken into account when resource groups are modelled. If the group has no members, PowerProject uses the defaults of 7.5 hours per day and the SYSTEM calendar.

If you want to change the lead member, select another member of the group from the Lead Member list box.


Cost Centre Details dialog

This dialog allows you to specify a name, initial availability, default allocation and any accruals or deferrals for a cost centre.

Details

Enter the following details about the cost centre you are creating:

Cost Centre name

This is the full name of the cost centre, for example "Research and Development". This name appears on the Cost Centre Library selector.

To change an existing name, click on the name you wish to edit to position the text cursor.

The cost centre name cannot be more than 32 characters long, and you cannot give the same name to more than one cost centre.

Note: You cannot change the name of the PROJECT cost centre.

Short name

This is the short name of the cost centre, for example, "R & D budget" This name is used for histogram legends.

To change an existing name, click on the name you wish to edit to position the text cursor.

The singular short name can be up to 16 characters long.

Note: You cannot change the short name of the PROJECT cost centre.

Initial availability

Click in this field to locate the text cursor, and type a number between 1 and 19,999,999.99.

This represents the amount of money available for this cost centre at the start of the project. The availability of money after the start of the project depends on how the money resource is used or supplied by tasks in the project.

Default allocation

Click in this field to locate the text cursor, and type a number between 1 and 19,999,999.99.

This represents the amount of money that is allocated, by default, when a fixed cost is assigned from this cost centre. You can change the allocation when you actually assign a fixed cost from the Fixed Costs selector.

Next and Previous buttons

These buttons are only available if you selected more than one cost centre from the Cost Centre Library selector and clicked on Edit to edit the cost centre details.

Clicking on Next saves the information you have just entered about a cost centre and displays the details of the next cost centre selected.

Clicking on Previous saves the information you have just entered about a resource and displays the details of the previous resource selected.

Accruals button

Click on the Accruals button to display the Cost Centre Accruals/Deferrals dialog. This dialog provides options allowing you to specify that costs are accrued or defered instead of being fixed across tasks.

Appearance button

Click on the Appearance button to display the Display Appearance dialog. This dialog displays the default graph appearances for that cost centre. The default graph appearances are used when you include a cost centre in a cost centre histogram.


Permanent Resource Display Appearance dialog

Click the Appearance button on the Permanent Resource Details dialog to display this dialog.

When a resource is included in a resource histogram, you choose the information you want to display about each resource by selecting one or more graphs. So that you can distinguish different resources and different graphs on the histogram display, each resource has a set of default appearances, which are stored along with the resource in the resource library.

PowerProject uses the graph appearances that appear on this dialog whenever a histogram that includes this resource is executed. If you change a default appearance for a graph from this dialog, PowerProject will use that appearance for any histogram reports containing that graph for this resource.

Often you may just want to change the graph appearance for a resource just for one histogram. You can specify graph appearances for a resource on a histogram basis, by changing the graph appearance from the histogram display.

Layout of the Display Appearance dialog

The Display Appearance dialog is laid out as follows:

Each graph is listed on the left side of the dialog and alongside each graph is the appearance that will appear on the histogram if this resource and graph are included in the histogram.

The left hand column of appearances displays the appearance used if the graph is represented as a bar or an area.

The right hand column of appearances displays the appearance used if the graph is represented as a line.

Colours and patterns

To achieve the best appearances, the exact patterns and colours used for these appearances depend on whether you are running PowerProject on a monochrome or colour screen.

If you have a colour screen PowerProject represents different types of graphs by different colours, for example, for a permanent resource all "Availability" graphs appear in yellow and all "Over allocation" graphs appear in red, and different resources are represented by different patterns and line styles.

If you have a monochrome screen PowerProject represents different types of graphs by different patterns and line styles and different resources are represented by different colours.

Changing the bar/area appearance of a graph for a resource

To change the appearance of a bar or area representing a graph for the resource, click on the bar or area appearance that appears alongside the name of the graph you want to change to display the Bar/Area Appearance dialog

Changing the line appearance of a graph for a resource

To change the appearance of a line representing a graph for the resource, click on the line appearance that appears alongside the name of the graph you want to change to display the Line Appearance dialog.

Related topics

Permanent Resource Graph Types


Consumable Resource Display Appearance dialog

Click the Appearance button on the Consumable Resource Details dialog to display this dialog.

When a resource is included in a resource histogram, you choose the information you want to display about each resource by selecting one or more graphs. So that you can distinguish different resources and different graphs on the histogram display, each resource has a set of default appearances, which are stored along with the resource in the resource library.

PowerProject uses the graph appearances that appear on this dialog whenever a histogram that includes this resource is executed. If you change a default appearance for a graph from this dialog, PowerProject will use that appearance for any histogram reports containing that graph for this resource.

Often you may just want to change the graph appearance for a resource just for one histogram. You can specify graph appearances for a resource on a histogram basis, by changing the graph appearance from the histogram display.

Layout of the Display Appearance dialog

The Display Appearance dialog is laid out as follows:

Each graph is listed on the left side of the dialog and alongside each graph is the appearance that will appear on the histogram if this resource and graph are included in the histogram.

The left hand column of appearances displays the appearance used if the graph is represented as a bar or an area.

The right hand column of appearances displays the appearance used if the graph is represented as a line.

Colours and patterns

To achieve the best appearances, the exact patterns and colours used for these appearances depend on whether you are running PowerProject on a monochrome or colour screen.

If you have a colour screen PowerProject represents different types of graphs by different colours, for example, for a consumable resource all "Supply" graphs appear in yellow and all "Over consumption" graphs appear in red, and different resources are represented by different patterns and line styles.

If you have a monochrome screen PowerProject represents different types of graphs by different patterns and line styles and different resources are represented by different colours.

Changing the bar/area appearance of a graph for a resource

To change the appearance of a bar or area representing a graph for the resource, click on the bar or area appearance that appears alongside the name of the graph you want to change to display the Bar/Area Appearance dialog

Changing the line appearance of a graph for a resource

To change the appearance of a line representing a graph for the resource, click on the line appearance that appears alongside the name of the graph you want to change to display the Line Appearance dialog.

Related topics

Consumable Resource Graph Types


Cost Centre Display Appearance dialog

Click the Appearance button on the Cost Centre Details dialog to display this dialog.

When a cost centre is included in a cost centre histogram, you choose the information you want to display about each cost centre by selecting one or more graphs .So that you can distinguish different cost centres and different graphs on the histogram display, each cost centre has a set of default appearances, which are stored along with the cost centre in the cost centre library.

PowerProject uses the graph appearances that appear on this dialog whenever a histogram that includes this cost centre is executed. If you change a default appearance for a graph from this dialog, PowerProject will use that appearance for any histogram reports containing that graph for this cost centre.

Often you may just want to change the graph appearance for a cost centre just for one histogram. You can specify graph appearances for a cost centre on a histogram basis, by changing the graph appearance from the histogram display.

Layout of the Display Appearance dialog

The Display Appearance dialog is laid out as follows:

Each graph is listed on the left side of the dialog and alongside each graph is the appearance that will appear on the histogram if this cost centre and graph are included in the histogram.

The left hand column of appearances displays the appearance used if the graph is represented as a bar or an area.

The right hand column of appearances displays the appearance used if the graph is represented as a line.

Colours and patterns

To achieve the best appearances, the exact patterns and colours used for these appearances depend on whether you are running PowerProject on a monochrome or colour screen.

If you have a colour screen PowerProject represents different types of graphs by different colours, for example, all "Income" graphs appear in yellow and all "Over expenditure" graphs appear in red, and different cost centres are represented by different patterns and line styles.

If you have a monochrome screen PowerProject represents different types of graphs by different patterns and line styles and different cost centres are represented by different colours.

Changing the bar/area appearance of a graph for a cost centre

To change the appearance of a bar or area representing a graph for the cost centre, click on the bar or area appearance that appears alongside the name of the graph you want to change to display the Bar/Area Appearance dialog

Changing the line appearance of a graph for a cost centre

To change the appearance of a line representing a graph for the cost centre, click on the line appearance that appears alongside the name of the graph you want to change to display the Line Appearance dialog.

Related topics

Cost Centre Graph Types


Graph Line Appearance dialog

This dialog allows you to change the appearance of graphs in a histogram. The Appearance panel at the foot of the dialog shows how the graph will appear on the bar chart.

Lines

This panel allows you to select the line style of the graph and the width of the graph as it appears on screen.

Lines selection box

Select the line style you want from this box. Use the scroll bar to display all of the line styles available. Click on the line style you want to select it. Notice that the style you select appears in the Appearance panel at the foot of the dialog.

Line width

The width of the graph as it appears on screen is always specified in pixels. Use the arrows to select the line width you want, or type in the width. The maximum screen width is 10 pixels.

Colour

The Colour panel allows you to specify the colours you want the lines and/or symbols to appear in. Click on the Lines or Symbols option to specify whether you want to choose a colour for the graph or for the symbols on the graph. the Lines option is selected by default.

When you have specified Lines or Symbols click on a colour from the panel. The colour you choose is displayed in the Appearance panel at the foot of the dialog.

Symbols

Specify where you want symbols to appear, together with the type of symbol, the size and the spacing of symbols on the graph.

Options

Check the Start, End, or Along Line boxes to specify where you want symbols to appear on the line. You can check any combination of the three boxes.

Symbol Size

Check Tiny, Small, Medium or Large to specify the size of the symbols on the graph.

Symbols selection box

Select the type of symbol you want to use. Use the scroll bar to display all of the symbols available. Click on the symbol you want, to select it. Notice that the symbol you select appears in the Appearance panel at the foot of the dialog.

Symbol Spacing

This specifies the spacing between symbols on the graph on the screen. The screen spacing is always specified in pixels. Use the arrows to select the spacing you want, or type in the spacing. The maximum screen spacing is 50 pixels.

Leaving the dialog

Click on OK to confirm the appearance of the graph, or Cancel to cancel.


Cost Accruals/Deferrals dialog

This dialog appears when you click on the Accruals button on the Cost Centre Details dialog or on the Permanent and Consumable Resource Details dialogs.

When you open this dialog from the Cost Centre Details dialog, it allows you to specify whether income to, or expenditure from, a cost centre is accrued and/or deferred instead of being fixed across the duration of segments.

When you open this dialog from a Resource Details dialog, it allows you to specify whether resource costs are accrued and/or deferred instead of being spread evenly across the tasks that the resource is assigned to.

Choose Income to set the cost accurals and/or deferrals for costs going into the cost centre. Choose Expenditure to set the cost accruals and/or deferrals for costs going out of the cost centre. These options are not available when you open this dialog from a Resource Details dialog because all resource costs are expenses.

Accrue box

Select Across Task to leave the cost fixed. Any costs assigned to segments will then be fixed so that they are spread evenly across the segment duration.

Select At Start of Task to load the cost at the start of any segments it is assigned to.

Select At End of Task to load the cost at the end of any segments it is assigned to.

Select Every time unit In Advance/Arrears, to load the cost at regular intervals either in advance or in arrears. Click on the drop-down list boxes to select a time unit and whether the cost is loaded in advance or in arrears.

Defer box

Select Don't Defer if you do not want to postpone costs.

Select Defer By to specify by how much costs should be postponed. Enter a number in the first box then select a time unit from the drop-down list box.

Click on OK to save the settings you have entered.


Admin - Toolbars menu command

Use this menu command to turn the toolbars on and off and to turn tooltips on and off.

Main

Annotation

Help

When a toolbar is displayed, you can move it by dragging it to the top, bottom, left or right edge of the PowerProject window. When you release the toolbar, it is redrawn along the chosen edge of the PowerProject window. If the toolbar is not moved from its original position, then you did not drag it close enough to the edge of the PowerProject window.


Toolbars - Main menu command

Use this menu command to toggle the main toolbar on and off. The menu command is ticked when the main toolbar is displayed. The main toolbar is illustrated below.


Toolbars - Annotation menu command

Use this menu command to toggle the annotation toolbar on and off. The menu command is ticked when the annotation toolbar is displayed. The annotation toolbar is illustrated below.


Toolbars - Help menu command

Use this menu command to toggle help for the toolbar buttons on and off. When this command is on, if you pause the mouse pointer over a toolbar button a tooltip appears showing you the name of the button under the mouse pointer.

This menu command is ticked when toolbar help is on.


Code Library dialog

The Codes dialog appears when you choose one of the first four menu commands in the Admin menu.

Codes are used to set the appearance of bars and segments on the bar chart, and to filter groups of similar segments when creating reports. You can also sort your report according to the codes assigned to bars.

The code library can contain many entries, scroll the dialog up and down - using the arrow boxes or slider bar - to see different areas of the dialog.

Code library titles

The library titles displayed on the first four lines of the Admin menu are initially Bar Library 1, Bar Library 2, Seg Library 1 and Seg Library 2.

You can change the wording used for the title on this dialog - so that the library titles are meaningful for your project. For example, substitute Bar Library 1 with Department, you can then use the codes in this library to refer to departments in your organisation.

Throughout PowerProject, the code is referred to as Bar Library 1, but if you have changed the Code Library title you see your own entry on the Admin menu and on dialogs throughout PowerProject.

A legend of codes used on the bar chart can be included on output with the Code Library title used as the heading. You set this on the Options tab of the Print dialog.

Adding a code to a library

Click on the New button to start a new entry.

The new entry is initially placed at the end of the current list, but the list is sorted into alphabetical order when you leave the dialog with OK.

Once you start an entry, you cannot continue until you have entered a valid code name. A blank pattern is assigned. Only a name is required to complete an entry.

Code name

Each code in a library must have a unique name, although you can have codes with the same names in different libraries.

The first entry is called default. You cannot change the name of this entry. If you change the name of an entry, it's position in the list can change when you leave the dialog with OK as the list is sorted into alphabetical order.

To change an existing code name within the library click on the name you wish to edit to position the text cursor.

Appearance

You can choose the colour and pattern for each code. The colour and pattern combination you choose is shown in the Appearance panel next to the code name.

To set or change the appearance click on the Appearance panel. The Select Appearance dialog is presented.

Deleting a code

To delete a code from a library:

1	Click on the name you want to delete; this locates the text cursor in the correct code box.

2	Click on the Delete button. Confirm the action on the Alert presented.

The first entry is called default. You cannot delete this entry. Any bars that refer to a code which you have deleted are set to this default code.

Note: If you are working in a multi­user project and have an Access Right of NONE you will be unable to gain access to the library. If your Access Right is VIEW you will be able to see the library, but be unable to change it. If your Access Right is EDIT you will be able to see and change the library.


When to use the code libraries

Four code libraries are provided, two for bar codes and two for segment codes, so that you can look at your chart in up to four different ways.

If you need only one view of your project, just set up your bar codes and patterns in Bar Library 1.

The following example shows how you might use PowerProject's code library features:

1	Change the code library name Seg Library 1 to Risk Factor.

2	Add codes in your Risk Factor library:

High - you could make this code red

Medium - yellow

Low - green.

3	Draw the bars on your chart as usual.

4	Use the Segment tab on the Details dialog to assign the appropriate Risk Factor for the segments.

Change your view of the chart by selecting Risk Factor as the code display on the Appearance tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog, or using the CTRL A shortcut.

Once you have added a code to a library, you can select it as a segment default, so that every new segment will have this library entry.

You can produce a filter of all the segments in the plan which have a certain Risk Factor, or combination of Risk Factors. The bar codes can also be used to provide a sort sequence in a filter chart.


Select Appearance dialog

The title of this dialog depends on the operation you are trying to perform. For example:

 	Specifying a code appearance from a Bar or Segment library, the dialog is Code Appearance.

Specifying an appearance for holidays, weekends or overtime from the calendar, the dialog is Calendar Appearance.

Specifying an appearance for a graph represented by a bar or an area, the dialog is Bar/Area Appearance.

You can choose the pattern and colour (foreground and background) for the requested operation. Your choice appears in the Representation panel at the foot of the dialog.

The number of colour boxes displayed on the dialog depends on the number of colours supported by your computer. The number of colours and the effect of patterns on printed output needs to be considered and is related to the selected printer.

Pattern

To set a pattern:

1	Click on the pattern you want.

2	Drag the pointer across the patterns, release on the pattern you want.

The current pattern is placed in the Representation panel.

Colour

To set a colour:

1	Click on the colour you want.

2	Drag the pointer across the colours, release on the colour you want.

The current colour is placed in the Foreground or Background panel and the Representation panel.

Foreground colour

Click on the Foreground button. Any colour selection will now apply to the foreground.

Background colour

Click on the Background button. Any colour selection will now apply to the background.

Toggle

Click on the Toggle button to swap the foreground and background colours.

Restrictions

Two restrictions apply to colour and pattern combinations:

You cannot choose the same foreground and background colour.

You cannot choose the combination reserved for use by the bar chart to show a selected segment - a black foreground with a solid pattern, or a black background with an empty pattern.


Choosing colours and patterns for printed output

The number of colours and patterns produced on printed reports depends on your output device. If your output device does not support a colour or pattern the result may be black or blank. Experiment with the best combination of colours and patterns for your output device.

With colour printers a dark foreground and background colour with a fine pattern may result in a muddy colour.

For plotters, only the hatched patterns are reproduced and you should leave the background colour as white. Patterns of dots or shapes are blank.

Codes containing different foreground and background colours may not be faithfully reproduced when editing a chart image in a drafting program.

Using a lot of colours and dense patterns slows down the speed of printing.


Pointer shapes

When you use one of the annotation buttons [image] and move over the bar chart or histogram the pointer changes shape:

Box pointer

Text pointer

Line pointer

Circle pointer

Polygon pointer

Rounded Box pointer

Import Picture pointer

If you move over a segment while in annotation mode, or move an annotation by dragging, the pointer changes to one of a number of shapes You can use these to attach an annotation to the segment:

Note: You cannot attach annotations to a particular part of a graph included in a histogram. Histogram annotations are always attached to the histogram, so they stay in their relative positions unless you move them.


Attaching an annotation

If you are annotating a chart, you must decide whether to attach an annotation to the chart, or to a particular segment on the chart.

You cannot attach annotations to baseline bars displayed within the current project.

If you attach to the chart, the annotation stays in its original position unless you move it. For example a reschedule has no effect on its position.

If you attach an annotation to a segment with one of the special attach pointer shapes, the annotation moves if the segment is moved.

You can change the attachment point via the mouse, or on a dialog.

Once an annotation is attached you can ALT-drag the annotation to a new position and it stays attached to the original point, but off set by the moved amount.

If you are annotating a histogram, you cannot attach annotations to a particular part of a graph included in the histogram. The annotation always remains where it was first positioned in the histogram, unless you move it. If the histogram changes its horizontal or vertical scale, the annotation moves with the scale.


Changing the attachment point

You can change the attachment from segment to chart on the annotation Details dialogs, but you must drag the annotation on the chart if you want to change from chart to segment.

You can change the attachment of an annotation by pointing to the part of the annotation you want to attach - the hotspot - and dragging it to its new position. The pointer shape changes as you move over the segment - release when you have the annotation correctly positioned.

It is easier to drag an annotation when it is deselected. If it is selected you may resize, rather than move it.

Note: Annotations on a histogram are always attached to the histogram. They cannot be attached to graphs on the histogram.


Annotation hotspot

This is the point where the pointer is positioned on an annotation when the annotation is dragged to a different position on the chart or histogram.

On the bar chart you can attach annotations to a bar or segment, PowerProject uses the annotation's hotspot to connect the annotation to the bar or segment. In some cases it can be difficult to attach an annotation exactly, for example if you create an annotation which you want to place over any milestones on the bar chart. Use the Centre Around Hotspot menu command to centre an annotation around its hotspot.

When an annotation is selected, its hotspot is marked by a drawing pin. For example, the drawing pin marks the hotspot of a selected text annotation:

When you first draw an annotation on a chart or histogram, the hotspot is the point at which you started to draw the annotation.


Adding a text annotation

To add a text annotation to a chart or histogram, you can use the Add Text menu command or the [image] button.

Adding a single line

1	Click on the text button or select Add Text from the Annotation menu.

2	Move the pointer over the chart or histogram. The pointer shape changes when you are over the chart or histogram, or near to a segment. Click to locate the text cursor, which is a blinking line.

3	Type the text for the annotation. If you want to change colour or font, double-click on the text annotation or use the [image] button to display the Text Details dialog.

Typing more than one line

If you want to make an annotation of more than one line, you must click the text button when you have finished the first line, then position a second line under the first.

On the bar chart you may find it easier to align the cursor if you turn Set Snapping on.

When you have typed the annotation, you should Group the lines together. If you want to edit text which you have grouped, first use Ungroup to separate the items.

Editing text annotations

To make changes to an existing annotation, you do not need to choose the text tool.

Simply click to locate the text cursor on the text at the point you want to edit, and make changes as necessary.

When the text cursor is on a text annotation, the annotation is selected, so you can also use the Edit menu commands, Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete, or you can use the [image] button to go to the Text Details dialog.


Adding a shape annotation

As well as annotating a chart or histogram with text, you can add shape annotations. Create shapes using PowerProject's annotation buttons to add a:

Box/Circle

Line

Polygon

To use a file created in a drawing package, choose Import Picture to draw a frame and choose a WMF or BMP file.

Editing shapes

You can edit shapes if you select them. Drag from the handles to resize the shape. If you want to maintain the height to width ratio of the shape when resizing it, use CTRL-drag to drag the handles.

You can change the colour, settings and category of a shape by selecting it and using the [image] button to display the Shape/Line Details dialog.

Mirroring shapes

You can mirror any of the shapes on your chart - boxes, ovals and polygons. For example you may make an arrowhead using the polygon tool, then make a copy and mirror the shape to produce arrowheads pointing in different directions.

1	Select the shape you want to mirror, then position the pointer over one of the handles. CTRL-drag to copy the shape if you want to keep the original.

2	Create the mirrored shape by dragging the shape to invert it.

You may also be able to mirror certain imported WMF files by dragging. However, some files cannot be mirrored - you'll find that the selected box becomes empty.


Shape buttons

Use boxes, circles and ovals to frame text annotations or to group them to make composite shapes on the chart or histogram. On the bar chart you may find it easier if you turn Set Snapping on before you use the drawing tools.

The box, rounded box and circle tools operate in a similar way. The shape drawn depends on how you drag the pointer away from the start position.

1	Click the Box/Rounded box/Circle button. The pointer shapes show the type of annotation or the attachment point.

2	Point where you want to start the shape and drag to the required size. You can drag the pointer in any direction to create the right shape.

3	Release to draw the shape. The shape is selected after you have drawn it, so you can double-click or use the [image] button to make changes to the colours, settings or category on the Shape/Line Details dialog.


Line button

You can use the line tool to draw a line anywhere on the chart or histogram. A line can be linked to a segment, or to the chart or histogram.

You can draw a line to connect an annotation to a segment, or to another annotation.

On the bar chart you can use vertical lines to mark columns, which is easier with Set Snapping on.

To draw a line

1	Click the line button. The pointer shape changes when it is over the chart or histogram or if you move close to a segment.

2	Point where you want to start the line and drag the line to the end point you require.

3	Release to draw the line and leave it selected, so you can double-click or use the [image] button to display the Shape/Line Details dialog.

Connecting an annotation to a segment

You can connect an annotation to a segment by drawing a line. For example, you may want the annotation to stay attached to the chart, but if the segment moves, the line should change length.

1	Click the line button and position the pointer over the segment with the required attach pointer showing.

2	Drag the line away from the segment and release when you have connected it to the annotation.

If you move the segment to which the line is attached, the line length is automatically adjusted. If you move the annotation, the line is left behind. To reconnect it:

1	Select the line.

2	Use the resize pointer to drag the end of the line to its new position. The other end of the line stays attached to the segment.


Polygon button

Using the polygon tool you can draw any multi-sided shape, for example an arrowhead or star. By dragging and releasing the polygon tool you can create any straight sided shape; by holding down CTRL as you drag the polygon tool you can draw any freehand shape. You can also rotate the shapes you draw using the polygon tool.

To create a polygon

1	Click the polygon button.

2	Position the polygon tool where you want to start the shape and drag to the first point.

3	Release to draw a line from the start to this position.

4	Drag to the next point and release. A line is automatically drawn from the end of the previous line to this point.

5	Continue to drag and release until you want to join up to the start.

6	Click on the chart or histogram to complete the shape. (The shape is drawn as a line through a series of points.)

You can hold down CTRL at any time when dragging the pointer to draw a shape that has curves as well as straight lines.

The shape is selected, so you can double-click or use the [image] button to display the Shape/Line Details dialog to make changes to the colours, settings or category for the annotation.

Reshaping a polygon

You can change the shape of a polygon by moving its points. Select the polygon then position the cursor over the point you want to move. When the cursor changes to the resize shape, drag the point to a new position.

To delete a point

You can also change the shape of a polygon by deleting some of the points that make up the shape. Select the polygon, and double-click on the point you want to delete. Select Delete Point from the popup menu that appears. The point is deleted and the adjacent points are connected by a new line.

To add a point

If you want to add a point to a polygon, select the polygon then double-click on the point closest to where you want to add a new one. Select Add Point from the popup menu that appears. A new point is placed on top of the original one. Drag the new point away from the original and release the mouse button when the point is in the correct position. The shape is redrawn through the new point positions.

Rotating polygons

To rotate a polygon, select the polygon so that you can see the eight black handles around the shape then double-click on one of the handles. If the Shape/Line Details dialog appears, press ESC to close it. Now notice that the corner handles around the polygon are double-headed arrows. Position the cursor over one of these corner handles then drag the handle clockwise or anti-clockwise. A line appears from the centre of the polygon to the handle and another follows the pointer as you move it, showing you the angle that the polygon is being rotated by. An outline of the polygon also follows the pointer movements showing you the angle that the shape will be redrawn at when you release the mouse button. Release the mouse button to draw the polygon at its new angle.

You cannot rotate polygons when they are grouped with other annotations.


Annotation - Group/Ungroup menu command

This menu command is only available if more than one annotation is selected on a chart or more than one annotation is selected on a histogram.

Use it to make any combination of text and/or shapes into a group so you can treat them as a single annotation. The command groups or ungroups annotations that are selected in the active window.

You can group:

More than one line of text.

Text and shapes, for example text in a box.

More than one shape, making a composite shape. You may need to use To Front /To Back to arrange overlapping shapes, or shapes and text.

Text or shapes and pictures.

You cannot make a group if you select an auto annotation, however you can make a group annotation automatic.

If you select a group annotation, the menu command changes to Ungroup.

Text

You can make changes on the Text Details dialog to affect the colour or settings, font or category for all the text lines in a group.

To edit any text within a group annotation, you should first use Ungroup, so that you can position the text cursor.

Text and shapes

If you group text and shapes together you can move between the Shape/Line and Text Details dialogs and drag or resize the annotation as a single item on the chart.

Different shapes

You can construct your own shapes by combining boxes, ovals and polygons. For example, you might want to design a special milestone symbol, or a more complex shape to highlight a particular area of the chart.

On Bar Chart/On Histogram

If you have a histogram locked onto a bar chart and have more than one annotation selected on the chart and the histogram, a submenu appears when you choose this command. This menu gives you the option of choosing On Bar Chart or On Histogram to ensure that PowerProject groups the correct set of annotations. If you have two histograms locked onto a bar chart and choose On Histogram, PowerProject groups/ungroups annotations on the active histogram.


Annotation - To Front/To Back menu command

Use this menu command to arrange annotations which are on top of each other on a chart or on a histogram. If you have annotations selected on both a chart and a histogram when a histogram is locked onto a bar chart, a submenu is displayed, which allows you to specify where you want to arrange the annotations.

When you are combining annotations, you may want to move a particular annotation to the front, or to the back. For example:

If you have a circle which is partially obscured by a box, select the circle then choose To front to make the circle overlap the box.

If you have a box which completely obscures a circle, select the box then choose To back to make the box appear behind the circle

If you have typed some text, then drawn a shape over it, the text is obscured. You need to select the shape then choose To back to reveal the text.

On Bar Chart/On Histogram

If you have a histogram locked onto a bar chart, these extra options are available on a submenu. They allow you to specify whether the annotation you want to move to the front or back is on the histogram or the bar chart. If you choose On Histogram when you have two histograms locked onto a bar chart, PowerProject performs the action on the active histogram.


Annotation - Centre Around Hotspot menu command

Use this menu command to centre an annotation around its hotspot.

The Centre Around Hotspot command is available on the menu if you have one or more annotations selected on a bar chart and/or histogram.

This command is particularly useful if you are attaching an annotation to a bar or segment on the bar chart. In some cases it can be difficult to position the annotation exactly, for example if you want to position an annotation directly over a milestone. You can use this command to centre the annotation.


Annotation - Replicate menu command

Use this menu command to copy a selected annotation to other selected bars or segments.

You can replicate normal or grouped annotations, which can include tokens, but not auto annotations.

The Replicate command is available on the menu if you:

Select an annotation attached to a segment - and also select one or more segments or bars.

Select an annotation attached to the chart - and also select one or more bars.

The effect of Replicate depends on whether the annotation is attached to the chart, or a segment, and whether you have selected segments or bars as the target.

If the annotation is attached to a segment, it is replicated to other selected segments, or the segment in the same position (for example, the last segment) on selected bars.

If the annotation is attached to the chart, it is replicated at the same position on any selected bars on the chart.

Each replicated annotation is independent - each can be edited, copied, moved or deleted as a normal annotation.

Note: This menu command is not available if you are annotating a histogram.


Annotation - Make Auto/Make Non Auto menu command

This menu command is available if you select an annotation on the chart.

Use Make Auto to make the selected annotation appear automatically either on all bars or segments, or selected bars or segments, by choosing filter options on the Make Auto Annotation dialog. You must give the auto annotation filter a Title which appears on the Edit Auto Annotations dialog.

Use Make Non Auto to make the currently selected existing auto annotation a normal annotation. All other occurrences of the Auto annotation are removed and the Auto annotation title is removed from the list of available Auto annotations on the Edit Auto Annotations dialog.

If you define a filter, the selected annotation is automatically applied to existing bars or segments and any new bars or segments you draw which match the filter. For example you could design a graphic to overlay the PowerProject milestone symbol and choose Milestones as the filter on the Search dialog. Any existing milestones would be covered by your custom symbol and any new milestones you create are annotated automatically.

If you do not define a filter, the auto annotation is applied to all bars or segments. For example you could annotate all bars to display the bar title, or create an annotation column showing the bar start date.

An auto annotation with a segment filter must be attached to a segment.

You can change the auto annotation filter or delete the auto annotation. You can have several different auto annotations on your chart, but each auto annotation only applies to the active chart in the project.

When selected, graphics auto annotations are displayed with grey rather than black markings, and text auto annotations are marked with longer dashed lines.

If you edit or move an auto annotation, all the other auto annotations of the same type are automatically updated.

Note: This menu command is not available if you are annotating a histogram.


Annotation - Edit Autos menu command

Use this menu command to display the Edit Auto Annotations dialog, on which you can see a list of auto annotation titles. An auto annotation is created via the Make Auto menu command.

You can choose a name from the list and use Edit to change the filter on the Edit Filter dialog, or Delete to delete an auto annotation from all bars or segments.

Note: This menu command is not available if you are annotating a histogram.


Annotation - Add Text menu command

Choose this menu command to create a new text annotation on the active chart or histogram.

Using this menu command has the same effect as clicking on the [image] button in the main toolbar or the annotation toolbar.

For full details of creating text annotations, see Add a text annotation.


Annotation - Import Picture menu command

Choose this menu command when you want to place a picture, for example one created in a drawing package or a painting program, or from a Clipart library onto your chart or histogram. The file can be in WMF or BMP format.

On the chart or histogram, the pointer changes shape, so that you can locate and drag to size a frame into which the picture is placed. The import picture tool works in a similar way to using [image].

Once you have defined where the picture is to be placed, the Import Picture Annotation dialog is displayed so you can choose a file. The chosen picture is fitted into the frame you have defined. If you select a picture, you can change the shape and size by dragging.


Annotation - Categories menu command

Use this menu command to display the Annotation Categories dialog. In a new project, there is only one category: 'Default'.

Use this dialog to:

Create more categories to use for annotation within the project.

Choose which categories of annotation to display on charts and histograms.

When you first create an annotation, it is automatically put into the Default category. Choose a different category for each annotation from the Category list box on the Text Details, Shape/Line Details or Picture Details dialogs. An annotation can only have one category.

Examples

You could create a category for annotations which are additional notes to yourself, which you could turn off before printing the chart or histogram for presentation to others.

Another way of using categories is to use a different one for each type of annotation, so you could turn off pictures, or columns for example, depending on what you are doing on the chart.


Annotation - Insert token menu command

Use this command to include an item of information (a token) from the project in a text annotation. Position the text cursor where you want to place the annotation then select the Insert Token menu command, or press F9, to pop up a list of options from which you can select a token.

If you are annotating a bar chart, the following options are displayed on the popup menu:

Bar

Segment

Project

Chart

Other

Elapsed Difference

Working Difference

If you are annotating a histogram, the following options are displayed on the popup menu:

Graph

Histogram

Project

Other

Elapsed Difference

For example, you could annotate each bar with its start date, by including the "Bar current start" token for the bar. If you move the start of the bar, the token is automatically updated to show the new date. On histograms you could annotate each graph with the value displayed by the graph at a particular point in time. You can select annotation tokens that represent any of the 12 types of graph you can include in a histogram report, even if you have not included all the graph types in the histogram you are annotating.

When an annotation containing a token is selected you see the name of the token, for example: <BAR-CURRENT-START>.

When the annotation is deselected, the token is replaced by the information it represents: 02 Sept 97.

A token can only be inserted into a text annotation. Locate the text cursor by clicking on an existing text annotation, or by pressing the [image] button and clicking on the chart.

Note: You can insert information from another program into your text annotation, by using the DDE link option.


Annotation - Select All menu command

Use this command to select all the annotations currently displayed on the chart or histogram. When all annotations are selected, deselect individual annotations using CTRL-click.

Make global changes to annotations once they are selected, using the Details dialogs.

On Bar Chart/ On Histogram

If you have a histogram locked onto a bar chart, a submenu appears when you choose this command. This menu gives you the option of choosing On Bar Chart or On Histogram to ensure that PowerProject picks the correct set of annotations. If you have two histograms locked onto a bar chart and choose On Histogram, PowerProject selects annotations on the active histogram.


Annotation - Set Snapping menu command

Snapping helps you draw lines and shapes, position text and align annotations.

Use this menu command to display the Annotation Snapping dialog to define the annotation grid and turn snapping on and off. If you set snapping on, you can choose to display either the annotation or chart grid.

Note: This menu command is not available if you are annotating a histogram. If you find it difficult to draw the annotation without snapping on, you can draw it on the bar chart and then move or copy the completed annotation onto the histogram.


Bar tokens

The information given by these tokens will refer to the bar line which may or may not be made up of a number of segments e.g. if there are three segments on the bar line 'Bar current start' would refer to the first segment whilst 'Bar current end' would refer to the last segment.

You can also choose the Permanent Resource, Consumable Resource and Fixed Cost options from the Bar popup which display further popup menus.

Available Tokens	Token Name	Token Information
Bar title	<BAR-TITLE>
Bar current start	<BAR-CURRENT-START>
Bar current end	<BAR-CURRENT-END>
Bar early start	<BAR-EARLY-START>
Bar early end	<BAR-EARLY-END>
Bar free start	<BAR-FREE-START>
Bar free end	<BAR-FREE-END>
Bar late start	<BAR-LATE-START>
Bar late end	<BAR-LATE-END>
Bar total float	<BAR-TOTAL-FLOAT>
Bar % complete	<BAR-PC-COMPLETE>
Bar duration	<BAR-DURATION>
Bar work done	<BAR-WORK-DONE>	Sum of completed tasks
Bar work left	<BAR-WORK-LEFT>	Sum of uncompleted tasks
Bar Library 1	<BAR-CODE-1>
Bar Library 2	<BAR-CODE-2>
Calendar	<BAR-CALENDAR>
Bar Cost	<BAR-COST>	Cost of the bar from one or all cost centres
ID	<BAR-ID>	Unique ID number for the bar.
Work Breakdown Number	<WORK-BREAKDOWN-NUMBER>	WBN code assigned to the bar.
WBN Pathname	<WORK-BREAKDOWN-FULL-NAME>
Planned % Complete	<BAR-PLAN-PC-COMPLETE>
Planned Work Done	<BAR-PLAN-WORK-DONE>
User Text1	<BAR-USER-TEXT1>	A string of up to 40 characters that you have entered in the Bar User Text1 column on the column sheet.
User Text2	<BAR-USER-TEXT2>	A string of up to 20 characters that you have entered in the Bar User Text2 column on the column sheet.
User Real Number	<BAR-USER-REALNUM>	A decimal number that you have entered in the Bar User Real Number column on the column sheet.  You can change the number of places after the decimal point by setting a line in your PPROJECT.INI file. See Specifying the decimal places in Real Number tokens
Additional tokens in the column sheet

The following bar tokens can only be displayed in the column sheet. The tokens represent the difference between a bar's value in the project and its value in a selected baseline.(The variance value is calculated by subtracting the project value from the baseline value.)

When you display these tokens in the column sheet, select the baseline that you want to reference from the Details group box on the Column tab of the Details dialog or the Column tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog - you can only select baselines that are open in the project. If you select the project instead of a baseline, no variance values will be displayed in the column.

Current Start Variance	The difference between the bar's start date in the selected baseline, and the bar's start date in the project.
Current End Variance	The difference between the bar's end date in the selected baseline, and the bar's end date in the project.
Duration Variance	The difference between the bar's duration in the selected baseline, and the bar's duration in the project.
% Complete Variance	The difference between the bar's % complete in the selected baseline, and the bar's % complete in the project.
Cost Variance	The difference between the bar's cost in the selected baseline, and the bar's cost in the project.


Segment tokens

The information given by these tokens refers only to the segment chosen, regardless of whether there are other segments on that bar line.

You can also choose the Permanent Resource, Consumable Resource and Fixed Cost options from the Segment popup which display further popup menus.

Available Tokens	Token Name	Token Information
Segment title	<TASK-TITLE>
Flag date	<TASK-FLAG-DATE>
Flag gap	<TASK-FLAG-GAP>
Segment current start	<TASK-CURRENT-START>
Segment current end	<TASK-CURRENT-END>
Segment early start	<TASK-EARLY-START>
Segment early end	<TASK-EARLY-END>
Segment free start	<TASK-FREE-START>
Segment free end	<TASK-FREE-END>
Segment late start	<TASK-LATE-START>
Segment late end	<TASK-LATE-END>
Segment free float	<TASK-FREE-FLOAT>
Segment total float	<TASK-TOTAL-FLOAT>
Segment Library 1	<TASK-CODE-1>
Segment Library 2	<TASK-CODE-2>
Segment total duration	<TASK-TOTAL-DURATION>	Duration of all segments in a group (which has had progress added).
Segment duration	<TASK-DURATION>	Duration of one segment in a group (which has had progress added).
Segment work done	<TASK-WORK-DONE>	Sum of completed parts of segment.
Segment work left	<TASK-WORK-LEFT>	Remaining uncompleted part of segment.
Segment % complete	<TASK-PC-COMPLETE>
Segment Cost	<TASK-COST>	Cost of the segment from one or all cost centres.
ID	<TASK-ID>	Unique ID number for the segment.
Planned % Complete	<TASK-PLAN-PC-COMPLETE>
Planned Work Done	<TASK-PLAN-WORK-DONE>
User Text1	<TASK-USER-TEXT1>	A string of up to 12 characters entered in the User Text1 field on the Segment tab of the Details dialog
User Text2	<TASK-USER-TEXT2>	A string of up to 16 characters that you have entered in the Segment User Text2 column on the column sheet.
User Real Number	<TASK-USER-REALNUM>	A decimal number that you have entered in the Segment User Real Number column on the column sheet.  You can change the number of places after the decimal point by setting a line in your PPROJECT.INI file. See Specifying the decimal places in Real Number tokens
User Num1	<TASK-USER-NUM1>	The digits entered in the User Number 1 field on the Segment tab of the Details dialog.
User Num2	<TASK-USER-NUM2>	The digits entered in the User Number 2 field on the Segment tab of the Details dialog.
Additional tokens in the column sheet

The following segment tokens can only be displayed in the column sheet. The tokens represent the difference between a segment's value in the project and its value in a selected baseline.(The variance value is calculated by subtracting the project value from the baseline value.)

When you display these tokens in the column sheet, select the baseline that you want to reference from the Details group box on the Column tab of the Details dialog or the Column tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog - you can only select baselines that are open in the project. If you select the project instead of a baseline, no variance values will be displayed in the column.

Current Start Variance	The difference between the segment's start date in the selected baseline, and the segment's start date in the project.
Current End Variance	The difference between the segment's end date in the selected baseline, and the segment's end date in the project.
Duration Variance	The difference between the segment's duration in the selected baseline, and the segment's duration in the project.
% Complete Variance	The difference between the segment's % complete in the selected baseline, and the segment's % complete in the project.
Cost Variance	The difference between the segment's cost in the selected baseline, and the segment's cost in the project.


Project tokens

The information given by these tokens refers to project (including baseline projects) level information. You can use these tokens when annotating a chart or a histogram.

Available Tokens	Token Name	Token Information
Project title	<PROJECT-TITLE>
Project for	<PROJECT-FOR>
Project by	<PROJECT-BY>
Project start	<PROJECT-START>
Project end	<PROJECT-END>
Project report date	<PROJECT-REPORT-DATE>
Project % complete	<PROJECT-PC-COMPLETE>	Amount of project completed
Project duration	<PROJECT-DURATION>	Total elapsed period of project


Chart tokens

The information given by these tokens refers to project level information.

Available Tokens	Token Name	Token Information
Chart title	<CHART-TITLE>	Always gives chart title.
Chart subtitle	<CHART-SUBTITLE>	Chart title if not root chart
Chart. path	<CHART-PATH>
Chart author	<CHART-AUTHOR>
Chart manager	<CHART-MANAGER>
Chart comment	<CHART-COMMENT>
Chart programme number	<CHART-PROG-NUM>
Chart issue date	<CHART-ISSUE-DATE>
Chart revision number	<CHART-REV-NUM>
Chart revision date	<CHART-REV-DATE>
Chart revision comment	<CHART-REV-COMMENT>
Chart start	<CHART-START>
Chart end	<CHART-END>
Chart report date	<CHART-REP-DATE>
Chart duration	<CHART-DURATION>
Chart work content	<CHART-WORK-CONTENT>
Chart % complete	<CHART-PC-COMPLETE>
Chart number of bars	<CHART-NUM-BARS>
Chart number of segments	<CHART-NUM-SEGS>
Chart number of local links	<CHART-NUM-LOCLINKS>
Chart number of X links in	<CHART-NUM-XLINKS-IN>
Chart number of X links out	<CHART-NUM-XLINKS-OUT>
Chart number of X links	<CHART-NUM-XLINKS>


Consumable Resource Tokens for Segments

The following tokens are available when you choose the Segment - Consumable Resource options from the popup menus presented when you press F9 on a bar chart.

Available Token	Token Name	Token Information
Resource Consumption Rate.	<RES-CONS-RATE>	The rate at which the resource is supplied or consumed on the selected segment (only applicable for fixed consumption or supply rates).
Resource Consumption Rate Average	<RES-CONS-RATE-AVR>	Average consumption rate of the resource on the selected segment, if the consumption or supply rate is represented as a profile.
Resource Consumption Rate Minimum	<RES-CONS-RATE-MIN>	Minimum rate of consumption or supply of the resource on the selected segment, if the consumption or supply rate is represented as a profile.
Resource Consumption Rate Maximum	<RES-CONS-RATE-MAX>	Maximum rate of consumption or supply of the resource on the selected segment, if the consumption or supply rate is represented as a profile.
Resource Allocation	<RES-ALLOC>	The amount of the resource allocated to the selected segment
Resource Cost	<RES-COST>	The cost of the resource at normal rate on the selected segment.
Resource Total Cost	<RES-TOT-COST>	The total cost of the resource (first use cost + normal rate cost on the selected segment.
User Text	<RES-ALLOC-USER-TEXT>	A string of up to 20 characters that you have entered in the Segment Consumable Resource User Text (Resource name) column on the column sheet.  You must have the selected consumable resource assigned to the segment before you can enter this user text string on the column sheet.
Additional tokens in the column sheet

The following segment tokens can only be displayed in the column sheet. The tokens represent consumable resource modelling information that is normally viewed on the Resource Modelling dialog.

Modelling Method	None, Fixed or Proportional
Calculated Parameter	Duration, Allocation or Consumption/Supply Rate
Balancing Parameter	Allocation or Consumption/Supply Rate
Cost Centre	The cost centre selected on the Resource Modelling dialog.


Permanent Resource Tokens for Segments

The following tokens are available when you choose the Segment - Permanent Resource options from the popup menus presented when you press F9 on a bar chart.

Available Token	Token Name	Token Information
Resource Allocation	<RES-ALLOC>	The amount of the resource allocated to the selected segment as a fixed allocation.
Resource Allocation Average	<RES-ALLOC-AVR>	Average allocation of the resource on the selected segment, if the allocation is represented as a profile.
Resource Allocation Minimum	<RES-ALLOC-MIN>	Minimum allocation of the resource on the selected segment, if the allocation is represented as a profile.
Resource Allocation Maximum	<RES-ALLOC-MAX>	Maximum allocation of the resource on the selected segment, if the allocation is represented as a profile.
Resource Effort	<RES-EFFORT>	The amount of effort required for the resource to complete work on the selected segment. (Only applicable if the resource assignment is modelled using an effort based calculation).
Resource Work	<RES-WORK>	The amount of work required for the resource to finish working on the selected segment. (Only applicable if the resource assignment is modelled using a work based calculation).
Resource Work Rate	<RES-WORK-RATE>	The rate at which a resource works on the selected segment. (Only applicable if the resource assignment is modelled using a work based calculation).
Resource Cost	<RES-COST>	The cost of the resource at normal rate on the selected segment.
Resource Overtime Cost	<RES-OT-COST>	The cost of the resource at overtime rate on the selected segment.
Resource Total Cost	<RES-TOT-COST>	The total cost (first use cost + normal rate cost + overtime cost) of the resource on the selected segment.
User Text	<RES-ALLOC-USER-TEXT>	A string of up to 20 characters that you have entered in the Segment Permanent Resource User Text (Resource name) column on the column sheet. You must have the selected permanent resource assigned to the segment before you can enter this user text string on the column sheet.
Additional tokens in the column sheet

The following segment tokens can only be displayed in the column sheet. The tokens represent permanent resource modelling information that is normally viewed on the Resource Modelling dialog:

Modelling Method	None, Fixed or Proportional
Calculation Type	Effort based or Work based
Calculated Parameter	Duration, Allocation, Work or Work Rate
Balancing Parameter	Effort, Work, Work Rate or Allocation
Cost Centre	The cost centre selected on the Resource Modelling dialog.


Fixed Cost Tokens for Segments

The following tokens are available when you choose the Segment - Fixed Cost options from the popup menus presented when you press F9 on a bar chart.

Available Token	Token Name	Token Information
Fixed Cost Allocation	<FIXED-COST-ALLOC>	The allocation of any fixed costs from the cost centre to the selected segments.
Fixed Cost Expenditure Rate	<FIXED-COST-EXP-RATE>	The rate at which any fixed costs allocated from the cost centre provide income or use expenditure.
User Text	<RES-ALLOC-USER-TEXT>	A string of up to 20 characters that you have entered in the Segment Fixed Cost User Text (Cost Centre name) column on the column sheet. You must have a fixed cost from the selected cost centre assigned to the segment before you can enter this user text string on the column sheet.


Other Tokens

The information given by the date tokens refers to the current system date of your computer.

Available Token	Token Name	Token Information
Date now	None	System date as text
Date	<OTHER-DATE>	System date (updated)
DDE Link	Specified from the Create DDE Link Token dialog	A link to information in another Windows program.


Consumable Resource Tokens for Bars

The following tokens are available when you choose the Bar - Consumable Resource options from the popup menus presented when you press F9 on a bar chart.

Available Token	Token Name	Token Information
Resource Consumption Rate	<BAR-RES-CONS- RATE>	The rate at which the resource is supplied or consumed on the selected bar (only applicable for fixed consumption or supply rates).
Resource Consumption Rate Average	<BAR-RES-CONS- RATE-AVR>	Average consumption rate of the resource on the selected bar, if the consumption or supply rate is represented as a profile.
Resource Consumption Rate Minimum	<BAR-RES-CONS- RATE-MIN>	Minimum rate of consumption or supply of the resource on the selected bar, if the consumption or supply rate is represented as a profile.
Resource Consumption Rate Maximum	<BAR-RES-CONS- RATE-MAX>	Maximum rate of consumption or supply of the resource on the selected bar, if the consumption or supply rate is represented as a profile.
Resource Allocation	<BAR-RES-ALLOC>	The amount of the resource allocated to the selected bar
Resource Cost	<BAR-RES-COST>	The cost of the resource at normal rate on the selected bar.
Resource Total Cost	<BAR-RES-TOT- COST>	The total cost of the resource (first use cost + normal rate cost on the selected bar.


Permanent Resource Tokens for Bars

The following tokens are available when you choose the Bar - Permanent Resource options from the popup menus presented when you press F9 on a bar chart.

Available Token	Token Name	Token Information
Resource Allocation	<BAR-RES-ALLOC>	The amount of the resource allocated to the selected bar as a fixed allocation.
Resource Allocation Average	<BAR-RES-ALLOC- AVR>	Average allocation of the resource on the selected bar, if the allocation is represented as a profile.
Resource Allocation Minimum	<BAR-RES-ALLOC- MIN>	Minimum allocation of the resource on the selected bar, if the allocation is represented as a profile.
Resource Allocation Maximum	<BAR-RES-ALLOC- MAX>	Maximum allocation of the resource on the selected bar, if the allocation is represented as a profile.
Resource Effort	<BAR-RES-EFFORT>	The amount of effort required for the resource to complete work on the selected bar. (Only applicable if the resource assignment is modelled using an effort based calculation).
Resource Work	<BAR-RES-WORK>	The amount of work required for the resource to finish working on the selected bar. (Only applicable if the resource assignment is modelled using a work based calculation).
Resource Work Rate	<BAR-RES-WORK- RATE>	The rate at which a resource works on the selected bar. (Only applicable if the resource assignment is modelled using a work based calculation).
Resource Cost	<BAR-RES-COST>	The cost of the resource at normal rate on the selected bar.
Resource Overtime Cost	<BAR-RES-OT-COST>	The cost of the resource at overtime rate on the selected bar.
Resource Total Cost	<BAR-RES-TOT-COST>	The total cost (first use cost + normal rate cost + overtime cost) of the resource on the selected bar.


Fixed Cost Tokens for Bars

The following tokens are available when you choose the Bar - Fixed Cost options from the popup menus presented when you press F9 on a bar chart.

Available Token	Token Name	Token Information
Fixed Cost Allocation	<BAR-FIXED-COST- ALLOC>	The allocation of any fixed costs from the cost centre to the selected bar.
Fixed Cost Expenditure Rate	<BAR-FIXED-COST- EXP-RATE>	The rate at which any fixed costs allocated from the cost centre to the selected bar provide income or use expenditure.


Graph Tokens

These tokens refer to information about graphs for resources or cost centres included in the histogram report.

Available Token	Token Name	Token Information
Graph Value at Specified time	Specified from the Select Resource and Graph Time dialog.	The value of a selected graph for a resource at a time specified by the user.
Graph Time for Specified Value	Specified from the Select Resource and Graph Value dialog.	The time at which a selected graph for a resource reaches a value specified by the user.
Graph minimum	Specified from the Select Resource and Graph dialog.	The minimum value of a selected graph for a resource.
Graph maximum	Specified from the Select Resource and Graph dialog.	The maximum value of a selected graph for a resource.
Graph description	Specified from the Select Resource and Graph dialog.	A brief description of a selected graph.
Note: Sometimes a graph may display more than one value for a particular day, for example if you supply consumable resources instantly to a project by assigning them to a milestone. In these cases, an annotation token representing the graph value for that day always contains the greater value of the graph.


Histogram Tokens

These tokens give information about the histogram report of the histogram you are annotating.

Available Token	Token Name	Token Information
Histogram Report Name	<HISTOGRAM-NAME>	The name of the histogram report.
Histogram Bar/Periodic Time Unit	<GRAPH-UNIT>	The time unit used for the histogram report.
Resource Name	<RES-NAME(S)>	The names of the resource(s) included in the histogram report.


Make Auto Annotation/Edit Filter dialog

This dialog is presented when you choose the menu command Make Auto or if you choose Edit on the Edit Auto Annotations dialog.

Title - you must give a unique title to the filter, so you can edit or delete it on the Edit Auto Annotations dialog.

Type - choose whether to apply the Filter options to a Bar or Segment.

Filter options - select options to determine whether or not bars or segments should be included in the filter.

To save your changes, exit with OK. To abandon changes choose Cancel.


Type

When you use this option, first decide which type of filter you want:

Bar - if any segment on the bar matches the Filter Options, the bar line is selected, including the bar title and all segments.

Segment - any individual segments which match the filter options are selected.

For example:

If you select Bar in Type and Milestones in the Filter Options the whole bar line will be selected for any milestone.

If you select Segment in Type and Milestones in the Filter Options then just the actual milestones will be selected.


Deleting auto annotations

Remove an auto annotation from a particular bar using Edit - Delete

Restore an auto annotation to normal using Make non-auto.

Delete an auto annotation filter from the chart using Edit Autos, by selecting it on the Edit Auto Annotations dialog and then using the Delete button.


Changing the auto annotation filter

You can change the filter for an auto annotation on the Edit Filter dialog. You can reach this dialog by:

Choosing the Edit Autos menu and picking the required auto annotation on the Edit Auto Annotations dialog and then using the Edit button.

Reach the relevant Details dialog, by double-clicking or using the [image] button, and choose the Filter button.

Once the Edit Filter dialog is displayed, alter the Filter options as required. Click on OK when you have finished, to confirm the change and return to the chart.


Defining a filter

This example shows how you could add a special annotation to milestones by setting up a filter.

1	Create a graphic annotation using the shape tools and Group menu command.

2	Overlay the PowerProject milestone symbol by dragging the new symbol so that it is attached to a milestone.

3	Select the annotation and choose Make Auto.

4	On the Make Auto Annotation dialog, choose the Segment Type and the Filter Milestones.

5	Press OK to confirm the filter and return to the chart.

The annotation is automatically added to any segment on the chart which matches the filter - in this case, milestones.

If you define a filter and no annotations appear on the chart, then no segments have matched the filter. Use Edit Autos to change the filter.


Annotating all bars

You can use the auto annotation feature to add annotations to all bars, or segments. You may want to add an annotation containing a token - such as a start date - to each bar on the chart or as a column.

If your annotation is attached to a segment on a bar, for example the last segment, you can make it appear automatically on the last segment of all other bars.

For example:

1	Make an annotation containing the 'Bar title' token, and attach it to the end of a segment.

2	Choose Make Auto. Select Bar search to apply the annotation to the segment in the same position on all the other bars, for example the last. You could select a Segment search to apply it to every segment on the chart.

3	Give the auto annotation a title - such as 'Dates to all bars'.

4	You don't need to define a filter so click OK then choose Yes on the alert.


Creating an annotation column

If your annotation is attached to the chart, and you do not choose any filter options when you use Make Auto, your annotation appears in a column down the chart.

For example, to make a column of annotations containing the bar start and end dates, using tokens:

1	Choose the [image] button and locate the cursor at the start of the chart.

2	Choose Insert token and choose the 'Bar current start' token for 'This bar'. Choose Insert token again, this time choosing the 'Bar current end' token.

3	Select the annotation and choose Make auto. Name the auto annotation. As you want to display the start and end dates on all the bars, you don't need to define a filter so click OK then choose Yes on the alert.

You return to the chart with the bar start and end dates displayed as a column down the chart.


Annotation Snapping dialog

This dialog is presented after the Set Snapping menu command is chosen. It allows you to control the type and size of a grid to which annotations will be attached during drawing or moving.

Settings

When Snapping is off (cleared) the normal chart grid is displayed and you can move annotations to a precise place on the chart. Fine tuning the position of an item by dragging is easier with Snapping off.

When Snapping is on, the option is ticked (or 'checked'). If you create new annotations, or move existing annotations, the items will snap to the grid defined in the Annotation grid spacing panel. Drawing lines and shapes or aligning a number of items is easier with Snapping on.

If Snapping is on, you can choose to show either the Annotation grid, or the Chart grid. Whichever grid you show, the annotation always snaps to the annotation grid.

The size of the grid affects the way the graphics tools work. To see the effect, check Snapping and set the horizontal and vertical snapping grid to 0.5 inch. Draw a box then move it by dragging. You will notice that the box snaps to the nearest 0.5 inch grid. If you now clear Snapping and move the box, you will notice that the box does not snap, but stays where it was placed.


Annotation Details dialogs

Three Details dialogs are available depending on the type of annotation:

Text Details dialog for text annotations.

Shape/Line Details dialog for shapes or lines.

Picture Details dialog for WMF or BMP files.

You can display these dialogs in three ways:

Double-click on the annotation you want to change.

·	Select the annotation and then use the [image] button.

Select the annotation and then choose Edit - Details.

Multiple dialogs

A Multiple dialog is displayed if you first select more than one annotation. Use this dialog to make changes to all the selected annotations.

If you select a picture and any other annotations, the Multiple Picture Details dialog is displayed, with buttons to move to the other dialogs.

If you select text and shape annotations, the Multiple Text Details dialog is displayed first, with a Shapes button for moving to the Shape/Line Details dialog.

You use the dialogs in the same way as the single Text or Shape/Line or Picture Details dialogs, but there are two major differences:

Settings

Only options which are common to all the selected items are checked. If you check an option, all the items will have that setting.

Colours

For Text and Shape/Line Details, An additional option appears in the Colours panel - Ignore. This is automatically selected, so that the items keep any different colours they may have.


Text Details dialog

Use this dialog to change text annotation font style, point size, colour and appearance. You can display the dialog in three ways:

Select the annotation and then use the [image] button.

Double-click on the annotation you want to change.

Select the annotation and then choose Edit - Details.

Colours

The sample of text on this dialog shows the current colours. To change the text colour:

1	Click Text colour, then choose a colour.

2	Click Background and choose a different colour.

The changes are reflected in the Sample panel.

For Multiple Text Details, an additional option appears in the Colours panel - Ignore. This is automatically selected, so that the items keep any different colours they may have.

If you would like to see the chart behind the text, rather than a solid colour, choose the Transparent - Yes option in the Settings panel to make the annotation transparent.

Settings

Scale

You have the option of scaling the annotation in one of two ways:

No scaling, which means that the font size you have chosen is not changed, even if you change the scale of the chart or histogram.

With the chart or histogram, so the size of the text annotation is automatically made larger or smaller if you make changes to the Chart - Scale - Vertical chart scale or to the size of the histogram window.

Scaling with the chart

If you change the bar height and bar spacing values (on the Scale tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog) by different amounts, you may find that using the With chart option, some text annotations change to different fonts, whilst others don't. This is because PowerProject takes account of how each annotation is attached when rescaling the font:

If the annotation is attached to the chart, a combination of the bar height and bar spacing is used as a scaling factor.

If the annotation is attached to the centre of a bar, the bar height is used as the scaling factor.

If the annotation is attached above or below a bar, the bar spacing is used as the scaling factor.

Attach

Use this option if you want to change the attachment from a segment to the chart.

When you draw an annotation, it can be attached to the chart, or to a segment using one of the special pointer shapes.

You cannot use this option to change the attachment point from chart to segment.

Transparent

You may want to place text or a shape on the chart, but you want to see the chart behind the annotation - it should be transparent.

Use the Yes option to make an annotation transparent.

Use No, to give the annotation a solid background of your chosen colour.

Font library

Once you have chosen a font style and point size for an annotation via the Font Selector, it is added to the Font library. When you want to use the same font for another annotation, it is quicker to choose from the Font library list box.

Scroll down the list and click the one you want. Click OK to leave the Text Details dialog and return to the chart with the annotation displayed in the new font.

Note: If you are using a copy of a project from another PowerProject user, there may be fonts in the library which you have not installed in your version of Windows, so they do not appear on the Font Selector. In this case, the original font names are not changed in the library, but Windows supplies the nearest font available to the one chosen.

Category

This shows the annotation's current category. Choose a different category for the annotation from the list you created with the Categories menu command. Click on the list box and choose the category you want.

If you have chosen a category which is turned on, the annotation is shown on the chart. If the category is turned off, the annotation disappears when you deselect it.

If this is a Multiple Text Details dialog there will be extra buttons:

Shapes for moving to the Shape Details dialog.

Pictures for moving to the Picture Details dialog.

If the annotation is an auto annotation there will also be a Filter button to allow editing of the filter.

Font button

Click this button to display the Font Selector. This dialog lets you change the font and the point size of the text annotation. It also allows you to place a line through the text, by checking the Strikeout box and allows you to underline the text, by checking the Underline box.

When you have selected a font and a point size, PowerProject adds the font to the Font library so if you want to use the font for another annotation you can select it from the Font library list box.

As a shortcut, you can use the [image] [image] [image] on the main toolbar to apply bold, italic or a single underline to any selected text annotations.


Shape/Line Details dialog

Use this dialog to change the appearance, scaling and attachment of a shape or line. You can also change the annotation's category. You can display the dialog in three ways:

Select the annotation and then use the [image] button.

Double-click on the annotation you want to change.

Select the annotation and then choose Edit - Details.

Colours

The sample on this dialog shows the line, foreground and background colours. To change the colours

1	Click Line, then choose a colour and line style. The line colour and style is shown in the Sample panel.

2	Click Background and choose a different colour.

3	Choose a pattern instead of the solid colour which is the default, then you can choose another colour for the Foreground.

For Multiple Shape/Line Details dialogs an additional option appears in the Colours panel - Ignore. This is automatically selected, so that the items keep any different colours they may have.

Settings

Scale

Choose With chart or With histo to scale the shape with the chart or histogram. The size of the shape changes if you change the horizontal or vertical scale with Chart - Scale or change the size of the histogram window.

Choose No scaling, so that changes to the scale of the chart or changes to the size of the histogram window do not affect the shape.

Attach

Use this option to change the attachment of the shape from a segment to a chart. You can also change the attachment point by dragging the picture on the chart, and using the appropriate pointer shape to attach it to either the chart or a segment.

Outline

You can draw the background, but not the line around the shape if you choose the Don't draw option.

Transparent

You may want to place a shape on the chart or histogram, but you want to see the chart or histogram behind the annotation - it should be transparent.

Use the Yes option to make an annotation transparent.

Use No, to give the annotation a solid background of your chosen colour.

When a shape is transparent, the pointer only appears when it is over the line around the shape. To select a transparent annotation, you must click over the line not in the middle of the shape.

Category

Choose the category for an annotation from the list you created with the Categories menu command. The Category panel shows the annotation's current category.

Click the down arrow to display the list box and choose the category you want.

If you have chosen a category which is turned on, the annotation is shown on the chart. If the category is turned off, the annotation disappears when you deselect it.

If this is a Multiple Shape Details dialog there will be extra buttons:

Text for moving to the Text Details dialog.

Pictures for moving to the Picture Details dialog.

If the annotation is an auto annotation there will also be a Filter button to allow editing of the filter.


Import Picture dialog

This dialog is displayed after you have defined a frame in which to insert a picture, using the Import Picture menu command. It is also displayed if you press the New Filename button on the Picture Details dialog.

Filename

Type in the file name, or use the Browse button to choose a file (WMF or BMP) from the File Selector.

Information

This shows the file size in bytes, and the file format - Standard or Placeable for WMF, and Bitmap for BMP.

Options

You can choose to use the picture from the disk, or to copy it into your project database file (PDB).

You should copy the file into the PDB if you want to keep the project self-contained, for example if you intend to pass a copy of the PDB onto another PowerProject user.

Copy the file into the project database if it is on a floppy disk, or PowerProject may seem slow to respond.

If the file is likely to be updated, you may find it more convenient to keep it on disk.

The Copy into PDB option is not available if your picture file is larger than 32K.


Picture Details dialog

Use this dialog to change the current picture, or to change the scaling method and attachment point for the picture. You can also change the annotation's category. You can display the dialog in three ways:

Double-click on the picture.

Select the picture on the chart and then use the [image] button.

Select the picture and then choose Edit - Details.

Scale

Choose With chart or With histo to scale the picture with the chart or histogram The size of the picture changes if you change the horizontal or vertical scale of the chart via the Scale tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog, or change the size of a histogram window.

Choose No scaling, so that changes to the scale of the chart or changes to the size of the histogram window do not affect the picture.

Attach

Use this option to change the attachment of the picture from a segment to a chart. You can also change the attachment point by dragging the picture on the chart, and using the appropriate pointer shape to attach it to either the chart or a segment.

Category

The Category panel shows the picture's current category. Choose the category for the picture from the list you created with the Categories menu command. Click the list box and choose the category you want.

If you have chosen a category which is turned on, the annotation is shown on the chart. If the category is turned off, the annotation disappears when you deselect it.

For example, if you want to hide all the pictures, you could create a category called Pictures and use it for picture annotations. You can then turn pictures on and off using the Categories menu command.

New Filename

You may need to change the filename of a picture file on your chart. For example:

You want to change the picture.

The original file, which was not copied into the project, is in a different place on disk. In this case, you'll find that the frame where the picture should be is blank, because PowerProject has been unable to find the file on the drive or path specified.

Press the New Filename button to go to the Import Picture dialog to provide the correct drive, path or filename.

If this is a Multiple Picture Details dialog there will be extra buttons:

Text for moving to the Text Details dialog.

Shapes for moving to the Shape Details dialog.

If the annotation is an auto annotation there will also be a Filter button to allow editing of the filter.


Annotation Categories dialog

A list of categories is presented when you choose Annotation - Categories. You can add or change the name of categories, and choose the categories to be displayed.

Any categories you create apply within the current project, regardless of whether the annotations are on a chart or a histogram.

Click to locate the cursor, either to change the name of an existing category, or to type in a new category.

Categories which are ticked will be displayed on the chart or histogram. Clear any categories you want to hide.

You can delete a category, but annotations which belonged in that category now have no category. This means you cannot turn them off - they are always displayed on the chart or histogram.

You cannot delete the Default category.

All annotations, of whatever category, can be turned on or off via the Display tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog or the Display tab on the Customise Histogram View dialog, or by using the CTRL V shortcut.


Edit Auto Annotations dialog

Use this dialog to see a list of existing Auto annotation titles. When you click on the title you require the auto annotation you have selected is displayed in the Appearance panel of the dialog. When you have selected an auto annotation title you can:

Click on Delete to remove the auto annotation from all bars or segments.

Click on Edit to go to the Edit Filter dialog to change filter settings.

Click on Undelete Autos to restore any instances of the auto annotation that you previously deleted from a bar or segment using DEL. When you return to the bar chart the annotations are re-displayed and are selected.


Select Bar dialog

This dialog is displayed once you have chosen a bar token using Insert token. Choose whether you want the token to represent a bar from the current project or from a baseline of the current project and choose which bar the token should represent.

Project/Baseline

To make the token represent a bar from the current project, select Project from the Project/Baseline list box. To make the token represent a bar from a baseline project, select a baseline from this list box. Only baselines that are open within the current project are displayed in this list box.

Bar

If you choose This bar from the top of the list, the annotation displays the token for the current bar. If you move the annotation, it displays the token for the new bar. You would normally choose This bar if you intend to replicate the annotation to other bars or segments.

You may want to take information from a specific bar, in which case you can choose the desired bar from the list. If you move the annotation, the token continues to show information from the chosen bar.


Select Segment dialog

This dialog is the same as the Select Bar dialog, with an additional list box for choosing the segment.

Project/Baseline

To make the token represent a segment from the current project, select Project from the Project/Baseline list box. To make the token represent a segment from a baseline project, select a baseline from this list box. Only baselines that are open within the current project are displayed in this list box.

Bar and Segment

If you choose This bar or This Segment from the top of the lists, the annotation displays the token for the current segment. If you move the annotation, it displays the token for the new segment. You would normally choose This bar and This Segment if you intend to replicate the annotation to other bars or segments.

You may want to take information from a specific segment, in which case you can choose the desired segment from the list. If you move the annotation, the token continues to show information from the chosen segment.


Difference tokens

There are two special difference tokens on the Chart Token popup menu, which you can use to show the number of weeks and days between two dates:

Elapsed difference

Working difference

For example, you could display the amount of time between the start of the project and the start of a particular task.

Note: Only the Elapsed Difference token is available from the Histogram Token popup menu.


Elapsed Difference Token

This token shows the elapsed difference - which includes non-working days (holidays and weekends) between two date tokens. You can use this token on charts and histograms. For example, on the bar chart:

1	Locate the text cursor on a bar with a segment and press F9. Choose the Bar list and the Bar current start token for This bar on the Select Bar dialog.

2	Press F9 again and choose the Elapsed Difference token. You can imagine this token as a 'minus' symbol.

3	Now press F9 and choose the Project start token from the Project list.

4	The completed annotation should look like this:

<BAR-CURRENT-START><ELAPDATE><PROJECT-START>.

5	Click on the chart to display the elapsed difference in weeks and days.

The differences are displayed in the format weeks:days.

For example if the difference between the project start and the bar start was fifteen weeks, one and a half days, the annotation would look something like this:

15:1.5

Only the difference is displayed. The bar and project start dates are not displayed.


Working Difference Token

You can use the working difference in the same way as the elapsed difference token, to show the number of working weeks and days between two dates.

The working difference deducts any weekends and holidays to only show the working duration in weeks:days of a period.

Note: This token is not available if you are annotating a histogram.


Select Resource And Graph Time dialog

This dialog is displayed when you have a permanent or consumable resource histogram active, and you have chosen the Graph Value at Specified Time token from the graph tokens using Insert token. Choose which resource and graph the token should represent and specify whether you want the value of the graph at a certain date or at the position of the annotation on the histogram.

Resource

Select the resource you require from the list box. The list box displays all the resources included in the histogram report.

Graph Type

Select a graph type from the list. You can select any of the 12 graph types available for the type of histogram you are annotating, even if you did not include the graph type in the histogram report.

See Permanent Resource Graph Types for a description of the different permanent resource graphs.

See Consumable Resource Graph Types for a description of the different consumable resource graphs.

Time

Use the options in this panel to specify whether you want the token to represent the value of the graph at a specified date or the time at which the annotation's hotspot is positioned.

Use Annotation Hotspot Time

Check this box if you want to use the time at the position you are inserting the annotation. If you move the annotation to a different place on the histogram, the time in the annotation will change to the time at the new position. If you check this box, the Time box below is not available. If you want to use a specific time, clear this box and use the Time box.

Time

Enter a time in this box if you want to use a specific time for the annotation. If you checked Use Annotation Hotspot Time, this option is not available. The default is the time at the position of the annotation.

Related topics

If you selected the Graph Time for Specified Value token, the Select Graph And Value dialog is presented.


Create DDE Link Token dialog

This dialog is presented when you do either of the following:

You choose the DDE Link token when annotating a chart or histogram.

You select a DDE link and click on the Edit button from the DDE Link Editor dialog

Paste Link

Click on this button if you have pasted information from the source program to the Windows Clipboard. Clicking this button uses the information from the Clipboard to complete the fields on this dialog.

Note: This button is only available if DDE link information is currently stored in the Clipboard.

Some source programs do not allow you to paste information for DDE links into a second program by pasting to the Clipboard. Refer to the documentation for the source program to find out whether you can paste link information to the Clipboard.

Server

Enter the name of the source program. If you have pasted information from the Windows Clipboard, using the Paste Link button, the information needed in this field will appear automatically. If you cannot use the Windows Clipboard, refer to the documentation for the source program to find the name you should enter here.

Topic

Enter the topic provided by the source program. For example a filename. If you have pasted information from the Windows Clipboard, the information needed in this field will appear automatically. If you cannot use the Windows Clipboard, refer to the documentation for the source program to find what to enter in this field.

Item

Enter the data you want to be referenced by the DDE link from the source program. Programs have different conventions for the item, for example DDE_1. If you have pasted information from the Windows Clipboard, the information needed in this field will appear automatically. If you cannot use the Windows Clipboard, refer to the documentation for the source program to find out what to enter in this field.

Automatic Link

Check this box if you want the annotation to be updated automatically if the information referenced by the DDE link changes in the source program. This is known as an automatic link. The default is that the box is checked.

Clear the box if you do not want your annotation to be updated automatically. This is known as a manual link. This means that PowerProject does not update the information referenced by the DDE link, until you specify that you want to update it from the DDE Link Editor dialog. You might want to do this if the information referenced by the link changes frequently, but you do not want to see all the changes.

Leaving the dialog

Click on OK to create the token and include the information on your chart or histogram. Click on Cancel to abandon the link.


A source program is the program that contains the data you want to import into PowerProject as a text annotation.


Select Segment And Consumable Resource dialog

This dialog is displayed once you have chosen a Segment - Consumable Resource token using Insert token. Choose the project or baseline, the resource and the segment the token should represent.

Bar - Consumable Resource tokens can only represent data from the current project. If you want to access consumable resource information about baseline bars, open the baseline as a separate project and annotate the baseline chart.

Bar and Segment

If you choose This bar or This Segment from the top of the lists, the annotation displays the token for the current segment. If you move the annotation, it displays the token for the new segment. You would normally choose This bar and This Segment if you intend to replicate the annotation to other bars or segments.

You may want to take information from a specific segment, in which case you can choose the desired segment from the list. If you move the annotation, the token continues to show information from the chosen segment.

Resource

Choose the consumable resource you want the token to represent from the Resource list box. You can select any consumable resource or consumable resource group present in the Resource library.


Select Segment And Permanent Resource dialog

This dialog is displayed once you have chosen a Segment - Permanent Resource token using Insert token. Choose the permanent resource and the segment you want the token to represent.

Bar - Permanent Resource tokens can only represent data from the current project. If you want to access permanent resource information about baseline bars, open the baseline as a  separate project and annotate the baseline chart.

Bar and Segment

If you choose This bar or This Segment from the top of the lists, the annotation displays the token for the current segment. If you move the annotation, it displays the token for the new segment. You would normally choose This bar and This Segment if you intend to replicate the annotation to other bars or segments.

You may want to take information from a specific segment, in which case you can choose the desired segment from the list. If you move the annotation, the token continues to show information from the chosen segment.

Resource

Choose the permanent resource you want the token to represent from the Resource list box. You can select any permanent resource or permanent resource group present in the Resource library.


Select Segment And Cost Centre dialog

This dialog is displayed if you choose the Segment Cost token or a Segment - Fixed Cost token using Insert token. Choose whether you want the token to represent a bar from the current project or from a baseline of the current project and choose which segment and which cost centre the token should represent.

Segment - Fixed Cost tokens can only represent data from the current project. If you want to access fixed cost information about baseline bars, open the baseline as a separate project and annotate the baseline chart.

Project/Baseline

To make the token represent a bar from the current project, select Project from the Project/Baseline list box. To make the token represent a bar from a baseline project, select a baseline from this list box. Only baselines that are open within the current project are displayed in this list box.

Bar and Segment

If you choose This bar or This Segment from the top of the lists, the annotation displays the token for the current segment. If you move the annotation, it displays the token for the new segment. You would normally choose This bar and This Segment if you intend to replicate the annotation to other bars or segments.

You may want to take information from a specific segment, in which case you can choose the desired segment from the list. If you move the annotation, the token continues to show information from the chosen segment.

Cost Centre

Select the cost centre that the token should represent. For example, you may want to see the cost of the segment from the PROJECT cost centre. To specify that the token should represent the total cost of the segment, choose All cost centres.


Select Bar And Consumable Resource dialog

This dialog is displayed once you have chosen a Bar - Consumable Resource token using Insert token. Choose the consumable resource and the bar the token should represent.

Bar - Consumable resource tokens can only represent data from the current project. If you want to access consumable resource information about baseline bars, open the baseline as a separate project and annotate the baseline chart.

Bar

If you choose This bar from the top of the lists, the annotation displays the token for the current bar. If you move the annotation, it displays the token for the new bar. You would normally choose This bar if you intend to replicate the annotation to other bars.

You may want to take information from a specific bar, in which case you can choose the desired bar from the list. If you move the annotation, the token continues to show information from the chosen bar.

Resource

Choose the consumable resource you want the token to represent from the Resource list box. You can select any consumable resource or consumable resource group present in the Resource library.


Select Bar And Permanent Resource dialog

This dialog is displayed once you have chosen a Bar - Permanent Resource token using Insert token. Choose the permanent resource and the bar the token should represent.

Bar - Permanent resource tokens can only represent data from the current project. If you want to access permanent resource information about baseline bars, open the baseline as a separate project  and annotate the baseline chart.

Bar

If you choose This bar from the top of the lists, the annotation displays the token for the current bar. If you move the annotation, it displays the token for the new bar. You would normally choose This bar if you intend to replicate the annotation to other bars.

You may want to take information from a specific bar, in which case you can choose the desired bar from the list. If you move the annotation, the token continues to show information from the chosen bar.

Resource

Choose the permanent resource you want the token to represent from the Resource list box. You can select any permanent resource or permanent resource group present in the Resource library.


Select Bar And Cost Centre dialog

This dialog is displayed if you choose the Bar Cost token or a Bar - Fixed Cost token using Insert token. Choose whether you want the token to represent a bar from the current project or from a baseline of the current project and choose which bar and which cost centre the token should represent.

Bar - Fixed cost tokens can only represent data from the current project. If you want to access fixed cost information about baseline bars, open the baseline as a separate project and annotate the baseline chart.

Project/Baseline

To make the token represent a bar from the current project, select Project from the Project/Baseline list box. To make the token represent a bar from a baseline project, select a baseline from this list box. Only baselines that are open within the current project are displayed in this list box.

Bar

If you choose This bar from the top of the lists, the annotation displays the token for the current bar. If you move the annotation, it displays the token for the new bar. You would normally choose This bar if you intend to replicate the annotation to other bars.

You may want to take information from a specific bar, in which case you can choose the desired bar from the list. If you move the annotation, the token continues to show information from the chosen bar.

Cost Centre

Select the cost centre that the token should represent. For example, you may want to see the cost of the bar from the PROJECT cost centre. To specify that the token should represent the total cost of the bar, choose All cost centres.


Select Resource And Graph Value dialog

This dialog is displayed once you have chosen the Graph time for specified value token from the Graph tokens using Insert token. on a Permanent or Consumable Resource histogram report. Choose which resource and which value the token should represent.

Resource

Select a resource from this list box. The list box contains any resources included in the histogram report.

Graph type

Select a graph from the list box. This list box contains all the graph types available for the type of histogram you are annotating.

Value

Click in the field to locate the cursor and enter a value in this field. The token displays the date at which the graph you selected reaches the value you enter.

Confirm your selections by clicking on OK to return to the histogram and insert the token, or click on Cancel to abandon.


Select Cost Centre And Graph Value dialog

This dialog is displayed once you have chosen the Graph time for specified value token from the Graph tokens using Insert token. on a Cost Centre histogram report. Choose which cost centre and which value the token should represent.

Cost centre

Select a cost centre from this list box. The list box contains any cost centres included in the histogram report.

Graph type

Select a graph from the list box. This list box contains all the graph types available for the type of histogram you are annotating.

Value

Click in the field to locate the cursor and enter a value in this field. The token displays the date at which the graph you selected reaches the value you enter.

Confirm your selections by clicking on OK to return to the histogram and insert the token, or click on Cancel to abandon.


Select Cost Centre And Graph Time dialog

This dialog is displayed once you have chosen the Graph Value at Specified Time token from the graph tokens using Insert token. on a cost centre histogram. Choose which cost centre and graph the token should represent and specify whether you want the token to represent the graph value at a specified date or at the time denoted by the annotation's hotspot.

Cost centre

Select the cost centre you require from the list box. The list box displays all the cost centres included in the histogram report.

Graph Type

Select a graph type from the list. You can select any of the 12 graph types available for the type of histogram you are annotating, even if you did not include the graph type in the histogram report.

See Cost Centre Graph Types for a description of the different cost centre graphs.

Time

Use the options in this panel to specify whether you want the token to represent the value of the graph at a specified date or the time at which the annotation's hotspot is positioned.

Use Annotation Hotspot Time

Check this box if you want to use the time at the position you are inserting the annotation. If you move the annotation to a different place on the histogram, the time in the annotation will change to the time at the new position. If you check this box, the Time box below is not available. If you want to use a specific time, clear this box and use the Time box.

Time

Enter a time in this box if you want to use a specific time for the annotation. If you checked Use Annotation Hotspot Time, this option is not available. The default is the time at the position of the annotation.


Select Project/Baseline dialog

This dialog is displayed if you choose a project token or chart token using Insert token. Using this dialog you can specify whether you want the token selected to represent the current project or a baseline of the current project.

Project/Baseline

To make the token represent the current project, select Project from the Project/Baseline list box. To make the token represent chart or project information from a baseline of the current project, select a baseline from this list box. Only baselines that are open within the current project are displayed in this list box.


Select Resource And Graph dialog

This dialog is displayed once you have chosen the Graph Minimum or Graph Maximum tokens from the graph tokens using Insert token. from a permanent or consumable resource histogram. Choose which resource and graph the token should represent.

Resource

Select the resource you require from the list box. The list box displays all the resources included in the histogram report.

Graph Type

Select a graph type from the list. You can select any of the 12 graph types available for the type of histogram you are annotating, even if you did not include the graph type in the histogram report.

See Permanent Resource Graph Types for a description of the different permanent resource graphs.

See Consumable Resource Graph Types for a description of the different consumable resource graphs.


Select Cost Centre And Graph dialog

This dialog is displayed once you have chosen the Graph Minimum or Graph Maximum token from the graph tokens using Insert token. on a cost centre histogram. Choose which cost centre and graph the token should represent.

Cost centre

Select the cost centre you require from the list box. The list box displays all the cost centres included in the histogram report.

Graph Type

Select a graph type from the list. You can select any of the 12 graph types available for the type of histogram you are annotating, even if you did not include the graph type in the histogram report.

See Cost Centre Graph Types for a description of the different cost centre graphs.


Specifying the decimal places in Real Number tokens

You can assign a real number to each bar and segment in a chart. A real number can have decimal places whereas other numbers that you can assign to bars and segments cannot. To enter real numbers for bars or segments, you must display the Bar User Real Number column or the Segment User Real Number column in the column sheet. You can then enter the real numbers directly into the appropriate column.

By default, real numbers have two decimal places but you can change this by editing the following line in your PPROJECT.INI file:

BarAndSegUserRealDecPlaces=2

The 2 specifies that real numbers have up to two decimal places. Change the 2 to however many decimal places you want to allow for real numbers, e.g.

BarAndSegUserRealDecPlaces=3

Read the notes in Editing PPROJECT.INI before you edit the file.


Working with the bar chart

You will spend most of your time in PowerProject using the bar chart; that's why it's made so easy to use.

The items that you work with on the bar chart are bars, bar titles, segments, links, milestones, annotations and charts. The following topics provide further information.

Using the mouse on the bar chart

Drawing segments

Drawing links

Snapping

Annotations

Selecting

Moving

Copying

Changing segment durations

Completed segments

Opening charts

Using more than one chart

Chart title

Active chart window

Chart boundaries

Window positions

See also

Bar Titles panel

Bar Number column

Date Zone

Status Line


Bar Titles panel

Bar titles are shown in a separate Titles panel on the left of each chart. When the chart is scrolled, the contents of the Titles panel scroll as well. When the chart is panned, the chart passes underneath the Titles panel.

When you click anywhere on this area the Bar Title dialog is presented. Through this you type descriptions of bar lines and set the text appearance.

The Titles panel width can be adjusted by dragging the junction between the Titles panel and the Bar number column, or the bar chart. The pointer changes shape on the junction to a [image]. The width can also be set as a measurement on the Appearance tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog.

The Titles panel can be turned off on the Display of the Customise Barchart View dialog, and directly from the bar chart via the CTRL B shortcut.


Bar Number column

A column of bar line numbers is usually displayed between the Bar Titles pane and the bar chart. (When the column sheet is displayed, the bar numbers column appears down the left-hand edge of the column sheet.)

When the pointer travels across this column it changes shape to [image]. When the pointer is this shape you can click on the numbers in the column to select whole bar lines.

The numbering column can be positioned left or right of the Bar Titles pane, and can be turned off altogether. The numbering can be changed to reflect empty bar lines. The corresponding number can be placed before and after the segments on the bar chart.

All these aspects are controlled on the Appearance tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog.


Date Zone

The date zone is the name of the four (maximum) lines:

Year line

Month line

Day line

Unit line

which display calendar information on charts and histograms.

The setting of your Date Format options and Dates and Numbering options affect the contents of each line. The chart scale and histogram scale will also affect the amount of information it is possible to show.

Each line can be individually turned on or off on the Display tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog or the Display tab of the Customise Histogram View dialog and shortcuts are available.

When a histogram is locked onto a bar chart, only the bar chart date zone is displayed.

A further (inverted) date zone can be included on output at the foot of a chart.


Date Zone - Year line

This line shows a year as either four or two digits, depending on your option, e.g. 1998 or 98.

The shortcut to toggle this line is CTRL Y.


Date Zone - Month line

This line shows months either as numbers, or as text, depending on your option.

The chart scale can cause text names to be truncated. For example, March may appear as Mar or M.

The shortcut to toggle this line is CTRL M.


Date Zone - Day line

This line shows day numbers of each month as either Week Commencing, or Week Ending, depending on your option.

For example, if you choose Week Commencing, the date of the Monday of each week is placed to the right of the divisions. If you choose Week Ending, the Sunday of each week is placed to the left of the divisions.

The position of week boundaries can be affected by other options. With:

Annual unit type, the weeks always start on a Monday.

Sequential unit type, the day of the week on which boundaries occur depends on the Project start date.

At a sufficiently large scale individual days are also marked, and eventually each day is numbered.

The shortcut to toggle this line is CTRL D.


Date Zone - Unit line

This line shows time division numbers in a range of formats depending on your option.

The unit type and the date zone format preferences can be set to affect the unit line contents.

The shortcut to toggle this line is CTRL U.


Create New Chart dialog

This dialog is presented after choosing the Task - Expand menu, or double-clicking on a segment, and the bar line has no title.

Complete the dialog by specifying a title for the new chart.

This dialog also appears when you indent a chart in the Chart Manager. Indenting charts moves the selected chart, and any other charts in the same branch of the tree, inwards one level in the hierarchy. The chart you select to indent is replaced by a new chart. If you indent the root chart, all the charts in the hierarchy are indented one level and the title of the new root chart becomes the project title.


Status line

The status line gives title, date and time information as you move the pointer, or select items. When chart windows are open the status line is displayed on the desktop.

The status line displays information about the active chart; if no charts are open, the status line is not displayed. You can move the status line to maximise the working area available on the screen.

You can edit segments via the status line.

Status line display

When the pointer is inside the active chart the Date and Time Unit panels show the date and time unit corresponding to the current pointer position.

When you select an item on the chart, the Start, Duration and End panels display time information on the selected item.

When you select a bar or segment, the Bar Title panel displays the bar's title.

When you select a baseline bar on the current chart, information about them is displayed in the status line.

When you draw on the chart, all the status line panels display information. This shows you, in numbers and dates, what is happening on the screen.

For more details see Status line parts.


Status line parts

The status line is made up of six panels, all of which are useful at different times.

Bar title

The Bar Title panel is only active when a bar or segment is selected, or in the process of being drawn. Approximately half of the bar title is displayed.

The bar title can be edited by clicking on this panel. The Select Title Appearance dialog is presented.

The bar title and title appearance can also be changed directly on the bar chart by clicking the Bar Titles panel, and on the Bar tab of the Details dialog.

Time Unit

The time unit you are working in is displayed in the top of the panel.

You can change the time unit of the chart by clicking on the top of the time unit panel and selecting the unit you want from the popup menu that appears.

You can also change the time unit using the Chart - Time Unit menu command.

The time unit corresponding to the current pointer position is always shown in the bottom of the panel, while the pointer is over the chart. It is blank when the pointer is outside the chart.

Date

The date corresponding to the current pointer position is always shown while the pointer is over a chart.

The date display is affected by your options. However, the am/pm prefix/suffix is only displayed when working in a time unit of half days and then the year is only displayed as 2 digits.

Start

The start time unit panel is only active when a bar, segment or link is selected, -or in the process of being drawn. The start panel displays the time unit (in the current time unit) of the selected item's start.

Duration

The Duration panel is only active when a bar, segment or link is selected or is in the process of being drawn. It displays the working duration: the number of time units (in the current time unit) of the selected item without any weekend or holiday periods included.

The Duration panel always shows the working duration of an item.

If a segment is selected the segment duration is displayed. If a bar is selected the sum of all the segment durations is displayed.

If a link is selected the amount by which the link slopes (possibly negative) is displayed.

If a segment has modelled resource assignments on it, the maximum working duration (that is the duration of the resource that works for the longest time on the segment) is displayed.

End

The end time unit panel is only active when a bar, segment or link is selected, -or in the process of being drawn. The end panel displays the time unit (in the current time unit) of the selected item's end.


Editing on the status line

The status line can be used to change, as well as display, information. The function of most panels of the status line can affect the appearance of a chart. Editing through the status line is used mainly for fine adjustment of dates and times.

Adjusting the start or end of a segment

Once a segment is selected you can adjust the start or end time by the Left and Right arrows. You may want to move or adjust a segment if it does not start on the day you intended. To do this click, or press, on an arrow to change the Start or End time. When you release, the chart is updated to reflect the new value you have just entered. This changes the start or end time of the segment and changes its duration.

If you are adjusting the start or end of a segment that has resources assigned, PowerProject displays a Resource assignment popup window, which contains information about all the resources assigned to the segment. The window is displayed as long as the Left or Right arrow button is selected. Because changing the segment duration may affect the length of time a resource works on a segment, PowerProject updates the information in this window as you change the segment duration using the status line.

Adjusting duration-driven segments

If a segment has no modelled resource assignments, PowerProject repositions the start or end of the segment taking into account only the task calendar. This means that you can move the start or end of a segment to a time when the task is available but the resource is not. This is because the segment is totally duration-driven, so work on the task can continue even if the resource is unavailable.

Adjusting resource-driven segments

If a segment has at least one resource-driven resource assignment however, PowerProject takes into account both the resource and the task calendars when positioning the start and end of a segment. This means that the task cannot start or end during periods where all the resources or the task are unavailable. This is because the segment has resource-driven assignments on it. Specifying a resource-driven assignment means that you want the resource assignment to have some effect on the segment duration and want to ensure that the resource always has enough time to complete its work on the segment.

If you decide that you do not want to change the segment duration, you can return it to its original duration by pressing ESC while the Left or Right arrow is still selected.

Note the following restrictions when adjusting the start or end of a segment:

Owning segments - which contain subordinate segments - cannot be changed. They take their location and duration from a summary of the subordinate segments.

You cannot adjust the start or end of a summary bar segment. A summary bar takes its duration and position from the bars within its summary group.

A segment's duration can be reduced to 1, but no further. If you want the segment to be a milestone drag it to zero on the bar chart or use the Task - Make Milestone menu command.

You can turn a milestone back into a segment, by clicking on an arrow to change the Start or End time.

If a segment duration is changed and the segment has links attached, the links are re-positioned by scaling.

Moving segments using the status line

You can move a selected segment bodily by CTRL-clicking on the Left or Right arrow of the Start and End panels. This moves the segment in that direction without affecting the duration shown in the Duration panel of the status line.

If you have more than one segment on a bar, editing will push other segments along.


Status line positioning

The status line can be repositioned on the screen, for example you may prefer to see it at the top of the screen, below the menu bar.

Position the pointer on the status line and drag it to where you want. Only an outline of the status line moves, to be re-drawn in the new position.

There are four possible positions for the status line.

At the top of the PowerProject window with both lines showing.

At the top of the PowerProject window with the top line hidden under the menu line - this maximises the working screen area.

At the bottom of the PowerProject window with both lines showing.

At the bottom of the PowerProject window with the top line turned off - to maximise the working screen area.

Wherever you release while dragging the outline, the status line will appear at the nearest location.


Chart title

The title of a chart is displayed in the window title bar. The title is taken from the title you give to the owning bar. For the root chart the project title is used.

To ensure that a chart has a sensible title, the title of the owning bar must contain at least one letter and cannot be made up of just spaces.

To help you navigate complex trees of charts, PowerProject displays the title of subcharts as a chart path.

For example, the title of a chart called Basement, owned by a bar called Pack and move, is displayed as Pack and move > Basement. If there is not enough room for the full title, PowerProject truncates the path, but always displays the > symbol to show that there is a chart above the current one.


Active chart

When you have more than one chart window open, only one window is active at one time. The active chart is the one which is topped and has all the features of the window frame.

This means that you can only work on the active chart, although changes which affect other charts in view can be seen.

All Chart, Bar and Edit menu commands and the status line apply to the active window. The only exception is when closing or saving a chart with X-chart links assigned.

When you transfer information between windows - drawing a link, moving or copying bars - the direction of transfer must be from the active window to an inactive one.

If chart windows are open from two different projects, topping a chart window changes the active project.


Selecting

There are various operations that can be carried out on items on the chart: bars, segments and links, such as moving, copying, deleting, inserting or changing details (editing). To identify the item(s) to work on, you must first select it.

Clicking on an item first deselects everything and then selects that item. You can deselect everything and not select an item by clicking on an empty area of the chart.

CTRL-clicking on an item alternates its selection state - it selects the item if it was not selected, and deselects it if it was - without affecting the selection state of any other item. CTRL-clicking can be used to select more than one item at a time, or to deselect a single item from a group of selected items.

You can also select a group of bars and segments using selection criteria on the Search & Select dialog.

With an item or items selected, you can use the Edit - Details command if you want to make changes to individual bars, or choose Edit - Multi Edit to make global changes to a group of bars. Single bar lines can be inserted. Blocks of items can be moved, copied and deleted.

Related Topics

Selecting bars and segments

Selecting links


Selecting bars and segments

To select a segment move the pointer to the segment and click. A selected segment is shown highlighted.

To select a bar, select a segment and choose the Edit - Select menu command. A selected bar is shown with its title and segments highlighted.

The most direct way to select a whole bar is to click when the pointer is located over the bar number column and is shaped [image].

The keyboard shortcut for selecting a bar is to SHIFT-click on any of the bar's segments, or on the bar title.

The most direct way to select a further bar - to form a group - is to click or drag the [image] shaped pointer over the bar number column. The original and new bars are selected.

The keyboard shortcut to select a group is to CTRL SHIFT-click on the other bar(s).

To select every bar in the chart use the Edit - Select All menu command. This command simplifies copying, moving and deleting whole charts.

To select a group of bars and segments according to a selection criteria, use Edit - Search & Select menu command.


Selecting links

To select a link, click on the start, or end, of the link.

If more than one link starts, or ends, at this position the Link Selector is presented. Through this you can choose which link of the group to select.

A selected link is drawn in a different colour on a colour monitor (the exact colour depends on your monitor, usually it is green) and as a thick line on a monochrome monitor. Similarly, selected X-chart links are drawn in a different colour or thickened, depending on your monitor.


Moving

You can move items from one part of a chart to another, and from one chart to another and from one project to another. The items are removed from the original location. For more information, click on a topic below:

Moving segments

Moving bars

Moving links

Effects of moving

Moving between charts

Copying


Moving links

Links cannot be moved. They must be deleted and re-drawn.


Moving segments

A segment can be moved horizontally along the same bar line. The order of segments cannot be changed, but an earlier or later segment of the same bar will be pushed along by moving one segment.

You can move a segment on the chart, or on the status line.

To move a segment horizontally on the chart, position the pointer near the centre of the segment you wish to move - when the pointer is shaped [image] - and drag left or right. A status box pops up, showing the changing start and end dates as you move the segment. An outline of the segment also appears, showing you the new segment position. When you release, the segment snaps onto the nearest time unit boundary - just like drawing a segment.

If you move a segment by editing the Start and End panels on the Status Line it does not snap and the popup status box does not appear. The segment is moved regardless of the position of the nearest time unit boundary.

Owning segments, which contain subordinate segments, cannot be moved - they take their location and duration from the subordinate segments. Similarly, summary bar segments cannot be moved - they take their location and duration from the bars within their summary group.

When you drag a segment beyond the area currently shown in the chart window, the window will scroll automatically to keep the segment in view.

You can prevent popup boxes from appearing when you draw, move, size and mark progress on segments. To turn these popups off, deselect the appropriate options on the General tab of the Options dialog.


Moving bars

You can move a bar, or group of bars from one part of a chart to another. You can also move bars between charts in different windows, and even between projects.

This section describes the unique PowerProject techniques for moving bars. You can also move bars by cutting and then pasting to a new location.

Individual bars, or groups of bars can be moved:

Vertically - to rearrange the order of bars.

Horizontally - to reposition all the segments in time.

Moved bars are removed from their original position.

To move bars:

1	Select the bar(s) you wish to move

2	Position the pointer over the centre of one of the selected segments.

3	Drag to move the bar(s). The cursor changes shape to a hand pointer [image] and an outline of the selected bar follows the mouse movement.

If all the selected bars become deselected, you have located the pointer too close to the edge of the segment, and PowerProject has interpreted the action as drawing a link. Before dragging, check that the pointer is in the centre of the segment.

SHIFT-drag is a shortcut for selecting a bar and then dragging it to move.

4	Position the bar outline at the location in the chart you require. A status box pops up showing the changing start and end date as you move the bar(s).

5	To complete the move, locate the pointer at the destination. Drag the outline to position the pointer (vertically) where you require the bar(s), and locate it (horizontally) at the time unit you want -shown on the status line. Release when the outline is in position.

When you move bars vertically, they are inserted above the bar at the final pointer position. The moved bars remain selected after the action. To move to the end of the chart, position the pointer below the last bar of the chart.

You can also move bars by Cutting and Pasting.

When you drag a segment beyond the area currently shown in the chart window, the window will scroll automatically to keep the segment in view.

You can prevent popup boxes from appearing when you draw, move, size and mark progress on segments. To turn these popups off, deselect the appropriate options on the General tab of the Options dialog.


Effects of moving

Depending on the circumstances, there can be a number of additional effects when you move bar(s).

Remember the following points:

When moving a group of bars vertically, even if the group of selected bars were dispersed on the chart, they are grouped together at the new position. Moving a group of dispersed bars horizontally on the chart leaves the bars in their original positions.

All links on a moved bar, or group of bars, are also moved when moving within the same chart.

The dates of any start flags are not affected by a move.

Owning bars can only be moved up and down within the same chart. You cannot move them horizontally, as the dates and duration of the bar depend on the segments in the subordinate charts. This also applies to summary bars.


Moving between charts

If more than one window is open, you can move bars from one window to another. The windows may contain the same chart, different charts or different projects.

The techniques for moving are the same as for moving in a single window.

Different projects

When moving charts between different projects first transfer any codes, resources and calendars that are assigned to bars via Admin - PDB Transfer.

If bars are moved into a chart which has a calendar other than SYSTEM assigned to the owning bar, and some of the bars being moved have a different calendar from the owning bar's, then the calendar of the bars being moved are re-set to the owning bar's. An alert is presented.

If a bar refers to an item that does not exist in the destination project an alert is presented. Any non-existent resources are removed, any non-existent codes are replaced by the default and any non-existent calendars are replaced by the SYSTEM calendar.

When moving bar(s) between different projects, any links (local or X-chart) to bars outside the moved bar(s) will be lost, as it is not possible to link segments in different projects. The effect is as if a copy had been carried out.

Different charts in the same project

When moving bar(s) between different charts of the same project:

Any local links from members of the moved group to other bars are converted into X-chart links. Thus the logic of these links is preserved across chart boundaries. However, if the source chart is abandoned before either chart is saved, the X-chart links are lost, and the effect is as if a copy had been carried out.

If a bar with X-chart links is moved from one chart to another, the X-chart links are not moved and are lost. An alert is presented.

When both ends of a link are moved to the same chart a X-chart link is converted into a local link and the logic is preserved.


Copying

You can copy items from one part of a chart to another, and from one chart to another and from one project to another. Identical items are placed at the target location.

Note: You cannot copy individual segments.

Related Topics

Copying bars

Effects of copying

Copying between charts

Move


Copying bars

You can copy a bar, or group of bars from one part of a chart to another. You can also copy bars between charts in different windows, and even between projects. Copying creates additional bar lines on your chart.

This section describes the unique PowerProject techniques for copying bars. You can also copy bars by copying and then pasting to a new location.

Individual bars, or groups of bars can be copied vertically

To copy bars:

1	Select the bar(s) you wish to copy.

2	Position the pointer over the centre of one of the selected segments.

3	While holding down CTRL, drag to copy the bar(s) and obtain the hand pointer [image] and an outline of the selected bar under the pointer. Once the outline of the bar has appeared, you can release CTRL as it no longer has an effect.

If all the selected bars become deselected, you have located the pointer too close to the edge of the segment, and PowerProject has interpreted the action as drawing a link. Before dragging, check that the pointer is in the centre of the segment.

SHIFT CTRL-drag is a shortcut for selecting a bar and then dragging it to copy.

4	Position the bar outline at the location in the chart you require. As you drag the bar, a status box pops up to show you the start and end dates of the bar you're copying. When you have several bars or segments selected, the status box shows the start and end date of the segment under the mouse pointer.

5	To complete the copy, locate the pointer at the destination. Drag the outline to position the pointer (vertically) where you require the bar(s), and locate it (horizontally) at the time unit you want - shown on the status line. Release when the outline is in position.

When you copy bars vertically, they are inserted above the bar at the final pointer position. The copied bars remain selected after the action. To copy to the end of the chart, position the pointer below the last bar of the chart.

You can also copy bars using Copy and Paste.

You can prevent popup boxes from appearing when you draw, move, size and mark progress on segments. To turn these popups off, deselect the appropriate options on the General tab of the Options dialog.


Effects of copying

Depending on the circumstances, there can be a number of additional effects when you copy bar(s).

Remember the following points:

When copying a group of bars vertically, even if the group of selected bars were dispersed on the chart, they are grouped together at the new position. Moving a group of dispersed bars horizontally does not group the bars together at the new postion.

Links on a copied bar may not be copied. When you copy a group of bars, any links between members of the group are copied. Links to other bars which are not part of the group will not be copied. Copying a single bar never copies any links.

If the number of bars in a group, plus the number of bars in the chart are greater than the maximum number of bars in a chart, the bars are not copied.

The dates of any start flags are not affected by a copy.

Owning bars which are copied are converted to normal bars - no subordinate bars are copied.

After copying bars, only the copied items are selected - the original bars are not selected. This means that you can easily delete them if the copy is incorrect.


Copying between charts

If more than one window is open, you can copy bars from one window to another. The windows may contain the same chart, different charts or different projects.

The techniques for copying are the same as for copying in a single window.

Different projects

When copying charts between different projects first transfer any codes, resources and calendars that are assigned to bars via Admin - PDB Transfer.

If bars are copied into a chart which has a calendar other than SYSTEM assigned to the owning bar, and some of the bars being copied have a different calendar from the owning bar's, then the calendar of the bars being or copied are re-set to the owning bar's.

If a bar refers to an item that does not exist in the destination project an alert is presented. If the copy proceeds any reference to a non-existent resource is removed, any non-existent codes are replaced by the default and any non-existent calendars are replaced by the SYSTEM calendar.


Using the mouse on the bar chart

When you use the bar chart you work with the mouse and items on the chart, to tell PowerProject what to do.

This involves mouse actions inside the window on the bar chart, and moving the window view to control what you see.

Becoming familiar and fluent with these aspects is the key to productivity with PowerProject.


Mouse actions on the chart

What happens next depends on where you are on the screen (actually the pointer symbol), and what you do with the mouse. For example, if the pointer is on a segment and you

Click - the segment is selected [image].

Drag - the segment moves [image].

Double-click - the segment is expanded into another chart.

SHIFT-click - the bar is selected [image].

CTRL SHIFT-click - this bar is selected in addition to any other selected items.

ALT-click - the Segment tab on the Details dialog is presented. If you ALT-click on a baseline segment the Segment tab displays details about the baseline segment.

You can also use a particular mouse technique to assign progress to a segment. For details of this technique see Assigning progress to segments.


Moving the window view

Every bar chart is contained within a chart window. Unless you have a very simple plan, your bar chart will quickly extend beyond the area visible in the chart window. When your bar chart is larger than the chart window, you can scroll around the chart window to bring different areas of the bar chart into view.

The chart window can be changed in size and moved around, using window features. To scroll around your bar chart you can use any of the following techniques:

Click on the up and down cursor keys or the arrow buttons at either end of the vertical scroll bar to move the chart view vertically by one bar at a time.

Click on the left and right cursor keys or the arrow buttons at either end of the horizontal scroll bar to move the chart view by about 2 centimetres at a time.

Click on either side of the scroll box in the vertical scroll bar to move the chart view up or down by a full screen. The PGUP and PGDN keys are shortcuts for this.

Click on either side of the scroll box in the horizontal scroll bar to move the chart view by one full screen to the left or right.

Drag the scroll box in either the vertical or horizontal scroll bar to bring any area of the chart into view. When you drag a scroll box, a popup may appear showing the current chart view in relation to the whole chart. When dragging the vertical scroll box, the popup displays the title of the bar that will be at the top of the screen when you stop dragging; when dragging the horizontal scroll box, the popup displays the date that will be at the left of the chart window when you stop dragging. You can turn this popup on or off by checking or clearing the Scroll option in the Bar Chart Popups group box on the General tab of the Options dialog.

There are several keyboard shortcuts to help you scroll around the chart window without using the mouse. For a full list of the shortcuts available, see Window features shortcuts.


Drawing

With PowerProject the basic actions of creating segments and links are done by simply drawing the items directly on the screen.

PowerProject knows what type of item - segment, or link - you want to create, from where the pointer is located. To draw an item on the chart:

1	Position the pointer where you want the item to start (use the status line to help locate the pointer accurately) and drag. As you drag, the item grows from the original pointer position.

2	When you want the item to end, position the pointer and release. The item is drawn in its final position and selected.

If you drag the pointer beyond the area currently shown in the chart window, the window will scroll automatically to keep the pointer in view.

Using the mouse on the bar chart is the key to creating and editing schedules in PowerProject.

Drawing segments is the first operation, although lines can be blank or contain only a title. Segments cross holidays and can be converted into milestones, although there are some restrictions.

Once segments have been created they can be linked together. You can draw links between different charts - where you have big charts, or to coordinate your project.


Drawing segments

Each line on the chart is a bar line or bar. You can draw a segment anywhere on the chart, except in the Titles panel or the column sheet. You can create more than one segment on a bar line.

To draw a segment:

Position the pointer on a blank part of the chart and drag to the left (to fix the end date and set the start), or right (to fix the start and set the end). As you drag, a status box pops up showing you the segment duration and its start or end date. Up and down movement has no effect.

When you are creating a segment, the pointer is shaped [image]. The longer you draw the segment symbol, the more time the segment takes to carry out.

To create another segment on the same line, simply draw another segment on a blank part of the bar line.

The start and end dates of a segment are not too important, as you can set the optimum times after a reschedule.

When drawing a segment, if you drag the pointer beyond the area shown in the chart window, the window will scroll automatically to keep the pointer and the segment in view.

You can prevent popup boxes from appearing when you draw, move, size and mark progress on segments. To turn these popups off, deselect the appropriate options on the General tab of the Options dialog.


Drawing across holidays and weekends

When drawing a segment across holidays, or weekends, the duration of the segment is affected by the non-working time and the current time unit.

The start and end date is adjusted to take account of weekends and holidays.

When the time unit is Weeks or Fortnights, the weekends are already included in the duration.


Drawing restrictions

There are certain locations in a chart where PowerProject does not allow you to draw a segment. You cannot draw a segment if:

A segment already exists at the pointer location.

You are trying to insert a segment into a gap between the start of a segment and the beginning of the project, or into a gap between the end of one segment and the start of another where the amount of workable time in that gap is less than one current time unit.

The bar already contains an expanded segment.

A bar already contains the maximum number of segments.


Creating blank lines and sub-headings

You do not need to draw a segment on every line of the chart.

You can leave blank lines - to improve the layout and legibility of the chart.

Enter only a bar title - to create headings and sub-headings.


Creating milestones

A segment with a duration of zero can be used to highlight important parts of a project. These type of segments are called milestones.

You cannot draw a milestone directly on the screen, instead you draw a segment, then convert it into a milestone.

You can drag the start or end of a selected segment, so that the duration is zero - creating a milestone.

You can have a single milestone, more than one milestone, or a mixture of ordinary segments and milestones on a bar.

Once you have created a milestone you can treat it like any other segment - for example you can add links and start flags or move it.

You cannot drag a milestone back to a normal segment. If you increase the duration of a selected milestone on the status line you can convert a milestone to a segment.


Drawing links

You can draw a link anywhere on a segment. A segment must exist before you can draw a link.

When you are creating a link, the pointer is shaped [image].

A link starts and ends on segments and the direction of the link is also important in defining the sequence of operations.

When drawing a link, if you drag the pointer beyond the area shown in the chart window, the window will scroll automatically to keep the pointer and the link in view. If you are drawing a link between segments in different windows, drag the link quickly from one window to the other to avoid the first window autoscrolling to the end of its chart.


Link start

To start to draw a link, position the centre of the pointer on the top or bottom edge of a segment (use the status line to help accurately locate the pointer) and drag. A link grows from the original position and is attached to the end of the pointer.

You can move the link around the chart to position it to end wherever you like. The link remains attached to the pointer as long as you continue dragging. You cannot take the link outside the visible chart area. To connect widely dispersed segments you need to open two chart windows with the target and source segments visible in each.


Link end

To end a link, position the pointer anywhere on another segment and release. The link is drawn in its final position.

A link must end on a normal (not owning or summary) segment, or milestone. If you release while drawing a link and the pointer is not on a segment or milestone, the link disappears.

A link is the means of tying your plan together logically. The portion of the segment before the start of the link must be carried out, before commencing the portion of the segment the link ends on.

The amount by which the link slopes is shown in the status line Duration panel.

You can have as many links on a segment as you wish. You can have up to 10,000 links in a single chart, depending on the amount of memory in your computer.


Link direction

Links can pass down and up the chart.

The direction of link defines the order in which the linked segments can be carried out.

It is more efficient for the PowerProject reschedule if you organise your links to pass down the chart.


Drawing links between charts

You can draw a local link between segments in the same chart in one window or in different windows - when the segments you want to link cannot fit onto the screen.

You can draw a X-chart link between different charts in different windows.


Drawing local links between charts

You can open the same chart in two windows when the segments you want to link together are widely separated - and cannot fit onto the same screen, no matter how large the window.

The link is still on the same chart so it is a local link.

Drawing a link between two windows of the same chart is exactly the same as drawing a link in one window. The link is shown correctly in each chart.

When drawing a link between segments in different windows, drag the link quickly from one window to the other to avoid the first window autoscrolling to the end of its chart.


Drawing X-chart links

You open different charts in different windows when you want to link charts into a whole, coordinated project. Links connecting segments in different charts are X-chart links.

Drawing a link between different charts is exactly the same as drawing a link in one window.

The only difference occurs at the moment you release the link - to set its end position. The start and end positions of the X-chart link are marked on the segment with the X-chart link symbol [image].

On the owning chart, where the branches in the tree of charts meet, a reflected link is drawn after a chart is saved - to show how the two chart branches are connected.

To see the details of a X-chart link, select the link and choose the Edit - Details menu command. The Link tab on the Details dialog is presented.

When drawing a link between segments in different windows, drag the link quickly from one window to the other to avoid the first window autoscrolling to the end of its chart.


Snapping

When you draw a segment or link on the bar chart, the drawing starts from where the pointer is at the time. The drawing ends at the final pointer position. The status line shows date and time unit information, while the drawing is in progress.

You can start or finish drawing anywhere on the chart. However, the start or end of the item being drawn snaps onto the earliest time unit boundary.

PowerProject uses this method so that you can afford to be inaccurate with the pointer, but still draw accurate and consistent schedules.

This can have a dramatic visual effect when the bar chart is displayed in large scale. Changing the chart time unit affects the degree of snapping.

Snapping affects segment creation, link creation and moving/copying.


Segment snapping

You can draw a segment with the start and end somewhere between time unit boundaries.

When you release, the segment is re-drawn onto the nearest left hand (earliest) time unit boundary.


Link snapping

The same snapping action happens when you draw a link between segments. If you draw a link which starts somewhere between two time unit boundaries, the start of the link automatically snaps onto the earliest time unit boundary.

When you release, the link is snapped onto the earliest time unit boundary.

Note: You can see every time unit boundary by using the Grid tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog to set a grid to be displayed every 1 work unit.


Move/copy and snapping

If a segment starts in the middle of a week and is moved across the chart, it starts at the next week boundary. If the segment is moved by editing on the status line it starts in the middle of the next week.

When you move or copy bar(s) they snap to the nearest time unit boundary. It could be important to change to a small time unit before moving or copying.


Changing task durations

Once a segment has been created you can change the duration of the segment in two ways:

By dragging when the pointer changes shape for the; start [image], or end [image] of the segment.

Via the status line Start and End panels.

On segments with modelled resource assignments, the pointer changes to [image], [image], or [image] when you move the pointer over the segment.

There are a few minor restrictions to changing segment durations, and special attention should be paid to segments with links when changing the duration.

Segments with resources assigned

If you are adjusting the start or end of a segment that has resources assigned, PowerProject displays a Resource assignment popup window, which contains information about all the resources assigned to the segment. The window is displayed as long as you are resizing the segment using the pointer. Because changing the segment duration may affect the length of time a resource works on a segment, PowerProject updates any information about the resource assignment in this window as you resize the segment.

Adjusting duration-driven segments

If a segment has no modelled resource assignments, PowerProject repositions the start or end of the segment taking into account only the task calendar. This means that you can move the start or end of a segment to a time when the task is available but the resource is not. This is because the segment is totally duration-driven, so work on the task can continue even if the resource is unavailable.

Adjusting resource-driven segments

If a segment has at least one resource-driven resource assignment however, PowerProject takes into account both the resource and the task calendars when positioning the start and end of a segment. This means that the task cannot start or end during periods where all the resources or the task are unavailable. This is because the segment has resource-driven assignments on it. Specifying a resource-driven assignment means that you want the resource assignment to have some effect on the segment duration and want to ensure that the resource always has enough time to complete its work on the segment.

If you decide that you do not want to change the segment duration, you can return it to its original duration by pressing SHIFT before releasing the mouse button to complete the resizing.

Note: If a segment has only fixed resource assignments or a combination of fixed and non-modelled resource assignments on it, you cannot resize the segment duration on the bar chart. This is because the segment duration is set by the longest fixed resource assignment duration on that segment. As you drag the end of the segment, the assignment information in the popup window remains constant and the segment duration returns to its original duration when you release the pointer.


Editing tasks with links

If a segment duration is changed and the segment has links attached, the links are re-positioned by scaling.

The link position is computed by the ratio of the new to the old time from the start of the segment.

Rounding errors can be introduced.

Links which are attached to the start and end of a segment are always correct.

You should check that the link positions are correct after scaling.

If links are attached to segments that have one or more modelled resource assignments on them, PowerProject uses the task calendar and a calendar of one of the modelled resources when re-positioning links. You can specify which resource calendar you want PowerProject to use from the Link Resource dialog.

Reducing segment duration day by day with links which start or end in the body of the segment, can mean the link positions are different from reducing the segment duration in large steps.

If you want to change a segment duration, for example from 12 weeks to 4 weeks, changing the duration from 12 to 4 is more accurate than changing it by 8 one week steps.


Segment editing restrictions

The following lists the only limitations to editing items on the chart.

Segments cannot overlap any other segment.

Expanded bars and summary bars cannot be changed.

Milestones once created can only be converted back to a segment via the status line.


Assigning progress to tasks

As your project is carried out, the segments change from not started, through a percentage completed, to completed. You need to update PowerProject to keep your charts up to date with the current progress.

When you draw a new segment it is always uncompleted (unless a later segment of the same bar is set to be completed).

An uncompleted segment can be changed to a partially completed or completed one, in any of the following ways:

selecting the segment then using the Task - Enter Progress command to enter the progress on the Enter Progress dialog.

selecting the segment then using the Task - Progress Up-To-Date command to mark the segment as being completed up to a specific date using the Progress Up-To-Date dialog.

ensuring that progress shading is turned on, then positioning the mouse pointer at the left-hand end of the segment so that the cursor changes shape to [image] then dragging the cursor along the segment. You can use the left and right cursor keys to add or remove half days of progress. Release the mouse button when you have assigned the amount of progress you wanted. (You can turn progress shading on and off via the Display tab on the Customise Barchart Appearance dialog, or by pressing CTRL P.)

On the chart, PowerProject uses a thick dark line along the top of the segment to mark how much of the segment is completed [image]. It can also draw a progress line to mark the chart report date. Once you have updated the progress for all bars, you can reschedule to see how the progress affects the chart.

Depending on your preferences, a popup box may appear when you assign progress to a segment by dragging the mouse pointer along it. The popup box displays information including the amount of progress you are marking on the segment. To turn the popup box on or off, display the General tab of the Options dialog and check or clear the Progress option in the Bar Chart Popups group box.

Note: You can assign progress to more than one segment by using the Enter Progress dialog or the Progress Up-To-Date dialog. You can only assign progress to one segment at a time when you use the mouse technique.


Using more than one chart

So far you have discovered how to use the bar chart features of PowerProject on one chart. PowerProject really comes into its own when you use more than one chart.

You can have several different views of your project in different windows at the same time.

All the features of bar chart creation are available in each window.

You can change the size and position of the windows to see as much or as little of each chart as you wish.

Each chart can be shown with different: scales, grids, appearance, display, columns and details.

You can have more than one view on a single chart, or views of different charts from the same or different projects.


Multiple views of one chart

You can open the same chart in two or more different windows.

This allows you to draw links between widely separated bars in the same chart.

You can move and copy bars between different parts of the same chart.

You can see the same chart displayed differently in each window.

When the same chart is shown in more than one window, an action - for example selecting a bar or drawing a link - is shown in all the windows.


Multiple views of different charts

You can see different charts of the same project in different windows. This allows you to draw links between different bars in different charts.

You can rapidly and easily create an interconnected series of charts - by X-chart links - to form a coordinated project.

You can move and copy bars between different charts.

Changing the chart boundaries in one chart may affect the appearance of another chart. This change is shown in all affected charts, after the chart is saved.

Charts from different projects

You can see charts from different projects in different windows. This enables you to move and copy bars between different projects.


Opening charts

A new window is opened for a chart when you choose the Chart - Open menu command. This allows you to choose any chart for viewing or editing.

To see charts in different windows, simply repeat the Chart - Open command.

When the project is organised as a tree of charts, you can step up or step down the tree one branch at a time, directly from the bar chart. A different chart is displayed in the same window.

You can also expand a segment  to create a new chart directly on the bar chart.


Stepping up the tree of charts

Stepping up the tree of charts saves any changes to the current chart.

If the chart you are viewing is part of a tree, you can step up the tree to see the parent chart in the same window by clicking on the window step up button [image] in the top left corner of the window frame.

You can only step up the tree if you have sufficient chart scope, or if you are not already on the root chart. In these situations the step up button is not displayed and you can only close the window.

You may be restricted in your access to charts by your chart scope.


Stepping down the tree of charts

Stepping down the tree of charts saves any changes to the current chart.

If the chart you are viewing has expanded bars you can step down the tree to see the child chart in the same window by doing either of the following:

Double-clicking on the expanded bar

Selecting it and choosing the Task - Expand menu command.

You may be restricted in your access to charts by your chart scope.


Expanding a task

Only a bar with a single segment can be expanded into a subordinate chart. To create a new subordinate chart:

1	Select the segment you wish to expand and choose the Task - Expand menu command.

2	Double-clicking on the segment has the same effect.

If the bar has no title you will be prompted for one.


Chart boundaries

On a chart the boundaries of the owning bar are shown by shaded areas. This gives you information, at a glance, on what dates have been allocated to the owning bar of this chart.

You can draw segments which go into this shaded area and breach the chart boundaries - both start and end boundaries.

No segment can be drawn before the project start.

No segment may finish later than 44 years after the project start.

When you draw segments in the shaded area they will affect the owning bar on the parent chart, after the chart is saved. If you have the parent chart open at the same time, you can see the change to the owning bar, and maybe the project end.

The first time you enter a new chart, the boundaries are taken as the start and end of the owning bar. After you have added some segments to a new chart, the chart boundaries are taken from the earliest and latest segment on the chart. The new chart boundaries affect the owning bar's dates and duration, after the chart is saved.

On first starting a project, the boundaries of the root chart meet to show a fully shaded chart. The project start and end dates are the same, until you add some segments. The project end date is taken as the end boundary of the root chart.

If all the segments in a chart are deleted the chart bounds meet to show a fully shaded chart.


Remembering window positions

Positioning windows each time you open them can be time consuming. PowerProject lets you remember the layout of the charts and histograms on the screen, when different numbers of windows are open. The next time you open a window it is presented in the previous position. You can save up to eight windows  four chart and four histogram. If a histogram is locked onto a chart, only the chart window is saved.

To save the windows layout, choose the Admin - Save Desktop menu command.


Task - Expand menu command

This menu command allows you to examine an existing child chart, and to step down the tree of charts. The shortcut to expand a bar into a chart is to double-click on the segment. (Double-clicking on a summary bar toggles between expanding and collapsing the summary bar.)

When the new chart is opened it replaces the current chart in the active window.

Before creating a subordinate chart from a bar, you should check that the bar has:

Only one segment.

A title - the bar title becomes the title for the new chart.

No links - any links on a bar must be deleted before it can be expanded.

You can tell which are the owning bars on a chart as they are displayed as expanded bar symbols.

Owning bars and links

No links can be set on an owning bar. Links can only start and end on unexpanded segments.

Progress on owning bars

Expanded bars cannot be edited on the Enter Progress dialog or the Progress Up-To-Date dialog.

The progress amount displayed on an owning bar is taken from the subordinate chart. There are two options to choose from:

chart report date

percentage completed

The report date of subordinate charts can be different from the report date of owning charts.

Note: In a multi-user project this command is disabled unless you have EDIT Access Rights.

This menu command allows you to create a new child chart, and to step down the tree of charts. The shortcut to expand a bar into a chart is to double-click on the segment. This command is only available if a bar (not a summary bar) with a single segment is selected.

You cannot create more than 10 levels of charts.The new chart replaces the current chart in the active window.

Once you have expanded a bar into a chart, the owning bar's duration is shown on the child chart by shading - to indicate the current chart boundaries

You can also create child charts from the Chart Manager.


Task - Enter Progress menu command

This menu command allows you to enter a chart report date and assign progress when the work is completed or partially completed, or remove progress from a segment.

This menu command allows you to:

Record when a segment has been completed or indicate how much of the segment is completed.

Remove progress from a segment if you need to make corrections or adjustments to a chart.

Record when a milestone is completed.

Set a chart report date.

Move to the next selected segment.

This last option is only available when one or more segments are selected, either using the Search & Select menu command, or by directly selecting them on the bar chart.

This command leads to the Enter Progress dialog.


Enter Progress dialog

This dialog is entered from the Task - Enter Progress menu command.

Through this dialog:

You can assign and remove progress to any segment - except that of an owning bar or summary bar.

A segment can be completed, partially completed, or not started.

Set the report date which separates the past from the future.

Once progress has been entered for segments:

The parts of segments which are completed are marked by a dark horizontal stripe along their top. The progress marking can be turned on and off via the Display tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog.

Completed parts of segments are positioned behind the chart report date after a reschedule and uncompleted parts are positioned after the report date.

By assigning progress to segments, and possibly editing them on the chart, you can keep an exact record of when the planned work was actually carried out.

Progress restrictions

When segments are created they are always uncompleted, unless the following segment is complete.

All earlier segments must be recorded as completed before progress can be assigned to a later segment, for example if segments 1 to 4 are completed, you must change segment 5 to completed before you can assign progress to segment 6.

All later segments must be recorded as uncompleted before progress can be removed from an earlier segment, for example if segments 1 to 6 are completed, you must change segment 6 to uncompleted before segment 5 can have progress removed.

You cannot assign or remove progress to out of sequence segments. The contents of the dialog and the buttons are disabled.

Report Date

The chart report date is the date you are reporting progress for.

Enter any valid date.

The chart report date applies only to this chart. You can set different report dates in other charts. The report date is shown on a chart as the progress line.

Amount Completed

This section of the dialog allows you to enter how much of the segment has been completed. This can be done by entering how much work has been completed, or by what percentage of work has been done. Both values affect each other and the segment's original duration can be seen at the top of the dialog.

Work Completed

The Number panel works in conjunction with the Time unit panel.

The amount of progress assigned cannot be greater than the segment duration - shown at the head of the dialog.

Set the amount of completed work via:

Number panel

Type a number between 0 and 100, or click on the arrows to change the value by 1.

Units

Click on the arrow at the right of the panel to drop down a list of available time units.

% Completed

Set the amount of progress as a percentage(%) via:

Number panel

Type a number between 0 and 100, or click on the arrows to change the value by 1.

Slider

Click on the arrows to change the value by 1 or drag the slider along the bar.

The value entered via %completed affects the Work Completed section.

PowerProject marks progress to the nearest half day. If you enter a percentage that is not a multiple of half days, the progress shading on the segment may not exactly reflect the %completed that you specified.

Not Started

Click the Not Started button to remove all progress from a segment.

The button is disabled for out­of­sequence progress entry.

Completed

Click the Completed button to assign progress to the whole segment.

The button is disabled for out-of-sequence progress entry.

Previous

You can only assign, or remove, progress to segments which are selected. Use this button to work your way through the selected list.

The current position in the selected list is indicated. The bar and segment titles displayed at the head of the dialog change as you move through the list.

The button is disabled when on the first segment of the list.

Next

You can only assign, or remove, progress to segments which are selected. Use this button to work your way through the selected list.

The current position in the selected list is indicated. The bar and segment titles displayed at the head of the dialog change as you move through the list.

The button is disabled when on the last segment of the list.


Task - Progress Up-To-Date menu command

This command displays the Progress Up-To-Date dialog which allows you to mark the selected segments complete to a particular date.

This command is useful for marking several segments as being progressed on target. You must select one or more segments before this command becomes available.


Progress Up-To-Date dialog

This dialog is displayed when you select one or more segments then select Progress Up-To-Date from the Task menu.

In the Progress Date box enter the date to which you want to mark all selected segments as being complete. Today's date is shown in this box until you change it. If today's date is before the chart starts or after the chart ends, the chart's start or end date will be shown in the Progress Date box.

Check the Set Chart Report Date to Progress Date box if you want to make the date you entered in the Progress Date box into the chart report date.

Check the Confirm Changes box if you do not want to mark the progress on all the selected segments. When you click on OK you will have the opportunity to skip any segments that you do not want to assign the progress to.

Click on OK to close the dialog and mark the selected segments as being complete to the specified date. For details of how to display progress on your chart, see the Display tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog.


Task - Set/Delete Start Flag menu command

This menu command allows you to set or delete a start flag on selected segments. You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the chart window and selecting Set Start Flag from the popup menu that appears.

If no start flag is assigned to one or more of the selected segments and a start flag could be assigned one, the menu command reads Set Start Flag.

If all the selected segments have a start flag, the menu command reads Delete Start Flag.

This menu command is not active until at least one segment is selected.

You can set start flags on more than one segment in the same bar.

A start flag can only be set on the start of a segment.

The start flag date can be changed on the Segment tab of the Details dialog.

The start flag display can be turned on and off on the Display of the Customise Barchart View dialog.

Start flags can be set on owning bars - when they are known as chart flags. You cannot set start flags on summary bars.

After moving a segment (manually or via the reschedule), the start flag may no longer be attached to the start of the segment. The difference between the start date of the segment and the start flag date is known as the start flag gap.


Task - Make Milestone menu command

This menu command allows you to convert segments into milestones. This command is active when segments are selected. You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the chart window and selecting Make Milestone from the popup menu that appears.

It allows you to convert selected segments into milestones.

You can also drag a segment to reduce the duration to zero and make a milestone directly on the bar chart.

You can convert a milestone back into a segment by using the editing features of the status line.

You can have more than one milestone on the same bar or a mixture of milestones and normal segments on a bar.

The segment start dates are maintained, the durations are reduced to zero and the segment ends are changed.

Links on the milestone are maintained.

Milestones can have segment titles entered, but the titles are not displayed on the bar chart. However, they are printed out on text reports.

Owning bars cannot be converted into milestones.


Task - Make Lead/Lag menu command

This menu command lets you convert the selected segment into a lead/lag segment. When a lead/lag segment is selected, this menu command changes to Make Normal Segment and lets you convert the lead/lag segment back to a normal segment.

When one or more segments are selected, you can select this command by right-clicking on one of the selected segments and choosing Make Lead/Lag from the popup menu that appears.

A lead/lag segment sets a minimum delay between tasks. For example, a task called Paint First Coat may need to be followed by a delay of three days before the Paint Second Coat task can begin.

A lead/lag segment is shown as a single black line. You can draw links to and from lead/lag segments, and you can assign resources, costs and segment codes to them.


Task - Split Segments menu command

Select this command to split the selected segment into two. The Split Segments dialog appears. On this dialog you can choose where along its length you want the segment to be split.

You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the chart window and selecting Split Segments from the popup menu that appears.

When you split a segment, any resources and costs assigned to the segment are divided between the two parts in direct proportion to their new durations.

Once you have split a segment, you can treat each part as a normal segment e.g. assigning codes, resources and costs to them, drawing links to them, and changing their start dates, end dates and durations. Segments along a bar are renumbered when you split them, so if the segment titles include their segment numbers, the numbers are recalculated to keep all the segments in sequence.

Note: Once you have split a segment in this way, you cannot join its two parts back together, unlike segments which have been split by assigning partial progress to them. For details of segments split by assigning partial progress to them, see Partially Completed Segments.

You cannot split expanded segments or summary bar segments.


Split Segments dialog

This dialog appears when you have selected a segment then selected the Split Segments command from the Task menu. It enables you to split a segment into two parts. This is useful when you have drawn one long task, then realise that it should be carried out as two shorter tasks.

The Current Segment panel shows the start date, end date and duration of the selected segment. In the Split Position panel, the End Date shows the date at which the segment will be split and the Duration shows the duration of the segment up to the date at which it will be split.

To split the segment, do any of the following:

Drag the slider along the scroll bar.

Enter a number and select a time unit for the Split After control, e.g. enter 2 Weeks to split the segment two weeks after its start date.

Enter a number in the Split % box to split the segment after a specific percentage of its duration.

The information in the Split Position panel updates to show the date and duration at which the segment will be split.

If more than one segment was selected when you displayed the Split Segments dialog, use the Next and Previous buttons to cycle through them.

Click on OK to close the dialog and split the selected segment. Click on Cancel to leave the segment whole.


Task - Hide Selected menu command

This menu command lets you hide the tasks that are selected in your chart. When one or more segments are selected, you can select this command by right-clicking on one of the selected segments and choosing Hide Selected from the popup menu that appears.

Any links to or from the selected tasks are also hidden.

When you save and close a chart that contains hidden bars or segments, the tasks remain hidden when you reopen the chart.

Hidden tasks are included in reschedule calculations.

The position and duration of a summary bar does not take account of any hidden tasks within its summary group. Similarly, the position and duration of an owning bar does not take account of any hidden bars within its subordinate chart.

If you create text reports, histograms or export information when some bars or segments are hidden, any relevant information on the hidden bars and segments will not be included.


Task - Hide Unselected menu command

This menu command lets you hide the tasks that are not selected in your chart. When one or more segments are selected, you can select this command by right-clicking on one of the selected segments and choosing Hide Unselected from the popup menu that appears.

Any links to or from the unselected tasks are also hidden.

When you save and close a chart that contains hidden bars or segments, the tasks remain hidden when you reopen the chart.

Hidden tasks are included in reschedule calculations.

The position and duration of a summary bar does not take account of any hidden tasks within its summary group. Similarly, the position and duration of an owning bar does not take account of any hidden bars within its subordinate chart.

If you create text reports, histograms or export information when some bars or segments are hidden, any relevant information on the hidden bars and segments will not be included.


Task - Show Hidden menu command

This menu command lets you reveal any hidden tasks in the chart.

When some tasks in the active chart have been hidden, you can select this command by right-clicking on a segment and choosing Show Hidden from the popup menu that appears.

Holding down the Show Tasks button temporarily displays all the hidden tasks in the active chart. When you release this button, all the hidden tasks in the chart are hidden from view again.


Task - Insert Summary Bar menu command

This menu command lets you organise the bars in a chart into groups. A summary bar can be expanded when you want to view the bars in its group, and collapsed when you do not want to see them. By expanding and collapsing summary bars, you can control the amount of detail displayed in the chart without having to move tasks into subcharts.

To create a summary bar:

1	Select a group of contiguous bars (i.e. bars that are adjacent in the chart).

2	Select Insert Summary Bar from the Task menu or right-click on one of the selected segments and choose Insert Summary Bar from the popup menu that appears. (This command will be disabled if you have selected bars that are dispersed in the chart.)

A bar is inserted above the group of bars whose bar titles have been indented to show that they form a summary group.

The titles of summary bars are set to be bold by default, so when you enter a bar title for a summary bar it will be displayed in bold.

Double-click on a summary bar to toggle between expanding and collapsing it.

You cannot move or resize summary bars; the position and duration of a summary bar is determined by the bars within the summary group. When you move or resize bars in the summary group, the summary bar will be moved or resized accordingly.

You can move bars into and out of summary groups using Task - Indent and Task - Outdent.


Task - Indent menu command

This menu command lets you add the selected bars to a summary group by indenting them. This command is only available when you have selected one or more contiguous bars immediately below a summary group.

When one or more contiguous bars are selected, you can also select this command by right-clicking on one of the selected segments and choosing Indent from the popup menu that appears.


Task - Outdent menu command

This menu command lets you remove bars from a summary group by outdenting them. This command is only available when you have selected one or more contiguous bars in a summary group.

When one or more contiguous bars in a summary group are selected, you can also select this command by right-clicking on one of the selected segments and choosing Outdent from the popup menu that appears.

When you outdent bars, they are moved below the summary group from which they have been outdented. If the summary group was nested within another summary group, the bars will still be indented at the level of the current summary bar.


Task - Select Loop menu command

This menu command allows you to choose which link loop to examine on the bar chart, after a reschedule reports that link loops have been found. The Select Link Loop dialog is presented.

This command is only active when a chart window is open and after a reschedule has reported that link loops have been found.

You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the chart window and selecting Select Loop from the popup menu that appears.


Select Link Loop dialog

This dialog allows you to choose which link loop to examine on the bar chart, after a reschedule reports that link loops have been found. It is called from the Task - Select Loop menu command.

A reschedule first checks for the occurrence of link loops. If any loops are found, the reschedule ends immediately. You must eliminate all link loops before PowerProject will reschedule your plan. The links which are members of a loop are selected on the bar chart, in any open windows, after leaving this dialog. Loop members can also be deselected by clicking anywhere else on a chart.

Through the dialog you can choose:

Which loop is selected on the bar chart

See the type of loop - local to one chart, or passing through several charts.

See the name of the chart the loop is formed in, or passes through.

As the reschedule can find up to three link loops at one time, you can display the links forming each loop. To see the members of a particular loop, click on the button next to the loop number and confirm the dialog.

On leaving the dialog any links which are members of the chosen loop number are selected in all open chart windows.


Task - Reschedule menu command

This menu command lets you reschedule the whole project or the active chart.

Project

Chart

You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the chart window and selecting Reschedule from the popup menu that appears.


Reschedule - Project menu command

This menu command lets you reschedule the whole project. Confirmation is sought before continuing.

All open charts are saved.

All charts in the project which are accessible are recalculated.

The reschedule halts when link loops are found.

Chart scope

The whole project is determined by your available chart scope. If you are restricted to editing part of the project, the reschedule only calculates the effect on the part of the project accessible to you.

If your plan has X-chart links originating from charts outside your scope, and if these charts have not been rescheduled, you are warned that the calculation may not be fully correct. If the whole project is not available to you, then a person with a higher scope should carry out a reschedule to ensure the whole project is correctly recalculated.


Reschedule - Chart menu command

This menu command lets you reschedule the active chart or a branch of the tree of charts. The [image] button in the toolbar has the same effect.

If the active chart contains subordinate charts, the Reschedule Scope dialog appears.


Reschedule Scope dialog

This dialog is presented when the Task - Reschedule - Chart menu command is selected and the active chart contains subordinate charts. This dialog lets you control how much of the plan to reschedule at this time.

Chart - Only the active chart is rescheduled and made correct. Subordinate charts are not recalculated.

Branch - All open charts are saved. The active chart and any subordinate charts it contains are recalculated and made correct.


Search dialog

This dialog appears when you select the Edit - Search & Select menu command.

This dialog provides you with a list of selection criteria, which you use to create a filter so that segments are selected only if they match all the criteria. The selection criteria act together to form more restrictive filters as you add more criteria. For example; if you choose Critical and In progress, then only segments which are both Critical and In progress are selected. If a segment has no progress, it is not selected even if it is Critical.

Type - use this option to decide which type of filter or search you want.

Filter options - select options to determine whether or not segments should be selected.

Executing a search and leaving the Search dialog

When you have selected the Type of filter and have made your selections from the Filter Options, then press OK to make the selection. Leave the dialog with Cancel.


Filter Options

This selection form is common to the following dialogs:

Search dialog called by Edit - Search & Select

Filter dialog called by File - Filter

Make Auto Annotation dialog called by Annotation - Make Auto

Edit Filter dialog called by Annotation - Edit Autos

Histogram Report Filter dialog called from a Histogram Report Details dialog.

Bar Library 1/Bar Library 2

These are the first two filters on the Bar Filter and Bar Select dialogs. They do not appear on the Segment Filter or Segment Search dialogs.

Choose this filter when you want bars with a code assigned from Bar Library 1/Bar Library 2 to be included.

Note: If the Bar library names have been changed then these names will be displayed - see Admin - Code library names.

Some

Choose this option if you want to include bars which use particular codes from Bar Library 1. You can select more than one code from the library: a bar is included if it uses any of the codes you have selected.

The Bar Library 1 Selector is presented. Through this you can choose any combination of codes in the project.

All

Choose this option if you want to include bars with any code from Bar Library 1 other than the default. Those bars with the default code assigned are not included.

Seg Library 1/Seg Library 2

These are the first two filters on the Segment Filter and Segment Select dialogs. They do not appear on the Bar Filter or Bar Search dialogs.

Choose this filter when you want segments with a code assigned from Seg Library 1/Seg Library 2 to be included.

Note: If the Segment library names have been changed then these names will be displayed - see Admin - Code library names.

See Bar Library 1/Bar Library 2 (above) for details on how to use these filters.

Critical

Choose this filter when you want to include segments which are critical or have float. This option is only useful after a chart has been rescheduled.

Critical - just include critical segments.

Not critical - include segments which have some float.

Milestones

Milestone - choose this option if you only want to include segments which are milestones.

Non-milestone - choose this option if you want to exclude any segments which are milestones.

Segment locking

Choose this filter when you want to include segments with segment locking effects.

Locked - only segments with locked segments to be included.

Unlocked - include segments with unlocked segments.

When you choose the Locked filter option, any bar with no segments or 1 segment will be included even if segment locking is not turned on for the bar.

Position

Choose this filter when you want to include segments with particular positioning effects.

ASAP - only segments which are set ASAP are included.

ALAP - only segments which are set ALAP are included.

Start flags

Choose this filter when you just want to include segments according to the Start flag effects.

With flags - only segments which have Start Flags assigned are included.

No flags - segments which do not have Start Flags assigned are included.

Segments

Choose this filter when you want to include bars with particular segment effects.

No segments - choose this option to select bars which you have entered with a Bar title, but no segments, as subheadings.

Single segment - choose this option if you want to include bars which have only one segment.

Multiple segments - choose this option if you want to include bars which have more than one segment.

Resources

Choose this filter when you want to include bars with a particular resource, a combination of resources, or no resources assigned.

None - choose this option if you want to include bars with no resources assigned.

Some - The Resources selector is presented. Through this you can choose any combination of resources in the project. Bars that have any of the resources you select assigned are included.

Any - choose this option if you want bars with any resource assigned to be included.

Any permanent and consumable resource groups are also displayed on the Resources selector. Selecting a group includes any bars to which the group is assigned. Selecting a resource who is a member of a group includes any bars to which the resource is assigned as an individual resource and as a member of a group.

Cost Centres

Choose this filter when you want to include bars with costs assigned from a particular cost centre, a combination of cost centres, or no costs assigned. This filter includes both fixed costs and resource costs.

None - choose this option if you want to include bars with no costs assigned.

Some - The Cost Centres selector is presented. Through this you can choose any combination of cost centres in the project. Bars that have costs from any of the cost centres you select are included.

Any - choose this option if you want bars with any cost assigned to be included.

X-chart link

Choose this filter when you want to include segments depending on their X-chart links.

With links - segments with X-chart links are included.

Without links - segments without X-chart links are included.

Expanded

Choose this filter when you want to include only expanded bars (or segments), or if you want to exclude any bars or segments which are expanded.

Only expanded - choose this option if you only want the expanded bars.

Not expanded - this option stops any expanded bars from being included, even if the bar, or bar's children meet all other selection criteria.

Summary Bars

Choose this filter when you want to include or exclude summary bars.

Only Summary - choose this option if you only want to include summary bars.

Not Summary - choose this option if you only want to include bars that are not summary bars.

Progress

Choose this filter when you just want to include segments with progress effects. You can choose more than one progress filter by checking any of the boxes.

Completed - choose this option if you want to include segments which are completely finished to be in the filter chart.

In progress - choose this option if you want to include segments which are in progress.

Not started - choose this option if you want segments which have not started to be included.

For more detail see Task - Enter Progress.

Nearly critical

Choose this filter when you want to choose segments which are critical, or nearly critical (have a certain amount of float) by a specified amount. This option is only useful after a chart has been rescheduled.

Segments are included if they are critical or have a total float less than or equal to the entered period.

Activate the Nearly critical filter by choosing the type of:

Calendar/Working

Choose the Calendar button if you want the entered time period to include any holidays, or weekends, which might occur.

Choose the Working button if you want the entered period to exclude holidays and weekends.

Time slice

Choose this filter when you want to include the segments within a specific date range.

Click the Select button to display the Time Slice Dates dialog. Enter the dates to control the selection of segments.

Left date is the start of the time slice. A segment is included if it ends after this date. All segments which end before this date are excluded.

Right date marks the end of your chosen Time slice. Any segments which start after this date are excluded.

You must include am/pm as part of the date. The date format is set by your options on the Numbering tab of the Options dialog.

When you are happy with the dates you have entered, confirm by OK. Cancel leaves the dialog without selecting a Time slice filter.

Calendar

Choose this filter when you want to include segments using a particular calendar.

Choose the Select button to present the Calendar selector, from which you can choose more than one calendar.

A segment is included if it uses any of the calendars you have chosen.

Bar Title

Use this filter to include tasks with bar titles that match the string you enter.

You can use * to represent any characters. For example, to include all bars whose titles contain the string LEVEL anywhere in their title, you would enter *LEVEL* in the Bar Title text box.

You can use ? to represent any single character. For example, to include all bars whose titles are a six character string beginning with LEVEL, you would enter LEVEL? in the Bar Title text box.

You can use | or ¦ to combine more then one string in the filter. For example, to include all bars whose titles contain the strings LEVEL or FLOOR anywhere in their title, you would enter either *LEVEL*|*FLOOR* or *LEVEL*¦*FLOOR* in the Bar Title text box.

If you prefer not to use the | and ¦ characters, you can edit your PPROJECT.INI file to specify the characters you want to use for combining strings. For details of how to do this, see Specifying a character for combined search strings.

Segment Title

Use this filter to include tasks with segment titles that match the string you enter. See the Bar Title section above for details of how to enter strings for filtering.

WBN

Use this filter to include tasks with WBN codes that match the string you enter. See the Bar Title section above for details of how to enter strings for filtering.


Time Slice Dates dialog

This dialog is presented from the Search and Filter dialogs.

Enter the dates to control the selection of segments.

Left date is the start of the time slice. A segment is included if it ends after this date. All segments which end before this date are excluded.

Right date marks the end of your chosen Time slice. Any segments which start after this date are excluded.

You must include am/pm as part of the date. The date format is set by your options on the Date Format tab of the Options dialog.

When you are happy with the dates you have entered, confirm by OK. Cancel leaves the dialog without selecting a Time slice filter.


Specifying a character for combined search strings

When setting up filter options you can enter strings to match on in the Bar Title, Segment Title and WBN boxes. You can combine more than one string by separating the strings with a | or ¦ character. If you prefer to use a different character, enter the line below in your PPROJECT.INI file:

TextOrChars=

Specify the character you want to use after the = symbol. For example:

TextOrChars=%&(

You can then use the specified characters in addition to the default characters.

Do not specify the * or ? characters.


Editing PPROJECT.INI

PPROJECT.INI contains information that determines how PowerProject behaves when you run it. You will not need to do anything with PPROJECT.INI unless you want to change some finer details of PowerProject's behaviour.

Do not edit PPROJECT.INI unless instructed to do so by the PowerProject documentation or a member of the PowerProject technical support team.

Before editing PPROJECT.INI, make a backup copy so that if your edits go wrong you can revert to an earlier version of the file. If you need to edit PPROJECT.INI, open it in a text editor such as NotePad and when you have completed your edits, save the file as plain text. Once you have saved your edited PPROJECT.INI file, you will need to close and restart PowerProject for your changes to take effect.

If you accidentally delete PPROJECT.INI, when you next run PowerProject a new PPROJECT.INI file will be created with default settings.


Baseline Manager dialog

New

Click on New if you want to create a new baseline. The New Baseline dialog is presented. This button is disabled if the current project is a baseline opened as a separate project, as you cannot create baselines from a baseline project.

File

Select the baseline you want to open, close or delete:

Baseline list box

Select the baseline you want to open, close or delete using this list box. Either the filenames or the summary comments of baselines appear in this list box, depending how you specified you wanted to refer to baselines on the General tab of the Options dialog.

Open

Click on Open to open the baseline selected in the Baseline list box. If PowerProject cannot find the baseline selected, the Baseline Filename dialog is presented.

Opening a baseline from this dialog means that bars and segments from the baseline charts are displayed below their corresponding bars and segments on bar charts in the current project. You can turn the display of baseline bars on and off from the Display tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog.

Close

Click on Close to close the baseline selected from the Baseline list box.

Delete/Restore

Click on Delete to delete the baseline selected in the Baseline list box. The Delete Baseline dialog is displayed.

This button becomes a Restore button if you delete a baseline using the Delete Baseline dialog. If you decide that you do not want to delete the baseline, click on Restore to restore the baseline.

Auto-Open

Check the Auto-Open box if you want PowerProject to display the baseline selected in the Baseline list box every time you open the current project.

Bar Appearance

You can specify that all baseline bars in a baseline have the same appearance, or that the baseline bars use the same code appearances as their corresponding bars in the project.

Use codes

Check this box if you want baseline bars to use the same code appearances as their corresponding bars in the project. If you want all baseline bars to have the same appearance make sure that this box is cleared and use the Bar appearance panel of the dialog to specify an appearance.

Bar appearance panel

If the Use Codes box is unchecked, the Bar appearance panel shows the code in which all the bars in the baseline will appear. Click on the Bar appearance panel to change the appearance of all baseline bars. The Code Appearance dialog is presented, allowing you to specify the appearance of the bars.

Progress line appearance

Click on the progress line to display the Line Appearance dialog. This dialog allows you to change the appearance of the baseline progress line.

Chart display baseline bars are on/off

This tells you whether the display of baseline bars is on or off. You cannot change the setting here. To turn the display of baseline bars on or off, use the Display tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog.

Chart display baseline progress lines are on/off

This tells you whether the display of chart progress lines and baseline progress lines is on or off. You cannot change the setting here. To turn the display of baseline progress lines on or off, use the Display tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog. Turning on baseline progress lines displays progress lines for each baseline displayed on the chart.

Details

The Details panel displays information about the baseline file.

Issue date

This displays the issue date you specified when you created the baseline using the New Baseline dialog. You cannot edit this date.

Revision number

This displays the revision number you specified when you created the baseline using the New Baseline dialog. You cannot edit this number.

Summary

This displays the summary comment you entered when you created the baseline using the New Baseline dialog. If you did not enter a summary comment, PowerProject uses the filename of the baseline. You can edit this field provided the baseline is open.

Comment

This displays the comment you entered when you created the baseline using the New Baseline dialog. You can edit this field provided the baseline is open.

Links

This box is checked if you checked the Include Links box when you created the baseline using the New Baseline dialog. You cannot edit this field.

Annotations

This box is checked if you checked the Include Annotations box when you created the baseline using the New Baseline dialog. You cannot edit this field.

Scope of baseline

The scope is Whole project, Selected charts or Single chart, depending on the scope you specified when you created the baseline using the New Baseline dialog. You cannot edit this field.


New Baseline dialog

This dialog appears when you click on the New button on the Baseline Manager dialog.

Details

Specify the details about the baseline you are creating. The details fields are optional.

Issue Date

The issue date for the baseline. The default is today's date, but you can change this date if you want to. Click in this field to locate the text cursor and enter a new date if you do not want to use the current date.

Revision Number

Enter a revision number for the baseline. The revision number can be up to 11 characters long.

Summary

Enter a short comment that briefly describes the baseline. You can choose to refer to baselines by a filename or by the comment that you enter here, using the General tab on the Options dialog. The short comment can be up to 41 characters long.

Comment

Enter a longer comment to describe the baseline.

Scope

Specify the scope of the baseline you want to create. The default is to create a baseline of the whole project. Click on one of the other buttons if you want a different scope.

Current chart

Click on this option to create a baseline of the current chart.

Selected charts

Click on this option to specify that you want to create a baseline of selected charts from the project, then click on the Select button to display the Chart Selector. Select the charts you want to include in the baseline from the Chart Selector.

Whole project

Click on this option if you want to create a baseline of the whole project. This is the default.

Include

Specify whether you want to include the links and annotations displayed on the charts used to create the baseline. You may want to omit links and annotations from the baseline to reduce the size of the baseline PDB file. Any links and annotations included in a baseline are only displayed when you open the baseline as a separate project. The default is to include links and annotations in the baseline.

Links

Check this box if you want to include links in the baseline. If the box is already checked, clear it by clicking on it to omit links from the baseline.

Annotations

Check this box if you want to include annotations in the baseline. If the box is already checked, clear it by clicking on it to omit annotations from the baseline.

File

Specify the filename for the new baseline.

Output name

Specify a filename for the baseline. PowerProject displays a default file location, derived from the directory and filename of the current project. You can use the default file location or specify a different one. Click on the Browse button to display the File Selector. if you want to specify a different file location.

Baseline source for merge

If you want the baseline to be merged with an existing baseline file, click on the arrow to display a list of the baseline files and select the file you want the new baseline to be merged with.

New

Click on New to specify that you want to store the baseline in a new PDB file, not merged with an existing baseline file. (Any selection you made in the Baseline source for merge box will be ignored.)

Merge -> New

Click on Merge -> New to merge the new baseline and an existing baseline into a completely new baseline file. Use the Baseline source for merge list box to select the existing baseline file you want the new baseline to be merged with. The new baseline will be merged with the existing baseline into a new baseline file which you can open in the same way as other baselines.

Merge -> Existing

Click on Merge -> Existing to merge the new baseline into an existing baseline file. Use the Baseline source for merge list box to select the existing baseline file that you want the new baseline to be merged with. The name of the baseline file you choose as the source for the merge is shown in the Output name field and you cannot edit it. The existing baseline file will be updated to include the additional information in the new baseline.

Ensure that both the new baseline and the existing baseline originate from the same original project, otherwise you will have undesireable results.

Leaving the dialog

Confirm by OK. Cancel leaves the dialog unchanged.


Delete Baseline dialog

This dialog is presented when you click on the Delete button on the Baseline Manager dialog. It allows you to delete the selected baseline.

Delete references in current PDB only

Click on this button to delete any references contained in the current project to the selected baseline. Choosing this option means you will no longer be able to display the baseline from within the current project, but you will still be able to open it as a separate project, using the File - Open command.

Delete reference and file

Click on this button to delete any references to the baseline from the current project and delete the baseline file itself. Choosing this option means that the baseline file is physically removed from your computer.

Leaving the dialog

Click on OK to confirm, or click on Cancel to abandon the delete operation.


Baseline Progress Line Appearance dialog

This dialog allows you to change the appearance of baseline progress lines. The Appearance panel at the foot of the dialog shows how the baseline progress line will appear on the bar chart.

The appearance you specify from this dialog is also displayed in the Progress Line Appearance panel of the Baseline Manager dialog.

Lines

This panel allows you to select the style of the progress line and the width of the line as it appears on screen.

Lines selection box

Select the line style you want from this box. Use the scroll bar to display all of the line styles available. Click on the line style you want to select it. Notice that the style you select appears in the Appearance panel at the foot of the dialog.

Screen width

The width of the progress line as it appears on screen is always specified in pixels. Use the arrows to select the line width you want, or type in the width. The maximum screen width is 10 pixels.

Colour

The Colour panel allows you to specify the colours you want the lines and/or symbols to appear in. Click on the Lines or Symbols option to specify whether you want to choose a colour for the progress line or for the symbols on the progress. The Lines option is selected by default.

When you have specified Lines or Symbols, click on a colour from the panel. The colour you choose is displayed in the Appearance panel at the foot of the dialog.

Symbols

Specify where you want symbols to appear, together with the type of symbol, the size and the spacing of symbols on the progress line.

Options

Check the Start, End, or Along Line boxes to specify where you want symbols to appear on the line. You can check any combination of the three boxes.

Symbol size

Check Tiny, Small, Medium or Large to specify the size of the symbols on the progress line.

Symbols selection box

Select the type of symbol you want to use. Use the scroll bar to display all of the symbols available. Click on the symbol you want, to select it. Notice that the symbol you select appears in the Appearance panel at the foot of the dialog.

Symbol spacing

This specifies the spacing between symbols on the progress line on the screen. The screen spacing is always specified in pixels. Use the arrows to select the spacing you want, or type in the spacing. The maximum screen spacing is 50 pixels.

Leaving the dialog

Click on OK to confirm the appearance of the progress lines, or Cancel to cancel.


Baseline Filename Dialog

This dialog is presented if you try to open a baseline and PowerProject cannot find the baseline file. For example, you may have moved the file to another disk or directory after you created the baseline.

Baseline path

Enter the full path name for the baseline file in the field on this dialog.

Leaving the dialog

Click on OK to confirm the new path, or Cancel to cancel the operation.


Calendar Library selector

This selector is presented when you choose the Admin - Calendar Library command.

The selector lists all the current calendars previously created.

A new calendar

Choosing the New button allows you to create a new calendar:

1	A calendar called UNTITLED is opened in a window, with the year of the project report date displayed.

2	Set up the calendar entering any holidays, weekends and overtime. How to do this is explained in Editing a calendar.

3	To save a calendar you must change the name from UNTITLED.

Opening a calendar

Clicking on the Edit button allows you to edit a calendar you have previously created and saved.

You can use the Edit button to open the SYSTEM calendar but you cannot make any changes to it.

Note: When working in a multi-user project, this button is disabled when your Access Rights for calendars are set to NONE.

Deleting a calendar

Clicking on the Delete button with a calendar selected, allows you to delete a calendar which you have previously created and saved. After confirmation the calendar is deleted.

You cannot delete a calendar which is open. You cannot delete the SYSTEM calendar.

Deleting a calendar which has been assigned

If the deleted calendar was used for bars or a permanent resource or consumable resource in the project, then it is replaced by the SYSTEM calendar which contains no holidays or weekends.

If you delete a calendar which was assigned to bars, carry out a project reschedule to ensure the change is correctly accounted for throughout the project.


After saving a calendar

If you make any changes to a calendar, you should reschedule your project to ensure that the changes are correctly accounted for throughout the project.

The bar chart maintains information on segments and links correctly, after a change to a calendar.

The duration of any owning segments may be incorrect on the bar chart if: segments in a subordinate branch of the tree have been affected by a calendar change and all the charts have not been opened, or the branch has not been rescheduled. Reschedule the branch to correct this.


Editing a Calendar

You can change the titles of the items on the calendar, but the descriptions below refer to the original titles.

Once you have opened a new or existing calendar, you can make any changes to appearance or titles. You can select a holiday type, then mark holidays, weekends and overtime days.

If possible, set up the calendar before drawing segments, as the weekends and holidays may affect the timing and sequence of tasks in the project.

Naming the calendar

If you are editing a new calendar, enter a name for it in the Name box.

The default calendar

If you want the calendar to be assigned automatically to any new bars you draw, check the Default button. You can override this setting for individual bars by choosing an alternative calendar on the Bar tab of the Details dialog. (You can also set the default calendar on the Bar Defaults tab of the Options dialog.)

Changing the key

In the key, you can tailor a calendar by changing the titles and colours. You can also alter the colour and pattern used to mark the holiday periods on the bar chart or filter chart.

Changing the titles

You can supply the text you want to display instead of the four titles Hol type 1, Hol type 2, Weekends and Overtime.

Initially, PowerProject displays the holiday titles in the calendar window as Hol type 1 and Hol type 2 but you can change the titles to display the text you want, for example, you could change Hol type 1 to Public, and Hol type 2 to Vacations.

Holiday Type 1 description

Click on the title Hol type 1 in the key at the head of the calendar, and type the text you want to be displayed in the Calendar Text dialog.

Holiday Type 2 description

Click on the title Hol type 2 in the key at the head of the calendar, and type the text you want to be displayed in the Calendar Text dialog.

Weekends description

Click on the title Weekends in the key at the head of the calendar, and type the text you want to be displayed in the Calendar Text dialog.

Overtime description

Click on the title Overtime in the key at the head of the calendar, and type the text you want to be displayed in the Calendar Text dialog.

Changing the colours and patterns

The two types of holidays, weekends and overtime are each displayed in a unique colour in the calendar window. However, the colours and patterns you choose on this dialog control the colour and pattern displayed on the bar chart or printed on output if selected.

The colour used to highlight different holiday types is always unique. If a colour is chosen for any holiday, weekend or overtime period, then the same colour may not be used to highlight the non-working periods.

Holiday Type 1 appearance

Click on the Holiday Type 1 Appearance box to display the Calendar Appearance dialog, allowing you to change the colour and pattern.

Holiday Type 2 appearance

Click on the Holiday Type 2 Appearance box to display the Calendar Appearance dialog, allowing you to change the colour and pattern.

Weekend appearance

Click on the Weekend Appearance box to display the Calendar Appearance dialog, allowing you to change the colour and pattern.

Overtime appearance

Click on the Overtime Appearance box to display the Calendar Appearance dialog, allowing you to change the colour and pattern.

Marking days on the calendar

You mark weekends on the working week line, and holidays and overtime on the calendar.

Holidays

You can mark two different types of holidays, for example, you could choose one type for public holidays and industry shut-downs, and the other type for personal vacations. Holidays are irregular, and you must mark the days individually.

Other years of the calendar are unaffected. To set the same day as a holiday in different years of a calendar you must set the holiday for each year.

Selecting a holiday type

The highlighted button indicates the currently selected holiday type. To change the holiday type you want to mark on the calendar, click on the button for the holiday type of your choice.

Each holiday type may be displayed or hidden individually on a bar chart using the Appearance tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog.

Marking a holiday

First ensure that the holiday type you require is selected.

On the calendar, the first digit of a date (which may be an underline) represents the first half of the day. The second digit represents the second half of the day.

To mark a holiday click on each Half Day on the calendar to turn it On. To remove a holiday and make it a working period, click on it to turn it Off.

Marking weekends

Weekends are regular non-working periods and apply to every year of a calendar, throughout the project. For example, your weekend may be all day Saturday and Sunday, or Saturday afternoon and all day Sunday. (Weekends can be displayed or hidden on a bar chart using the Appearance tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog.)

You control the setting of weekends on the Working Week Line at the head of the calendar. Each day on the Working week line has two periods, for the morning and afternoon of each day. When a period is off (empty) it means that this is worked. When a period is On (full) it is not worked. To change the Working week line, click on any period to toggle it between Off and On. At least one period of the working week line must be Off and you cannot set a calendar without working periods.

If you change the working week and have holidays set for periods which are now weekends, or have overtime set for periods which are now working periods, this information is lost.

Marking overtime

To set an overtime period on the calendar simply click on each Half Day of a weekend to turn it on. To remove an overtime period and make it part of a weekend again, click on an overtime period to turn it off.

Overtime may be displayed or hidden on a bar chart using the Appearance tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog.

Moving from year to year

Weekends affect every year in the calendar. Holidays and overtime must be set when you want them. You have to display each year on the screen and set the holidays and overtime over the likely duration of your project. To do this you have to move from year to year in the calendar.

The year of display is shown inbetween the buttons that display the previous year and next year underneath the working week line.

The Previous year button is disabled when the start year of the project is reached. You cannot see calendars before the start of the project. The earliest year available is 1901.

Click on the Previous year button. The current year is reduced by one and the calendar re-drawn to show the dates and days for this year.

Press on the Previous year button to see the current year keep changing . Release when you reach the year you are searching for. The calendar is redrawn to show this year.

The Next year button is disabled when the last year of the calendar is reached. A calendar cannot be longer than 44 years. You cannot see calendars after 2099.

Click on the Next year button. The year in the Year panel is increased by one and the calendar re-drawn to show the dates and days for this year.

Press on the Next year button and see the year keep changing. Release when you reach the year you are searching for. The calendar is re-drawn to show this year.

Saving an existing calendar under a new name

You may want to create similar calendars in the same project. To save time you can make a copy of a calendar you have already created under another name. To do this:

1	Open the calendar you want to copy by selecting it from the Calendar Library selector and clicking on the Edit button.

2	Change the name of the existing calendar, by entering a new name in the Name field

3	Click on the Save As button.

This leaves the existing calendar unchanged and creates a new calendar.


Printing a Calendar

You may want to print out the current year of display of a calendar to use as a customised year planner, marked with all holidays, weekends and overtime.

To do this:

1	Select Calendar Library from the Admin menu to display the Calendar Library selector.

2	Select the calendar that you want to print.

3	Click on the Edit button. The calendar is displayed on the Calendar dialog

4	Click on the Print button. The Print dialog appears

You can preview the calendar before printing it by clicking on the Preview button.


Why more than one calendar?

Using different calendars is useful when:

Work is being carried out by different people who take vacations at different times.

Work on the project is being carried out in different parts of the world where working patterns are different.

Each bar line and each resource can have a different calendar.

The differences in working periods can affect your schedule. PowerProject takes all the differences into account.


Copying calendars

Calendars are specific to one project, but calendars from other projects can be transferred to save time in setting up new calendars.


Dates on a calendar

PowerProject displays calendars for all the months from the beginning of the year in which your project starts.

The earliest year available is 1901, and the latest year is 2099.

The first date you can edit on the calendar is the project report date.

In a new project, or if you have not set a project report date, then PowerProject uses the project start date as the project report date.

Any dates before the project report date are disabled and cannot be edited.


SYSTEM calendar

The SYSTEM calendar is always available in a project.

It has no holidays, weekends or overtime

You cannot edit or delete it.

You can assign it to any segment or resource in the project.

If you delete a calendar which is assigned to a segment or resource it is replaced by the SYSTEM calendar.


Calendar Text dialog

Enter any 12 characters to be used as one of the holiday, weekend or overtime titles. Confirm by OK or Cancel leaves the dialog without any changes being made.


Chart Manager

The Chart Manager allows you to view, change and print the chart hierarchy of a project.

By inserting new charts and indenting existing charts inwards one level in the hierarchy you can change the project structure.

The Chart Manager is made up of a:

Chart Pane - showing a picture of the hierarchical structure of the project.

Bar Viewpane - where the contents of a selected chart can be seen.

Menu commands - which control the appearance and operation of the Chart Manager.

Message line - giving feedback on operations and the contents of the Chart Manager.

Exit buttons - to OK or Cancel the insert or delete operation.

Window frame features - to control the moving, closing and sizing of the Chart Manager.

The functions of the Chart Manager are detailed in:

Windows features.

Printing menu gives access to the common print and preview dialogs through which the project hierarchy can be printed and enclosed in a border.

Display menu to control the appearance for the screen and printing.

Edit menu to insert and indent charts in the hierarchy.

Options menu to control the how the Chart Manager behaves.

Note: If you are working in a multi-user project, access to charts, and what constitutes the whole project for you may be limited by your Chart Scope.

Chart Pane

This area shows a picture of the hierarchical structure of the active project. There is a scroll bar to enable display of large projects. You indicate where you want to insert or indent charts on the chart pane, by moving the mouse pointer over the appropriate chart.

Window features

The Chart Manager has features which you can control using the pointer:

If the Bar Viewpane is displayed, you can change its width - by pointing to the centre of the double line between the Chart Pane and Viewpane where the pointer changes to shape to [image] and dragging to a new position.

Printing the project structure

The Print menu gives access to the Preview, Print and Printer Setup dialogs via the menu commands. These are identical to the commands available on the main PowerProject File menu. For more details see File - Preview, File - Print Graphics and File - Printer Setup.

The way the structure is printed depends on what you have chosen to display.

Display Menu

The Display menu commands allow you to control various aspects of how the Chart Pane and Bar Viewpane of the Chart Manager appear. This affects the screen and output appearance.

Display - Font

You can change the font face and font size used in the Chart Pane. The Font Selector is presented.

Using a smaller font shows more information.

Display - Set Levels

You can control the number of chart hierarchy levels within the project which are displayed in the Chart Pane. For example, if you wanted to look at the root chart and any owning bars on the root, you should choose Maximum level 1 and Minimum level 2.

Display - Joining Lines

You can decide whether or not you need lines to connect each chart to the next level in the Chart Pane.

Edit Menu

The Edit menu allows you to insert and indent charts to create new charts and thus change the existing chart hierarchy.

Insert

Use the Insert command or click on the Insert button to insert a new chart into the hierarchy.

When you have chosen this command the mouse pointer changes to [image] to indicate that you are about to insert a new chart into the project.

Move the mouse pointer over the rectangle that represents the chart into which you want to insert a new chart. As you move the mouse over a chart, the pointer changes to:

 to insert a new chart into an existing chart.

 to insert a new chart above an existing chart in the hierarchy.

 to insert a new chart below an existing chart in the hierarchy.

You cannot insert new charts above or below the root chart of a project. You can only insert new charts into the root chart or indent the root chart.

When you have positioned the appropriate pointer over the a chart, click to display the Insert New Chart dialog.

Indent

Indenting charts moves the selected chart, and any other charts in the same branch of the tree, inwards one level in the hierarchy. The chart you select to indent is replaced by a new chart. If you indent the root chart, all the charts in the hierarchy are indented one level.

When you choose this command, the mouse pointer changes to [image] to indicate that you are about to indent a chart.

Move the pointer until it is over the chart you want to indent. The pointer changes to [image] click to display the Create New Chart dialog.

Any subordinate charts of the chart you indent are also indented.

To select a chart, click on it in the Chart Pane; the bars in the selected chart will be displayed in the Bar Viewpane. You can select more than one chart by holding down CTRL and clicking on the charts you want to select. To select a whole branch, hold down SHIFT and click on the parent chart.

You cannot delete charts from the Chart Manager. Once you have confirmed the insertion or indenting of charts by leaving the Chart Manager with OK, you can only delete charts from the bar chart by deleting any bars in the chart and then deleting its owning bar.


Chart Manager Options menu

The Options menu allows you to control aspects of the Bar Viewpane and the operation of the Chart Manager.

Options - Bar Viewpane

You can choose whether to display the bar titles for a single selected chart in the Bar Viewpane. For example, you may need to see the bar titles before opening a chart if you are not sure from the chart title exactly what the chart contains. The command is marked with a tick, and the window is divided by a double vertical line.

You can scroll the Viewpane if the selected chart has more than a window-full of bar titles.

You can alter the width of the Viewpane by pointing to the centre of the double line between the Chart Pane and Viewpane - the pointer changes shape on the junction to [image] - then dragging to a new position.

If you want to close the Viewpane altogether, deselect the Bar Viewpane command so that it is not ticked.


Insert New Chart dialog

This dialog is presented when you insert a new chart into your project from the Chart Manager.It allows you to specify the position and name of the owning bar of the chart you are about to insert.

Above/Below bar

Specify where you want the owning bar of the new chart to be positioned in the existing chart, by selecting a position from the Below bar or Above bar list box. You can accept the default position suggested by PowerProject or select a different one.

The list box is called Below bar or Above bar depending on where you are inserting the new chart.

As

Specify the name of the new chart in the As field. Click in the As field to locate the text cursor and enter the name of the new chart.


Chart - Open menu command

This menu command displays the Chart Selector window, which allows you to view the project structure and choose charts for display from any open project. You can also print the chart hierarchy displayed in the Chart Selector.

Several chart windows can be opened, each displaying the same or different charts, from the same or different projects.

You cannot open a chart if a Filter window is open.

See also

Opening Charts


Chart - Close menu command

This menu command allows you to close the chart window. Any changes to the chart are saved permanently and the window is closed.

The window step up button [image] has the same effect as this menu command - except the window is not closed if the chart has an owning bar.

The window Close button has a similar effect to this menu command - except if the chart has been changed an Alert is presented where you can confirm your changes or abandon them. The window is closed.

Once the chart is closed and the information saved permanently the chart cannot be abandoned.

If the same chart is opened in more than one window at the same time, then any changes are not saved until you close the last window onto the chart.

Closing a chart which has had X-chart links assigned also results in the chart the X-chart link starts (or ends) in being saved. As this chart in turn may have X-chart links to a third chart, this may result in a chain reaction, where a number of interconnected charts are all saved at once. Each chart saved can no longer be abandoned.

Note: If your Access Rights for the chart are only VIEW, this menu command is disabled and you cannot edit the chart. The scales, grids, display options, details and time unit can be changed, but cannot be made permanent.


Chart - Save menu command

This menu command allows you to make permanent any changes to a chart. The project data base on disk is updated. You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the chart window and selecting Save from the popup menu that appears.

In addition to the chart data, the current scales, grid spacing, details, time unit and window position are also saved.

Any changes saved cannot be later undone. The Edit - Undo All menu command is disabled after a save.

Clicking on the Save Project button will save all the open charts and histograms in the active project. If the active project has not already been saved using File - Save As, the Save File selector will be displayed for you to enter a filename for the project.

Chain reaction save

Saving a chart which has had X-chart links assigned also results in the chart the X-chart link starts (or ends) in being saved. As this chart in turn may have X-chart links to a third chart, this may result in a chain reaction where a number of interconnected charts are all saved at once.

When this happens, you are alerted that saving one chart also results in all the listed charts being saved.

Note: This menu command is disabled if your Access Rights for the chart are only VIEW. You may make changes, but cannot make them permanent.


Chart - Chart Manager menu command

The Chart Manager menu command allows you to view and alter the chart structure of a project. For example, you can insert new subordinate charts or indent existing charts.

This command is only active when a project is open, but all chart windows are closed. If you have more than one project open, the Chart Manager applies to the currently active project. Use File - Select to make a project active.


Chart - Outline menu command

This menu command lets you switch between displaying the chart as an outline and displaying the chart in full. When the chart is displayed as an outline, only summary bars and bars on the root of the chart are displayed.

You can also select this command by right-clicking on the active chart window and selecting Outline from the popup menu that appears.


Chart - Customise menu command

This menu command leads to the Customise Barchart View dialog which lets you to change the appearance, scale, grid, and column sheet settings of the chart in the active window. You can use this menu command to change the appearance of both bar charts and filter charts. When more than one chart is open, different charts can have different displays.

You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the chart window and selecting Customise from the popup menu that appears.


Customise Barchart View dialog

The Customise Barchart View dialog appears when you select Chart - Customise. You can use the Customise Barchart View dialog to change the appearance, scale, grid and column sheet settings of the active chart window. Click on the tab name below for information about the options on that tab.

Appearance

Display

Scale

Grid

Column

Save

The Save button is enabled when either the Appearance or Display tabs are topped. You can click on the Save button to save the current appearance or display settings as the default so that any new chart windows automatically take these display attributes.

The choices you make on the Scale and Grid tabs are saved with the chart when you do a Chart - Save. The choices you make on the Column tab can be saved within the column layout using Chart - Column Layout Manager.


Chart/Histogram - Time Unit menu command

This menu command lets you to change the time unit used for data entry in the active chart, or the time unit of the date zone in the active unlocked histogram. A submenu appears listing the time units available, which are:

half days

days

weeks

fortnights

The current time unit is ticked. Choose a different time unit by clicking on the one you want to use.

You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the chart or histogram window and selecting Time Unit from the popup menu that appears. The time unit of locked on histograms is determined by the time unit of the chart to which the histogram is locked.

Time unit for charts

When you draw bars and links on the bar chart they are drawn at time unit boundaries - called snapping - so that they are always located at a whole number of time units.

You can change time units whenever you need to, to suit the length of the segment you are drawing, or adjusting.

The time unit of data entry does not affect the scale of the chart display. It is just a convenience to make it easier for you to draw segments of different lengths on the bar chart.

The time unit chosen is displayed on the status line. All numbers in the status line panels are in whole numbers of the new time unit.

Time unit for histograms

You can change the time unit of the histogram date zone whenever you need, for example to match the time unit of the bar chart related to the histogram.

For histograms that are locked to the bar chart, select the Time Unit command from the Chart menu if you need to change the units.


Chart - Column Layout Manager menu command

This menu command lets you save, delete and apply column layouts.

When you select this command, the Column Layout Manager appears.

You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the chart window and selecting Column Layout Manager from the popup menu that appears.

A column layout can have up to 100 columns. If you apply a column layout that was created in an earlier version of PowerProject and had more than 100 columns, the columns beyond 100 will not be displayed. If you then save the column layout in this version of PowerProject, any columns beyond 100 will be lost.


Appearance tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog

This tab is available when you choose the Chart - Customise menu command. The options on this tab let you change the appearance of the active chart window.

Shortcuts

Many of the options on this tab have keyboard shortcuts to let you change attributes directly on the chart and avoid having to open the Customise Barchart View dialog. These shortcuts make PowerProject faster to use as you become familiar with them.

The shortcuts toggle between on and off, or in some cases, cycle through the options. If the display attribute is on and you use a shortcut, it is turned off. If the attribute is off and you use a shortcut it is turned on.

The CTRL+letter shortcut only affects the active window.

If you want the display attribute to affect all open windows use the CTRL+SHIFT+letter combination.

How to select an attribute

The attributes are grouped together according to their function. Each attribute is shown next to a check box. To select or switch off an attribute, check the appropriate box.

Calendar display

Check the options in this section if you want to display holidays, weekends and overtime on the chart. The options are independent of each other, for example weekends can be on and holidays off. Set up the details of holidays, weekends and overtime using the Admin - Calendar Library menu command.

Holidays

Holidays set on a calendar can be displayed, or hidden. You can control the two holiday types independently.

The shortcut for Holidays is CTRL H. Use CTRL H repeatedly to cycle through the combinations of holiday types 1 and 2 on and off.

Weekends

Any weekends set on a calendar are displayed, or hidden. The shortcut for weekends is CTRL W.

Overtime

Overtime set on a calendar is displayed, or hidden. The shortcut for overtime is CTRL O.

Folding

This option allows the effect of holidays to be removed from the display. Each holiday type can be removed individually.

In the root chart, folding out is only possible when all bars in a chart use the same calendar. In a subchart the calendar of the owning bar is folded, even if the bars in the subchart use a mix of calendars. If the owning bar's calendar is SYSTEM, then no folding will occur in the subchart.

Holidays over bars

If you choose to display holidays and weekends on your chart (see above), they can be shown superimposed on the bars if you wish. Leave this option switched off to display the bars with weekends and holidays behind them.

Bar numbering

The options in this section help you read across large charts by displaying numbers on the titles and bars.

You can control whether bar numbers appear on the left or right of the bar titles panel, and whether bar numbers appear on the left or right of bars in the bar chart.

If you do not want bar numbers to be displayed, click the No title numbers option. The bar numbers column will not be displayed alongside the bar titles panel.

Only lines with bars are numbered. If you want to number blank lines and subheadings, check the Number subheadings box.

Title numbers left. Shortcut is CTRL I. This places the bar numbers column on the left of the bar titles panel.

Title numbers right. Shortcut is CTRL J. This places the bar numbers column on the right of the bar titles panel.

Bar numbers left. Shortcut is CTRL K. This places bar numbers on the left of the first segment on each bar in the bar chart.

Bar numbers right. Shortcut is CTRL Z. This places bar numbers on the right of the last segment on each bar in the bar chart.

Number sub-headings. Shortcut is CTRL N.

When the bar numbers column is displayed, you can select a bar by clicking on its number in the bar numbers column.

Note: You cannot move the bar numbers column to the right of the column sheet.

Code display

Make a selection from this section to choose the library containing the set of colours and patterns to display for the bars or segments on your chart.

When one code library is chosen, the others are automatically turned off. The shortcut for changing between code libraries is CTRL A.

Note: The text is displayed on this tab as Bar Library 1, Seg Library 1, Bar Library 2, and Seg Library 2 unless you have changed the Code library names.


Display tab on Customise Barchart View dialog

This tab is available when you choose the Chart - Customise menu command. The options on this tab let you change the display attributes of the active chart window.

Shortcuts

Many of the options on this tab have keyboard shortcuts to let you change attributes directly on the chart and avoid having to open the Customise Barchart View dialog. These shortcuts make PowerProject faster to use as you become familiar with them.

The shortcuts toggle between on and off. If the display attribute is on and you use a shortcut, it is turned off. If the attribute is off and you use a shortcut it is turned on.

The CTRL+letter shortcut only affects the active window.

If you want the display attribute to affect all open windows use the CTRL SHIFT+letter combination.

How to select an attribute

The attributes are grouped together according to their function. Each attribute is shown next to a check box. To select or switch off an attribute, check the appropriate box.

Float

Use the options in this section to indicate the float and critical items - calculated by the reschedule - you want to see on the chart, and which should be hidden. Use the Critical option to highlight critical segments.

Free

Any free float is displayed, or hidden. The symbol for free float is an empty, narrow bar drawn after or before a segment.

The shortcut for turning free float on and off is CTRL F.

Total

Any total float is displayed, or hidden. The symbol for total float is a line with a vertical bar, drawn after a segment.

The shortcut for turning total float on and off is CTRL T.

Critical

Any critical segments and links are highlighted, or not highlighted. The symbol for critical segment is a heavy border drawn around a segment. The border is red for colour screens and output. Critical links are in red and only displayed in colour.

The shortcut for turning critical shading on and off is CTRL C.

Progress

Any progressed segments and the chart report date are displayed or hidden.

The shortcut for displaying progress marking is CTRL P.

Baseline Progress

Any progressed segments and the chart report date are displayed or hidden.

The shortcut for displaying progress marking is CTRL P.

Links

Use the options in this section to indicate the links you want to see on your chart, and which links should be hidden.

Local

Any local links on the chart are displayed, or hidden. Local links can still be set when the display is Off. The shortcut for local links is CTRL L.

X-chart

Any X-chart links drawn on the chart are displayed, or hidden. X-chart links can still be set between charts when the display is Off. The shortcut for X-chart links is CTRL X.

Reflected

Any reflected links are displayed, or hidden. The shortcut for reflected links is CTRL R.

Miscellaneous

A number of additional attributes are included in this section.

Bar titles

The Bar Titles panel is displayed on the left of the chart, or hidden. The shortcut for Bar Titles panel is CTRL B. (This option has no effect on the column sheet.)

Segment titles

Any segment titles are displayed, or hidden.

You may want to change the bar height (using the Scale tab) to read segment titles easily. The shortcut to display segment titles is CTRL E.

Start flags

Any start flags on the chart are displayed, or hidden. The shortcut for start flags is CTRL S.

Grids

Any vertical grid lines are displayed, or hidden. The shortcut for the grid display is CTRL G.

When Annual numbering is selected the vertical grid lines on week boundaries are always drawn on Mondays.

Ruling lines

Any horizontal ruling lines are displayed, or hidden. The shortcut for ruling lines is CTRL - (minus key on the keypad).

Histogram ruling lines

This option is only available if you have a histogram locked onto a bar chart. Any horizontal ruling lines on the locked on histogram are displayed or hidden. The shortcut for ruling lines is CTRL - (minus key on the keypad).

Annotations

You can annotate your chart by adding text, graphics pictures and information taken from within the project. Turn the display of annotations on and off like other display attributes. The shortcut for turning annotations on and off is CTRL V.

Baseline Bars

Check this box if you want to display baseline bars from any open baselines on the bar chart. If you do not want to display baseline bars, or if you want to stop displaying baseline bars that are displayed, clear the box.

Column sheet

Check this box if you want to display the column sheet in the current chart window. Clear the box if you do not want the column sheet to be displayed.

Bar titles panel width

The Bar titles panel width can be adjusted. The current width is displayed.

Type the width you require for bar titles. The width produced on output is set to at least the number entered on the dialog.

You can also change the width of the Bar titles panel on the chart, by pointing to the junction between the chart and the bar titles panel and then dragging the side of the titles panel left or right to a new position.

Date zone

You can control the number of lines of date information (up to four) at the top of your chart, using the options in this section. The options are independent of each other, for example you can choose to display the Year and Units lines, or just the Month line. If you select all the options, four lines are displayed.

The top three lines show calendar dates:

Year: Shortcut CTRL Y.

Month: Shortcut CTRL M.

Week commencing (or Week ending): Shortcut CTRL D.

The bottom line displays the day or week number - relative to the start of the project.

The exact contents of this Unit line depend on the current chart time unit and the preference setting.

The shortcut for the Unit line is CTRL U.


Grid tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog

This tab is available when you choose the Chart - Customise menu command. The options on this tab let you change the grid settings for the active chart window.

Using the Grid tab you can:

Change the frequency and appearance of up to three types of vertical grid lines on a chart, showing your chosen time unit boundaries.

Add two types of horizontal ruling lines to your chart, for visual effect.

Insert ruling lines before, or remove ruling lines from, selected bars on your chart.

Define horizontal lines of histograms if they are locked on. You cannot define vertical histogram grid lines when a histogram is locked on, because these are taken from the bar chart.

Defining vertical grid lines

To define the grid lines, set a line appearance by clicking on the panel displaying the current line style then set the frequency of the grid by specifying both a number and a time unit.

Frequency

When you set the vertical grid, you must enter a number and choose a time unit to show the frequency of grids.

1	Type or select a number to indicate the number of time units, for example 10 weeks or 1 week.

2	Choose the time unit using the box arrows - click on the arrows at the side of the panel, to increase or decrease the time unit.

An extra type of time unit is available when setting the grid - Work units. If you choose Work units the position of the grid lines reflects the chart time unit.

Position of grid lines

Grid line positions are affected by your preference unit numbering option:

If Annual numbering is chosen, weekly grid lines always occur on Mondays.

If Sequential numbering is selected then the grid boundaries are affected by the Unit 0/1 at date.

For example, if the date is a Wednesday and the grid display time unit is in Weeks, then the week grid lines occur on a Wednesday.

Displaying the grids

You can choose to display any or all of the three vertical grids which you control independently. To display up to three grid lines:

Check the box to select the grid(s) you want displayed.

Defining horizontal ruling lines

To define horizontal lines:

1	Set the line appearance for ruling lines clicking on the panel displaying the current line style.

2	Set the frequency of two types of ruling line:

Regular - choose the frequency for repeating lines.

Before every subheading - bar title with no segments or a blank line

Every n lines, for example every 1 line or every 10 lines

Never

Specific - if you select bar lines before entering this dialog you can either:

Draw a ruling line above all selected bars using the line appearance in the panel.

Remove the Specific ruling lines from above the selected bars - Regular lines are not affected.

Leave the current selection unchanged.

A ruling line becomes one of a bar's attributes. If you move or copy the bar, the ruling line is also moved or copied. If you add a new subheading to your chart with Before every subheading active, a ruling line is automatically added to your chart. No ruling line is drawn above the first bar on a chart.

Defining histogram horizontal ruling lines

These options are only displayed on the tab if you have a histogram locked onto the bar chart. When you lock a histogram onto the bar chart, the histogram uses the same vertical grid lines as the chart, however, you can specify different horizontal ruling lines.

To define horizontal histogram lines:

1	Set the line appearance for primary and secondary ruling lines by clicking on the panel displaying the current line style.

2	Specify whether you want each horizontal line to be displayed in the background or the foreground of the histogram.

In foreground

By default, histogram horizontal ruling lines appear in the background of the histogram. This means that the lines are displayed behind any graphs that appear on the histogram display.

Check this box if you want the horizontal ruling line to appear in front of any graphs on the histogram.

Displaying horizontal lines

You can choose to display any or all of the two horizontal lines which you control independently. To display up to two grid lines:

Check the box alongside the grid(s) you want displayed.

To specify grid lines for a histogram that is displayed in a separate window, use the Grid tab on the Customise Histogram View dialog which you get to from the Histogram - Customise menu command.

Any grids or ruling lines which you have selected on this tab are only effective if the corresponding Grid, Ruling line and Histogram ruling lines display attributes are active.


Scale tab on Customise Barchart View dialog

This tab is available when you choose the Chart - Customise menu command or when you click the Chart Scale button on the Print dialog. The options on this tab let you change the scale settings for the chart in the active window.

Using the Scale tab you can:

Set scales for the screen display and for graphics output.

Change the horizontal scale of a chart.

Change the vertical scale of the chart, by controlling the height of bars and the spacing between them. You can also control the height and spacing of baseline bars and the gap between bars in the current project and baseline bars.

You can independently control the horizontal and vertical scales for the screen display and for output.

Device

Screen

You may choose to set small scales for the screen display to see more of your chart at one time. Segment titles may be difficult to read if you make the bar height very small. The screen option is disabled when you display this tab from the Print dialog.

Output

This option allows you to set the scales for the output chart. The scales control the output chart size, which is displayed on the Print dialog. If necessary, you can adjust the scales to affect the chart size.

Project Vertical scale

You control the vertical scale by setting the height of bars, and the size of the spacing between bars. An example of two linked bars is shown on this tab so that you can see the effects of your changes.

Baseline Vertical scale

You can also control the vertical scale by setting the height of any baseline bars that appear on the bar chart, the spacing between baseline bars and the gap between the bar in the current project and the first baseline bar displayed underneath it. Two baseline bars are displayed underneath the first bar in the Sample panel at the foot of the tab, so you can see the effects of any changes you make to the height, spacing and gap of baseline bars.

Project Horizontal scale

The largest scale available for the chart depends on the duration of the chart and is displayed below the scale line. The longer the chart duration, the smaller the maximum scale will be. The smallest possible scale is 52 Weeks per Inch or 21 Weeks per Centimetre.

To set the horizontal scale enter the number of time units. The number entered must be between 1 and 52.

Synchronise screen and output settings

Check this box if you want to set the same scale for both screen and output. This saves you from setting the output scale separately when you come to output the chart.


Line Appearance dialog

You can choose a colour for the line, and one of nine styles. Your choice is displayed in the Appearance panel at the foot of the dialog.

Confirm by OK. Cancel returns to the Grid tab on the Customise Histogram View dialog without changing the appearance.


Edit - Undo All menu command

This menu command lets you undo all the changes you have made since you last saved the chart and column sheet. (This menu command is only active when some changes have been made to the active chart.)

When you use this command:

any changes to the chart since it was last saved are lost and the chart as it was when last saved is restored

any changes to the column sheet since it was last saved as a column layout are lost, and the column sheet as it was when last saved is restored.

You can abandon a chart after a chart reschedule, but not after a branch reschedule.

If you have the same chart open in more than one window, the Undo All menu command affects all the windows onto the same chart.

This command is not available if you have made changes to the column sheet but not to the chart. If you want to undo changes to the column sheet without changing the chart, you can close the chart without saving the column layout, or reapply the current column layout.


Edit - Cut menu command

This menu command deletes whole selected bar lines or annotations from their current position and places them onto the Clipboard. When the column sheet is displayed, you can also use this menu command to cut columns from the column sheet in the active chart window.

Once you have used this command, the Edit - Paste menu command is available - so you can move the cut items to another location.

If you use Cut, any links will be broken, and connections to baseline bars will be lost. If you want to maintain links or connections to baseline bars, drag the bar to its new position.

You can cut selected bars by right-clicking on one of the selected bars and choosing Cut from the popup menu that appears. Any links on the selected bars will be lost. You can cut columns from the column sheet by right-clicking on a column heading and selecting Cut from the popup menu that appears.

From Bar Chart/ From Histogram

If you have a histogram locked onto a bar chart and have items selected on the bar chart and the histogram, a submenu appears when you choose the Edit - Cut menu command. The commands displayed on the submenu allow you to specify whether you want to cut items from the bar chart or from the histogram.

If you have more than one histogram locked onto the bar chart and choose the From Histogram command, PowerProject cuts the items selected on the active histogram to the Clipboard.

When you cut text annotations from a chart or histogram, you can paste the text into another program and edit it as text.


Edit - Copy menu command

This menu command copies whole selected bar lines or annotations to the Clipboard without affecting the original items. When the column sheet is displayed, you can also use this menu command to copy columns from the column sheet in the active chart window.

Once you have used this command, the Edit - Paste menu command is available - so you can copy to another location.

You can copy selected bars by right-clicking on one of the selected bars and choosing Copy from the popup menu that appears. Any links on the selected bars will not be copied. You can copy individual columns from the column sheet by right-clicking on a column heading and selecting Copy from the popup menu that appears.

From Bar Chart/ From Histogram

If you have a histogram locked onto a bar chart and have items selected on the bar chart and the histogram, a submenu appears when you choose the Edit - Copy menu command. The commands displayed on the submenu allow you to specify whether you want to copy items from the bar chart or from the histogram.

If you have more than one histogram locked onto the bar chart and choose the From Histogram command, PowerProject copies the items selected on the active histogram to the Clipboard.

When you copy text annotations from a chart or histogram, you can paste the text into another program and edit it as text.


Edit - Paste menu command

Choose this menu command to insert the contents of the Clipboard above the selected bar, or at the end of the chart if no bar is selected.

Bar lines or annotations can be cut or copied in PowerProject and then pasted using this command. When the column sheet is displayed, you can use this menu command to paste columns from the Clipboard into the active chart window.

A list of bar titles can be created using a word processor, or the Windows Notepad accessory. The bar titles can be copied or cut to the Clipboard, from where they can be pasted into a PowerProject chart to create sub-headings.

When you have cut or copied bars to the Clipboard, you can paste them into the chart above a selected bar by right-clicking on the selected bar and choosing Paste from the popup menu that appears. If you have cut or copied a column from the column sheet, you can paste it into the column sheet by right-clicking on a column heading and selecting Paste from the popup menu that appears. The column will be inserted in front of the column on which you right-clicked.

To Bar Chart/ To Histogram

If you have a histogram locked onto a bar chart and the items stored in the Clipboard could be pasted to the bar chart or the histogram, a submenu appears when you choose the Edit - Paste menu command. The commands displayed on the submenu allow you to specify whether you want to copy items from the Clipboard to the bar chart or to the histogram.

If you have more than one histogram locked onto the bar chart and choose the To Histogram command, PowerProject pastes the items to the active histogram.


Edit - Insert menu command

This menu command allows you to create a new bar line anywhere on the bar chart.

To make this menu command active first select a bar or segment. After choosing the menu command a new bar line is created at the selected bar's position. All other bar lines are moved down the chart to make way for the new line.

The keyboard shortcut is INS.

When a column is selected in the column sheet, select this command to insert a blank column on the left of the selected column.

You can also insert a bar by right-clicking on a segment and choosing Insert from the popup menu that appears. You can also insert a column by right-clicking on a column heading and selecting Insert Blank from the popup menu that appears.


Edit - Delete menu command

This menu command allows you to delete a single segment, a whole bar, an annotation or a link, or any combination or group of these items. When the column sheet is displayed, you can also use this menu command to delete columns from the column sheet in the active chart window. This command is only active when an item, or group of items, is selected on a bar chart or on a histogram.

If you have items selected on both a bar chart and a histogram that is locked onto a bar chart, a submenu is displayed, which allows you to specify whether you want to delete items from the bar chart or the histogram.

Confirmation is not requested if you are deleting:

A single segment without links attached.

A single local link.

An untitled sub-heading bar.

A single annotation.

The keyboard shortcut is DEL. If you are editing an annotation, DEL deletes a single character to the right of the cursor.

In addition to using this menu command, you can also delete one or more selected bars by right-clicking on one of the selected bars and choosing Delete from the popup menu that appears. You can delete one or more selected segments by right-clicking on one of the selected segments and choosing Delete from the popup menu that appears. You can delete a column by right-clicking on the column heading and selecting Delete from the popup menu that appears.

The Delete Items dialog is presented for confirmation when you are deleting groups of items.

Provided you do not save the chart, deleted items can be recovered by abandoning the chart.

Note: This menu command is disabled if you have only VIEW Access Rights for a chart.

If all the segments in a chart are deleted:

The chart and the owning bar have a duration of zero.

The chart bounds meet to show a fully shaded chart.

The owning segment has a duration of zero.

From Bar Chart/ From Histogram

If you have a histogram locked onto a bar chart and you have items selected on the bar chart and on the histogram, a submenu appears when you choose the Edit - Delete command. The commands displayed on the submenu allow you to specify whether you want to delete items that are selected on the bar chart, or on the histogram.

If you have more than one histogram locked onto a bar chart and choose the From Histogram command, PowerProject deletes items from the active histogram.


Edit - Details menu command

This menu command lets you view and edit information about the active project, active chart, selected bars, selected segments, selected links, active histogram, selected columns and selected annotations.

Using the [image] button when an item is selected has the same effect as choosing this menu command.

When you choose this command, the tabbed Details dialog appears. The tabs available on the Details dialog depend on the items that are selected (if any) when you choose the Edit - Details command. When you have an annotation selected and you choose this command, the relevant annotation Details dialog appears.

When no items are selected, right-clicking on the bar chart and choosing Details from the popup menu that appears will display the Details dialog with the Project and Chart tabs available. Right-clicking on a selected bar or segment and choosing Details from the popup menu that appears will display the Details dialog with the Project, Chart, Bar and Segment tabs available.

This menu command lets you:

Examine and change details of the active project on the Project tab of the Details dialog.

Examine and change details of the active chart on the Chart tab of the Details dialog.

Examine and change the settings of selected bars on the Bar tab of the Details dialog.

Examine and change the settings of selected segments on the Segment tab of the Details dialog.

Examine, but not alter the details of selected local or X-chart links on the Link tab on the Details dialog.

Examine and change details of the active histogram on the Histogram tab of the Details dialog.

Examine and change the settings of selected columns on the Column tab of the Details dialog.

When you choose this command to edit an annotation, you can:

Examine and change the settings of selected picture annotations on the Picture Details dialog.

Examine and change the settings of selected text annotations on the Text Details dialog.

Examine and change the settings of line or shape annotations on the Shape/Line Details dialog.


Details dialog

This dialog appears when no annotations are selected and you choose Details from the Edit menu or click on the [image] button. When an annotation is selected, the relevant annotation Details dialog appears when you select the Edit - Details command.

The tabs available on the tabbed Details dialog depend on the items that are selected (if any) when you choose the Edit - Details command. The options on each tab are explained below. Click on the name of the tab for which you want Help.

Project

Chart

Bar

Segment

Link

Histogram

Column

Leaving the dialog

When you have finished editing the options on the Details dialog and wish to return to the bar chart, confirm by OK. If you wish to return to the bar chart without the changes to the last item being effective, choose Cancel.

The changes you make on the Chart, Bar and Segment tabs are not permanently saved to disk when you click on OK. To permanently save this information with the bar chart, use Chart - Save. You can abandon changes you have made on the Chart, Bar and Segment tabs - and also on the bar chart - since the last time you saved the information, using the Edit - Undo All command. Using Edit - Undo All will not abandon changes you made on the Project, Histogram or Column tabs.


Edit - Resources menu command

This menu command allows you to assign permanent and consumable resources to selected bars and segments from the bar chart. You can also assign resource groups. Resources and groups are assigned on a segment basis, so you can have different resources assigned to different segments on the same bar.

When you choose this menu command the Resources selector is presented. This dialog allows you to specify the resources you want to assign and the amount you want to assign. It also allows you to model the assignment of resources.

You can also select this command by right-clicking on a selected segment and choosing Resources from the popup menu that appears.


Edit - Fixed Costs menu command

This menu command allows you to assign fixed costs from a cost centre to selected bars and segments from the bar chart. Fixed costs are assigned on a segment basis, so you can have different costs assigned to different segments on the same bar.

When you choose this menu command the Fixed Costs selector is presented. This dialog allows you to specify how much the cost will be, which cost centre it is associated with and whether the cost supplies (income) money to or uses (expenditure) money from a cost centre.

You can also select this command by right-clicking on a selected segment and choosing Fixed Costs from the popup menu that appears.


Edit - Multi Edit menu command

This menu command allows you to make the same changes to the settings on every selected bar and segment in a chart. You can also select this command by right-clicking on a selected segment and choosing Multi Edit from the popup menu that appears.

When one or more columns are selected in the column sheet, this menu command lets you make changes to all the selected columns.

When bars or segments are selected and you choose this menu command, the Multiple Bar Edit dialog appears. This dialog allows you access to the:

Multiple Segment Edit dialog where you can make changes to the settings for the selected segments.

Multiple Resource Edit selector where you can make changes to the resources assigned to the selected segments.

Multiple Fixed Cost Edit selector where you can make changes to the fixed costs assigned to the selected segments.

Once you have entered details of the changes, you can automatically apply the changes to every selected item or you can confirm the changes before they are made to each individual item.

When one or more columns are selected and you choose this command, the Multiple Column Edit dialog appears.


Edit - Search & Select menu command

This menu command allows you to select the bars or segments in the chart which meet the criteria you specify in one quick operation. The Search dialog is presented.

You can add to, and subtract from, the group of selected items after you have used Search & Select by selecting further items.

Once all the items you want are selected you can:

Alter progress details.

Edit the items one by one.

Multi Edit the items globally.

Move and/or copy the items.

Delete all the items.


Edit - Select Current menu command

This menu command allows you to select a single bar for editing.

With the current bar line selected you can now:

Delete the bar.

Move or copy the bar.

Add progress to the bar.

Draw a ruling line above the current bar.

The shortcuts to select a whole bar are:

Click on the bar line's number in the bar number column.

SHIFT-click on any , or the bar title. To select a subsequent bar CTRL SHIFT­click on another bar.


Edit - Select All menu command

This menu command allows you to select all the bars on the chart in one operation.

Once all the bars have been selected they can be deleted, moved or copied.

This is a useful way to see all the bars - including blank bars - which make up your chart.


Edit - Select Included Tasks menu command

This menu command lets you select all the bars in a summary group. This command is only available when a summary bar is selected.

To select all the bars in a summary group, select the summary bar of the summary group then choose Select Included Tasks from the Edit menu. All the bars in the summary group are selected and the summary bar itself is deselected.


Edit - DDE Links menu command

If you have created any DDE links you can use this command to:

See details of the links.

Update the annotation with data from the linked program.

Edit the link details.

Start or close a link.

The DDE Link Editor dialog is displayed.


Project tab on Details dialog

This tab is available when a project is active and the Edit - Details menu command is chosen or [image] is clicked.

This tab lets you enter or change information about the project or about a baseline. You can edit the information at any time in an existing project.

Project title

The project title is used throughout PowerProject for dialog and output titles.

It can be up to 40 characters, but cannot be blank, or made up of just spaces.

The project title is different from the file name under which the project data base is saved on disk.

Project start date

Any valid date can be used as the base date for the project.

The earliest date available is January 1 1901 and the latest December 31 2099.

You can change this date later. However, this changes the dates for all the segments and holidays on calendars in the project. If the start of your project is delayed, the start of the root chart can be easily adjusted by setting the chart report date, or assigning start flags to the new start without changing the project start date.

Project End date

The project end date always shows the latest date of any segment in the project. You cannot edit the project end date.

Project report date

The project report date is the earliest of all the chart report dates in the project. You cannot edit the project report date here

For

This field is available to you to use as you like. For example, make notes about who the project is for. Any text can be included in chart borders.

By

This field is available to you to use as you like. For example, make notes about who is carrying out the project. Any notes can be included in chart borders.

Baseline Project Dates

The fields in this panel display information about a baseline project created from the current project.

By default PowerProject displays information about the earliest baseline. To display information about a different baseline project, select a baseline from the list box in this panel. You can only view information about baseline projects that are currently open within the current project.

Note: In a multi­user project you will be unable to edit the commands on this tab unless you have ALL Access Rights for the root chart.


Chart tab on Details dialog

This tab is available when a chart window is active and the Edit - Details menu command is chosen or [image] is clicked.

This tab lets you add your own information to a chart for reference or output, and lets you view a summary of the chart details which you can include in the border of your output charts.

The name of the active chart is displayed towards the top of the tab.

In the Chart History panel you can enter your own reference notes about the chart which you can include when it is output.

You cannot make any changes to the information in the Current Chart and Baseline Chart panels, but you can include it on output.

Chart History

You may want to add your own references and other information to the chart when it is output. All the panels in the top of this dialog can be included as tokens in the border for the output chart.

To enter any of the following details, locate the text cursor in the appropriate field and enter text or a date

Author

Manager

Comment

Program number

Issue date

Revision number

Revision date

Revision comment

Date fields on this dialog can be filled with spaces only, but if this field is referred to by a token in a border it will not be reproduced if spaces have been used.

Current chart and baseline chart details

By default, the Current option is selected so that the Chart History panel displays information about charts from the current project. However, if you have created baselines of charts from the current project, you can also add or view information about the currently selected baseline, by clicking on the Baseline option.

The name or summary comment of the currently selected baseline is displayed in the list box at the top of the Baseline Chart panel. To display chart information from another baseline project, select a different baseline from the list box in the Baseline Chart panel of the dialog.

If you do not have a baseline open in the current project, the Baseline option and the Baseline list box are disabled.

Current Chart

The information displayed in this panel of the dialog is for information only, but it can be included on output.

Baseline Chart

The information displayed in this panel is for information only. It displays information about a baseline chart created from the current chart. To specify which baseline chart you want to display information about, select a baseline from the list box at the top of this panel. This list box displays only baselines that are open within the current project.


Bar tab on Details dialog

This tab is available when a bar or bars and segments are selected on the bar chart and the Edit - Details menu command is chosen or [image] is clicked.

If you select a baseline bar, the Bar tab displays information about the baseline bar only. You cannot change any baseline bar information on this tab.

This tab contains all the relevant information about a bar on the bar chart. You can examine the status of a bar and change certain settings to affect how the bar appears on the bar chart. Some of the information on the tab is initially affected by your settings on the Bar Defaults tab of the Options dialog.

Moving from bar to bar

You can examine the details of every selected bar in the chart without leaving this tab, by clicking on the Previous and Next buttons.

These buttons are disabled if you have only selected one bar and when you are at the first and last selected bar in the group.

Using either of these buttons, or the equivalent shortcuts is the same as accepting any changes you have made to the bar details currently displayed.

Changing bar details

Some parts of the Bar tab cannot be changed and only supply information. Other parts of the dialog can be changed and affect the appearance of the bar chart.

Bar title

You can enter or change the bar title. Type any combination of letters and numbers up to 60 characters. The title of an expanded bar must contain at least one letter and cannot be made up of just spaces.

The bar title can be displayed on the bar chart if desired (using the Appearance tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog) and on reports - see File - Print Text - Bar Report.

You can filter on bar titles. See Filter Options for details.

Title appearance

You can set the colour and style of the text you enter for the bar title. A sample of the current colour and style settings is shown beside the Appearance button.

1	Click on the Appearance button, and the Select Title Appearance dialog is presented.

2	To choose the colour, click on your chosen colour in the colour panel. The number of colour boxes displayed depends on the number of colours supported by your monitor.

3	To set the style, click on the button for the style, or combination of styles you want when you type new bar titles. You can choose - Bold, Italic, Underlined.

4	To switch off a selected style, simply click on it.

5	To switch all selected styles off and return to the normal text style, click the Normal button.

Each time you click to change the colour or style, the 'Example bar title' at the foot of the Select Title Appearance dialog immediately reflects your choice.

6	Confirm by OK. Cancel returns to the Bar tab without changing the appearance.

Position

The position of an uncompleted bar after a reschedule -within its free float amount - is governed by this option. The initial setting is affected by your settings on the Bar Defaults tab of the Options dialog.

Click on ASAP to position the bar to start As Soon As Possible.

Click on ALAP to position the bar to start As Late As Possible.

Segment locking

When a bar has more than one uncompleted segment, their position after a reschedule is governed by this option. The initial setting is affected by your settings on the Bar Defaults tab of the Options dialog.

Locked to ensure all segments are locked together for unbroken working. This is useful when you have two or more segments on a bar and, although the logic of the project means that there is a gap between the segments, you want to force the segments to take place continuously because (for example) it is cheaper for you to employ a resource to work constantly on the segments rather than stopping and starting.

Unlocked to allow segments to move independently for intermittent or staggered working.

Current Bar and Baseline Bar

The information displayed in these panels allows you to see details about the currently selected bar and the details about any corresponding baseline bars. Select a currently open baseline from the list box to see information about bars in a baseline.

Bar duration - Information only

Bar start date - Information only

Bar end date - Information only

Total float - Information only

Displays the total float, in working time unit, excluding holidays, for the last segment of the bar.

When segments are unlocked, segments other than the last one may have different amounts of float. You can see the total float for each segment on the Segment tab of the Details dialog.

When a bar is expanded into a chart the total float is the latest total float amount for all subordinate segments.

Free float - Information only

Displays the free float, in working time units, excluding holidays, for the last segment of the bar.

When segments are unlocked, segments may have different amounts of float. You can see the free float for each segment on the Segment tab of the Details dialog.

The free float amount (or delay) is displayed as a negative number if the bar is in its ALAP position.

When a bar is expanded into a chart, the free float is the earliest free float amount for all subordinate segments in the ALAP position.

Percentage completed - Information only

For owning bars, the figure represents the percentage completed on all subordinate segments.

Number of segments - Information only

Bar expanded - Information only

Displays whether the bar is expanded into a further chart, and is itself an owning bar.

Start variance - Information only

Displays the difference between the start date of the current bar and the start date of the corresponding baseline bar. For example, if the start date of the baseline bar is 3 days after the start date of the corresponding baseline bar, "3 Days late" is displayed in this field.

End variance - Information only

Displays the difference between the end date of the current bar and the end date of the corresponding baseline bar. For example, if the end date of the baseline bar is 2 days before the end date of the corresponding baseline bar, "2 Days early" is displayed in this field.

Cost from - Information only

Displays the total cost of the bar from all or a single cost centre. The total cost of a bar, includes any fixed costs and any resource costs assigned to the segments that make up the bar. The list box allows you to specify whether you want to see the bar cost from all cost centres or from just one cost centre.

By default, Not specified appears in the drop-down list box so no cost is displayed, as it may take some time to calculate the cost of the bar. Select the All cost centres option or a particular cost centre from the drop-down list box depending on whether you want to see the cost of the bar from all cost centres or just one.

Note: The maximum value that can be displayed in the Cost from field is 19,999,999.99.

Bar Library 1 and Bar Library 2

On the Bar tab of the Details dialog, the code library names Bar Library 1 and Bar Library 2 are substituted by titles of your choice - see Admin - Code libraries.

Select these options to set the code to use for this bar from Bar Library 1 and Bar Library 2.

The codes initially displayed on the chart and on the Bar tab are set by your preferences - see Admin - Code libraries.

If a code has been assigned and then deleted from a Code library it is replaced by the default code.

To change a code, click on the list box for Bar Library 1 or Bar Library 2. Through this you can choose any code in the library.

Bar appearance

The names of the codes selected and the appearance of the codes is displayed

If you select Bar Library 1 on the Appearance tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog, the bar is displayed with the appearance you have selected from the Bar Library 1 library of codes on the Bar tab of the Details dialog. If you select the Bar Library 2 library, then the bar is displayed with the appearance you have selected from the Bar Library 2 library of codes

Calendar

Select this option to change the calendar associated with this bar. The calendar information affects the timing of the segments - and if it is linked to other segments it could affect these also.

To assign a different calendar to the bar, click on the Calendar list box and select a calendar from the list available. If the bar is in a subchart, the owning bar's calendar will be shown by default until you select an alternative.

As different bars can have different calendars, the holiday and weekend display on the bar chart may be different for each bar.

If a calendar has been assigned and then deleted from the project it is replaced by the System calendar.

Owning Bar

You can assign one calendar to an owning bar and different calendars to the subordinate bars. The calendar assigned to the owning bar does not affect the calendars on the subordinate bars.

Effectively the calendar assigned to an owning bar is for display purposes only, and does not affect the durations or working periods of the subordinate bars. For example, you could create a calendar for an owning bar to show just the common weekends of calendars assigned to the subordinate bars, then display the weekends on the owning bar. This will give you a visual reminder of the working periods in the subchart.

Note: In a multi-user project the calendar list box is disabled if you do not have EDIT Access Rights for the chart, or if you do not have VIEW Access Rights for calendars.

Work Breakdown No.

The WBN code of the bar is displayed. You can edit this code by deleting the code that is displayed and replacing it with the characters you want. The code can be up to 21 characters.

You can filter on WBN codes. See Filter Options for details.

If you do not want the bar’s WBN code to be updated when you renumber the work breakdown, check the Don’t Renumber box.


Select Title Appearance dialog

You can change the bar title and its appearance on this dialog. You reach this dialog from the Bar Titles panel and from the bar title panel in the status line. The bar title can also be edited on the Bar tab of the Details dialog and in the column sheet.

A bar title can be a maximum of 60 characters long.

You can set the colour and style of the bar title. The number of colour boxes displayed depends on the number of colours supported by your computer. To choose the colour, click on your chosen colour in the colour panel.

You can choose any, all, or a combination of styles for the bar title: Bold, Italic, Underlined. To set the style, click on the button for the style, or combination of styles you want when you type a new bar title. To switch off a selected style, simply click on it

To switch all selected styles off and return to the normal text style, click the Normal button.

Each time you change the colour or style, the example bar title at the foot of the dialog immediately reflects your choice.

You can work through all the titles on the chart by using the Next and Previous buttons. The Previous button is disabled when you are on the first bar of the chart, and the Next button is disabled when you are on the last bar of the chart.

You can also use the [image] [image] [image] to change the formatting of bar titles.


Segment tab on Details dialog

This tab is available when bars or segments are selected on the bar chart and the Edit - Details menu command is chosen. If a segment was selected then details of that segment are presented. If a bar was selected then details of the first uncompleted segment on the bar are presented.

Moving from segment to segment

You can examine the details for every selected segment in the chart by clicking on the Previous and Next buttons.

Current Segment

The fields in this panel display information about the current segment. If you have baselines open within the current project, information about a corresponding baseline segment is also displayed in the Baseline Segment panel.

Segment Title

You can enter or change the segment title (16 characters long) by clicking on the panel to locate the text cursor and editing the text. Each time the first segment of a bar is created the segment text is taken from your preferences.

The segment title can be displayed on the bar chart if desired

If the current segment has no corresponding baseline segment, 'No Match' is displayed alongside the Title field in the Baseline Segment panel.

You can filter on segment titles. See Filter Options for details.

Automatic segment numbering

You can include special characters in segment titles.

Use the # symbol to display the segment number with any other text. For example, if you type the segment title -Hole# - it is displayed as - Holesegment number, -, Hole6.

Use the % symbol to display the segment number with a leading space and any other text. For example if you type the segment title - Hole% - it is displayed as - Hole 6.

Set up the initial Segment title as a preference option - see the options on the Bar Defaults tab on the Options dialog. The first segment on the bar takes this title. Each time you create a new segment on the bar, the previous segment's title is copied into the new segment.

The segments on a bar are not renumbered if a segment is split through being assigned partial progress - see Task - Enter Progress. Both parts of the segment share the old number. For example, if the segment titled Hole 2 became a split segment, there would be four segments on the bar: Hole 1, Hole 2, Hole 2, Hole 3. However, segments are renumbered if you split them using the Task - Split Segments command.

Segment duration - Information only

Segment start date - Information only

Segment end date - Information only

Total float - Information only, in working time units, excluding holidays, for the segment.

Free float - Information only, in working time units, excluding holidays, for the segment.

The free float amount is displayed as a negative number if the bar is in its ALAP position - see the Bar tab on the Details dialog.

Note: Float values are only correct after a reschedule. Float values can be affected by the Project/Chart float setting in your preferences - see the Reschedule tab on the Options dialog.

Percentage complete - Information only

Displays the percentage of the segment which has been completed by adding progress using the Enter Progress dialog. See also Task - Enter Progress.

Start flag

Displays whether a segment has an imposed start flag set on the bar chart. The panel displays NOT SET if no start flag is present, or displays the start flag date when present.- this may be edited. Click on the date to locate the text cursor. The date format is affected by your settings on the Numbering tab of the Options dialog.

Start flag gap - Information only

This shows the distance between the start flag date and the current start of the segment in the time units selected in the Chart menu. If the start flag is at the start of the segment, the gap is displayed as 0 Weeks. If the bar moves for any reason (due to a reschedule, the start flag date being edited, or the segment being moved on the chart for example) the Start flag gap shows the slippage from the original position.

Critical/Not critical - Information only.

This is only correct after a reschedule of the chart.

Force critical

Check this box to mark a segment as critical, and hold it as critical, regardless of the effects of a reschedule. This facility is used to mark segments indicating sectional completion where, although not on the primary critical path, subsequent sections are dependant on earlier sections being completed. Normally, you should allow PowerProject's reschedule facility to calculate and mark critical segments.

Cost from - Information only

Displays the total cost of the segment from all or a single cost centre. The total cost of a segment, includes any fixed costs and any resource costs assigned to the segment. The list box allows you to specify whether you want to see the segment cost from all cost centres or from just one cost centre.

By default, Not specified appears in the drop-down list box so no cost is displayed, as it may take some time to calculate the cost of the segment. Select the All cost centres option or a cost centre from the drop down list box depending on whether you want to see the cost of the bar from all cost centres or just one.

The maximum value that can be displayed in the Cost from field is 19,999,999.99.

User text

You can enter a string of up to 12 characters that you want to associate with the segment. The string can be displayed in annotation tokens, text reports and the column sheet.

User number1/User number2

In each of the User number boxes, you can enter a string of up to 11 digits that you want to associate with the segment. The strings can be displayed in annotation tokens, text reports and the column sheet.

Baseline Segment

The Baseline Segment panel of the Segment tab on the Details dialog displays information about the baseline segment alongside the corresponding information about the current segment. The information in this panel is for information only.

Seg Library 1 and Seg Library 2

Note: On the Segment tab on the Details dialog, the code library names Seg Library 1 and Seg Library 2 are substituted by titles of your choice - see Admin - Code Libraries.

Select these options to set the code to use for this segment from Seg Library 1 and Seg Library 2. The library name, code name and the segment appearance for the code name you select are displayed on the Segment tab of the Details dialog. To add codes to the libraries, see - Admin - Code libraries.

If a code has been assigned and then deleted from the Code library it is replaced by the default code.

To change a code, click on the list box for Seg Library 1 or Seg Library 2. Through this you can choose any code in the library.

Segment appearance

You can choose one code for a segment from each of the segment libraries. The names of the codes selected and their appearance are displayed

End Date Preferences

This check box is only enabled when the current segment is a milestone. Check the Show Earlier Date box if you want the milestone's end date to be shown as the day of ending rather than the following morning. (You must select the Show Earlier Date option on the General tab of the Options dialog for this option to take effect.)

For example, if a task ends on Tuesday afternoon, and you have a milestone marking the end of that task, check the Show Earlier Date box to ensure that the milestone's end date is shown as Tuesday afternoon instead of Wednesday morning. (End dates can be shown in text reports, export files and annotation tokens.)

The end dates of segments other than milestones are adjusted using the Show Earlier Date box on the General tab of the Options dialog.


Link tab on Details dialog

This tab is available when one or more links are selected in the active chart. It displays information about the tasks at the start and end of each selected link. You cannot change the information on this dialog; links can only be changed on the bar chart. If you have selected more than one link, use the Next and Previous buttons to move back and forth through them, viewing details on each link in turn.

This tab is useful for seeing details about a link connecting a segment which is not in view in the current chart window.

The chart titles are always the same for local links and always different for X-chart links.

Reflected links cannot be selected and are not shown on this dialog.

You can include details about links in a link text report.


Histogram tab on Details dialog

This tab is available when a histogram window is active. The fields on this tab vary depending on whether the active histogram is a permanent resource histogram, consumable resource histogram, or cost centre histogram.

See Permanent Resource Histogram Report Details for more details on the options available for a permanent resource histogram report.

See Consumable Resource Histogram Report Details for more details on the options available for a consumable resource histogram report.

See Cost Centre Histogram Report Details for more details on the options available for a cost centre histogram report.


Multiple Bar Edit dialog

This dialog is presented once the Edit - Multi Edit menu command is chosen. The dialog allows you to make the same changes to the settings on every selected bar and segment in a chart.

Once you have entered details of the changes you can choose either to automatically apply the changes to every selected bar and segment, or to confirm the changes before making them to each individual segment or bar.

When to use Multi Edit

Use this option when you want to change a number of bars and segments to the same setting, for example to add a new resource to a group of bars, change the cost centre for a group of bars, or change the code used from a particular library.

As you choose this command to apply global changes, you would often have selected a group of items via the Search dialog.

If you want to apply changes to segments, click on the Segment button to display the Multiple Segment Edit dialog.

Updating the bars and segments

To apply the changes you have entered to all selected bars or segments, click OK.

If you do not want to update all selected bars or segments, click on one of the options in the Confirm Changes section and choose which items to update through the Confirm Changes dialog.

If you have elected to confirm changes, then on choosing OK, confirmation that changes should be applied to each item is sought.

Bar title

You can enter the bar title to be applied to the selected bars, or alter the existing text for bar titles.

Type any combination of letters and numbers up to 60 characters long to replace any current titles

Alter the existing bar title using - , + or =.

Use - followed by text to delete this string of text from each selected bar title. For example to remove 'First floor' from each selected bar, type -First floor in the Bar title panel.

Use + followed by text to add more text to an existing title. For example to add 'Second floor' to the end of all selected bars' titles, type +Second floor in the Bar title panel.

Use = to replace one string of text with another. For example, to replace First floor with Second floor, type First=Second in the Bar titles panel.

Title appearance

You can set the colour and style of the text you have entered for the bar title, or change the appearance of all existing bar titles for the bars you have selected.

Click on the Select button if you want to change the Title appearance, and the Select Title Appearance dialog is presented.

Position

The position of an uncompleted bar after a reschedule -within its free float amount - is governed by this option. Click on ASAP to position the bars to start As Soon As Possible. Click on ALAP to position the bars to start As Late As Possible.

Segment locking

To set the position of uncompleted segments belonging to the selected group of bars after a reschedule:

Click on Locked to ensure all segments are locked together for continuous or unbroken working; click on Unlocked to allow segments to move independently for intermittent or staggered working.

Bar Library 1 and Bar Library 2

Note: On the Multiple Bar Edit dialog, the code library names Bar Library 1 and Bar Library 2 are substituted by titles of your choice - see Admin - Code Libraries.

Select these options to set the code to use for the group of selected bars from Bar Library 1 and Bar Library 2. The library name, code name and the bar appearance for the code name you select are displayed on the dialog.

To change a code, click on the list box for Bar Library 1 or Bar Library 2. Through this you can choose any code in the library.

Calendar

Use this option to select the calendar associated with the selected bars. Click on the list box to select the calendar.

Resources button

Click this button if you want to add to, delete or adjust the resources already assigned to a group of selected segments. Clicking this button presents the Multiple Resource Edit selector.

Fixed Costs button

Click this button if you want to add to, delete or adjust the fixed costs already assigned to a group of selected segments. Clicking this button presents the Multiple Fixed Costs selector.


Multiple Segment Edit dialog

This dialog is reached when you click on the Segment button on the Multiple Bar Edit dialog

Segment title

You can enter the title to be used on all selected segments.

Type any combination of letters and numbers up to 16 characters long to replace any current titles. You can include the # or % characters as usual if you want to display the segment number as part of the title.

Alter the existing segment titles using -, + or =. These editing features are the same as for Bar titles

Force critical

Check this check box to mark all segments as critical, regardless of the effects of a reschedule. This facility is used to mark segments indicating sectional completion. This overrides PowerProject's reschedule facility which calculates and marks critical segments.

Seg Library 1 and Seg Library 2

Note: On the Multiple Segment Edit dialog, the code library names Seg Library 1 and Seg Library 2 are substituted by titles of your choice - see Admin - Code Libraries.

Select these options to set the code to use for the selected segments from Seg Library 1 and Seg Library 2. The library name, code name and the segment appearance for the code name you select are displayed . To change a code, click on the list box for Seg Library 1 or Seg Library 2.


Multiple Resource Edit selector

This dialog is presented when you click on the Resources button from the Multiple Bar Edit dialog. Multi editing resources is useful if you want to assign the same resources to more than one segment. It is also useful if you need to remove a resource or alter the resource allocated on a number of segments.

Type

Click on Permanent or Consumable to specify whether you want to edit the assignment of permanent or consumable resources on the selected segments.

Not Edited

The resources displayed in this list are all the permanent or all the consumable resources stored in the Resource library.

Used

The Y or N that appears alongside each resource name in this column indicates whether or not that resource has already been assigned to one or more of the segments you have selected. Y means that the resource has already been assigned and N means that the resource has not yet been assigned to any of the selected segments.

When you have selected one or more resources from the Not Edited list you can:

Add the selected resource(s) to the all the selected segments.

Remove the selected resource(s) from any of the segments it is assigned to.

Change the allocation of the selected resource(s) on any of the segments it is assigned to, for example increase or decrease the amount of the resource allocated.

To perform any of these operations, select the resources you want to edit from the Not Edited list and click on the appropriate button to specify that you want to edit the resource assignment and how you want to edit it, for example whether you want to add or remove the resource.

Note: If you select several resources from the Not Edited list, only buttons that perform actions valid for all the selected resources are available. For example, if you select one resource that has already assigned to some of the selected segments and another resource that has not yet been assigned to any of the selected segments, only the ALLOCATE button is available.

Allocate button

Click on this button if you want to allocate the selected resource to all the selected segments. This moves the resource into the Edited list. Click in the Amount field and enter the amount of the resource you want to allocate. The amount you enter in this field replaces any allocations of the resource already assigned and the resource is added to segments which did not previously have this resource assigned.

Remove button

Click on this button if you want to remove the selected resource(s) from any of the selected segments it is already assigned to. If you are removing a resource, you cannot edit the Amount field.

This button is only available if you have selected resources that have already been assigned to one or more of the selected segments.

Increase button

Click on this button if you want to increase the amount of a resource already allocated to any of the selected segments. Enter the value by which you want to increase the amount of the resource allocated in the Amount field. This only affects segments that already have this resource assigned. Selected segments which do not have this resource assigned are unchanged.

This button is only available if you have selected resources that have already been assigned to one or more of the selected segments.

Decrease button

Click on this button if you want to decrease the amount of a resource already allocated to any of the selected segments. Enter the value by which you want to decrease the amount of resource allocated in the Amount field. This only affects segments that already have this resource assigned. Selected segments which do not have this resource assigned are unchanged.

This button is only available if you have selected resources that have already been assigned to one or more of the selected segments.

Model button

Click on this button if you want to change only the modelling information associated with the assignments of a resource already allocated to any of the selected segments. The selected resources are moved into the Edited list and the Modelling button becomes available. Click on the Modelling button to display the Permanent Resource Multiple Resource Modelling or the Consumable Resource Multiple Resource Modelling dialog.

You can also change the modelling information associated with resource assignments if you allocate, increase or decrease resource assignments, as these actions ensure that the Modelling button is available.

Ignore button

Click on this button if you want to cancel any of the resource assignment edits you have made. Select the resources from the Edited list and click on this button to move the resource back into the Not Edited list.

This button is only available when you select one or more resources from the Edited list.

Edited

Any resources that appear in this list are resources that you have edited. The type of edit you have made is displayed alongside the resource name.

Amount

If you are allocating a resource to all the selected segments, enter the amount of the resource you want to allocate in this column.

If you want to alter the amount of the resource already assigned to any of the selected segments, enter the amount by which you want to increase or decrease the allocation.

You cannot edit this field if you use the Remove or Model buttons, as these do not require you to change the amount of resource assigned.

Modelling button

Click this button to display the Modelling dialog. You must select one or more resources from the Edited list before this button is available.

If you are multi editing permanent resources the Multiple Permanent Resource Modelling dialog is displayed.

If you are multi editing consumable resource the Multiple Consumable Resource Modelling dialog is displayed.

Click on OK to confirm and return to the Multiple Bar Edit dialog.

Multi editing existing assignments with allocation profiles

If any of the resources you multi edit have already been assigned to any of the selected segments using an allocation profile, the Allocate, Increase and Decrease buttons have the following effects:

Allocate overwrites any variable allocation profiles with fixed allocations.

Increase increases each value (or node) in a profile by the amount specified.

Decrease decreases each value (or node) in a profile by the amount specified.

Multi editing existing modelled assignments

If any of the resources you multi edit have already been assigned and modelled on the selected segments, PowerProject ignores any multi edit changes that affect the amount of the resource allocated in the following circumstances:

If a resource is already modelled using the Fixed resource model. Once a resource assignment has been modelled using the Fixed model, you can only change information about the resource assignment from the Permanent Resource Modelling or Consumable Resource Modelling dialog.

If a resource is already modelled using the Proportional resource model and has a Balancing parameter of Allocation. Specifying Allocation as a Balancing parameter means that PowerProject automatically adjusts the allocation of the resource to take account of any changes made to the segment duration, therefore the user cannot change this information.


Multiple Permanent Resource Modelling dialog

This dialog is presented when you select one or more permanent resources and click on the Modelling button from the Multiple Resource Edit selector. It allows you to :

Change the cost centre for any resource costs associated with a resource assigned to the selected segments.

Change the resource model used to model assignments of a resources on the selected segments.

Cost centre

Click on the this field to display a list of the cost centres available from the Cost Centre Library. Select the cost centre that you want resource costs for the selected resource to come from on the selected segments. Selecting a cost centre checks the Cost centre check box. Clear this box if you want to leave the cost centres unchanged.

Modelling

Click on None, Fixed or Proportional to specify how you want all assignments of the selected resource to be modelled on the selected segments. Selecting a modelling option checks the Modelling check box. Clear this box if you want to leave the modelling unchanged

See the Permanent Resource Modelling dialog for more information on the different resource models available.

Next and Previous buttons

These buttons are only available if you selected more than one resource from the Multiple Resource Edit dialog.

Clicking on Next saves the information you have entered about the current resource and displays modelling information about the next resource selected.

Clicking on Previous saves the information you have entered about the current resource and displays modelling information about the previous resource selected.


Multiple Consumable Resource Modelling dialog

This dialog is presented when you select one or more consumable resources and click on the Modelling button from the Multiple Resource Edit selector. It allows you to :

Change the cost centre for any resource costs associated with a resource assigned to the selected segments.

Change the resource model used to model assignments of a resources on the selected segments.

Change whether the resource is supplied or consumed on the selected segments.

Cost centre

Click on the this field to display a list of the cost centres available from the Cost Centre Library. Select the cost centre that you want resource costs for the selected resource to come from on the selected segments. Selecting a cost centre checks the Cost centre check box. Clear this box if you want to leave the cost centres unchanged.

Modelling

Click on None, Proportional or Fixed to specify how you want all assignments of the selected resource to be modelled on the selected segments. Selecting a modelling option checks the Modelling check box. Clear this box if you want to leave the modelling unchanged.

See the Consumable Resource Modelling dialog for more information on the different resource models available.

Type

Click on Supplies or Consumes depending on whether you want the resource to be supplied to the selected segments or consumed by the selected segments. Selecting an option checks the Type check box. Clear this box if you want to leave the type of the resource unchanged.

Next and Previous buttons

These buttons are only available if you selected more than one resource from the Multiple Resource Edit dialog.

Clicking on Next saves the information you have entered about the current resource and displays modelling information about the next resource selected.

Clicking on Previous saves the information you have entered about the current resource and displays modelling information about the previous resource selected.


Multiple Fixed Cost Edit selector

This dialog is presented when you click on the Fixed Costs button from the Multiple Bar Edit dialog. Multi editing fixed costs is useful if you want to assign the same fixed cost to more than one segment. It is also useful if you need to remove fixed costs already assigned to a number of segments.

Not Edited

The cost centres displayed in this list are all the cost centres stored in the Cost Centre library.

Used

The Y or N that appears each cost centre name in this column indicates whether or not fixed costs from that cost centre have already been assigned to one or more of the segments you have selected. Y means that fixed costs from that cost centre have already been assigned and N means that no fixed costs from that cost centre have yet been assigned to any of the selected segments.

When you have selected one or more cost centres from this list you can:

Add a fixed cost from the selected cost centre(s) to the all the selected segments.

Remove fixed costs from the selected cost centre(s) from any of the segments that have fixed costs already assigned from this cost centre.

Change the amount of fixed costs already assigned from the cost centre to selected segments.

To perform any of these operations, select the cost centre(s) you want to edit from the Not Edited list and click on the appropriate button to specify that you want to edit the fixed cost assignment from this cost centre and how you want to edit it, for example whether you want to add or remove the fixed costs.

Allocate button

Click on this button if you want to allocate a fixed cost from the selected cost centre to all the selected segments. This moves the cost centre into the Edited list. Click in the Amount field and enter the amount of the fixed cost. The amount you enter in this field replaces any fixed costs already assigned from this cost centre and the cost is added to segments which did not previously have a fixed cost from this cost centre.

Remove button

Click on this button if you want to remove any fixed costs from the selected cost centre(s) from all the selected segments. If you are removing fixed costs, you cannot edit the Amount field.

This button is only available if you have selected cost centres that have fixed costs assigned from them to one or more of the selected segments.

Increase button

Click on this button if you want to increase the amount of fixed costs already assigned to any of the selected segments. Enter the value by which you want to increase the fixed costs in the Amount field. This only affects segments that already have a fixed cost from this cost centre assigned. Selected segments which do not have a fixed cost from this cost centre.

This button is only available if you have selected cost centres that have fixed costs assigned from them to one or more of the selected segments.

Decrease button

Click on this button if you want to decrease the amount of any fixed costs already assigned from this cost centre to any of the selected segments. Enter the value by which you want to decrease the fixed costs in the Amount field. This only affects segments that already have fixed costs from this cost centre assigned. Selected segments which do not have fixed costs from this cost centre assigned are unchanged.

This button is only available if you have selected cost centres that have fixed costs assigned from them to one or more of the selected segments.

Type button

Click on this button if you want to change the cost type of fixed cost assignments from a cost centre; that is whether the costs are providing income to a cost centre or are expenditure from a cost centre. The selected cost centres are moved into the Not Edited list and the Cost Type button is available. Click on the Cost Type button to display the Multiple Cost Type dialog.

You can also change the cost type information associated with fixed cost assignments if you allocate, increase or decrease cost assignments, as these actions ensure that the Cost Type button is available.

Ignore button

Click on this button if you want to cancel any of the fixed cost assignment edits you have made. Select the cost centres from the Edited list and click on this button to move the cost centre back into the Not Edited list.

This button is only available when you select one or more cost centres from the Edited list.

Edited

Any cost centres that appear in this list are cost centres that you have edited. The type of edit you have made is displayed alongside the cost centre name.

Amount

If you are assigning a fixed cost to all the selected segments, enter the amount of the fixed cost you want to assign in this field.

If you want to alter the amount of fixed costs already assigned from the selected cost centre(s), enter the amount by which you want to increase or decrease the cost.

You cannot edit this field if you use the Remove or Type buttons, as these do not require you to change the amount of money assigned.

Cost Type button

Click this button to display the Multiple Cost Type dialog. You must select one or more cost centres from the Edited list before this button is available.

Click on OK to confirm the changes and return to the Multiple Bar Edit dialog.


Multiple Cost Type dialog

This dialog is presented when you select one or more cost centres and click on the Cost Type button from the Multiple Fixed Cost Edit selector. It allows you to specify whether you want fixed costs from the selected cost centres to supply money to (income) or use money from (expenditure) the cost centre.

Cost type

Click Income or Expenditure depending on whether you want the fixed costs to provide income or be expenditure. Selecting an option checks the Cost type check box. Clear this box if you want to leave the fixed cost type unchanged.

Next and Previous buttons

These buttons are only available if you selected more than one cost centre from the Multiple Fixed Cost Edit selector.

Clicking on Next saves the information you have entered about the current cost centre and displays cost type information about the next cost centre selected.

Clicking on Previous saves the information you have entered about the current cost centre and displays modelling information about the previous cost centre selected.


Delete Items dialog

This dialog is presented after Edit - Delete (or DEL) has been chosen with a group of items selected on the bar chart.

The dialog lists the number of items - bars, segments, local links and X-chart links - to be deleted. This can be useful when you have items which are not shown in the chart window or which you have chosen not to display.

When a segment is deleted any attached links are also deleted. The numbering of other segments on the same bar line is affected.

When a bar line is deleted all segments and any attached links are also deleted. The bar is removed and the bar chart is re-arranged.

Provided you do not save the chart, deleted items can be recovered by abandoning the chart.

Note: In a multi-user project, certain items are not deleted if you have insufficient Access Rights for the action. For example if you do not have X-CHART access rights you cannot delete segments with X-chart links attached.


Confirm Changes dialog

On this dialog you can choose to confirm the updates to bars, or segments or both. You are returned to the Multiple Bar Edit dialog.

If you choose an option on this dialog, once you choose OK on the Multiple Bar Edit dialog each update will be checked and confirmation sought on the Confirm Changes? dialog.


Confirm Changes? dialog

If you have chosen the Confirm button on the Multiple Bar Edit dialog, then on choosing OK this dialog is presented for each update where confirmation is sought.

Choose:

Yes to update,

No to skip the update

Stop to stop updating and return to the bar chart.


DDE Link Editor dialog

This dialog is presented when you choose the Edit - DDE Links command.

The dialog lists any DDE links that have been created as text annotations in the current project. For each DDE link it lists the following information:

A link number, starting from 0. This reflects the order in which the DDE links were created in PowerProject.

The name of the program being linked to, as specified on the Create DDE Link Token dialog.

The topic of the DDE link, as specified on the Create DDE Link Token dialog.

The item of the DDE link, as specified on the Create DDE Link Token dialog.

The current state of the DDE link, see the following list for more details.

Once you have created a DDE link to PowerProject it can be in one of three states:

Automatic. This means that the link is open (connected) and PowerProject automatically updates the text annotation whenever the information referenced by the link changes in the program being linked to.

Manual. This means that the link is open (connected) but PowerProject does not automatically update the text annotation if the information it references changes until you specify that you want to update it by using the Update Now or Update All Now button.

Unconnected. This means that the link is closed. PowerProject does not update any DDE links that are unconnected.

Update All Now

Click on this button to update all manual DDE links displayed on this dialog.

Update Now

Click on this button to update the manual link you have selected from this dialog.

Start Link

Click on this button to start the selected DDE link. The program that the DDE link connects to must be running before you can start the DDE link from PowerProject.

Close Link

Click on this button to close the selected DDE link.

Edit

Click on this button to edit or view information about the selected DDE link. The Create DDE Link Token dialog is displayed.

Leaving the dialog

Click on OK to confirm, or Cancel to cancel the action.


Filter Selector

This Selector is presented when the File - Filter menu command is chosen.

The Selector lists all the current filter reports previously created via the New button.

Choosing the New button presents the Filter dialog - where the parameters of a new filter report are defined. Once a filter report is selected - by clicking on the name in the list - it can be:

Opened - by selecting a filter from the list and choosing OK, or double-clicking - to present the Filter dialog - where the existing parameters of a filter can be changed.

Executed to accept the current settings of the Filter dialog and present the Chart Selector - to choose how much of the project to include in the filter.

Deleted and removed permanently from the list of available filters.


Presentation Options dialog

This dialog allows you to choose initial settings for a filter chart. Most of the settings can be changed via the Chart menu commands on the filter chart itself, however the settings will be lost unless saved on this dialog.

The dialog is presented from the Filter dialog after clicking on the Presentation Options button.

Insert chart titles

Use this option if you have clicked on the Exclude expanded bar filter option. Use it to insert a subheading taken from the chart title, at the position in the filter chart where the expanded bar would have appeared.

Chart time unit

Use this list box to choose the time unit for a filter chart. The chart time unit can be later adjusted on the filter chart. The chart time unit affects text reports, for example by setting the default time unit for segment durations.

Customise Appearance

This button displays the Customise Barchart View dialog with the Appearance, Display, Scale and Grid tabs available. You can change the appearance, display, scale and grid attributes for the filter chart using these tabs. When you have executed the filter chart, you can change these attributes using the Chart - Customise menu command.

Sort options

This button displays the Sort Options dialog. The order of any text report you output reflects the order of the segments on the filter chart.

Chart details

This button displays the Details dialog with the Chart tab enabled. Use this tab to enter any details that you want to save with the filter chart. When you have executed the filter chart, you can edit these details using the Edit - Details menu command.


Sort Options dialog

This dialog lets you determine the order of the segments on the filter chart. The order of any text report you output reflects the order of the segments on the filter chart.

This dialog is presented when the Sort Options button on the Filter dialog is chosen.

Making selections

To make a sort selection simply click on the box next to the sort option you want. The box is highlighted and a sort priority number displayed within it.

To deselect a sort option click on the box.

If no selections are made, the natural order of the bars is maintained.

When more than one option is selected, the sort priority is set by the sequence in which you choose the options.

The sort priority provides a secondary sort sequence when two or more segments have the same answer to the previous sort priority.

For example, if you choose sort option 1 as Start Date - Early and sort option 2 as Bar Title, then two segments with the same start date are sorted by their bar title.

You can re-order the sort priority by deselecting an option. All your remaining choices are automatically re-ordered.

Sort options

Bar title

Bars are ordered by the alphabetic sequence of their title. For example, Order A1 product comes before Order A2 product, which comes before Order B1 product.

WBN code

Bars are ordered by the alphabetic sequence of their WBN code.

Start date - early

Bars are ordered by their earliest start date, with earlier dates ordered before later dates. For example a bar starting on 19 May 1997 comes before a bar starting on 20 May 1997.

Start date - late

This is the latest date on which the segment can start - if it uses the maximum total float. Bars are ordered by their latest start date.

Finish date - early

Bars are ordered by their earliest finish date, with earlier dates ordered before later dates. For example, a bar finishing on 30 November 1997 comes before a bar finishing on 31 November 1997.

Finish date - late

This is the latest date the segment can finish - if it uses the maximum total float. Bars are ordered by their latest finish date.

Percentage (%) complete

This option is always available, except when you have selected Progress - Completed or Progress - Not started as a filter option.

Bars are ordered by the amount of work which has been completed, with bars containing large complete amounts ordered before bars with small complete amounts. For example, a bar which is 35% complete is ordered before a bar which is 25% complete.

Total float

Bars are ordered by the amount of total float, with low amounts of float ordered before high amounts of float. For example, a bar with a total float of 3 days comes before a bar with a total float of 4 days.

Free float

Bars are ordered by the amount of free float, with low amounts of float ordered before high amounts of float. For example, a bar with a free float of 2 days comes before a bar with a total float of 3 days.

Hierarchy level

Bars are ordered by their position in the tree of charts, with bars from higher level charts being ordered before bars from lower level charts. Parents are ordered before children. For example, a parent bar is ordered before a child bar, which is ordered before a grandchild bar.

Bar library 1

Choose this option to order bars according to Bar Library 1. This sorts so that bars of the same graphic appearance are together. The bars are in alphabetical order of code name, reflecting the order of the codes in Bar Library 1.

Bar library 2

In addition, or instead of Bar Library 1, you can sort the bars according to Bar Library 2.

Chart

This allows you to sort bars within each filter chart. You should select it first if you want to maintain the natural order of charts, subheadings and subcharts in the filter chart.


Filter chart

A filter chart is a chart containing bars extracted by executing a filter. Filter charts appear similar to bar charts but they do not contain links, and any changes you make to a filter chart cannot be saved.


Creating a filter

A filtered report is created by first choosing the File - Filter menu command.

This presents the Filter Selector, where you can choose to:

Execute an existing filter immediately. The Chart Selector is presented.

Make a New filter. The Filter dialog is presented.

Open an existing filter. The Filter dialog is presented.

On the Filter dialog you can choose to filter on bars or segments. The filter can be a Bar Filter or Segment Filter.

You can also choose how the information should be sorted on the Sort Options dialog, and how the information should be initially presented on the Presentation Options dialog.

On the Bar/Segment Filter dialog is an Execute button, which leads to the Chart Selector.

So by one of two routes you arrive at the Chart Selector. Here the extent of the project to include in the filtered report is defined. Filtering begins.

If the number of bar lines exceeds the chart limits, more than one filter chart will be presented. To open another filter chart use the Chart - Open menu command. The Filter Chart Selector is presented to choose another filter chart.

A filter chart is presented.

Once the filter chart is closed you are returned to the menu control, or Bar and Segment Filter dialog, depending on where you started the Execute command from.


Filter dialog

This dialog allows you to define a filter which can be applied to a project to present a sub-set of information on a separate filter chart. The dialog is displayed after clicking on the New button or opening a filter on the Filter Selector.

You can also create filters when creating an auto annotation using the Make Auto Annotation dialog or when creating a histogram report filter using the Histogram Report Filter dialog.

The dialog is similar to the Search dialog.

Dialog contents

Title - give a unique title to the filter, for future reference and for the filter chart title. You can only save the filter when you have entered a valid title.

Type - choose whether to apply the Filter options to a bar or segment.

Filter options - select options to determine whether or not segments should be included in the filter chart.

There are two additional buttons:

Presentation options - this button allows you to decide how the filter chart is initially presented.

Execute - this button starts the filter creation and leads to the Chart Selector.

Executing a filter and leaving the Filter dialog

When you have selected the Type of filter and have made your selections from the Filter Options, then:

For a temporary filter, press the Execute button. When you leave the filter chart you are returned here. Leave the dialog with Cancel.

For a permanent filter you must enter a Filter Title before leaving the Filter dialog with OK. You can then open the dialog again or execute directly from the Filter Selector.


Work Breakdown Numbering

PowerProject’s project structure of charts and subcharts is sometimes known as a Work Breakdown Structure (WBS). You can assign a code to every task in a project, according to its position in the Work Breakdown Structure. This is known as Work Breakdown Numbering (WBN).

A WBN code consists of a prefix and a generated string, usually a number. You specify the prefix that you want, and the range of characters that PowerProject is to use for the generated string. Once PowerProject has generated the WBN codes, you can manually edit the code of any bar if you require.

WBN codes can be included in annotations, text reports and on the column sheet.

Note: Work Breakdown Numbers are assigned to individual bars – they cannot be assigned to individual segments.


Owning bar

Owning bars are bars which have been expanded into a chart, to allow certain segments to be planned in more detail.

They are identified by a special symbol [image].

The owning bar is also known as an expanded bar, parent bar, or owning segment.

The location and duration of an owning bar shows the extent and position in time of all segments (except hidden segments) in the subordinate chart.

The owning bar is corrected when any subordinate chart is saved.

The bar chart maintains information on segments and links correctly, after a change to a calendar. However, if any of the segments in a subordinate branch of the tree have been affected by a calendar change, the duration and position of any owning bars on the bar chart may be incorrect. Rescheduling the branch corrects all segments.

The start and end of the owning bar is shown as the chart boundaries on the child chart.

You can assign any calendar (SYSTEM or other) to an owning bar, and assign different calendars to its subordinate bars. The calendar of the owning bar does not effect durations or working periods of the subordinate bars; instead it is for display purposes only. Bear this is mind when assigning calendars to owning bars and their subordinate bars.

Note: The duration of an owning bar is determined by the tasks shown in the subordinate chart. Any hidden tasks in the subordinate chart are not included in the duration of the owning bar. If you set a start flag on an owning bar whose subordinate chart has hidden tasks, the start flag may be displayed earlier than the start of the owning bar because the start flag takes the hidden tasks into account.


The Clipboard

The Clipboard is a temporary storage area in memory, used to transfer information from a chart:

You can cut or copy information onto the Clipboard and then paste it into another document or program.

You can place bar titles on the Clipboard from a windows word processor and paste them into a chart to create bars.

You can also place graphics output on the Clipboard for pasting into other windows programs - such as word processors, desk top publishers and drafting programs.


Report date

The report date is the date you are reporting progress for - often today's date. It is shown on the bar chart as the progress line.

All completed segments can be positioned behind the report date and all uncompleted segments positioned after the report date.

Completed segments after the report date have been completed ahead of schedule and uncompleted segments before the report date are running behind schedule.

The chart report date applies only to one chart. You can set report dates with different values in other charts.

The project report date is the earliest date for all chart report dates and is shown on the Project tab of the Details dialog. This affects the dates which can be edited on calendars.


The Progress Line

The progress line marks the chart report date.

It is shown on the bar chart by a thick vertical line.

The progress line can be turned off via the Display tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog.

The line can be displayed in one of two ways:

A jagged line highlights segments which are ahead of, or behind schedule.

A straight line simply marks the chart report date.

To choose one of these options see the Progress tab on the Options dialog.


Milestones

Milestones are segments with a zero duration and are marked by a diamond symbol; they are used to mark important events in a schedule.

Milestones behave as normal segments - they can have links and start flags attached, can have float, and be critical.

Milestones are created by choosing the Task - Make Milestone menu command or by dragging a segment to have a zero duration on the bar chart.

Milestones can be converted back to segments by editing on the status line.


Access Rights

When more than one person is working on a project you can restrict each user to only a part of that project.

The rules which govern what parts of a project are accessible are called Access Rights. You can set up Access Rights for new users and edit those of existing users.

Separate rights apply to library access and chart access.

When you introduce a new user to a project you can only assign the Access Rights you have. You can limit the Access Rights, but you cannot increase them above your own. The first user of a project has the maximum Access Rights.

You cannot edit your own Access Rights. Only a person who has higher Access Rights to the project can change your Access Rights.


Completed segment

A completed segment is one which has been carried out.

It lies in the past [image].


Uncompleted segment

An uncompleted segment is one which has not been carried out.

It lies in the future [image].


Partially completed segments

If you assign partial progress to a segment, PowerProject splits it into two or more segments. Part of the split segment is completed and part is uncompleted.

PowerProject remembers which segment the split ones originally came from. Splitting segments up into even smaller ones lets you keep an exact record of progress - to show what actually happened and when.

Milestones cannot be partially completed, as they have a duration of zero.

Segments split by partial progress

Segment numbers can be seen in the segment title on the bar chart, in the column sheet, and on the Segment tab of the Details dialog.

Segments which have been split behave exactly as any other normal segment - they can be edited and have links, etc.

If you want to merge split segments back together, ensure that they are touching and are all completed, or uncompleted.

When assigning progress to a partially completed (split) segment, any one of the split segments can be selected.

Segments which have been split are merged again only if they are touching - with due regard for holidays. Touching split segments are only merged if they are both completed, or both uncompleted.

Touching, uncompleted split segments are merged into one segment after completing the Enter Progress dialog if they are in the list.

All touching, completed split segments are merged into one segment by the reschedule.

As additional segments are created when you assign partial progress, it is possible that you will be unable to proceed if the number of segments on the bar is too great.

Note: If you split a segment using the Task - Split Segments command, you cannot join the segment back together.


Date format

The date format is a selectable arrangement for how calendar dates are entered and displayed. They are set up for each project using the Date Format tab on the Options dialog.


Bar

A line on the bar chart is known as a bar. The bar can be:

Just a title - known as a subheading

A title and single segment.

A title and a number of segments.

Blank (no title or segments) - to separate the information on your chart.


Start Flags

Start flags impose earliest start dates for segments and are used to override the logic of a plan established by the logic links. Segments with start flags cannot start earlier than the date on which the flag is set, they can however start later should logic or progress dictate this.

To assign a Start Flag:

1	Draw the segment start date where you want the start flag to be, or move the segment start date to the desired position by dragging.

2	Choose the Task - Set Start Flag menu command or click [image].

To change the date of a Start Flag:

Edit the Start flag date on the Segment tab of the Details dialog.

To remove a Start Flag:

Select the segment with the Start Flag and choose the Task - Delete Start Flag menu command.


Chart flag

A start flag on an owning bar is known as a chart flag.

Any subordinate segment in this branch is prevented from starting before the chart flag date.

An owning bar cannot be moved on the bar chart, so you must set the chart flag date on the Segment tab of the Details dialog.


Segment

A segment is a task or part of a task on the plan. A segment is independent in time, logic and appearance coding, but shares common attributes - such as a calendar - with other segments of the same bar.


Calendar

A calendar is a single, named range of dates defining the times when holidays, weekends and overtime occur.

There can be many calendars in a project, all with different holidays, etc.


Borders

A border is a standard framing around all graphical output. It is referred to during output, and gives schedules specific page sizes, orientations and other stylistic aspects.

A border is created with the separate border-generating program supplied with PowerProject.

The border is saved as a border file (*.B) which is referred to during graphical output.

Make standard borders of a specific page size, style and content. You can use these for different sized outputs. Several standard borders are provided with PowerProject. Make new ones using the border-generating program, or ask your supplier about creating borders for you.

For more details of making borders, see the Help or manual for the border-generating program.


Root chart

The root chart is the first chart of a project.

The highest chart in the tree of charts.

The root chart summarises the whole project.


Scope

You can set which charts can be worked on by a user.The scope of the user is then limited to a sub-set of the whole project.

For each chart you assign (also known as a head chart) the user has access to this chart and all the subordinate charts it may contain.

You cannot assign charts which are outside your own scope.

You can prevent the user seeing any chart, by not assigning any charts at all. The Chart- Open menu command is then disabled for this user.

What the user can do in each chart can also be defined by setting Access Rights for each chart.


Link loop

Link loops are logical impossible situations created when you enter links.

The links which are members of a loop are selected on the bar chart after the reschedule has reported the presence of link loops and the Task - Select Loop menu command chosen and the required loop selected on the Select Link Loop dialog.

A link loop is eliminated when one link (which is a member of the loop) is deleted, or when one of the linked bars (with more than one segment) has the bar position setting changed from locked to unlocked.

The same link can be a member of more than one loop.

Removing loops

Eliminate a link loop by deleting one member of the loop:

1	The chart the loop originates in and the loop type (local to one chart or passing through several charts and involving X-chart links) is shown on the Select Link Loop dialog. Open the chart and identify those members of the loop which are highlighted. If X-chart links are members of the loop, the loop passes through several charts.

2	Follow the trail of loop members until you find one of the links which you can delete. Delete a link which is a member of the loop to eliminate it.

Repeat the process for each loop, using the Task - Select Loop command, and reschedule again. As the reschedule only finds up to three loops at a time, you may find further loops.


Local link

A local link is a logical connection between two segments in the same chart.

You draw the logical links directly on the screen.

The links can be displayed or hidden on the chart.


X-chart link

A X-chart link is a logical connection between two segments in different charts.

You draw the logical links directly on the screen between two chart windows containing the different charts.

The links can be displayed or hidden on the chart.


Reflected links

Reflected links are a symbol used to show the existence of a X-chart link between two owning bars on the owning chart.

The links can be displayed or hidden on the chart.


Free float

Free float is the period by which a segment can be delayed or extended without affecting any other segment, or the completion of the project.

It is shown by a special symbol.

Free float can be displayed or hidden on the chart.


Total float

Total float is the period by which a segment can be delayed or extended without delaying the completion of the project.

It is shown by a special symbol.

Total float can be displayed or hidden on the chart.


Critical segments

A critical segment is one without float.

If a critical segment is delayed or extended, it will delay or extend the completion of the project.

It is highlighted by the segment border being thickened and drawn in red on colour monitors and printers.

The critical display can be shown or hidden on the chart.


Critical links

A critical link is one which connects two critical segments.

It is highlighted by being drawn in red - on colour monitors and printers.

The critical display can be shown or hidden on the chart.


Tokens

A token is a piece of information about your project, including information about charts, bars, segments, histograms and graphs. You can use tokens in a:

column on the column sheet

border file.

text annotation.

text report.

All you need to do to extract information from your project is choose the token which represents the information you want, and include it in your annotation via the menu command Insert Token or in a text report using the appropriate text report dialog.

For details of using tokens in your borders, see the Help or manual supplied with the border-generating program.


ASAP

As Soon As Possible (ASAP) is an option to position a segment in its earliest possible position, with due regard for links, start flags and other segments.

This is the normal setting for segments.

Free float is shown after the segment.

Segments can be set ASAP on the Bar tab of the Details dialog.


ALAP

As Late As Possible (ALAP) is an option to position a segment as late as possible, without affecting the position of other segments. The free float period is consumed. The free float is shown before the segment.

Segments can be set ALAP on the Bar tab of the Details dialog.


Chart limits

The capacity of a project created by PowerProject is large, but not limitless.

In a single chart you can have:

500 bar lines.

127 segments per bar line.

10,000 local links.

You can have many charts, with any single segment on a bar line exploded into a sub-chart, containing:

10 levels of nesting.

10,000 X-chart links.

You can create libraries of codes, resources, cost centres and calendars, which can have 10,000 items per library.

The exact number of items you can create will depend on the memory available to PowerProject.


Reschedule

A mathematical calculation - critical path analysis - performed on the segments and links, to ensure that the project is completed in the minimum possible time within the logical and imposed constraints of the plan.

The reschedule process can cover different parts of the project and responds to calculation preferences which you can set up.

All link loops must be eliminated before a reschedule is possible.


Reschedule scope

The reschedule can calculate different parts of the hierarchy making up your project.

Project

Choosing Task - Reschedule - Project calculates the whole project. Every part of the project is corrected.

The only limitation is if the whole project is not available to you as your chart scope is limited. In this case a person with a higher scope should carry out a reschedule to ensure the whole project is correctly recalculated.

Chart/Branch

The Task - Reschedule - Chart menu command only calculates the effect in a single chart.

If the active chart contains subordinate charts, you are presented with the Reschedule Scope dialog.

This allows you to choose:

Chart - Only the active chart is rescheduled and made correct. A chart may still be abandoned after a Chart reschedule.

Branch - All open charts are saved. The active chart and any subordinate charts it contains are re-calculated and made correct. A branch reschedule causes all open charts to be saved - even if they are not part of the branch being recalculated.

If some X-chart links affect a part of your plan which come from other charts and if these charts have not been rescheduled, you are warned.


Reschedule process

The reschedule goes through a number of stages:

Calendar check - All segments are corrected if a calendar has been changed.

Link check - All links are checked for loops. The reschedule only continues when all loops are eliminated.

Progress check - All segments are checked for progress. The effect of the chart report date on the results is governed by your Progress - Move completed segments preference option.

Forward pass - All segments and links are corrected to their earliest times.

Move unlinked segments check - Any segments without links which affect the project start or end are adjusted when the preference option Unlinked Segments is set to Max.

Backward pass - All segments and links are finally positioned and float calculated. The magnitude of float is affected by your Float preference

When the reschedule is complete you are returned to the menu control.

The reschedule can take some time if your project is large and your computer is slow.

During a project or branch reschedule a screen dialog is presented with a slider which fills up to indicate the processing of the reschedule.


Reschedule precedence

The effect of the reschedule is governed by the duration of segments, the position of links, progress information and the chart report date, bar position and locking options and preference option settings.

Each can have an effect and each inter-relates with other settings. Some settings have an effect before other settings, so the precedence of the options should be understood.

See:

Calendars

Progress

Start flags

Moving unlinked segments

Bar position

Segment locking

Links

Project/Chart float

Empty charts


Calendars

The position of weekends and holidays affects all segments - both completed and uncompleted.

A segment cannot start or end in a weekend or holiday period.


Rescheduling segments with progress

Completed segments are totally unaffected when the preference option Progress - Move completed segments is inactive.

Completed segments and links remain where you put them, uncompleted segments are affected by links and start flags.

When the preference option Progress - Move completed segments is active, only completed segments which are later than the chart report date, are moved. Completed segments which are earlier than the chart report date, are unaffected.

Uncompleted segments before the chart report date, are affected by being positioned to later than the chart report date.

Completed segments are not affected by links, start flags, bar position and segment locking.

Progress error messages

The reschedule can report three possible error conditions during progress processing.

The Too much progress Alert is presented when the gap between the project start and the chart report date is too small to fit any completed segments into - even if each completed segment has a duration of only 1 half day.

This condition is usually caused by the chart report date not being set when some progress has been assigned. To resolve this, set the chart report date.

The Task has too much progress to fit behind report date. Shrink? Alert is presented when a completed segment is longer than the gap between the project start and the chart report date.

Three options are available:

One - just the segment reported is reduced by the minimum amount to fit behind the chart report date.

All - the segments reported on the Alert and any other segments are reduced by the minimum amount to fit behind the chart report date.

Quit - the reschedule is aborted.

The Task with progress and resource driven assignment will not fit behind report date Alert is presented when a completed segment with one or more resource-driven assignments assigned to it is longer than the gap between the project start and the chart report date. PowerProject identifies which bars will not fit behind the report date on the alert, but does not attempt to shrink them as this would mean changing information you had entered about resource-driven assignments on the Modelling dialog. To resolve this, do either of the following:

Change the chart report date from the Enter Progress dialog.

Change some of the modelling information associated with any resource driven assignment on the bar from the Modelling dialog, so that the segment duration becomes shorter.


Start flags

Start flags are only effective on uncompleted segments.

They override the influence of links if the start flag date is later than the position dictated by any links.


Moving unlinked segments

Segments without any links are treated differently from segments with links: they are totally unaffected by a reschedule when the preference option Unlinked Segments - Do not move is active.

This is so you can sketch out the components of a plan and not have all the segments you enter shifted to the start of the project when you reschedule, or can have a mixed bar line of segments with and without links if some task logic is not required.

Unlinked segments can set the end of the project and can also prevent segments with links on the same bar line from starting earlier than links would dictate.

Segments without links may be moved when the preference option Unlinked Segments - Max or Min is active.

When the preference option Unlinked Segments - Max is active, two effects can occur.

Unlinked segments which set the end of the project are only moved if they affect the start or end of a project, or chart.

Unlinked segments on a bar line with linked segments are moved back to their earliest possible position

When the preference option Unlinked Segments - Min is active two effects can occur.

Unlinked segments are only moved if they affect the start or end of a project, or chart. This is the same as the Unlink Segments - Max setting.

Unlinked segments on a bar line which also contains linked segments are only moved back so that they do not delay any linked segment on the same bar line.

When the preference option Unlinked Segments - Max/Min is active the position of unlinked segments may also be affected by the preference option Float - Project/Chart.

Segments without links are not affected by the segment position setting for ASAP - otherwise they would always be positioned at the start of the project. They are, however, affected by the segment position setting for ALAP.

As segments without links are unrestrained by links, they have free float to the end of the project, or chart.

When the ALAP position is active, segments are positioned at the end of the project or chart, depending on the preference option Float - Project/Chart. Changing a position option back to ASAP, does not change the position of a segment without links - previously positioned ALAP.


Bar position

Segments can be positioned ASAP and ALAP, by a setting on the Bar tab of the Details dialog.

When segments are positioned ASAP they start as soon as links and start flags allow. Segments which only have links starting on them and have free float may be affected by the preference option Float - Chart. When a segment with only start links and with free float is setting the start of a chart, it is moved into the future by an amount up to the free float period so that the earliest start of any segment in the chart is minimised.

When segments are positioned ALAP all free float is consumed and the segment is positioned at its latest date, without affecting any other segment. The period of delay is shown before the segment by the free float symbol. The amount of free float is affected by the preference option Float - Project/Chart, so the location of segments in the ALAP position may be affected.

Unlinked segments can be affected by the task positioning.


Segment locking

Bars which have more than one segment can be locked together for continuous working, or unlocked for intermittent working.

Segment locking affects all uncompleted segments of the same bar. Completed segments are not affected.

Segment locking can affect the formation of link loops.


Reschedule links

The links attached to segments - both local and X-chart links - affect when the segments can be carried out.

Links always affect uncompleted segments. Start flags can override the logic of links, if the start flag date is later than the date dictated by links.

Links from completed segments have no effect on uncompleted segments when the preference option Progress - Move completed segments is active. All uncompleted segments are positioned after the chart report date, regardless of the links from uncompleted segments.

Links from completed segments affect uncompleted segments when the preference option Progress - Move completed segments is inactive.

Links starting on uncompleted segments and ending on completed ones can be automatically moved onto a following uncompleted segment of the same end bar line when the preference option Progress - Move part completed links is active.


Project/Chart Float

The preference option Float - Project/Chart is intended to allow you to group the segments in one chart to minimise the chart duration and float on segments in the chart.

Project

When the Float - Project option is active all segments start as early as possible - with due regard for the bar position setting - and all float (both total and free float) ends as late as possible.

Chart

When the Float - Chart option is active:

The start of the chart is affected if any uncompleted segments with free float set the chart start date - they may be moved to minimise the chart duration. Segments with no links are unaffected if the preference option Unlinked Segments - Do not move is active.

Any float beyond the completion of the latest segment end in the chart, is truncated. Segments without links may be moved if the preference option Unlinked Segments - Max/Min is active. Completed segments are unaffected.

As float is truncated, some segments may become critical with Float - Chart active, when they would not with Float - Project active. Segments may have less free float, so the bar position setting for ALAP may be affected with the Float - Chart option.


Empty chart

If a chart is empty - it has no bars - the reschedule removes the sub-chart and converts the owning segment into a normal segment without changing the duration.


Head chart

The head chart is the chart assigned to a user in a multi–user project which defines the chart scope.

More than one head chart can be assigned to each user.


Project Hierarchy

PowerProject lets you create a plan as a hierarchy.

This means that you organise operations with grades or classes ranked one above the other. This is similar to a family tree, or tree of charts, where

Parent segments are the summary of all child segments.

Child segments are a more detailed description of the parent segment.

Children can themselves be expanded into further details by grandchildren segments, etc.

The full hierarchy of any project can be seen on the Chart Selector and you can view and modify the chart hierarchy on the Chart Manager.

Several other terms are used in discussing a scheme as a hierarchy.

Branch - is a part of the tree of charts originating from a single chart. A branch contains all the subordinate segments at all lower levels of the hierarchy.

Subordinate - is a lower chart or segment in the hierarchy originating from a higher level. All lower relations of the owner (children, grandchildren, etc.) are subordinate.

Owner - is the originating segment which summarises the details of all subordinate segments in the hierarchy.

Sub-project - is a related set of segments which can be conveniently grouped together. The cumulative result of the segments are summarised by a single segment at a higher level in the plan. A significant stage of the project.

Nesting - is the arrangement of charts whereby the details on one are an expansion, or a summary, of the details of another. Nested charts are positioned lower in the hierarchy of charts.

Top down - is often the description of the project structure, or hierarchy, defining the major subordinate stages in increasing detail. The structure of the scheme is planned from the top down, before the detail is added at the lowest levels and their effects felt from the bottom up.

See also:

Owning bar

Root chart

Head chart

Chart title

Stepping up the tree of charts

Stepping down the tree of charts

Expanding a segment

Chart boundaries


Child segment/chart

A child segment is the direct subordinate of a higher level segment in the hierarchy. The details of the child chart(s), containing child segment(s) is summarised on the owning bar.


Parent segment/chart

A parent is the originating chart or segment which contains further lower level segments in the hierarchy.


Baselines

A baseline is a copy or a "snapshot" of a project at a particular point in time. You can create as many baselines as you want for a project, and you can specify whether the baseline is created from the whole project or from selected chart(s).

A baseline contains bars, segments and milestones from the charts specified, and you can choose whether to include links and annotations. Any information applied to bars and segments, such as progress, resources, costs and calendars, are also applied to the corresponding baseline bar or segment.

Creating "snapshots" of projects in this way can be useful for recording the history and tracking the progress of projects.

Baselines are stored in project data base files (.PDB files).

Once you have created a baseline using the New Baseline dialog, you can display it in either of the following ways:

As baseline information within the current project. This allows you to view the baseline bars and segments on the charts from the current project. You can display up to 9 baselines on a chart within the current project. Choose the File - Baseline Manager menu command to open a baseline within the current project.

As a project in its own right. This allows you to view the baseline information outside of the project from which it was created. Opening a baseline in this way is similar to opening a project, but the actions you can perform are limited. Open a baseline as a project in its own right using the File - Open command.


Opening a baseline as a separate project

As well as opening and displaying baselines on charts from the current project, you can open a baseline as a separate project. Opening a baseline as a separate project allows you to:

View just the baseline charts without any of the current project information.

View any links or annotations that you may have saved with the baseline.

Perform operations, such as creating histograms and text reports using the baseline charts.

Choose the File - Open command to open a baseline as a separate project.

Because creating baselines is a way of recording the history of a project, you can perform only a limited number of actions when you open a baseline as a separate project. Actions you cannot perform include:

Adding new bars or segments.

Creating baselines of a baseline project.

Changing the appearance of baseline bars.

If you try to perform an action that is not permitted, PowerProject displays an alert to remind you that you cannot perform that action on a baseline project.

Note: Because you have opened the baseline as a separate project, PowerProject regards the baseline as the current project. Therefore, dialogs that display information about baseline project, baseline charts or baseline bars and segments, such as the Bar and Segment tabs on the Details dialog this information in the Current Chart or Current Bar panels of the dialog. Fields for baseline information on these tabs are disabled.


Merging baselines

When creating a baseline from the New Baseline dialog you can choose to store it in any of the following ways:

In a new file, where it is stored on its own.

Merge the new baseline into an existing baseline file.

Merge the new baseline with an existing baseline file to create a new file.

Note: If you indent the root chart of your project after creating some baselines from it, you cannot merge any new baselines you create from this project, as the project now has a different chart hierarchy.

You might want to merge baselines if your project has not been planned all at once when you first start to create charts on the project. For example, in an Office Relocation project, you might plan the preliminary activities, such as appointing real estate agents and performing structural surveys before you plan the rest of the project. In such cases, you can still store a baseline of the planned progress for the whole project by creating a baseline of the chart that plans the preliminary activities and merging any baselines of charts that are not yet finished with that baseline file at a later date.

When merging baselines, PowerProject lets you choose whether you want to merge to an existing baseline file or to a new file. In the Office Relocation example used above, you would probably merge any subsequent baselines to the existing baseline file of all the preliminary activities, so that you have one baseline file of the planned progress for the whole project. However, if the preliminary tasks chart changes before you merge any other charts, you may want to merge the baselines to a new file, so that the baseline of the original Preliminary tasks chart is not overwritten.


Chart Progress Lines

The current chart progress line is the progress line of the current chart and it is determined by the current report date. See the Task - Enter Progress command.


Baseline Progress Lines

The baseline progress line is the chart progress line as it was when the baseline was created. Each baseline you create can have a baseline progress line.


DDE Links

Dynamic data exchange (DDE) is a standard Windows format for exchanging data between programs. In PowerProject, DDE is used to allow you to import data from another program (a source program) and use it in the form of a text annotation to a chart or histogram.

Note: You cannot use DDE to export PowerProject data to other programs; use the MPX file format to do that.

You can make a DDE link to some programs using the Windows Clipboard. In the source program paste the data you want to use to the Clipboard, then create a text annotation and insert the DDE Links token. The Create DDE Link Token dialog is displayed. Click the Paste Link button on this dialog and PowerProject completes the dialog with the source program information from the Clipboard.

If the source program does not allow you to use the Windows Clipboard, choose the DDE links token and enter the information about the data at the Create DDE Link Token dialog. Refer to the documentation for the program you are linking to, for information about how to complete the dialog.

When you have created a DDE Link, you can see information about it by choosing the Edit - DDE Links menu command.

You can make links with auto annotations. PowerProject creates one link, but the data is displayed wherever the auto annotation is placed in the chart.

You can cut, copy, and paste annotations with links. If you cut a link to the Windows Clipboard, the link is disconnected. Pasting the link, restarts it.


Permanent Resources

Permanent resources are not depleted by their use in a project. Once a permanent resource has completed work on one task it is available for work on another task. Employees, machinery and equipment are examples of permanent resources.

Any permanent resources you create are stored in the Resource Library.


Consumable Resources

Consumable resources are used or supplied by tasks in a project. Once a consumable resource has been used by a task it cannot be used again by any task in the project. Materials and utilities are examples of consumable resources.

Any consumable resources you create are stored in the Resource Library.


Resource Groups

A resource group is a collection of one or more resources from the resource library. You can create permanent resource groups or consumable resource groups, but you cannot have both permanent and consumable resources in the same group.

Resource groups can be useful if you often assign the same resources to several tasks in a project.


Cost Centres

A cost centre is a way of grouping costs together. A project can have one or more cost centres, depending on how the project is financed. PowerProject provides a default cost centre, called PROJECT, which is always available. Cost centres are similar to accounts in that you can assign costs that supply money to (income) or use money from (expenditure) a cost centre.

You can create as many cost centres as you want for a project. Any cost centres you create are stored along with the PROJECT cost centre in the Cost Centre Library.

Any costs (fixed costs or resource costs) that you assign to a task have to be allocated from a particular cost centre.


Locked histogram

When you lock a histogram onto a bar chart, the histogram is displayed below the chart in a chart window. Locking a histogram onto a bar chart allows you to compare the graphs displayed on the histogram with the tasks on the bar chart. You can lock up to two histograms onto a bar chart, using the Histogram - Lock to Bar Chart command.


Active histogram

One or more histograms may be open at any one time. If a histogram is displayed in a separate window, it must be selected to be the active histogram. Click on the window title bar or anywhere on the histogram to make a histogram window active.

You can lock up to two histograms onto a bar chart, but only one histogram can be active at any one time. Click on the tab displaying the name of the histogram to make it the active histogram.


Automatically updating histograms

Each histogram report you execute has an Auto Update link. When the Auto Update link is on it means that PowerProject automatically updates the histogram if any information changes on a bar chart. For example, if a permanent resource histogram shows that a resource has been over allocated, you can move tasks or change resource assignments on the bar chart and instantly see the effect on the histogram.

If you do not want a histogram to be updated automatically, for example if you are making a lot of changes to the bar chart you may only want to update the histogram once when you have finished making changes, you can turn the Auto Update link off.

The Auto Update indicator in the top left corner of each histogram indicates whether the Auto Update link is on or off:

When the Auto Update link is on the indicator is red on colour monitors and black on monochrome monitors; when the Auto Update link is off the indicator is blue on colour monitors and white on monochrome monitors.

Use the Histogram - Auto Update menu command or double-click on the indicator itself to turn the Auto Update link on and off.

Note: The Auto Update link is only between the histogram and bar charts in a project. Any other changes you make that cause the histogram to be regenerated, such as editing the histogram report details, while the report is open, always update the histogram.


Histogram legend

A histogram legend provides explanatory text about any graphs included in the histogram report. For each graph included in the report the histogram legend displays a sample of the graph style and appearance of the graph and the following information:

The name of the resource or cost centre. PowerProject uses the short name of the resource or cost centre if one was supplied, if not it uses the long name.

The type of graph, for example "Over allocated".

The factor (if any) by which the graph has been scaled to enable all graphs to fit on the same vertical axis, for example x10 or x100.

The cumulative unit for any "to date" graphs, for example "John Brown Days effort allocated" Days is the cumulative unit. This is specified from the Histogram Report Details dialog.

The cumulative unit and periodic time unit for any "each time unit" graphs, for example "John Brown Days effort allocated each month. Days is the cumulative unit and months is the periodic time unit. The periodic time unit is specified from the Graph Types dialog.

If you have created a filter for a resource or cost centre included in a histogram report, you can also specify that the name of the filter appears in the entry for that resource or cost centre in the histogram legend. Specify that you want to include the filter name from the Histogram Report Details dialog.

You can turn the display of the histogram legend on and off by using the Histogram - Show Legend menu command.

If you display the histogram legend you can resize the box in which the legend is displayed and change its position on the histogram. You can also re-arrange the order of entries in the legend box.


Re-sizing the legend box

To re-size the legend box, place the cursor over the edge of the box, until the cursor shape changes to [image] or [image], then click and drag the pointer until the box is the required size and release.


Moving the legend box

To move the legend box, click the mouse pointer in the box so that the pointer changes to a hand. Drag the pointer until the box is in the required position and release.


Changing the order of entries in the legend box

To change the order of entries in the legend box, select the entry you want to move by clicking on the entry's graph appearance, so that the pointer changes to a hand shape [image]. Drag the pointer until it is in the required position and release to insert the selected entry into that position.

To move the selected entry, the pointer must be positioned over another entry before you release.


Resource and cost centre names

Each resource or cost centre can have a long name and a short name. The long name of the resource or cost centre appears on selectors and the short name is used on histogram legends.

The long and short names can be the same or you may want to use the long name to include information, such as order numbers, for example "Carpet tiles - TL/9675".

You specify the names for a resource or cost centre when you create or edit them using one of the following dialogs:

Permanent Resource Details dialog.

Consumable Resource Details dialog.

Cost Centre Details dialog.


Fixed cost

A fixed cost is a cost assigned directly from a cost centre to a task. You assign fixed costs from the Fixed Costs selector.

A fixed cost remains the same irrespective of the duration of the task and the amount of resources assigned to it. Use a fixed cost when you know exactly how much a resource or task will cost, for example you may contract the work for a particular task out to another company for a fixed cost.

Fixed costs are used evenly throughout the task, so if you assign a fixed cost of £200 to a task that has a duration of 4 days, the money is used at £50 each day. Fixed costs that are assigned to milestones are used instantly, as milestones have no duration.

When you assign a fixed cost to a task you can specify whether the cost is providing income to a cost centre or is using money from (expenditure) a cost centre from the Cost Type dialog. The default is that fixed costs provide income to a cost centre.


Resource cost

A resource cost is a cost associated with a particular resource. When you create a resource you can specify certain costing information for that resource, for example how much a permanent resource costs each day or how much a consumable resource item costs. Resource costs always use money from a cost centre. Resource cost information is stored along with other information about the resource in the Resource Library.

If you specify costing information for a resource, the cost associated with the resource is assigned automatically whenever you assign the resource to a task.

Permanent resource costs depend on the amount of resource allocated and the length of time the resource works for on a task.

Consumable resources are always costed on supply. Therefore, a consumable resource cost depends on how much of the resource has been supplied.

Resource costs are used evenly throughout the task.

Permanent resource costs assigned to a milestone are ignored.

Consumable resources being supplied to a project on a milestone are costed. This is an instantaneous cost as milestones have no duration.


Histogram Graphs

You can include up to twelve different graphs in each type of histogram report. Two out of each set of twelve graphs are base graphs. This means that the remaining ten graphs are derived in some way from the two base graphs.

For example, the permanent resource graphs Available resource and Allocated resource are the two base graphs for permanent resource histogram reports. Therefore, the Unallocated resource graph is derived by calculating when the Available resources graph exceeds the Allocated resource graph.

Permanent resource base graphs are Available resource and Allocated resource.

Consumable resource base graphs are Supply rate and Consumption rate.

Cost centre base graphs are Income rate and Expenditure rate.

You can edit base graphs in the profile editor if you want to change the values of graphs in a histogram.

See also

Permanent resource graphs

Consumable resource graphs

Cost centre graphs


Effort

The amount of effort required for a task is calculated by multiplying the amount of a resource assigned to the task by the length of time they are assigned for.

The duration of a resource assignment that is modelled using an effort based calculation depends on the amount of the resource and the effort assigned to the task. For example, a task that needs 10 Programmers days of effort can be completed by 1 programmer in 10 days or completed by 2 programmers in 5 days.

Calculating a resource assignment duration using an effort based calculation means that you must rely on the estimate of the effort as being accurate.

Model a permanent resource assignment using an effort based calculation from the Permanent Resource Modelling dialog.


Work

The amount of work required to complete a task is the amount of an item that must be used for a permanent resource to complete a task. A resource completing an amount of work also has a work rate, which is the rate at which the resource completes the work.

The duration of a resource assignment that is modelled using a work based calculation depends on the amount of work to be completed, the amount of the resource assigned and the work rate of the resource. For example, for a task to excavate a building site the work might be to clear 100m3 of earth and the resource may have a work rate of 20m3 of earth a day.

A work based calculation is generally more accurate than an effort based calculation, as it does not rely on an estimate of the effort required to complete a task.

Model a permanent resource assignment using a work based calculation from the Permanent Resource Modelling dialog.


Resource modelling

PowerProject allows you to model the assignment of permanent and consumable resources to segments. You model a resource assignment from the Permanent Resource Modelling or Consumable Resource Modelling dialog. Any resource assignment you model is represented by PowerProject as a calculation. By specifying the information you know about a resource assignment, PowerProject calculates the remaining information.

No modelling

If you do not model a resource assignment, the resource you assign will work for the entire working duration of the segment (as far as its resource calendar permits). If you later resize the segment, the resource works for the new duration of the segment. Therefore, the length of time the resource works for is determined by the duration of the segment on the bar chart. This is a duration-driven resource assignment.

Modelling

Modelling the assignment of a resource, on the other hand, means that the resource assignment becomes a resource-driven assignment. When you model a resource, PowerProject allows you to calculate how long the resource needs to work for to complete their work on a segment. Having calculated this, you then assign the resource to a segment and PowerProject always makes sure that the segment duration is long enough for the resource to complete their work. For example, if you draw a segment lasting 1 week on the bar chart and then assign a resource-driven resource assignment that has a duration of 2 weeks PowerProject automatically increases the duration of the segment on the bar chart to 2 weeks, taking into account the task and resource calendars, so that the resource has enough time to complete their work on the task.

If you later resize a segment that has resource-driven assignments, PowerProject allows you to specify whether you want each resource assignment duration to remain fixed, as it was when you assigned the resource to the segment, or whether you want it to change in proportion to the new segment duration.


Histogram Scale Groups

To enable all the graphs included in a histogram report to fit onto a single axis, PowerProject sometimes scales graphs down, by a certain factor (in powers of ten), for example (x10) and (x100).

In some cases you may want to specify that certain graphs are scaled by the same factor, for example if you want to directly compare Allocated and Over allocated graphs. You specify that graphs are scaled by the same factor by including them in the same scale group.

To specify that certain graphs are included in the same scale group use the Scale Groups dialog, which is available from the Histogram Report Details dialog.

Related topics

Permanent Resource Scale Groups dialog

Consumable Resource Scale Groups dialog

Cost Centre Scale Groups dialog


Lead/lag segments

Lead/lag segments let you create a minimum delay between tasks. For example, a task such as Paint First Coat may need to be followed by a three day period to let the paint dry before the task, Paint Second Coat, can begin. You would set this up as follows:

Lead/lag segments are drawn as single black lines when deselected, and as dotted outline boxes when selected.

You can also use lead/lag segments to set a delay between the start or end date of one task and the start or end date of the other. For example:

You can draw links to and from lead/lag segments, and you can assign resources, costs and segment codes to them. (The appearance of a lead/lag segment does not change when you assign a segment code to it.) You can enter titles for lead/lag segments but they will not be displayed on the bar chart.

Lead/lag segments are not connected to their adjacent segments, so if you move a segment any adjacent lead/lag segment will not be moved with it. However, when you reschedule the project all linked segments are positioned to start as soon as possible which usually results in any lead/lag segments being positioned next to their adjacent segments. You can ensure that lead/lag segments are kept with their adjacent segments by locking the segments on a bar.

When a lead/lag segment is immediately adjacent to a normal segment and non-working periods (e.g. holidays and weekends) are displayed on the chart, the lead/lag segment is drawn extending across the non-working period to indicate the connection between the lead/lag segment and the normal segment. This does not affect the duration of the lead/lag segment.

You can assign progress to lead/lag segments using the Task - Enter Progress and Task - Progress Up-To-Date commands but you cannot assign progress to them using the progress cursor. Progress shading is not displayed on lead/lag segments.

Float is not displayed on lead/lag segments.

Summary bars and expanded bars cannot be converted into lead/lag segments.

Lead/lag segments are not included in bar duration calculations.


Summary bars and summary groups

A summary bar summarises a subset of bars which is known as a summary group. The position and duration of a summary bar is determined by the bars within the summary group. When you move or resize bars in the summary group, the summary bar is moved or resized accordingly. (The position and duration of a summary bar does not take account of any hidden tasks in its summary group.)

A summary bar can be expanded or collapsed. When a summary bar is expanded, the bars in its summary group are displayed in the chart window. When a summary bar is collapsed, the bars in its summary group are removed from the chart display. Double-click on a summary bar to toggle between expanding and collapsing it.

When you create a summary bar, the bars within the summary group have their bar titles indented. You can create summary bars within summary bars; this is know as nesting and can result in several levels of indentation in a chart. Bars that are not indented are on the root of the active chart.

The indent level of a bar is indicated by its bar title. If you do not have bar titles displayed in the column sheet or the bar titles panel, you will not be able to see if a bar has been indented.

The titles of summary bars are set to be bold by default, so when you enter a bar title for a summary bar it will automatically be displayed in bold.

Summary bars are very similar to normal bars in your chart, but you should note the following:

hiding a summary bar does not hide the bars within its summary group. If some bars within a summary group are hidden, they remain hidden when you hide the summary bar.

you cannot draw links to or from summary bars. To create links between summary groups, you must draw the link directly from a bar in one summary group to a bar in the other.

you cannot set start flags on summary bars

you cannot assign progress to summary bars but when you mark progress on bars in a summary group, the progress is reflected on the summary bar.

you can assign resources, costs, codes and calendars to summary bars in the same way that you assign these items to normal bars. Items that you assign to a summary bar do not affect the bars within the summary group.

when you delete a summary bar, the bars within the summary group remain in the chart but are outdented one level.

when you cut or copy bars and paste them into a summary group, the bars are indented to the same level as the bar onto which they are dropped. When you cut or copy bars from a summary group and paste them into another area of the chart, the bars take their indent level from the bar onto which they are dropped.


Object linking and embedding (OLE) automation

You can access data and functionality inside PowerProject from other programs by making use of PowerProject’s support for OLE automation. OLE automation allows other programs to invoke PowerProject and perform routines that you would normally do manually. For example, you could write a macro in Excel to open a project and create a spreadsheet of all the bars that have a particular resource assigned.

PowerProject’s OLE automation can be accessed by programs written in Visual Basic® and Visual Basic for Applications (VBA). VBA is supplied with Microsoft Office. A full list of the function calls supported by PowerProject is provided in a RTF file supplied on one of the PowerProject program disks. Refer to this file for more information.


Glossary

Click on a word or phrase to pop up its definition. To close the definition, click away from it.

- A -

Access rights

Accrual

Active histogram

Active project

Active window

Activity

ALAP

ALL

Annotation

Annual dates

Appearance

ASAP

Auto annotation

Auto-scroll

Auto update link

- B -

Backward pass

Bar

Bar chart

Bar codes

Bar defaults

Bar end date

Bar line

Bar numbering

Bar position

Bar segment

Bar start date

Bar title

Bar titles panel

Baseline

Border file

Border script

Bottom up

Boundaries

Branch

Branch reschedule

- C -

Calendar

Cell

Chart

Chart display appearance

Chart end date

Chart flag

Chart float

Chart path name

Chart report date

Chart reschedule

Chart scope

Chart start date

Chart time unit

Chart title

Chart window

Check box

Child

Clipboard

Code

Code library

Column

Column sheet

Completed task

Comma separated file

Consumable resource

Contiguous tasks

Cost

Cost centre

Critical

Critical path

Cross chart link

Current time unit

- D -

Date format

Date zone

Date zone - dates

Date zone - units

DDE link

Default

Deferral

Delete

Downward sloping link

Duration

Duration-driven

- E -

Early finish date

Early start date

EDIT

Effort

End date

Entry chart

Expanded bar

Export

- F -

Filter

Filter chart

First user

Fixed cost

Fixed resource model

Float

Forward pass

Free float

- G -

Graphs

Grids

- H -

Head chart

Hierarchy

Histogram

Histogram display appearance

Histogram legend

Histogram report

Holiday

Holiday over bars

- I -

Indent

Imposed date

- J -

Jagged report date

- L -

Landscape

Late finish date

Late start date

Lead/lag segment

Legend

Library

Link

Linked bar chart

Link loop

List box

Local link

Locked on

Locked off

Locked segments

Log on

Loop

- M -

Merged calendar

Milestone

Move completed segments

MPX

Multi-user

- N -

Nesting

Nodes

No links

NONE

- O -

Outdent

Outline

Output legend

Overtime

Owning bar

Owning chart

- P -

Parent

Part completed link

Partially completed task

Password

.PDB

Permanent resource

Pool

Portrait

Preferences

Profile editor

Progress

Progress - move completed segments

Project

Project end date

Project float

Project management

Project report date

Project reschedule

Project start date

Proportional resource model

- R -

Recalculation

Reflected link

Report

Report date

Reschedule

Resource

Resource allocation

Resource allocation profile

Resources assigned

Resource availability

Resource availability profile

Resource calendar

Resource consumption/supply rate

Resource consumption/supply rate profile

Resource cost

Resource-driven

Resource group

Resource library

Resource loading

Resource modelling

Resource profile

Root chart

Ruling lines

- S -

Scale groups

Scales

Schedule

Scope

Segment

Segment codes

Segment end date

Segment number

Segment start date

Segment title

Selector

Sequential dates

Shortcut

Single user

Slack

Start date

Start flag

Start flag date

Status line

Subordinate

Sub-project

Summary bar

Summary group

- T -

Task

Task end date

Task start date

Text report

Time grid

Time unit

Title numbering

Token

Toolbar

Top down

Total float

Tree of charts

.TXT

- U -

Uncompleted task

Unlinked segments

Unlocked segments

Upward sloping link

User

User name

User setup

- V -

VIEW

- W -

WBN

WBS

Weekend

Whole bar

.WKS

.WMF

Work

Work rate

Working time unit

Working week

- X -

X-CHART

X-chart link


Access rights

Settings for a user in a multi-user project which limit access and actions on libraries and charts.


Accrual

A cost that builds up over the duration of a task. You can specify that resource costs or costs from a particular cost centre (income or expenditure) are loaded at the start or end of a task, or accrue at regular intervals during the task. See also Deferral.


Active histogram

The currently selected histogram to which all actions and menu commands refer. Histograms can be displayed in their own window or locked onto a bar chart.


Active project

One of the two possible projects which can be open, to which all actions and menu commands refer.


Active window

The window which has all the features of the window frame displayed. The active window is the topped window. All actions and menu commands refer to the active window.


Activity

See Task.


ALAP

As Late As Possible. An option to position a task as late as possible, without affecting the position of other tasks. The free float period is consumed. The free float is shown before the task. See ASAP.


ALL

The access right for charts, which allows any action to be carried out on a chart.


Annotation

PowerProject allows you to annotate charts and histograms with text, shapes, lines and pictures. Text annotations can be typed or taken from the project, chart or histogram using tokens.


Annual dates

A numbering system for weeks and days which restarts at the beginning of each year. See Date zone - units.


Appearance

See Chart display appearance and Histogram display appearance.


ASAP

As Soon As Possible. An option to position a task in its earliest possible position. This is the normal setting for tasks. See ALAP.


Auto annotation

Any annotation can be automatically added to all bars and segments on a chart, or just to those segments that match a particular filter.


Auto-scroll

When the chart window automatically scrolls horizontally or vertically to keep the mouse pointer in view. This is useful when drawing segments and links that extend beyond the current area in view.


Auto update link

Link between a histogram and a bar chart. When the link is on PowerProject automatically updates the histogram to take account of any changes made on the bar chart.


Backward pass

The procedure whereby the latest task dates of a plan are calculated.


Bar

A line on the bar chart which can contain a task, be a subheading, or be blank. If a task is intermittent or repetitive, you can have several segments representing the task on the bar.


Bar chart

A graphical chart on which activities are represented as lines drawn to a common time scale showing a sequence of operations, interconnected by links.


Bar codes

One of two codes assigned to affect a bar's appearance. The name used in place of bar code 1 and bar code 2 can be changed. See also Segment codes.


Bar defaults

Values which are assigned automatically when a bar is created. See Default.


Bar end date

The calendar date when the last segment of a bar finishes. See Segment end date. An expanded bar's end date is taken from the chart end date of the subchart.


Bar line

See Bar.


Bar numbering

The display of line numbers adjacent to the first and/or last task of a bar line on the bar chart. Makes reading across large charts easier. See Chart display appearance.


Bar position

The general term used to refer to the ASAP and ALAP options for a bar.


Bar segment

See Segment.


Bar start date

The calendar date when the first segment of a bar commences. See Segment start date. An expanded bar's start date is taken from the chart start date of the subchart.


Bar title

The description applied to a bar.


Bar titles panel

An area of the bar chart displaying bar titles. The width can be changed.


Baseline

A "snapshot" of a project (or selected charts in a project) at a particular point in time. A baseline contains bars and segments from the specified charts. Any resources, costs, code appearances, calendars assigned to bars and segments in the project also appear on baseline bars and segments. A baseline can be opened within the current project or as a project it its own right.


Border file

A separate file containing a frame for output charts and histograms. It is referred to during output, and gives schedules specific page sizes, orientations and other stylistic aspects.


Border script

The descriptive language of commands which make up the frame in a border file.


Bottom up

The summarisation of the project details from subordinate parts of the project structure to higher parts of the project.


Boundaries

The earliest and latest dates for all tasks in a subordinate chart. Summarised on the owning task to give it's duration.


Branch

A part of the tree of charts originating from a single chart. A branch contains all the subordinate tasks at all lower levels of the hierarchy.


Branch reschedule

A reschedule of a single chart and all its subcharts. No higher charts are rescheduled.


Calendar

A single, named range of dates defining the dates when holidays, weekends and overtime occur. There can be many calendars in a project, all with different holidays, etc.


Cell

The individual boxes in columns on the column sheet. Each cell contains a separate piece of information.


Chart

A bar chart. A chart may contain further nested charts, or may itself be nested.


Chart display appearance

Selectable features of the bar chart display which can be turned on or off to display or hide the feature, for example, holidays, total float, etc.


Chart end date

The calendar date when the latest task in a chart finishes. The chart end date is shown on each chart by shading and will set the owning bar's end date.


Chart flag

A start flag assigned to an expanded bar. All subordinate tasks will be unable to commence before the start flag date.


Chart float

A calculation preference to calculate critical tasks and float using the chart start and end dates. This is used when you wish to regard a chart as a self contained project. Tasks may become critical when they would not be so with the project float option.


Chart path name

A list of the titles of related charts following the nesting level or generations. Allows the location of a chart easily within a structured project. See Chart title.


Chart report date

The report date on each chart. This can vary from chart to chart.


Chart reschedule

A reschedule of a single chart of the project. No subordinate or higher charts are rescheduled.


Chart scope

Settings for a user in a multi-user project which limit access to charts. Each chart assigned can be accessed and all subcharts. A chart once in scope is affected by the access rights. See Head chart.


Chart start date

The calendar date when the earliest task in a chart commences. The chart start date is shown on each chart by shading and will set the owning bar's start date.


Chart time unit

See Current time unit.


Chart title

The description applied to a chart. The chart title is obtained from the bar title assigned to the owning bar of the chart. See Chart path name.


Chart window

A partial view of a complete bar chart seen in a graphical window on screen.


Check box

Method of selecting an option on a dialog. When the box is checked (crossed out) the option is active and when cleared is inactive.


Child

The direct subordinate of a higher level task in the hierarchy. The details of the child chart(s), containing child task(s) is summarised on the owning task.


Clipboard

Place to which you can move or copy items from PowerProject, for example bars, segments and annotation. Having copied items to the Clipboard you can paste them to a new location.


Code

The name given to a management reporting code. Two codes can be assigned to each bar and two assigned to each segment. These can affect the appearance of the tasks on screen and be used for selective reporting.


Code library

A list of available codes. Each library can be accessed for assignment to a bar or segment code. See Library, Bar codes, Segment codes.


Column

Vertical lists of information which can be displayed alongside the bar chart in a column sheet. You can add and remove columns, and change the information displayed in them. You can save your column sheet as a layout that can be used again.


Column sheet

An optional display of columns of information alongside the bar chart. You can add and remove columns to or from the column sheet, and change the information displayed in the columns. You can save your column sheet as a layout that can be used again.


Completed task

A task which has been carried out. It lies in the past.


Comma separated file

The format of data produced with a .TXT file name extension for export produced from bar, link, chart or histogram text reports. Usually imported by databases and other project management programs.


Consumable resource

A resource that is depleted by its use in a project. Once a consumable resource has been assigned to a task it cannot be used again. Tasks in a project can consume or supply consumable resources. See also Resource


Contiguous tasks

Adjacent segments of the same bar whose start and end date are the same, ignoring non-working times.


Cost

An amount of money associated with a particular task on a bar chart. All costs have an associated cost centre. Costs can be expenditure from a cost centre or they can provide income to a cost centre.


Cost centre

Cost centres are a way of grouping related cost together. Similar to a current account, tasks in a project can use money from or supply money to a cost centre. You can create as many cost centres as you want to. See also Fixed cost and Resource cost.


Critical

A task without float. If a critical task is delayed or extended, it will delay or extend the completion of the project. Critical marking is shown as a thick red border around the critical task:


Critical path

A sequence of tasks spanning from start to finish of the project, which are all critical.


Cross chart link

See X-chart link.


Current time unit

The time unit chosen for data entry on the bar chart.


Date format

A selectable arrangement for displaying a calendar date.


Date zone

A display at the head of each chart and the foot of each histogram displaying dates and time unit numbers.


Date zone - dates

The date zone area showing calendar dates in the user's preferred date format.


Date zone - units

The date zone area showing time unit numbers in the current time unit.


DDE link

Dynamic Data Exchange is a standard Windows format for exchanging data between different programs. PowerProject allows DDE links to other programs in text annotations. See Annotation.


Default

A value used the first time an action is carried out when no user entered value is available. See Preferences, Default chart and Bar defaults.


Deferral

A cost that has been delayed or postponed. You can specify resource costs or costs from particular cost centres (income or expenditure) to be deferred by days, weeks, fortnights or months. See also Accrual.


Delete

To remove from the project.


Downward sloping link

A link which passes down the chart, starting on a higher bar and ending on a lower bar in the chart.


Duration

The estimated or actual time required for the completion of an activity or resource assignment.


Duration-driven

A duration-driven assignment means that the duration of the segment to which the resource is assigned determines the length of time the resource works for on the segment. The resource will always work for the entire segment duration. See also Resource-driven and Resource modelling.


Early finish date

The earliest possible time by which an activity can finish within the logical and imposed constraints of the plan.


Early start date

The earliest possible time by which an activity can start within the logical and imposed constraints of the plan.


EDIT

The access right for calendars and libraries which allows any entry to be changed. For bar charts this allows any editing within one chart to be carried out, X-chart links cannot be set, edited or deleted.


Effort

Effort is calculated by multiplying the amount of a resource assigned to a task by the length of time they are assigned. For example, it takes 2 Writers 5 days to do 10 Writer days of effort.


End date

The calendar date when a segment, bar, chart or project finishes.


Entry chart

The first chart opened automatically when a project is first opened. The entry chart can be assigned and removed as a preference option.


Expanded bar

See Owning bar.


Export

The transfer of information from the active project.


Filter

A set of definable selection criteria applied to segments and bars in a project, or part of a project, to supply a subset of information which is relevant to a particular situation.


Filter chart

A filter chart is a chart containing bars extracted by executing a filter. Filter charts appear similar to bar charts but they do not contain links, and any changes you make to a filter chart cannot be saved.


First user

The first person to use a project and convert it from a single user project into a multi-user one.


Fixed cost

A cost assigned directly from a cost centre to a task. A fixed cost remains the same regardless of the length of the task and the number of resources assigned to it.


Fixed resource model

This model allows you to calculate the amount of time you want a resource to work for. Once you have assigned the resource the length of time it works for remains the same even if the segment duration changes on the bar chart. See also Proportional resource model and Resource modelling.


Float

The period by which a task can be delayed without affecting the completion of the project.


Forward pass

The procedure whereby the earliest task dates of a plan are calculated.


Free float

The period by which a task can be delayed or extended without affecting any other tasks, or the completion of the project. Free float is shown as:


Graphs

Visual display (as a line, bar or area) of resource or cost centre information on a histogram.


Grids

Horizontal and vertical lines drawn on a bar or filter chart and histograms to improve clarity. See also Ruling lines and Time grid.


Head chart

A chart assigned to a user in a multi-user project which defines the chart scope. More than one head chart can be assigned to each user. See Scope.


Hierarchy

Organisation of operations with grades or classes ranked one above the other.


Histogram

One or more graphs to give a visual display of the usage of resources or cost centres throughout the project. The information and appearance of a histogram is defined in a histogram report.


Histogram display appearance

Selectable features of the histogram display which can be turned on or off to display or hide the feature, for example, date zone, grids etc.


Histogram legend

Explanatory text about graphs displayed on a histogram, including the name of the graph and the factor by which it was scaled to fit on the histogram vertical axis.


Histogram report

Defines the information (represented by graphs) to be included in a histogram and various graph display options.


Holiday

An irregular non-working period.


Holiday over bars

A chart display feature which will place holiday and weekend graphics on top of tasks, or behind tasks.


Indent

The method of adding a bar to a summary group.


Imposed date

A point in time determined by circumstances outside the project which may override the logic of the plan. See Start flag and Chart flag.


Jagged report date

A style of line drawing for a chart report date which zig zags left and right around the report date to highlight tasks ahead and behind schedule.


Landscape

Orientation of a printed image with long edge of the paper horizontal. Landscape orientation is portrait rotated through 90 degrees.


Late finish date

The latest possible time by which an activity must finish within the logical and imposed constraints of the plan, without affecting the total project duration.


Late start date

The latest possible time by which an activity must start within the logical and imposed constraints of the plan, without affecting the total project duration.


Lead/lag segment

A type of segment that forces a minimum delay between two tasks.


Legend

An extra panel of information produced on graphical chart images showing information on codes used on the bar chart. See also Histogram legend.


Library

A collection of similar items into a list, for example resources, codes, cost centres and calendars. Items from the list may be chosen and assigned to individual bars and/or segments in the project.


Link

A logical interconnection between tasks. Dictates the sequence in which tasks can be carried out.


Linked bar chart

A bar chart showing tasks and the logical links between them on one diagram.


Link loop

A logical error in a plan whereby a link or series of links results in a later activity imposing a logical restraint on an earlier activity.


List box

A graphical selector, where a list of information is presented to make a choice from.


Local link

A logical connection between two tasks in the same chart.


Locked on

When a histogram is locked onto a bar chart, PowerProject displays the histogram directly underneath the bar chart in the bar chart window. You can lock up to two histograms on to a single bar chart. Useful for directly comparing the histogram and the bar chart.


Locked off

When a histogram is locked off from a bar chart, it is displayed in a separate window.


Locked segments

An option to make the segments of a bar contiguous after a reschedule. The uncompleted segments of the bar are considered to be one task. The bar must have more than one uncompleted segment to be effective. Locked segments can affect the creation of link loops. See Unlocked segments.


Log on

The procedure of entering a user name and password when starting a multi-user project. The procedure identifies who is using the project and what their access rights are.


Loop

See Link loop.


Merged calendar

If the resource assigned to a task has a resource calendar that is different to the task calendar, PowerProject merges the two calendars to define the working time for the task.


Milestone

A task with a zero duration, identified by a special symbol. Used to highlight important events, or outside influences in a project.


Move completed segments

See Progress - move completed segments.


MPX

A standard file format, originating from Microsoft® Project, which allows files to be transferred between programs that support the MPX file format.


Multi-user

The mode of operation of PowerProject where more than one user can gain access a project. Each user has a user name and password. Only one user at a time can use PowerProject.


Nesting

The arrangement of charts whereby the details on one are an expansion or a summary of the details of another. Nested charts are positioned lower in the hierarchy of charts. Summary bars can also be nested.


Nodes

Black squares positioned in the profile editor to indicate a new value for the resource profile.


No links

A segment without any local links or X-chart links attached.


NONE

The access right for calendars and libraries which prevents entry to this feature of a project.


Outdent

The method of removing a bar from a summary group.


Outline

A way of displaying the active chart so that only summary bars and bars on the root of the chart are displayed.


Output legend

See Legend.


Overtime

An irregular weekend working period.


Owning bar

The originating task or bar which summarises the details of all subordinate tasks in the hierarchy.


Owning chart

The chart on which the owning task(s) for subchart(s) and task(s) is located.


Parent

The originating chart or task which contains further lower level tasks in the hierarchy.


Part completed link

A link which starts on an uncompleted task and ends on a completed task. Such a link indicates a possible error in logic linking. Can be automatically moved onto any uncompleted end task during a reschedule.


Partially completed task

A task which is being carried out. Part has been completed and part still remains to be carried out.


Password

An encrypted set of characters assigned to each user of a multi-user project, which is entered and verified when starting a multi-user project. See Log on and User name.


.PDB Project Data Base

The file name extension for all projects and baseline projects produced by PowerProject when saved to disk.


Permanent resource

A resource that is not depleted by its use in the project. Once a permanent resource has finished work on a task it can be assigned to other tasks in the project.


Pool

A collection of resources or cost centres that have been combined into one for a histogram report. By pooling resources you can represent more resources on a histogram at once.


Portrait

Orientation of a printed image with short edge of the paper horizontal.


Preferences

Options to set default values and system parameters. Preference options can be changed and made permanent.


Profile editor

Allows users to map the varying values of some quantity over time in a graphical format. Used mainly to create resource profiles. Profile editor has two axes to represent the quantity and the time into the project or task. Nodes positioned at different points between the two axes represent the variable amounts over time.


Progress

The process whereby completed tasks are designated on the plan as work proceeds.


Progress - move completed segments

When active this calculation preference positions all completed tasks behind the chart report date and all uncompleted tasks after the report date. Adding progress may affect the project end date. When inactive this calculation preference ignores the effect of the chart report date on completed and uncompleted tasks. Adding progress may not affect the project end date.


Project

An enterprise involving a number of inter-related operations, with a set of objectives,- time, cost, quality.


Project end date

The calendar date when a project finishes. The project end date is taken from the latest end date of all tasks in the project.


Project float

A calculation preference to calculate critical tasks and float using the project start and end dates. See Chart float.


Project management

A term used to describe a range of techniques for meeting the objectives of a project.


Project report date

The minimum report dates of all the charts in the project. See Chart report date.


Project reschedule

A reschedule of every chart in the project. Every task in the project is correctly located.


Project start date

The calendar date when a project can commence. The project start date sets the earliest start date of any other item in the project.


Proportional resource model

This model allows you to calculate the amount of time you want a resource to work for. If the duration of the segment later changes the length of time the resource works for changes in proportion to the new segment duration and PowerProject automatically changes some of the information (as specified by the user) about the resource assignment to take account of the new resource assignment duration. See also Fixed resource model and Resource modelling.


Recalculation

See Reschedule.


Reflected link

A symbol used to show the existence of an X-chart link between two owning bars on the owning chart.


Report

Definition of filter or selection criteria to be used to search the project, or part of the project to extract just the information required for any circumstance. Graphical resource and cost centre histograms can be produced and previewed. Information about bars, links, charts and histograms can be produced in text format and be printed or exported to other programs.


Report date

The date you are reporting progress for - often today's date. It is shown on the bar chart as the progress line.


Reschedule

A mathematical calculation - critical path analysis - performed on the tasks and links, to ensure that the project is completed in the minimum possible time within the logical and imposed constraints of the plan.


Resource

Any item required to complete the work of a task. See Consumable resource and Permanent resource.


Resource allocation

A number - possibly decimal - set for each resource assigned to a segment, which represents the number of this resource which will be used throughout for the execution of the segment. See also Resource profile.


Resource allocation profile

A profile representing the variable allocation of a resource to a task. The profile is created using the profile editor.


Resources assigned

A list of resources chosen from the resource library which are assigned to a segment.


Resource availability

A number assigned to each resource in the resource library which represents the maximum number of this resource available throughout the project. See also Resource profile.


Resource availability profile

A profile representing the variable availability of a resource throughout the project. The profile is created using the profile editor.


Resource calendar

The calendar assigned to each resource in the resource library, which defines the working periods for a resource.


Resource consumption/supply rate

The rate at which a consumable resource is evenly supplied or consumed across a task.


Resource consumption/supply rate profile

A profile representing the variable rate at which a consumable resource is consumed or supplied by tasks in the project. The profile is created using the profile editor.


Resource cost

A cost associated with a particular resource and assigned to tasks whenever the associated resource is assigned. Cost information about a resource is stored along with other information about the resource in the resource library. A resource cost depends on the duration of the task and the number of resources assigned to the task.


Resource-driven

A resource-driven assignment means that the length of time a resource works for on a task is not solely determined by the duration of the segment to which it is assigned. You specify that you want a resource-driven resource assignment using resource modelling. PowerProject provides the Fixed and the Proportional resource models.


Resource group

A collection of resources of the same type that are often used together in the same ratio. See Resource.


Resource library

A list of all available resources in a project and details about each resource, including resource calendar, resource availability and resource cost information. See Library.


Resource loading

See Histograms.


Resource modelling

A way of allowing the user to specify whether they want a resource assignment to be duration-driven or resource-driven.


Resource profile

Represents information about a resource that varies throughout the project or task. For example, resource availability profile and resource allocation profile for a permanent resource and consumption or supply rate profile for a consumable resource. A resource profile is created using the profile editor.


Root chart

The first chart of a project. The highest chart in the tree of charts. The root chart summarises the whole project.


Ruling lines

Horizontal lines drawn across a bar chart or histogram. Different line frequency and line styles can be chosen. See also Grids.


Scale groups

A way of forcing certain graphs to always have the same vertical scale. For example, to compare under and over usage of a resource directly, they must be in the same scale group.


Scales

The horizontal and vertical size of a chart or histogram. PowerProject chooses the vertical scale of a histogram, but the horizontal scale can be changed.


Schedule

A time plan of the operations to be carried out in a project.


Scope

The area of the project accessible to a user in a multi-user project, see chart scope and head chart, or the area of a project to be used when creating baselines, filter charts, text reports and histograms.


Segment

A task or part of a task on the plan. A segment is independent in time, resource, cost, logic and appearance coding, but shares common attributes, such as a calendar, with other segments on the same bar.


Segment codes

One of two codes assigned to affect a segment's appearance. The name used in place of segment code 1 and segment code 2 can be changed. See also Bar codes.


Segment end date

The calendar date when a segment finishes. Originally set on creating/editing a segment. Segments end at their optimum position after a reschedule.


Segment number

The number of the segment of a bar in the position it occupies in a sequence of bar segments. Tasks split by partial progress are still considered to be one segment and will share the segment number.


Segment start date

The calendar date when a segment commences. Originally set on creating/editing a segment. Segments start at their optimum position after a reschedule.


Segment title

The description applied to a segment.


Selector

A general graphical method of choosing one or more items from a list of possible items, for example Resource Library selector.


Sequential dates

A numbering system for week and days which starts at the beginning of the project (or user requested date) and continues without re-starting at the start of each year. See Date zone - units.


Shortcut

A keyboard or mouse action which is a substitute for a menu command or dialog option. Allows an operation to be carried out quickly without leaving the current work area.


Single user

The mode of operation of PowerProject where anyone can gain access to a project. No users are entered and no user name or password is requested when starting a project.


Slack

See Float.


Start date

The calendar date when a task, bar, chart or project commences.


Start flag

A special symbol assigned to a task showing an imposed earliest date.


Start flag date

The date from which a start flag is effective and may affect the start date of a task.


Status line

A panel of information displayed when bar charts are active on screen. Shows in text, dates and time units what is the status of the pointer location and any selected item.


Subordinate

A lower chart or task in the hierarchy originating from a higher level owner task. All lower relations of the owner-children, grandchildren, etc.- are subordinate. Subordinate charts are sometimes referred to as subcharts.


Sub-project

A related set of tasks which can be conveniently grouped together. The cumulative result of the tasks are summarised by a single task at a higher level in the plan. A significant stage of the project.


Summary bar

A bar summarising a subset of bars on the chart. The summary bar takes its position and duration from the bars it summarises. Summary bars can be collapsed or expanded.


Summary group

The collective name given to the bars grouped under a summary bar. Summary groups are indented from the root of the chart.


Task

An operation or process consuming time and possibly other resources. Where a bar contains a single task, the bar is sometimes called a task. If a bar contains an intermittent or repetitive task, each segment is also called a task. See Segment.


Task end date

See Segment end date.


Task start date

See Segment start date.


Text report

Information about bar and segments, charts, links or histograms can be output in text format in a text report. Text reports can also be saved to a file on disk, which can be imported into other programs.


Time grid

Vertical lines on the bar chart marking the divisions between time units.


Time unit

A unit of time-Half Days, Days, Weeks, Fortnights-at which tasks can be created, edited and examined.


Title numbering

The display of line numbers adjacent to the bar title's panel on the bar chart. See Chart display appearance.


Token

A string of characters which represents a piece of information in a project, chart, bar or segment such as the project start date e.g. <PROJECT-START>. When inserted, the token is replaced with the correct information, for example the project start might be 17 Jul 1995. Tokens can be included in border scripts, text reports, text annotations and column sheets.


Toolbar

Set of buttons displayed underneath the menu bar. Some buttons can be used instead of certain PowerProject menu commands and others can be used to annotate charts and histograms. See Annotation.


Top down

The description of the project structure or hierarchy defining the major subordinate stages in increasing detail.


Total float

The period by which a task can be delayed or extended without delaying the completion of the project. Total float is shown as:


Tree of charts

The arrangement of charts into a hierarchy. Similar to a family tree. Parent tasks are the summary of all child tasks. Child tasks are a more detailed description of the parent task. Children can themselves be expanded into further details by grandchildren tasks, etc..


.TXT

The file name extension for comma separated text reports when saved to disk. See also Comma separated file.


Uncompleted task

A task which has not started. It lies in the future.


Unlinked segments

A calculation preference to move those tasks which have no links assigned by varying amounts. Settings are minimum, maximum or do not move.


Unlocked segments

An option to allow the segments of a bar act independently. The segments of the bar are considered to be individual tasks. See Locked segments.


Upward sloping link

A link which passes up the chart, starting on a lower bar and ending on a higher bar in the chart.


User

The person currently using PowerProject.


User name

A unique name assigned to each user of a multi-user project which is entered and verified when starting a multi-user project. See Log on and Password.


User setup

The process of introducing a new user to a project. See Multi-user.


VIEW

The access right for calendars, libraries and charts which allows entry to an area, but prevents changes being made.


WBN

Work Breakdown Numbering (WBN) is a term used to describe the numbering system applied to a Work Breakdown Structure (WBS). See WBS.


WBS

Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) is a term used to describe organising the tasks in a project so that the tasks on any level are a subsection of the level above. PowerProject’s chart hierarchy, where an overall task can be broken down into smaller units of work (bars), is a work breakdown structure.


Weekend

A regular non-working period.


Whole bar

A bar on the bar chart, made up of a series of segments.


.WKS

The file name extension for text reports saved to disk to be imported into spreadsheet programs.


.WMF

The file name extension for saving graphic images produced by PowerProject when saved to disk.


Work

The quantity of an item that must be used to allow a permanent resource to complete a task.


Work rate

The rate at which a permanent resource can work.


Working time unit

A time unit available for the time grid display which will respond to the setting of the current time unit for the bar chart. Changing the current time unit of the bar chart will affect the display of the time grid when the working time unit is assigned to the grid.


Working week

The number of regular working periods in a week.


X-CHART

The access right for charts which allows the setting, editing or deletion of X-chart links only, task and link details within the chart cannot be changed.


X-chart link

A logical connection between two tasks in different charts.


Histogram - Resource menu command

This menu command displays the Resource Histograms selector which allows you to:

Create a new resource histogram report.

Edit an existing resource histogram report.

Execute an existing resource histogram report.

Delete an existing resource histogram report.

You can perform these actions on permanent resource histograms or consumable resource histograms. Click on Permanent Resources to perform an action on a permanent resource histogram or click on Consumable Resources to perform an action on a consumable resource histogram.

A resource histogram report specifies the information you want to include in a resource histogram and how you want to display the information.

Note: This command is not available if you are working in a multi-user project and have an Access Right of NONE for the resource library.


Histogram - Cost Centre menu command

This menu command displays the Cost Centre Histograms selector where you can:

Create a new cost centre histogram report.

Edit an existing cost centre histogram report.

Execute an existing cost centre histogram report.

Delete an existing cost centre histogram report.

A cost centre histogram report specifies the information you want to include in a cost centre histogram and how you want to display the information.

Note: This command is not available if you are working in a multi-user project and have an Access Right of NONE for the cost centre library.


Histogram - Close menu command

This menu command allows you to close the active histogram.

If any of the histogram report details have changed since you executed the report, PowerProject displays an alert which asks whether you want to save the changes made to the report. If you confirm the alert any changes made to the histogram are saved.

If you close a histogram report that has not yet been saved, PowerProject displays a prompt to ask if you want to save the report. If you confirm the prompt, the report is saved. If you have not specified a name for the report, PowerProject displays a Histogram Report Details dialog for you to enter a name for the report.

This menu command has the same effect as the histogram window close box.


Histogram - Save menu command

This menu command allows you to save any changes made to the active histogram.

This command is only available if you have made changes to the histogram report since you executed the histogram report. To see details of the current histogram report, use the Edit - Details menu command.

You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the histogram window and selecting Save from the popup menu that appears.

Clicking on the Save Project button will save all the open histograms and charts in the active project. If the active project has not already been saved using File - Save As, the Save File selector will be displayed for you to enter a filename for the project.

Note: Any changes made to the current histogram scale and grid will also be saved if you use this command. These scales and grids are displayed only if the histogram is displayed in a separate window.


Histogram - Customise menu command

This menu command lets you change the display, scale and grid settings of the active unlocked histogram. The tabbed Customise Histogram View dialog appears when you select this command. If the active histogram is locked to a bar chart, this menu command is disabled.

A locked on histogram takes its display, scale and grid attributes from the bar chart to which it is locked. To change the display, scale and grid of a locked on histogram use the Chart - Customise menu command.

You can also select this menu command for an unlocked histogram by right-clicking on the histogram window and selecting Customise from the popup menu that appears. If you right-click on a locked on histogram, you will notice that this menu command is disabled.


Customise Histogram View dialog

This dialog appears when you select Histogram - Customise. Use the tabs on this dialog to change the display, scale and grid settings of the active unlocked histogram. Click on a tab name below for details about the options available on that tab.

Display

Scale

Grid


Chart/Histogram - Time unit menu command

This menu command lets you change the time unit used for data entry in the active chart, or the time unit of the date zone in the active unlocked histogram. A submenu appears listing the time units available, which are:

half days

days

weeks

fortnights

The current time unit is ticked. Choose a different time unit by clicking on the one you want to use.

You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the chart or histogram window and selecting Time Unit from the popup menu that appears. The time unit of locked on histograms is determined by the time unit of the chart to which the histogram is locked.

Time unit for charts

When you draw bars and links on the bar chart they are drawn at time unit boundaries - called snapping - so that they are always located at a whole number of time units.

You can change time units whenever you need to, to suit the length of the segment you are drawing, or adjusting.

The time unit of data entry does not affect the scale of the chart display. It is just a convenience to make it easier for you to draw segments of different lengths on the bar chart.

The time unit chosen is displayed on the status line. All numbers in the status line panels are in whole numbers of the new time unit.

Time unit for histograms

You can change the time unit of the histogram date zone whenever you need, for example to match the time unit of the bar chart related to the histogram.

For histograms that are locked to the bar chart, select the Time Unit command from the Chart menu if you need to change the units.


Histogram - Edit Base Graph menu command

This menu command allows you to edit the values displayed by a base graph in a resource or cost centre histogram.

This command is only available if you have a base graph selected on the histogram display. To select a base graph, single-click on the graph you want to edit and a short description of the graph is displayed.

You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the histogram window and selecting Edit Base Graph from the popup menu that appears.

You edit a base graph in the profile editor.

Editing a base graph has the following effects on the histogram:

The Auto Update link between the histogram and the bar chart is automatically turned off.

Any graphs included in the histogram that are derived from the base graph you edited will also change in accordance with the changes made to the base graph.


Histogram - Vertical Rescale menu command

When you choose this menu command PowerProject checks whether a more appropriate vertical scale could be used to display the graphs on the active histogram.

You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the histogram window and selecting Vertical Rescale from the popup menu that appears.

When you execute a histogram report, PowerProject chooses a suitable vertical axis on which to display all the graphs included in the histogram. When choosing a vertical axis, PowerProject takes into account the screen space available for the histogram and the maximum and minimum values of graphs in the histogram. Therefore, if the space available for the histogram or the graph values change PowerProject may need to choose a more appropriate vertical axis.

PowerProject automatically checks whether a more suitable vertical axis could be used in the following situations:

If you resize the histogram window.

If you change any details about the histogram from the Histogram Report Details dialog.

Unless you do either of these, PowerProject leaves the vertical axis unchanged, for example if you turn the Auto Update link on and off or move and edit segments on the bar chart, even if some of the graphs in the histogram no longer fit on the axis. Leaving the vertical axis unchanged means that you can easily see the effects that changes to the bar chart have on graphs in the histogram. However you can specify that you want PowerProject to check whether a new vertical axis would be appropriate at any time by choosing the Histogram - Vertical Rescale command.

Note: Specifying that you want PowerProject to check and change the vertical axis can also affect the scaling factors used for graphs on the histogram. For example, if the maximum value of a graph increases, PowerProject may scale the graph down (by a power or ten) to enable it to be displayed on the vertical axis.


Histogram - Show Legend menu command

This menu command allows you to toggle the histogram legend on and off on the histogram display. The histogram legend is displayed when this command is ticked.

You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the histogram window and selecting Show Legend from the popup menu that appears.


Histogram - Auto Update menu command

This menu command allows you to toggle the Auto Update link between a histogram and a bar chart on and off. The Auto Update link is on when this command is ticked.

You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the histogram window and selecting Auto Update from the popup menu that appears.

The indicator in the top left corner of each histogram indicates whether the Auto Update link is on or off. When the link is on, this indicator is red and when the link is off the indicator is blue.

You can also turn the Auto Update link on and off by double clicking on the indicator.

Turning the Auto Update link on causes PowerProject to regenerate the histogram to take account of any changes made to the project that affect the graphs included in the histogram.

Note: On monochrome screens, the Auto Update indicator is black when the link is on and white when the link is off.


Histogram - Lock to Bar Chart menu command

This menu command allows you to toggle the active histogram between being locked onto the bar chart and being displayed in a separate window. The histogram is locked onto the bar chart when this command is ticked.

If you have more than one bar chart open and you choose this command, PowerProject displays the Lock to Chart cursor:

Position this cursor over the chart you want to lock the histogram onto, and click. If you click while the cursor is not positioned over a chart, the histogram remains in a separate window.

You can also select this menu command by right-clicking on the histogram window and selecting Lock to Bar Chart from the popup menu that appears.

For details of how to set the size of a locked histogram for printing, see Printing locked histograms.


Resource Histograms selector

This selector is presented when the Histogram - Resource menu command is chosen.

The Selector lists all the current permanent or consumable resource histogram reports previously created via the New button. If a histogram report is already open the histogram report name still appears on the selector, but has (Open) after it to indicate that the report has already been executed. You can edit an open histogram report from the selector but you cannot delete or execute it.

To display permanent resource histogram reports on the selector, click the Permanent resources option and to display consumable resource histogram reports on the selector, click the Consumable resources option.

Using this selector you can:

Create a new resource histogram report

Edit an existing resource histogram report

Execute an existing resource histogram report.

Delete an existing resource histogram report.

To close the Resource Histograms selector, click on the Close button.

Creating a new resource histogram report

To create a new resource histogram report:

1	Click on Permanent resources or Consumable resources depending on whether you want to create a report about permanent or consumable resources.

2	Click the New button to display the Permanent Resource Histogram Report Details or the Consumable Resource Histogram Report Details dialog. This dialog allows you to specify the resources you want to include in the report, the information you want to display about the resources and how you want the information to appear on the histogram display.

Editing an existing resource histogram report

To edit an existing resource histogram report:

1	Click on Permanent resources or Consumable resources depending on whether you want to create a report about permanent or consumable resources.

2	Select a histogram report from the selector and click on the Edit button or double-click on a report from the selector to display the Permanent Resource Histogram Report Details or the Consumable Resource Histogram Report Details dialog.

Executing a resource histogram report

Once you have created a resource histogram report from the Permanent Resource Histogram Report Details or the Consumable Resource Histogram Report Details dialog, and saved it, you can execute it whenever you like from the Resource Histograms selector.

To execute a resource histogram report:

1	Click on Permanent resources or Consumable resources depending on whether you want to execute a report about permanent or consumable resources.

2	Select a histogram report from the selector and click on the Execute button.

PowerProject executes the histogram report and the information specified in the report is displayed as a histogram on your screen.

Deleting a resource histogram report

To delete a resource histogram report:

1	Click on Permanent resources or Consumable resources depending on whether you want to delete a permanent or a consumable histogram report.

2	Select a histogram report from the selector and click on the Delete button.

3	Confirm the alert presented to delete the histogram report. The report is permanently removed from the Resource Histograms selector.

Closing the histogram report selector

To close the Resource Histograms selector without creating, editing, executing or deleting a report, click on the Close button.


The histogram window

Once a histogram report has been created, and executed the histogram window shows graphs of how particular resources or cost centres are used over a period of time. You can see when you have too few, or too many resources and when you have a deficit or surplus of money in a cost centre.

A histogram can be displayed in a separate window or can be locked onto a bar chart. Use the Histogram - Lock to Bar Chart menu command to lock a histogram on and off a bar chart. Once a histogram is displayed on-screen it can be printed.

Each histogram displayed on screen contains the following information:

One or more graphs for the resources or cost centres included in the histogram report.

A vertical axis which is chosen by PowerProject to display the graphs in the histogram. PowerProject only changes the vertical scale if you resize the histogram window or you specify that you want to change the scale, using the Histogram - Vertical Rescale menu command. For example, as a result of bar chart changes the graph values may change and not all of the graph may be visible on the histogram display. Choosing Histogram - Vertical Rescale means that PowerProject will select a more appropriate vertical scale, if appropriate.

A date zone to show how the resources or cost centres are being used over time. You can change the display of the date zone by using the Display tab on the Customise Histogram View dialog and you can change the horizontal scale by using the Scale tab on the Customise Histogram View dialog.

Grid and ruling lines to help you read the values of the graphs on the histogram display. You can change the display of grid and ruling lines using the Grid tab on the Customise Histogram View dialog.

An Auto Update link indicator which is displayed in the top left corner of the histogram. The indicator shows whether the Auto Update link between a histogram and bar chart is on or off. When the Auto Update link is on it means that PowerProject automatically updates the histogram if you make any changes to the bar chart that affect the graphs included in the histogram. Use the Histogram - Auto Update menu command or double-click on the indicator itself to toggle the Auto Update link on and off.

A histogram legend. The legend displays explanatory text about each graph included in the histogram. Use the Histogram - Show Legend menu command to toggle the display of the histogram legend on and off.

Note: If a histogram is locked to a bar chart, use the Scale tab and Grid tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog to change the horizontal scale and ruling lines of the histogram.


Printing a histogram

Once a histogram is displayed on screen it can be printed, sent to the Clipboard, or output as a WMF file by using the File - Print Graphics menu command.

You can print a histogram that is displayed in a separate window or when it is locked onto a bar chart.

When printing a histogram that is not locked to a bar chart, only the section of the histogram shown in the window will be printed. You can avoid having empty space at the start and end of a histogram printout. To avoid empty space at the start of a histogram, scroll the histogram window so that the graphs start at the very left of the histogram window. If you want to print the histogram graphs starting from a certain date, scroll the window until that date is at the left edge of the histogram window. To avoid empty space at the end of a histogram printout, increase the histogram's horizontal scale using the Scale tab on the Customise Histogram View dialog.

For details of how to change the size of a locked histogram for printing, see Printing locked histograms.


Histogram Report Details dialogs

You can create permanent resource, consumable resource and cost centre histograms in PowerProject. The dialog you use to create histogram reports is the Histogram Report Details dialog. The fields on this dialog vary depending on which type of histogram report you are creating.

See Permanent Resource Histogram Report Details for more details on creating a permanent resource histogram report.

See Consumable Resource Histogram Report Details for more details on creating a consumable resource histogram report.

See Cost Centre Histogram Report Details for more details on creating a cost centre histogram report.


Permanent Resource Histogram Report Details dialog

This dialog allows you to create a consumable resource histogram report, which you can execute to display a histogram on screen. When creating a consumable resource histogram report you can specify the following:

The name of the histogram report.

The resources you want to include in the histogram.

The information you want to display about the resources included in the histogram. The different types of information you can include in a report are represented by different graphs.

The style of graphs included in the histogram.

Whether you want to override the default graph scaling done by PowerProject.

Highlight any resources that have been over allocated.

The way in which you want to view the histogram report.

A filter for a resource included in the histogram

The cumulative unit you want to use for resources included in the histogram.

The asap/alap position of tasks on charts included in the scope of the histogram report

The scope of the histogram, for example you may want to create a histogram from a single chart or all the charts in the project.

Name

Enter a name for the histogram report you are creating or click in this field to locate the text cursor and change the name of an existing report.

If you do not want to save the histogram report, you do not need to enter a name for the report. If you do want to save the report, enter a name that is not blank or made up of spaces.

Resources Available list

Select the resources you want to include in the histogram from this list and click on the right arrow to move them into the Selected for Histogram list.

Use CTRL - click to select resources scattered throughout the list or use SHIFT - click to select one or more contiguous resources in the list.

You can select up to twenty resources. If you need to include more than twenty resources in a histogram, you could pool them using the Pool button.

Pool button

Click on this button if you want to pool the selected resources into one set of graphs rather than have a set of graphs for each resource. When you click on this button the Pool Name dialog appears. There is no limit to the number of resources that you can include in a pool.

Selected for Histogram list

When a resource appears in the Selected for Histogram list it means that the resource will be included in the histogram.

To remove resources from the histogram, make sure they are selected and click on the left arrow to move them back into the Resources Available list.

Graph Types

To specify the information you want to show about the resources included in the histogram, click on the Graph Types button to display the Graph Types dialog. This dialog allows you to choose which graphs you want to include in the histogram and how you want them to appear on the histogram display, for example you can choose whether the graphs should appear as a bar, line or an area.

The default graphs for a permanent resource are the Allocated resource and the Over allocated resource graphs, each of which is represented on the histogram display as a Bar (Max) style. Any permanent resource histogram you create includes only these default graphs unless you specify otherwise from the Graph Types dialog.

Scale Groups

By default PowerProject groups Available, Unallocated, Allocated and Over allocated into different scale groups. Graphs that are in the same scale group are scaled by the same factor (by a power of ten), which allows you to compare different graphs directly. If you want to change the default scale groups for a particular histogram report, click on the Scale Groups button to display the Scale Groups dialog.

Find Over Allocated

Click on this button to identify any permanent resources that have been over allocated in the project. Any resources that have been over allocated are marked by an asterisk (*) in the Resources Available list. You can then choose whether to include them in the histogram report.

Viewing the histogram - Startup Options

Use the options in this panel of the dialog to specify how you want to view and update the histogram when the report is first executed.

Lock onto bar chart

Check this option if you want the histogram to be automatically locked onto a bar chart when the report is executed.

Show histogram legend

Check this option if you want the histogram legend to be automatically displayed when the histogram report is executed.

Auto update

Check this option if you want the Auto Update link between the histogram and the bar chart to be turned on when the report is executed. This option is checked by default.

Saving and executing the histogram report

Once you have created a histogram report, you can execute the report immediately or you can save the report and then execute it whenever you wish.

To save the histogram report details, click on the OK button.

To execute a histogram report that you have saved, choose the Histogram - Resource menu command to display the Resource Histograms selector. Select the report you want to execute and click on the Execute button.

Executing a histogram report immediately

To execute a histogram report without saving it, click on the Execute button of the Histogram Report Details dialog.

When you close the histogram using the Histogram - Close menu command, PowerProject presents an alert asking if you want to save the report.

Expanded Histogram Report Details dialog

To display the expanded version of the dialog, click on the Options button. To return the dialog to its unexpanded version, click the Hide Options button.

You can also specify whether you want resource and histogram dialogs to be expanded or unexpanded by default, using the General tab on the Options dialog.

Resource Cumulative Unit

You can specify a cumulative unit for each resource included in the histogram report, for example days and weeks. The unit you specify is used if you include any graphs that show cumulative values in the histogram report. For example, if you have a resource "Interior Designers" and include the graph "Allocated effort to date" and specify a cumulative unit of days, the graph will show the number of Interior Designer days effort that have been allocated so far in the project.

To specify a cumulative unit for a resource, you must first select the resource from the Selected for Histogram list and then select a cumulative unit.

Task position

This option allows you to specify how you want the position of tasks on a bar chart to be reflected in the histogram graphs for a resource. The task position you specify here does not affect the actual position of tasks on the bar chart.

The position of tasks on a bar chart may affect any under and over allocation of permanent resources

For example, to see whether the position of the tasks affects the allocation of a permanent resource across a project, you could include the same resource twice in a histogram report, specify ALAP position for one and ASAP for the other. By locking the histogram onto the bar chart, you can clearly see how the task position may affect any over and under allocation of the resource.

To specify the task position for a resource included in the histogram report, select the resource from the Selected for Histogram list and specify one of the following options:

Don't move

Click this option to specify that the histogram report should use the position of the tasks specified on the bar chart. This is the default option.

ASAP

Click this option to specify that the histogram report reflects all tasks as being in ASAP position.

ALAP

Click this option to specify that the histogram report reflects all tasks as being in ALAP position.

Resource filters

You can create a filter report for any resource included in the histogram report. For example, you may want to include only tasks that a particular resource has completed in a histogram report. If you save a histogram report, any resource filters you create are saved along with the histogram report.

To create a resource filter report:

1	Select the resource from the Selected for Histogram list

2	Click on the Define Filter button to display the Histogram Report Filter dialog. Specify which tasks you want to be included in the histogram report using the filter options displayed on this dialog. Click on OK to return to the Histogram Report Details dialog.

Notice that the Define Filter button now says Edit Filter, so you can edit the filter report later if you want to.

3	To specify that the histogram report uses the report filter, make sure that the Use filter box is checked.

If you save the histogram report, any resource filters for resources included in the report are saved along with the histogram report.

Note: If you remove a resource from the histogram report by moving it from the Selected for Histogram list into the Resources Available list, any filter you specified for the resource is removed.

Showing the filter name in the histogram legend

If you use a resource filter when executing the histogram report, you can specify whether or not you want the name of the filter to be displayed in the histogram legend. Displaying the filter name in the legend is useful if you include the same resource twice in the histogram report and specified a different filter for each instance of the resource. By displaying the filter name in the legend you can distinguish between graphs that use different resource filters.

Check the Show filter name in legend box to specify that you want the filter name to be displayed. This box is available only if the Use filter box is also checked.

Histogram Scope

Select an option from the Report Scope panel of the dialog to specify which charts you want to be included in the histogram. For example, you may want to create a histogram of resource usage for the whole project or only the resource usage from certain charts.

Whole project

Choose this option if you want the histogram report to use all the charts in the project.

Selected charts

Choose this option if you want the histogram report to use only certain charts from the project. When you have selected this option, click on the Select button to display the Report Chart Scope selector. Select the charts you want to include in the histogram report from the Report Chart Scope selector.

Histogram Accuracy

Select an option from the Accuracy panel of the dialog to specify whether you want the histogram to be rounded up to the nearest time unit or adjusted within the last half day to provide the correct amount of work required.

Round up to nearest halfday

Choose this option if you want the histogram generation calculations to be rounded up to the nearest time unit, for example, if a resource works for 17 hours and there are 4 hours per day, the histogram will show 5 complete half days of work (17 hours is just over 4 half days).

Adjust last halfday

Choose this option if you want the histogram generation calculations to modify the histogram profile to provide the correct amount of work required, for example, if a resource works for 17 hours and there are 4 hours per day the amount of work required in the last half day will be reduced to make the total work in the resource allocation correct, i.e. 17 hours.


Consumable Resource Histogram Report Details dialog

This dialog allows you to create a consumable resource histogram report, which you can execute to display a histogram on screen. When creating a consumable resource histogram report you can specify the following:

The name of the histogram report.

The resources you want to include in the histogram.

The information you want to display about the resources included in the histogram. The different types of information you can include in a report are represented by different graphs.

The style of graphs included in the histogram.

Whether you want to override the default graph  scaling done by PowerProject.

Highlight any resources that have been over used.

The way in which you want to view the histogram report.

A filter for a resource included in the histogram

The Consumption/supply rate unit you want to use for resources included in the histogram.

The asap/alap position of tasks on charts included in the scope of the histogram report

The scope of the histogram, for example you may want to create a histogram from a single chart or all the charts in the project.

Name

Enter a name for the histogram report you are creating or click in this field to locate the text cursor and change the name of an existing report.

If you do not want to save the histogram report, you do not need to enter a name for the report. If you do want to save the report, enter a name that is not blank or made up of spaces.

Resources Available list

Select the resources you want to include in the histogram from this list and click on the right arrow to move them into the Selected for Histogram list.

Use CTRL - click to select resources scattered throughout the list or use SHIFT - click to select one or more contiguous resources in the list.

You can select up to twenty resources. If you need to include more than twenty resources in a histogram, you could pool them using the Pool button.

Pool button

Click on this button if you want to pool the selected resources into one set of graphs rather than have a set of graphs for each resource. When you click on this button the Pool Name dialog appears. There is no limit to the number of resources that you can include in a pool.

Selected for Histogram list

When a resource appears in the Selected for Histogram list it means that the resource will be included in the histogram.

To remove resources from the histogram, make sure they are selected and click on the left arrow to move them back into the Resources Available list.

Graph Types

To specify the information you want to show about the resources included in the histogram, click on the Graph Types button to display the Graph Types dialog. This dialog allows you to choose which graphs you want to include in the histogram and how you want them to appear on the histogram display, for example you can choose whether the graphs should appear as a bar, line or an area.

The default graphs for a consumable resource are the Consumption to date and the Over consumption to date graph, each of which are represented by an area on the histogram display. Any consumable resource histogram you create includes only these default graphs unless you specify otherwise from the Graph Types dialog.

Scale Groups

By default PowerProject groups Supply, Under consumption, Consumption and Over consumption graphs into different scale groups. Graphs that are in the same scale group are scaled by the same factor (by a power of ten), which allows you to compare different graphs directly. If you want to change the default scale groups for a particular histogram report, click on the Scale Groups button to display the Scale Groups dialog.

Find Over Consumed

Click on this button to identify any consumable resources that have been over consumed during the project. Any resources that have been over consumed are marked by an asterisk (*) in the Resources Available list. You can then choose whether to include them in the histogram report.

Viewing the histogram - Startup Options

Use the options in this panel of the dialog to specify how you want to view and update the histogram when the report is first executed.

When you execute the histogram report you can choose whether you want to lock the histogram onto a bar chart and whether or not you want to display an explanatory legend for the histogram.

Lock onto bar chart

Check this option if you want the histogram to be automatically locked onto a bar chart when the report is executed.

Show histogram legend

Check this option if you want the histogram legend to be automatically displayed when the histogram report is executed.

Auto update

Check this option if you want the Auto Update link between the histogram and the bar chart to be turned on when the report is executed. This option is checked by default.

Saving and executing the histogram report

Once you have created a histogram report, you can execute the report immediately or you can save the report and then execute it whenever you wish.

To save the histogram report details, click on the OK button.

To execute a histogram report that you have saved, choose the Histogram - Resource menu command to display the Resource Histograms selector. Select the report you want to execute and click on the Execute button.

Executing a histogram report immediately

To execute a histogram report without saving it, click on the Execute button of the Histogram Report Details dialog.

When you close the histogram using the Histogram - Close menu command, PowerProject presents an alert asking if you want to save the report.

Expanded Histogram Report Details dialog

To display the expanded version of the dialog, click on the Options button. To return the dialog to its unexpanded version, click the Hide Options button.

You can also specify whether you want resource and histogram dialogs to be expanded or unexpanded by default, using the General tab on the Options dialog.

Consumption/supply rate unit

You can specify a consumption/supply rate unit for each resource included in the histogram report, for example days and weeks. The unit you specify is used if you include any graphs that show the rate of consumption or rate of supply in the histogram report. For example, if you have a resource "Carpet tiles" and include the graph Consumption rate and specify a Consumption/supply rate unit of days, the graph will show the rate at which carpet tiles are being consumed per day.

To specify a Supply/Consumption rate unit for a consumable resource, you must first select the resource from the Selected for Histogram list and then select a cumulative unit.

Task position

This option allows you to specify how you want the position of tasks on a bar chart to be reflected in the histogram graphs for a resource. The task position you specify here does not affect the actual position of tasks on the bar chart.

The position of tasks on a bar chart may affect any under and over consumption of consumable resources.

For example, to see whether the position of the tasks affects the use of a consumable resource across a project, you could include the same resource twice in a histogram report, specify ALAP position for one and ASAP for the other. By locking the histogram onto the bar chart, you can clearly see how the task position may affect any over and under use of the resource.

To specify the task position for a resource included in the histogram report, select the resource from the Selected for Histogram list and specify one of the following options:

Don't move

Click this option to specify that the histogram report should use the position of the tasks specified on the bar chart. This is the default option.

ASAP

Click this option to specify that the histogram report reflects all tasks as being in ASAP position.

ALAP

Click this option to specify that the histogram report reflects all tasks as being in ALAP position.

Resource filters

You can create a filter report for any resource included in the histogram report. For example, you may want to see a graph of the usage of a consumable resource only when it is assigned to uncompleted tasks. If you save a histogram report, any resource filters you create are saved along with the histogram report.

To create a resource filter report:

1	Select the resource from the Selected for Histogram list

2	Click on the Define Filter button to display the Histogram Report Filter dialog. Specify which tasks you want to be included in the histogram report using the filter options displayed on this dialog. Click on OK to return to the Histogram Report Details dialog.

Notice that the Define Filter button now says Edit Filter, so you can edit the filter report later if you want to.

3	To specify that the filter is used when you execute the histogram report, make sure the Use filter box is checked.

If you save the histogram report, any resource filters for resources included in the report are saved along with the histogram report.

Note: If you remove a resource from the histogram report by moving it from the Selected for Histogram into the Resources Available, any filter you specified for the resource is removed.

Showing the filter name in the histogram legend

If you use a resource filter when executing the histogram report, you can specify whether or not you want the name of the filter used to be displayed in the histogram legend. Displaying the filter name in the legend is useful if you include the same resource twice in the histogram report and specified a different filter for each instance of the resource. By displaying the filter name in the legend you can distinguish between graphs that use different resource filters.

Check the Show filter name in legend box to specify that you want the filter name to be displayed. This box is available only if the Use filter box is also checked.

Histogram Scope

Select an option from the Report Scope panel of the dialog to specify which charts you want to be included in the histogram. For example, you may want to create a histogram of resource usage for the whole project or only the resource usage from certain charts.

Whole project

Choose this option if you want the histogram report to use all the charts in the project.

Selected charts

Choose this option if you want the histogram report to use only certain charts from the project. When you have selected this option, click on the Select button to display the Report Chart Scope selector. Select the charts you want to include in the histogram report from the Report Chart Scope selector.

Histogram Accuracy

Select an option from the Accuracy panel of the dialog to specify whether you want the histogram to be rounded up to the nearest time unit or adjusted within the last half day to provide the correct amount of work required.

Round up to nearest halfday

Choose this option if you want the histogram generation calculations to be rounded up to the nearest time unit, for example, if a resource works for 17 hours and there are 4 hours per day, the histogram will show 5 complete half days of work (17 hours is just over 4 half days).

Adjust last halfday

Choose this option if you want the histogram generation calculations to modify the histogram profile to provide the correct amount of work required, for example, if a resource works for 17 hours and there are 4 hours per day the amount of work required in the last half day will be reduced to make the total work in the resource allocation correct, i.e. 17 hours.


Cost Centre Histograms selector

This selector is presented when the Histogram - Cost Centre menu command is chosen.

The Selector lists all the current cost centre histogram reports previously created via the New button. If a histogram report is already open the histogram report name still appears on the selector, but has (Open) after it. to indicate that the report has already been executed. You can edit an open histogram report from the selector but you cannot delete or execute it.

Using this selector you can:

Create a new cost centre histogram report

Edit an existing cost centre histogram report

Execute an existing cost centre histogram report.

Delete an existing cost centre histogram report.

To close the Cost Centre Histograms selector, click on the Close button.

Creating a new cost centre histogram report

To create a new cost centre histogram report, click the New button to display the Histogram Report Details dialog. This dialog allows you to specify the cost centres you want to include in the report, the information you want to display about the cost centres and how you want the information to appear on the histogram display.

Editing an existing cost centre histogram report

To edit an existing cost centre histogram report, select a histogram report from the selector and click on the Edit button or double-click on a report from the selector to display the Histogram Report Details dialog.

Executing a cost centre histogram report

Once you have created a cost centre histogram report from the Histogram Report Details dialog, and saved it, you can execute it whenever you like from the Cost Centre Histograms selector.

To execute a cost centre histogram report, select a histogram report from the selector and click on the Execute button.

PowerProject executes the histogram report and the information specified in the report is displayed as a histogram on your screen.

Deleting a cost centre histogram report

To delete a cost centre histogram report:

1	Select a histogram report from the selector and click on the Delete button.

2	Confirm the alert presented to delete the histogram report. The report is permanently removed from the Cost Centre Histograms selector.

Closing the cost centre histogram report selector

To close the Cost Centre Histograms selector without creating, editing, executing or deleting a report, click on the Close button.


Cost Centre Histogram Report Details dialog

This dialog allows you to create a cost centre histogram report, which you can execute to display a histogram on screen. When creating a cost centre histogram report you can specify the following:

The name of the histogram report.

The cost centres or resource costs you want to include in the histogram.

The information you want to display about the cost centres included in the histogram. The different types of information you can include in a report are represented by different graphs.

The style of graphs included in the histogram.

Whether you want to override the default graph  scaling done by PowerProject.

Highlight any cost centres that have  overspent.

The way in which you want to view the histogram report.

A filter for a cost centre included in the histogram

The Income/Expenditure rate unit you want to use for cost centres included in the histogram.

The asap/alap position of tasks on charts included in the scope of the histogram report

The scope of the histogram, for example you may want to create a histogram from a single chart or all the charts in the project.

Name

Enter a name for the histogram report you are creating or click in this field to locate the text cursor and change the name of an existing report.

If you do not want to save the histogram report, you do not need to enter a name for the report. If you do want to save the report enter a name that is not blank or made up of spaces.

Cost Centres Available list

Select the cost centres you want to include in the histogram from this list and click on the right arrow to move them into the Selected for Histogram list.

Use CTRL - click to select resources scattered throughout the list or use SHIFT - click to select one or more contiguous resources in the list.

Below the cost centres in the project, is a list of all the resources in the project. By selecting a resource from this list and moving it into the Selected for Histogram list, you can include a graph that displays the total cost of that resource from all cost centres.

Resource groups are not displayed in this list.

Pool button

Click on this button if you want to pool the selected cost centres into one set of graphs rather than have a set of graphs for each cost centre. When you click on this button the Pool Name dialog appears.

Selected for Histogram list

When a cost centre appears in the Selected for Histogram list it means that the cost centre will be included in the histogram.

To remove cost centres from the histogram, make sure they are selected and click on the left arrow to move them back into the Cost Centres Available list.

Graph Types

To specify the information you want to show about the cost centres included in the histogram, click on the Graph Types button to display the Graph Types dialog. This dialog allows you to choose which graphs you want to include in the histogram and how you want them to appear on the histogram display, for example you can choose whether the graphs should appear as a bar, line or an area.

The default graphs for a cost centre histogram are the Expenditure to date and the Over expenditure to date graphs, each of which is represented on the histogram display as an area. Any cost centre histogram you create includes only these default graphs unless you specify otherwise from the Graph Types dialog.

Scale Groups

By default PowerProject groups Income, Under spend, Expenditure and Over expenditure graphs into different scale groups. Graphs that are in the same scale group are scaled by the same factor (in powers of ten), which allows you to compare different graphs directly. If you want to change the default scale groups for a particular histogram report, click on the Scale Groups button to display the Scale Groups dialog.

Find Over Spent

Click on this button to identify any cost centres that have over spent the amount of money available in the project. Any cost centres that have overspent are marked by an asterisk (*) in the Cost Centres Available list. You can then choose whether to include them in the histogram report.

Viewing the histogram - Startup Options

Use the options in this panel of the dialog to specify how you want to view and update the histogram when the report is first executed.

Lock onto bar chart

Check this option if you want the histogram to be automatically locked onto a bar chart when the report is executed.

Show histogram legend

Check this option if you want the histogram legend to be automatically displayed when the histogram report is executed.

Auto Update

Check this option if you want the Auto Update link between the histogram and the bar chart to be turned on when the report is executed. This option is checked by default.

Saving and executing the histogram report

Once you have created a histogram report, you can execute the report immediately or you can save the report and then execute it whenever you wish.

To save the histogram report details, click on the OK button.

To execute a histogram report that you have saved, choose the Histogram - Cost Centre menu command to display the Cost Centre Histograms selector. Select the report you want to execute and click on the Execute button.

Executing a histogram report immediately

To execute a histogram report without saving it, click on the Execute button of the Histogram Report Details dialog.

When you close the histogram using the Histogram - Close menu command, PowerProject presents an alert asking if you want to save the report.

Expanded Histogram Report Details dialog

To display the expanded version of the dialog, click on the Options button. To return the dialog to its unexpanded version, click the Hide Options button.

You can also specify whether you want resource and histogram dialogs to be expanded or unexpanded by default, using the General tab on the Options dialog.

Cost centre Income/Expenditure rate unit

You can specify a Income/Expenditure rate unit for each cost centre included in the histogram report, for example days and weeks. The unit you specify is used if you include any graphs that show the rate of income or rate of expenditure in the histogram report. For example, if you have a cost centre "Development budget" and include the graph "Expenditure rate" and specify a cumulative unit of days, the graph will show the Expenditure rate per day of this cost centre.

To specify a Income/Expenditure rate unit for a cost centre, you must first select the cost centre from the Selected for Histogram list and then select a unit.

Note: You can only choose a rate unit of half days or days for cost centre graphs. This is because the costs may come from more than one resource and each resource could work a different number of hours each day and/or have different working weeks, as defined by the resource calendar.

Task position

This option allows you to specify how you want the position of tasks on a bar chart to be reflected in the histogram graphs for a resource. The task position you specify here does not affect the actual position of tasks on the bar chart.

The position of tasks on a bar chart may affect any under and over spend by cost centres. For example, to see whether the position of the tasks affects any under and over spend by a cost centre across a project, you could include the same cost centre twice in a histogram report, specify ALAP position for one and ASAP for the other. By locking the histogram onto the bar chart, you can clearly see how the task position may affect any under and over spend by the cost centre.

To specify the task position for a cost centre included in the histogram report, select the cost centre from the Selected for Histogram list and specify one of the following options:

Don't move

Click this option to specify that the histogram report should use the position of the tasks specified on the bar chart. This is the default option.

ASAP

Click this option to specify that the histogram report reflects all tasks as being in ASAP position.

ALAP

Click this option to specify that the histogram report reflects all tasks as being in ALAP position.

Cost centre filters

You can create a filter report for any cost centre included in the histogram report. For example, you may want to include a graph of the expenditure of a cost centre only when costs from the cost centre as assigned to uncompleted tasks. If you save a histogram report, any cost centre filters you create are saved along with the histogram report.

To create a cost centre filter report:

1	Select the cost centre from the Selected for Histogram list

2	Click on the Define Filter button to display the Histogram Report Filter dialog. Specify which tasks you want to be included in the histogram report using the filter options displayed on this dialog. Click on OK to return to the Histogram Report Details dialog.

3	Notice that the Define Filter button now says Edit Filter, so you can edit the filter report later if you want to.

4	To specify that the histogram report uses the report filter, make sure the Use filter box is checked.

If you save the histogram report, any cost centre filters for cost centres included in the report are saved along with the histogram report.

Note: If you remove a cost centre from the histogram report by moving it from the Selected for Histogram into the Cost Centres Available, any filter you specified for the cost centre is removed.

Showing the filter name in the histogram legend

If you use a cost centre filter when executing the histogram report, you can specify whether or not you want the name of the filter used to be displayed in the histogram legend. Displaying the filter name in the legend is useful if you include the same cost centre or resource cost twice in the histogram report and specified a different filter for each instance of the cost centre or resource. By displaying the filter name in the legend you can distinguish between graphs that use different cost centre filters

Displaying the filter name in the legend is useful if you include the same cost centre twice in the histogram report and want to be able to distinguish the graphs that apply to one instance of the cost centre and graphs that refer to the other.

Check the Show filter name in legend box to specify that you want the filter name to be displayed. This box is available only if the Use filter box is also checked.

Histogram Scope

Select an option from the Report Scope panel of the dialog to specify which charts you want to be included in the histogram. For example, you may want to create a histogram of cost centre spending for the whole project or only the cost centre spending from certain charts.

Whole project

Choose this option if you want the histogram report to use all the charts in the project.

Selected charts

Choose this option if you want the histogram report to use only certain charts from the project. When you have selected this option, click on the Select button to display the Report Chart Scope selector. Select the charts you want to include in the histogram report from the Report Chart Scope selector.

Histogram Accuracy

Select an option from the Accuracy panel of the dialog to specify whether you want the histogram to be rounded up to the nearest time unit or adjusted within the last half day to provide the correct amount of work required.

Round up to nearest halfday

Choose this option if you want the histogram generation calculations to be rounded up to the nearest time unit, for example, if a resource works for 17 hours and there are 4 hours per day, the histogram will show 5 complete half days of work (17 hours is just over 4 half days).

Adjust last halfday

Choose this option if you want the histogram generation calculations to modify the histogram profile to provide the correct amount of work required, for example, if a resource works for 17 hours and there are 4 hours per day the amount of work required in the last half day will be reduced to make the total work in the resource allocation correct, i.e. 17 hours.


Graph styles

This table lists the different styles available for graphs

Style	Description
Off	This graph is not included in the histogram report and is not drawn on the histogram display.
Line	Single line.
Bar (min)	A bar graph showing the minimum value in the selected time period. Not available for "each time unit" graphs.
Bar (average)	A bar graph showing the average value in the selected time period. Not available for "to date" and "each time unit" graphs.
Bar (max)	A bar graph showing the maximum value in the selected time period.
Area	An area filled with a pattern.
Line (peaks only)	A line joining the peaks at the end of each time unit. Only available for "each time unit" graphs.
Area (peaks only)	A filled area joining the peaks at the end of each time unit. Only available for "each time unit" graphs.
Bar styles

There are three different bar styles: Min, Average and Max. These show the minimum, average and maximum values of the bar graph for the selected time period. The smaller the time period you select, the more detailed the bar graph will be.

The Bar (min) and Bar (average) styles are not available for "to date" and "each time unit" graphs, as they do not produce any meaningful data. For example, the Bar (min) style would always produce bars with a value of zero for "each time unit" graphs, as the values of these graphs are always reset to zero at the start of the selected time period.

Bar (min) and Bar (average) graph styles do not take into account allocations of a resource during weekends defined in the resource's calendar.

Peaks only styles

This style is available for any "each time unit" graphs that are represented by a line or an area. Selecting this type of style means that the values reached at the end of the selected time period are joined together.

"Peaks only" graphs are useful if you want to see a trend of how much of a resource or cost centre has been used at the end of a time period, for example the end of each month, although the lines joining the peaks together do not represent any actual usage of the resource or cost centre.


Histogram time unit

Each histogram report has a time unit which is used to specify the time period for any bar graphs included in the histogram. You specify this time unit from the Graph Types dialog. The time unit you select from a Graph Types dialog specifies whether each bar of a graph represents a half day, a day, a week and so on.


Graph Types dialogs

The Graph Types dialog is presented when you click the Graph Types button from the Histogram Report Details dialog.

The field names on the Graph Types dialog depends on what type of histogram report you are creating.

See Permanent Resource Graph Types for information on permanent resource graphs.

See Consumable Resource Graph Types for information on consumable resource graphs.

See Cost Centre Graph Types for information on cost centre graphs.


Permanent Resource Graph Types dialog

This dialog is presented when you click the Graph Types button from the Permanent Resource Histogram Report Details dialog.

This dialog allows you to specify:

The information you want to include about permanent resources included in the histogram report, by selecting one or more graphs from the dialog.

The style in which you want the graphs to appear on the histogram display.

How you want graphs represented by bars to appear on the histogram display

If you want to combine certain graphs represented by bars.

Whether you want the graphs to be stacked on the histogram display.

The time unit for any "each time unit" graphs and any graphs represented by a bar.

By default, PowerProject uses the Allocated resource and Over allocated resource graphs as the graphs for a permanent resource histogram. If you change the graphs used from these default graphs, you can always restore the default values, by clicking the Defaults button.

Permanent resource graph types

There are twelve different graphs available for permanent resource histograms. Any graphs you select are displayed for any resources included in the histogram. The different graphs you can select are displayed as a group of 12 drop-down list boxes. To select a graph, read across the rows and then down the columns to locate the graph you want. For example to select the Available effort to date graph, click on the list box in row 1 (Available), column 2 (effort to date) of the dialog. The drop-down list box displays the different styles available for that graph. To include a graph in the histogram report, choose a style from this list box, notice that the style you select is represented in the Sample panel at the foot of the dialog.

Graph name	Position on dialog	Description
Available resource (Base graph)	Row 1, Column 1	Amount of resource available across the project, as specified by the user in the Resource Library.
Allocated resource (Base Graph)	Row 2, Column 1	Amount of resource allocated across the project by the user.
Unallocated resource	Row 3, Column 1	Amount of resource not allocated; that is where the resource's availability exceeds its allocation.
Over allocated resource	Row 4, Column 1	Amount of resource over allocated; that is where the resource's allocation exceeds the availability.
Available effort to date	Row 1 , Column 2	The accumulated availability of the resource; that is the work capacity of the resource. For example, a project lasting 4 weeks that has 2 Electricians available throughout the project means the resource has 8 weeks of available effort.
Allocated effort to date	Row 2, Column 2	The accumulated allocation of the resource; that is the work load of the resource. For example, 2 Writers assigned to a task for 2 weeks is 4 weeks allocated effort.
Unallocated effort to date	Row 3, Column 2	The accumulated unallocation of the resource; that is the unused work capacity of the resource. For example, 3 Programmers not assigned to a task for 1 week is 3 week unallocated effort.
Over allocated effort to date	Row 4, Column 2	The accumulated over allocation of the resource; that is the excess work capacity on the resource. For example, an over allocation of 1 Carpet layer for 2 weeks is 2 weeks over allocated effort.
Available effort each time unit	Row 1, Column 3	The accumulated availability split into given time units throughout the project  For example, Available effort each week.
Allocated effort each time unit	Row 2, Column 3	The accumulated allocation split into given time units throughout the project.
Unallocated effort each time unit	Row 3, Column 3	The accumulated unallocation split into given time units throughout the project.
Over allocated effort each time unit	Row 4, Column 3	The accumulated over allocation split into given time units throughout the project.
Note: "Each time unit" graphs show the availability, allocation, under and over allocation of a permanent resource accumulate over a fixed period. The period is specified by the user, using the Time unit field from this dialog. PowerProject calculates "each time unit" graphs by resetting the cumulative to 0 at the start of each fixed period.

Bar Options

If you select a bar style for a graph in a histogram report, you can specify whether you want any spacing or any overlap between the bars when they appear on the histogram display.

Spacing

Use this field to specify the amount of spacing you want between bars on the histogram display.

Click in this field to locate the cursor and enter a number in this field, or use the arrows at the side of the box to enter the amount of spacing you want between bars. The spacing is specified as a percentage, therefore you must enter a value between 0 and 100.

The spacing between bars applies to all bars on the histogram display. All bars have to fit into the time period specified from the Time unit box on this dialog. If you specify a 20% spacing, any bars displayed for a specified time period occupy 80% of the space available. For example, if you include only one resource and one bar style graph in the histogram, the bar graph occupies 80% of the space available. However, if you include two bar style graphs in the histogram report, each graph occupies 40% of the space available, as PowerProject has to display two graphs into the same amount of space.

The Sample panel at the foot of the dialog shows the effect of any changes you make to the spacing of bars.

Overlap

Use this field to specify the amount of overlap you want for bars on the histogram display.

Overlap between bars only applies to bars representing different graphs or different resources. Therefore, the Overlap box is only available if you have done either of the following:

Included only bar style graph, but more than one resource in the histogram report.

Included two or more bar style graphs in the histogram report.

Click in this field to locate the cursor and enter a number in this field, or use the arrows at the side of the box to enter the amount of spacing you want between bars. The spacing is specified as a percentage, therefore you must enter a value between 0 and 100.

The Sample panel at the foot of the dialog shows the effect of any changes you make to the overlap of bars.

Bar Combining Options

When you select certain graphs which are represented with a bar style, you can specify that you want to combine the bars. This means that PowerProject shows one graph as part of another graph. Combining bars is useful if you want to see two lots of information displayed on the same bar graph.

Available with unallocated

This option is only available if you select Available and Unallocated graphs from the same column of the dialog and each graph is represented by a bar graph of the same type. For example, "Available resource" and "Unallocated resource" both represented by a Bar (min) style.

Check this box if you want to combine Available and Unallocated bar graphs on the histogram display.

Allocated with over allocated

This option is only available if you select Allocated and Over allocated graphs and each graph is represented by a bar graph of the same type. For example, "Allocated effort to date" and "Over allocated effort to date" graphs, both represented by a Bar (max) style.

Check this box if you want to combine Allocated and Over allocated graphs on the histogram display.

Other Options

The options in this panel allow you to specify whether you want the graphs to show weekends in the resource calendar, whether you want to stack the resource graphs included in the histogram and the time unit for any "each time unit" graphs and any bar graphs included in the histogram.

Draw through weekends

This option is available if you select a 'resource' graph for the histogram, for example the "Available resource" and "Allocated resource" graphs. If a resource has weekends defined in their calendar, any 'resource' graphs show a zero value at each occurrence of a weekend in the resource's calendar. For a long histogram this may make it difficult to interpret the data on the histogram display. To make these graphs easier to read and interpret, you can specify that the graph values are maintained through any of the resource's weekends by checking this option.

Stack resource graphs

Check this box if you want PowerProject to stack the graphs for all the resources included in the histogram. Stacking resource graphs is a way of viewing the total of resource graphs. For example, if you include the Allocation to date graph for permanent resources in a histogram and stack the resource graphs, you will be able to see the total allocation of all the resources included in the histogram, as well as the allocation of individual resources.

The following histogram shows the effect when the resources Designer and Architect are stacked. The allocated effort to date for the Designer is 90 weeks and for the Architect is 10 weeks. When the resources are stacked we can see that the total allocated effort to date is 100 weeks.

Time unit

Select a time unit from this list box. The time unit you select specifies the time unit for any "each time unit" graphs included in the histogram and the time unit for any graphs represented by a bar.

"Each time unit graphs". For these graphs the time unit you select specifies the unit PowerProject uses when calculating these graphs. For example if you select the Allocated each time unit graph, you can specify whether you want to see the number of resources allocated each day, each week and so on.

Bar graphs. For any graph represented by a bar the time unit you select specifies the time period that each bar represents. For example, a bar could represent a day, a week or a month.


Permanent resource availability

The resource available for a project is specified by the user from the Permanent Resource Details dialog. The user can enter a value in the Availability field to specify a fixed availability or can use the profile editor to specify a variable availability.

A fixed availability means that the same number of the resource is available throughout the project.

A variable availability means that the number of the resource varies throughout the project, for example you may start a project with 6 Labourers, which could increase to 10 Labourers some time into the project.


Resource allocation

The resource allocated for a project is the amount of the resource allocated by the user, using the Edit - Resources menu command.

You can specify a fixed or a variable allocation for a permanent resource.

A fixed allocation means that the same amount of resource is allocated for the duration of the resource assignment.

A variable allocation means that the amount of resource allocated varies throughout the duration of the resource assignment.


Consumable Resource Graph Types dialog

This dialog is presented when you click the Graph Types button from the Consumable Resource Histogram Report Details dialog.

This dialog allows you to specify:

The information you want to include about consumable resources included in the histogram report, by selecting one or more graphs from the dialog.

The style in which you want the graphs to appear on the histogram display.

How you want graphs represented by bars to appear on the histogram display

If you want to combine certain graphs represented by bars.

Whether you want the graphs to be stacked on the histogram display.

The time unit for any "each time unit" graphs and any graphs represented by a bar.

By default, PowerProject uses the Consumption to date and the Over consumption to date graphs as the default graphs for a consumable resource histogram, each of which is represented on the histogram display as an area. If you change the report to include different graphs you can later restore the default values, by clicking on the Defaults button.

Consumable resource graph types

There are twelve different graphs available for consumable resource histograms. Any graphs you select are displayed for any resources included in the histogram. The different graphs you can select are displayed as a group of 12 drop-down list boxes. To select a graph, read across the rows and then down the columns to locate the graph you want. For example to select the Consumption to date graph, click on the list box in row 2 (Consumption), column 2 (to date) of the dialog. The drop-down list box displays the different styles available for that graph. To include a graph in the histogram report, choose a style from this list box, notice that the style you select is represented in the Sample panel at the foot of the dialog.

Graph name	Position on Graph Types dialog	Description
Supply rate (Base Graph)	Row 1, Column 1	The rate at which the resource is being supplied to the project. Taken from any allocations that supply the resource and the Initial Availability in the Resource Library. This graph does not take instant supplies of a resource from milestones into account.
Consumption rate (Base Graph)	Row 2, Column 1	The rate at which the resource is being consumed by tasks in the project. Taken from any allocations that consume the resource. This graph does not take instant consumption of a resource by a milestone into account.
Under consumption rate	Row 3, Column 1	The rate at which the resource is being supplied in excess of its "Consumption rate"; that is, rate of build up of stock.
Over consumption rate	Row 4, Column 1	The rate at which the resource is being consumed in excess of its "Supply rate"; that is rate of depletion of stock.
Supply to date	Row 1 , Column 2	The accumulated "Supply rate" of the resource; including any instant supplies from milestones.
Consumption to date	Row 2, Column 2	The accumulated "Consumption rate" of the resource, including any instant consumption by milestones.
Under consumption to date	Row 3, Column 2	The amount of the resource supplied but not yet consumed; that is, stock left.
Over consumption to date	Row 4, Column 2	The amount of the resource consumed in excess of the amount supplied; that is, negative stock.
Supply each time unit	Row 1, Column 3	The accumulated "Supply rate" for a given time period. For example "Supply each week"
Consumption each time unit	Row 2, Column 3	The accumulated "Consumption rate" for a given time period.
Under consumption each time unit	Row 3, Column 3	The accumulated "Under consumption to date" for a given time period.
Over consumption each time unit	Row 4, Column 3	The accumulated "Over consumption to date" for a given time period.
Note: "Each time unit" graphs show the supply, consumption, under and over consumption of a consumable resource accumulate over a fixed period. The period is specified by the user, using the Time unit field from this dialog. PowerProject calculates "each time unit" graphs by resetting the cumulative to 0 at the start of each fixed period.

Bar Options

If you select a bar style for a graph in a histogram report, you can specify whether you want any spacing or any overlap between the bars when they appear on the histogram display.

Spacing

Use this field to specify the amount of spacing you want between bars on the histogram display.

Click in this field to locate the cursor and enter a number in this field, or use the arrows at the side of the box to enter the amount of spacing you want between bars. The spacing is specified as a percentage, therefore you must enter a value between 0 and 100.

The spacing between bars applies to all bars on the histogram display. All bars have to fit into the time period specified from the Time unit box on this dialog. If you specify a 20% spacing, any bars displayed for a specified time period occupy 80 % of the space available. For example, if you include only one resource and one bar style graph in the histogram, the bar graph occupies 80% of the space available. However, if you include two bar style graphs in the histogram report, each graph occupies 40% of the space available, as PowerProject has to display two graphs into the same amount of space.

The Sample panel at the foot of the dialog shows the effect of any changes you make to the spacing of bars.

Overlap

Use this field to specify the amount of overlap you want for bars on the histogram display.

Overlap between bars only applies to bars representing different graphs or different cost centres. Therefore, the Overlap box is only available if you have done either of the following:

Included only bar style graph, but more than one cost centre in the histogram report.

Included two or more bar style graphs in the histogram report.

Click in this field to locate the cursor and enter a number in this field, or use the arrows at the side of the box to enter the amount of spacing you want between bars. The spacing is specified as a percentage, therefore you must enter a value between 0 and 100.

The Sample panel at the foot of the dialog shows the effect of any changes you make to the overlap of bars.

Bar Combining Options

When you select certain graphs which are represented with a bar style, you can specify that you want to combine the bars. This means that PowerProject shows one graph as part of another graph. Combining bars is useful if you want to see two lots of information displayed on the same bar graph.

Supply with under consumption

This option is only available if you select Supply and Under consumption graphs in the same column of the dialog and each graph is represented by a bar of the same type. For example, "Supply to date" and "Under consumption to date" graphs both represented by a Bar (max) style.

Check this box if you want to combine Supply and Under consumption bar graphs on the histogram display.

Consumption with over consumption

This option is only available if you select Consumption and Over consumption graphs in the same column of the dialog and each graph is represented by a bar of the same type. For example, "Consumption rate" and "Over consumption rate" graphs both represented by a Bar (average) style.

Check this box if you want to combine Consumption and Over consumption graphs on the histogram display.

Other Options

The options in this panel allow you to specify whether you want to stack the resource graphs included in the histogram and the time unit for any "each time unit" graphs and any bar graphs included in the histogram.

Draw through weekends

This option is available if you select a 'rate' graph for the histogram, for example the "Supply rate" and "Consumption rate" graphs. If a resource has weekends defined in their calendar, any 'rate' graphs show a zero value at each occurrence of a weekend in the resource's calendar. For a long histogram this may make it difficult to interpret the data on the histogram display. To make these graphs easier to read and interpret, you can specify that the graph values are maintained through any of the resource's weekends by checking this option.

Stack resource graphs

Check this box if you want PowerProject to stack the graphs for all the resources included in the histogram. Stacking resource graphs is a way of viewing the total of resource graphs.

Time unit

Select a time unit from this list box. The time unit you select specifies the time unit for any "each time unit" graphs included in the histogram and the time unit for any graphs represented by a bar.

"Each time unit graphs". For these graphs the time unit you select specifies the unit PowerProject uses when calculating these graphs. For example if you select the "Consumption each time unit" graph, you can specify whether you want to see the number of resources consumed each day, each week and so on.

Bar graphs. For any graph represented by a bar the time unit you select specifies the time period that each bar represents. For example, a bar could represent a day, a week or a month.


Cost Centre Graph Types dialog

This dialog is presented when you click the Graph Types button from the Cost Centre Histogram Report Details dialog.

This dialog allows you to specify:

The information you want to include about cost centres included in the histogram report, by selecting one or more graphs from the dialog.

The style in which you want the graphs to appear on the histogram display.

How you want graphs represented by bars to appear on the histogram display

If you want to combine certain graphs represented by bars.

Whether you want the graphs to be stacked on the histogram display.

The time unit for any "each time unit" graphs and any graphs represented by a bar.

By default, PowerProject uses the Expenditure to date and Over expenditure to date graphs as the default graphs for a cost centre histogram. If you want to restore the default values, click the Defaults button.

Cost centre graph types

There are twelve different graphs available for cost centre histograms. Any graphs you select are displayed for any cost centres included in the histogram. The different graphs you can select are displayed as a group of 12 drop-down list boxes. To select a graph, read across the rows and then down the columns to locate the graph you want. For example to select the Expenditure to date graph, click on the list box in row 2 (Expenditure), column 2 (to date) of the dialog. The drop-down list box displays the different styles available for that graph. To include a graph in the histogram report, choose a style from this list box, notice that the style you select is represented in the Sample panel at the foot of the dialog.

Graph name	Position on Graph Types dialog	Description
Income rate (Base Graph)	Row 1, Column 1	The rate at which income is coming into the cost centre. Taken from any fixed cost allocations that supply money to the cost centre and the Initial Availability in the Cost Centre Library. This graph does not take instant supplies of money from milestones into account. For Cost of resource graphs this is taken from the Initial Availability of the resource's default cost centre and and any fixed cost allocations that supply money to that cost centre.
Expenditure rate (Base Graph)	Row 2, Column 1	The rate at which money is being spent from the cost centre. Taken from any resource cost and fixed cost allocations made from the cost centre. This graph does not take instant usage of money by milestones into account.
Under expenditure rate	Row 3, Column 1	The rate at which money is being supplied to the cost centre in excess of the "Expenditure rate".
Over expenditure rate	Row 4, Column 1	The rate at which money is being spent in excess of the "Income rate".
Income to date	Row 1 , Column 2	The accumulated "Income rate"; including any instant income from milestones.
Expenditure to date	Row 2, Column 2	The accumulated "Expenditure rate", including any instant expenditure by milestones.
Under expenditure to date	Row 3, Column 2	The "Supply to date" to the cost centre that has not been spent; that is the balance to date.
Over expenditure to date	Row 4, Column 2	The "Expenditure to date" from the cost centre that has been spent in excess of the "Income to date"; that is arrears.
Income each time unit	Row 1, Column 3	The accumulated "Income rate" for a given time period. For example, "Income each month".
Expenditure each time unit	Row 2, Column 3	The accumulated "Expenditure rate" for a given time period.
Under expenditure each time unit	Row 3, Column 3	The accumulated "Under expenditure to date" for a given time period.
Over expenditure each time unit	Row 4, Column 3	The accumulated "Over expenditure to date" for a given time period.
Note: "Each time unit" graphs show the income, expenditure, under and over spend of a cost centre accumulate over a fixed period. The period is specified by the user, using the Time unit field from this dialog. PowerProject calculates "each time unit" graphs by resetting the cumulative to 0 at the start of each fixed period.

Bar Options

If you select a bar style for a graph in a histogram report, you can specify whether you want any spacing or any overlap between the bars when they appear on the histogram display.

Spacing

Use this field to specify the amount of spacing you want between bars on the histogram display.

Click in this field to locate the cursor and enter a number in this field, or use the arrows at the side of the box to enter the amount of spacing you want between bars. The spacing is specified as a percentage, therefore you must enter a value between 0 and 100.

The spacing between bars applies to all bars on the histogram display. All bars have to fit into the time period specified from the Time unit box on this dialog. If you specify a 20% spacing, any bars displayed for a specified time period occupy 80 % of the space available. For example, if you include only one resource and one bar style graph in the histogram, the bar graph occupies 80% of the space available. However, if you include two bar style graphs in the histogram report, each graph occupies 40% of the space available, as PowerProject has to display two graphs into the same amount of space.

The Sample panel at the foot of the dialog shows the effect of any changes you make to the spacing of bars.

Overlap

Use this field to specify the amount of overlap you want for bars on the histogram display.

Overlap between bars only applies to bars representing different graphs or different cost centres. Therefore, the Overlap box is only available if you have done either of the following:

Included only bar style graph, but more than one cost centre in the histogram report.

Included two or more bar style graphs in the histogram report.

Click in this field to locate the cursor and enter a number in this field, or use the arrows at the side of the box to enter the amount of spacing you want between bars. The spacing is specified as a percentage, therefore you must enter a value between 0 and 100.

The Sample panel at the foot of the dialog shows the effect of any changes you make to the overlap of bars.

Bar Combining Options

When you select certain graphs which are represented with a bar style, you can specify that you want to combine the bars. This means that PowerProject shows one graph as part of another graph. Combining bars is useful if you want to see two lots of information displayed on the same bar graph.

Income with under spend

This option is only available if you select Income and Under expenditure graphs in the same column of the dialog and each graph is represented by a bar of the same type. For example, "Income rate" and "Under expenditure rate" graphs both represented by a Bar (min) style.

Check this box if you want to combine Income and Under expenditure bar graphs on the histogram display.

Expenditure with over spend

This option is only available if you select Expenditure and Over expenditure graphs in the same column of the dialog and each graph is represented by a bar of the same type. For example, Expenditure to date and Over expenditure to date graphs both represented by a Bar (max) style.

Check this box if you want to combine Expenditure and Over expenditure bar graphs on the histogram display.

Other Options

The options in this panel allow you to specify whether you want to maintain graph values across weekends, stack the cost centre graphs included in the histogram and choose the time unit for any "each time unit" graphs and any bar graphs included in the histogram.

Draw through weekends

If you are creating a histogram showing the cost of a resource, you can check this box so that the histogram graph values are maintained across weekends instead of reverting back to zero. This option is only effective when the resource has weekends defined on its calendar.

Stack cost centre graphs

Check this box if you want PowerProject to stack the graphs for all the cost centres included in the histogram. Stacking cost centre graphs is a way of viewing the total of cost centre graphs. For example, if you include the Income to date graph for cost centres in a histogram and stack the cost centre graphs, you will be able to see the total income to date of all the cost centres included in the histogram, as well as the income of individual cost centres.

Time unit

Select a time unit from this list box. The time unit you select specifies the time unit for any "each time unit" graphs included in the histogram and the time unit for any graphs represented by a bar.

"Each time unit graphs". For these graphs the time unit you select specifies the unit PowerProject uses when calculating these graphs. For example if you select the Expenditure each time unit graph, you can specify whether you want to see the expenditure made each day, each week and so on.

Bar graphs. For any graph represented by a bar the time unit you select specifies the time period that each bar represents. For example, a bar could represent a day, a week or a month.


Permanent Resource Scale Groups dialog

This dialog is presented when you click on the Scale Groups button from the Permanent Resource Histogram Report Details dialog.

When you execute a histogram report, PowerProject chooses a suitable vertical axis to display all the graphs included in the histogram. In some cases it is necessary to scale some graphs down, by a factor of ten, to enable different data to fit on the single axis. Therefore, PowerProject also selects any graph scaling factors when you execute the histogram report. PowerProject does not check to see whether more appropriate scaling factors could be used to display the graphs on the vertical axis unless you do one of the following:

Change and confirm any details about the histogram report using the Permanent Resource Histogram Report Details dialog while the histogram is open.

Resize the histogram window.

Choose the Histogram - Vertical Rescale command.

Each graph in a histogram is included in a particular scale group. PowerProject provides 4 scale groups for you to use. Graphs that are included in the same scale group will be scaled by the same factor on the histogram display. By default, PowerProject places permanent resource groups into 4 different scale groups:

Available graphs are in Scale Group 1.

Unallocated graphs are in Scale Group 2.

Allocated graphs are in Scale Group 3.

Over allocated graphs are in Scale Group 4.

If you change the scale groups used for a histogram report, you can always return to the default scale groups, by clicking on the Defaults button on this dialog.

Why put graphs in the same scale group?

Placing different graphs in the same scale group allows you to directly compare two graphs on this histogram display. If graphs are scaled by different factors you cannot compare them directly on screen.

Why put graphs in different scale groups?

In some cases, graphs may reflect vastly different values and scaling them by the same factor may mean that it is not easy to see all of the graphs on the histogram display. If this is the case, you can change the scale groups, so that the graphs are scaled by different factors.

Specifying scale groups

To change the scale group of a set of graphs, click the list box displayed alongside the set of graphs you want to change and select a different scale group.

Specifying resource scaling in scale groups

If you have more than one resource included in a histogram report you can specify whether you want the scale groups to use the same scaling factor for all the resources included in the report or whether you want each resource to be scaled independently of any other resources in the report.

Resources scale together (in groups)

Choosing this option means that all resource graphs in the same scale groups are scaled by the same factor. For example, if you created a histogram report that had:

Labourers and Foreman as the resources.

"Availability to date" and "Unallocated to date" (both in Scale group 1 as the graphs.

Resources scale together (in groups) option specified as the resource scaling.

PowerProject would scale the "Availability to date" graphs and the "Unallocated to date" graphs for both resources by the same factor.

Resources scale independently (in groups)

Choosing this option means that resources who have graphs in the same scale group do not all have to use the same scale factor. For example, if you created a histogram report that had:

Labourers and Foremen as the resources.

"Allocated effort to date" and "Over allocated effort to date" (both in Scale group 2) as the graphs.

Resources scale independently (in groups) option specified as the resource scaling.

PowerProject would scale the "Allocated effort to date" graphs and the "Over allocated effort to date" graphs for the Labourers resource together and would scale the "Allocated effort to date " and the "Over allocated effort to date" graphs for the Foremen resource together, but a different scaling factor could be used for each resource's graphs depending on the values shown by the graphs.


Available graphs are:

Available resource

Available effort to date

Available effort each time unit

Related topic

Permanent Resource Graph Types dialog


Allocated graphs are:

Allocated resource

Allocated effort to date

Allocated effort each time unit

Related topic

Permanent Resource Graph Types dialog


Unallocated graphs are:

Unallocated resource

Unallocated effort to date

Unallocated effort each time unit

Related topic

Permanent Resource Graph Types dialog


Over allocated graphs are:

Over allocated resource

Over allocated effort to date

Over allocated effort each time unit

Related topic

Permanent Resource Graph Types dialog


Consumable Resource Scale Groups dialog

This dialog is presented when you click on the Scale Groups button from the Consumable Resource Histogram Report Details dialog.

When you execute a histogram report, PowerProject chooses a suitable vertical axis to display all the graphs included in the histogram. In some cases it is necessary to scale some graphs down, by a factor of ten, to enable different data to fit on the single axis. Therefore, PowerProject also selects any graph scaling factors when you execute the histogram report. PowerProject does not check to see whether more appropriate scaling factors could be used to display the graphs on the vertical axis unless you do any of the following:

Change and confirm any details about the histogram report using the Consumable Resource Histogram Report Details dialog while the histogram is open.

Choose the Histogram - Vertical Rescale command.

Resize the histogram window.

Each graph in a histogram is included in a particular scale group. PowerProject provides 4 scale groups for you to use. Graphs that are included in the same scale group will be scaled by the same factor on the histogram display. By default, PowerProject places consumable resource graphs into 4 scale groups:

Supply graphs are in Scale Group 1.

Under consumption graphs are in Scale Group 2.

Consumption graphs are in Scale Group 3

Over consumption graphs are in Scale Group 4.

If you change the scale groups used for a histogram report, you can always return to the default scale groups, by clicking on the Defaults button on this dialog.

Why put graphs in the same scale group?

Placing different graphs in the same scale group allows you to directly compare two graphs on this histogram display. If graphs are scaled by different factors you cannot compare them directly on screen.

Why put graphs in different scale groups?

In some cases, graphs may reflect vastly different values and scaling them by the same factor may mean that it is not easy to see all of the graphs on the histogram display. If this is the case, you can change the scale groups, so that the graphs affected are scaled by a different factor.

Specifying scale groups

To change the scale group of a set of graphs, click the list box displayed alongside the set of graphs you want to change and select a different scale group.

Specifying resource scaling in scale groups

If you have more than one resource included in a histogram report you can specify whether you want the scale groups to use the same scale for all the resources included in the report or whether you want each resource to be scaled independently of any other resources in the report.

Resources scale together (in groups)

Choosing this option means that all resource graphs in the same scale groups are scaled by the same factor. For example, if you created a histogram report that had:

Carpet tiles and Tins of paint as the resources.

"Supply to date" and "Under consumed to date" (both in Scale group 1) as the graphs.

Resources scale together (in groups) option specified as the resource scaling.

PowerProject would scale the "Supply to date" graphs and the "Under consumed to date" graphs for both resources by the same factor.

Resources scale independently (in groups)

Choosing this option means that resources who have graphs in the same scale group do not all have to use the same scale factor. For example, if you created a histogram report that had:

Carpet tiles and Tins of paint as the resources

"Consumption to date" and "Over consumption to date" (both in Scale group 2) as the graphs

Resources scale independently (in groups) option specified as the resource scaling

PowerProject would scale the "Consumption to date" and "Over consumption to date" graphs for the Carpet tiles resource together and would scale the "Consumption to date" and "Over consumption to date" graphs for the Tins of paint together, but a different scaling factor could be used for each resource's graphs depending on the values shown by the graphs.


Supply graphs are:

Supply rate

Supply to date

Supply each time unit

Related topic

Consumable Resource Graph Types dialog


Consumption graphs are:

Consumption rate

Consumption to date

Consumption each time unit

Related topic

Consumable Resource Graph Types dialog


Under consumption graphs are:

Under consumption rate

Under consumption to date

Under consumption each time unit

Related topic

Consumable Resource Graph Types dialog


Over consumption graphs are:

Over consumption rate

Over consumption to date

Over consumption each time unit

Related topic

Consumable Resource Graph Types dialog


Cost Centre Scale Groups dialog

This dialog is presented when you click on the Scale Groups button from the Cost Centre Histogram Report Details dialog.

When you execute a histogram report, PowerProject chooses a suitable vertical axis to display all the graphs included in the histogram. In some cases it is necessary to scale some graphs down, by a factor of ten, to enable different data to fit on the single axis. Therefore, PowerProject also selects any graph scaling factors when you execute the histogram report. PowerProject does not check to see whether more appropriate scaling factors could be used to display the graphs on the vertical axis unless you do any of the following:

Change and confirm any details about the histogram report using the Cost Centre Histogram Report Details dialog while the histogram is open.

Choose the Histogram - Vertical Rescale command.

Resize the histogram window.

Each graph in a histogram is included in a particular scale group. PowerProject provides 4 scale groups for you to use. Graphs that are included in the same scale group will be scaled by the same factor on the histogram display. By default, PowerProject places cost centre graphs into 4 scale groups:

Income are in Scale Group 1.

Under expenditure graphs are in Scale Group 2.

Expenditure graphs are in Scale Group 3.

Over expenditure graphs are in Scale Group 4.

If you change the scale groups used for a histogram report, you can always return to the default scale groups, by clicking on the Defaults button on this dialog.

Why put graphs in the same scale group?

Placing different graphs in the same scale group allows you to directly compare two graphs on this histogram display. If graphs are scaled by different factors you cannot compare them directly on screen.

Why place graphs in different scale groups?

In some cases, graphs may reflect vastly different values and scaling them by the same factor may mean that it is not easy to see all of the graphs on the histogram display. If this is the case, you can change the scale groups, so that the graphs affected are scaled by a different factor.

Specifying scale groups

To change the scale group of a set of graphs, click the list box displayed alongside the set of graphs you want to change and select a different scale group.

Specifying cost centre scaling in scale groups

If you have more than one cost centre included in a histogram report you can specify whether you want the scale groups to use the same scale for all the cost centres included in the report or whether you want each cost centre to be scaled independently of any other cost centres in the report.

Cost centres scale together (in groups)

Choosing this option means that all cost centre graphs in the same scale groups are scaled by the same factor. For example, if you created a histogram report that had:

PROJECT and Training as the cost centres

"Income to date" and "Under expenditure to date" (both in Scale group 1) as the graphs

Cost centres scale together (in groups) option specified as the cost centre scaling

PowerProject would scale the "Income to date" graphs and the "Under expenditure to date" graphs for both cost centres together by the same factor.

Cost centres scale independently (in groups)

Choosing this option means that cost centres that have graphs in the same scale group do not all have to use the same scale factor. For example, if you created a histogram report that had:

PROJECT and Training as the cost centres

"Expenditure to date" and "Over expenditure to date" (both in Scale group 2) as the graphs

Cost centres scale independently (in groups) option specified as the cost centre scaling

PowerProject would scale the "Expenditure to date" and "Over expenditure to date" graphs for the PROJECT cost centre together and would scale the "Expenditure to date" graphs and "Over expenditure to date" graphs for the Training cost centre together, but a different scaling factor could be used for each cost centre's graphs depending on the values shown by the graphs.


Income graphs are:

Income rate

Income to date

Income each time unit

Related topic

Cost Centre Graph Types dialog


Expenditure graphs are:

Expenditure rate

Expenditure to date

Expenditure each time unit

Related topic

Cost Centre Graph Types dialog


Under expenditure graphs are:

Under expenditure rate

Under expenditure to date

Under expenditure each time unit

Related topic

Cost Centre Graph Types dialog


Over expenditure graphs are:

Over expenditure rate

Over expenditure to date

Over expenditure each time unit

Related topics

Cost Centre Graph Types dialog


Scale tab on Customise Histogram View dialog

This tab is available when you select Histogram - Customise. Use the options on this tab to change the horizontal scale for a histogram, both on the screen and for output. You cannot change the vertical scale of a histogram, as this is calculated by PowerProject when you execute the histogram report.

Screen

You can choose to set small scales for the screen display to see more of your histogram at one time.

Output

This option allows you to set the horizontal scale for output.

Horizontal scale

The largest scale available for the histogram is displayed below the scale line. The smallest possible scale is 52 Weeks per Inch or 21 Weeks per Centimetre.

To set the Horizontal scale enter the number of time units. The number entered must be between 1 and 52.

Horizontal scale shortcut

The [image] button approximately halves the horizontal scale. The [image] button approximately doubles the horizontal scale.

Horizontal scale of locked on histograms

When a histogram is locked onto a bar chart, it uses the same horizontal scale as the chart, which is set from the Scale tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog.


Grid tab on Customise Histogram View dialog

This tab is available when you select the Histogram - Customise menu command.

The options on this tab let you:

Change the frequency and appearance of up to three types of vertical grid lines on a histogram, showing your chosen time unit boundaries.

Add two types of horizontal ruling lines to your chart, for visual effect.

Specify whether horizontal ruling lines are displayed in the foreground or the background of the histogram.

Defining vertical grid lines

To define the grid lines:

1	Set a line appearance - by clicking on the panel displaying the current line style.

2	Set the frequency of the grid - a number and a time unit.

Frequency

When you set the vertical grid, you must enter a number and choose a time unit to show the frequency of grids.

Type or select a number to indicate the number of time units, for example 10 weeks or 1 week.

Choose the time unit using the box arrows - click on the arrows at the side of the panel, to increase or decrease the time unit.

Position of grid lines

Grid line positions are affected by your preference unit numbering option.

If Annual numbering is chosen, weekly grid lines always occur on Mondays.

If Sequential numbering is selected then the grid boundaries are affected by the Unit 0/1 at date

For example, if the date is a Wednesday and the grid display time unit is in Weeks, then the week grid lines occur on a Wednesday.

Displaying the grids

You can choose to display any or all of the three vertical grids which you control independently. To display up to three grid lines, check the box to select the grid(s) you want displayed.

Defining horizontal lines

To define horizontal lines:

1	Set the line appearance for primary and secondary ruling lines clicking on the panel displaying the current line style.

2	Specify whether you want each horizontal line to be displayed in the background or the foreground of the histogram.

In foreground

By default, histogram horizontal ruling lines appear in the background of the histogram. This means that the lines are displayed behind any graphs that appear on the histogram display.

Check this box if you want the horizontal ruling line to appear in front of any graphs on the histogram.

Displaying horizontal lines

You can choose to display any or all of the two horizontal lines which you control independently. To display up to two grid lines, check the box alongside the grid(s) you want displayed.

Grids on locked on histograms

If a histogram is locked onto a bar chart, the histogram uses the same vertical grid lines as the bar chart, which are set from the Grid tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog. The horizontal ruling lines are the same as when the histogram is displayed in a separate window.

Remember

Any grids or ruling lines which you have selected on this dialog are only effective if the Grid and Ruling line display attributes are active on the Display tab of the Customise Histogram View dialog.

When a histogram is locked onto a bar chart, the display of grids and ruling lines is specified from the Display tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog.


Display tab on Customise Histogram View dialog

This tab is available when you select the Histogram - Customise menu command. You can use the options on this tab to change the display attributes of the active histogram. When more than one histogram is open, different histograms can have different displays.

This menu command is unavailable if a histogram is locked onto a bar chart. When a histogram is locked onto a bar chart, the histogram display options are the same as the chart display options, which are specified on the Display tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog.

All the options on this dialog have keyboard shortcut keys which allow you to turn the options on and off directly from the histogram.

Miscellaneous

The options in this panel allow you to specify whether you want to display annotations and grid lines on a histogram.

Annotations

Annotations are displayed by default. Clear this box to remove annotations from the histogram display. The keyboard shortcut to remove annotations from displaying on any selected charts and histograms is CTRL V.

Grid

Vertical grid lines specified from the Grid tab of the Customise Histogram View dialog are displayed by default. Clear this box to remove vertical grid lines from the histogram display. The keyboard shortcut to remove grids from displaying on any selected charts and histograms is CTRL G.

Ruling lines

Horizontal ruling lines specified from the Grid tab of the Customise Histogram View dialog are displayed by default. Clear this box to remove any ruling lines from the histogram. The keyboard shortcut to remove ruling lines from displaying on any selected charts and histograms is CTRL - (minus key on the keypad).

Date Zone

You can control the number of lines of date information (up to four) on your histogram, using the options in this panel of the dialog. The options are independent of each other, for example you can choose to display the Year and Units lines, or just the Month line. By default, all of the date zone lines are displayed on a histogram. Clear the appropriate boxes to remove some of the date zone from the histogram display.

The top three lines show calendar dates:

Year: Shortcut CTRL Y.

Month: Shortcut CTRL M.

Week commencing (or Week ending): Shortcut CTRL D.

The bottom line displays the day or week number - relative to the start of the project.

The exact contents of this Unit line depend on the current chart time unit and the preference setting.

The shortcut for the Unit line is CTRL U.

Save as default

Checking this box and saving the histogram makes the current histogram display options apply to every new histogram.


Histogram

A histogram is a visual display of one or more graphs and each graph displays information about the usage of a resource or a cost centre over time. Using histograms allows you to see how effectively you are using resources and cost centres.

You can create resource histograms or cost centre histograms.


Resource histogram

A resource histogram is a visual display showing the usage and availability of resources over time. This allows you to see where you have too few resources to carry out a project, or where you have a surplus of resources.

You can create permanent and consumable resource histograms.

You specify the information you want to display on a histogram in a resource histogram report. You can save histogram reports so that you can execute them any time you want to.


Cost Centre Histogram

A cost centre histogram is a visual display showing the usage and availability of money in cost centres throughout the project. This allows you to see where you do not have enough money to carry out a project, or where you have a surplus.

You can also generate graphs that show the total cost of a resource from all cost centres in the project using a cost centre histogram.

You specify the information you want to display on a cost centre histogram in a histogram report. You can save histogram reports so that you can execute them any time you want to.


Creating a histogram

A histogram report contains all the information required to create a histogram.

Use the Histogram - Resource menu command to create a resource histogram report and use the Histogram - Cost Centre menu command to create a cost centre histogram report.

Once you have saved a histogram report you can execute it whenever you wish.

You can specify the following information in a histogram report:

The name of the histogram.

The resources or cost centres you want to include in the histogram.

The information you want to display about the resources or cost centres included in the histogram. You specify this by selecting one or more graphs. Each graph displays some information about the usage or availability of a resource or a cost centre.

The way in which you want the graphs to appear on the histogram display, for example as lines or as bars.

The way in which you want to view the histogram, for example you can display a histogram legend and you can lock a histogram onto a bar chart.

Related topics

Permanent Resource Histogram Report Details dialog

Consumable Resource Histogram Report Details dialog

Cost Centre Histogram Report Details dialog

Permanent resource graphs

Consumable resource graphs

Cost centre graphs


Changing graph appearances from the histogram display

When you create a new histogram report using a Histogram Report Details dialog, PowerProject uses the default graph appearances specified in the Resource or Cost Centre libraries to display graphs on the histogram display.

The graph appearances stored in the Resource or Cost Centre libraries are the default appearances, which means that they are used by default on any histogram you create. You can change the default appearances stored in the resource or cost centre library from the appropriate Display Appearance dialog or you can create a histogram-specific resource or cost centre graph appearance that applies only to a particular histogram by changing the graph appearance directly from the histogram display.

Changing the default graph appearances associated with a resource or cost centre in the Resource Library or Cost Centre Library affects any new or existing reports that include those resources or cost centres.

Changing a graph appearance directly from the histogram display means that the graph appearance for that resource or cost centre does not change in any other histogram reports that include that graph and resource or cost centre.

Note: Once you have specified a histogram-specific graph appearance to override the default graph appearances specified in the Resource or Cost Centre Libraries, you cannot revert back to using the default appearances for that histogram report, though you can change the histogram-specific graph appearance as many times as you want.

To change a graph appearance from the histogram display, double-click on the graph you want to change and confirm the alert presented. Depending on whether the graph is represented by a bar, line or an area the Line Appearance or Bar/Area Appearance dialog is presented.

Related topics

To change the default graph appearances for a resource or cost centre, see:

Permanent Resource Display Appearance dialog

Consumable Resource Display Appearance dialog

Cost Centre Display Appearance dialog


Histogram filters

When you include a resource or cost centre in a histogram, you may want to specify that the histogram report generates the resource or cost centre graphs using only certain tasks from the bar chart. For example, you may want to display a graph showing the usage of a resource only when the resource is assigned to critical tasks in the project.

Because you can include a resource or cost centre more than once in the same histogram, it means that you can include the same resource twice, define and apply a filter to one instance of the resource and leave the other instance of the resource without a filter and be able to compare the graphs generated on the same histogram display.

Once you have created a filter for a resource or cost centre, the filter is saved along with the histogram report and you can specify whether or not the filter is used when the report is executed.

Specify a resource or cost centre filter from the Histogram Report Details dialog.


Histogram Report Filter dialog

This dialog is presented when you click on the Define Filter or Edit Filter button from a Histogram Report Details dialog.

Filter name - you must give a unique title to the filter, so you can save and edit it.

Type - choose whether to apply the Filter options to a Bar or Segment.

Filter options - select options to determine whether or not bars or segments should be included in the filter.

To save your changes, exit with OK. To abandon changes choose Cancel.


Printing locked histograms

When printing a bar chart with one or more locked on histograms, PowerProject will use default relative sizes for the bar chart and histograms. You can override this default by setting the following variable in your PPROJECT.INI file:

Histogram%Height=number,number

The variable takes two parameters. The first parameter specifies the percentage of the available space taken up by the histogram when there is only one histogram locked on. The second parameter specifies the percentage of the available space taken up by each histogram when there are two histgrams locked onto a bar chart. For example:

Histogram%Height=50,25

This would mean that with one histogram locked on, the bar chart and histogram share equally the space available; with two histograms locked on, each histogram takes one quarter of the available space, leaving the bar chart with half.

The default values used by PowerProject are 33,25.

Note: Before editing your PPROJECT.INI file, always make a backup copy so that you have a version to revert back to if necessary.


Pool Name dialog

This dialog appears when you click on the Pool button on any of the Histogram Report Details dialogs. Pooling allows you to show more resources or cost centres in a histogram at once.

In the Pool Name box enter a name for the resource or cost centre pool that you are setting up. The name can be up to 21 characters long. Click on OK to close the dialog, saving the pool name. The pool is added to the Selected for Histogram list. The resources or cost centres in the pool are listed below the pool name.

The first resource or cost centre listed in the pool will be used in legends, annotation tokens and text reports to represent the whole pool.

When you execute the histogram, the resources or cost centres in the pool will be represented by one set of graphs on the histogram rather than having one set of graphs for each selected resource or cost centre.


Pooling resources

When creating a histogram report, you can choose to pool resources or cost centres so that they are represented as one resource or cost centre on the histogram. This enables more resources or cost centres to be represented on a histogram.

Pooling resources is a quick way to see ‘at a glance’ if you have enough resources to complete a task. For example if you have three bricklayers each as individual resources but you do not mind which one does what just so long as the work is done, by pooling them into one Bricklayers pool you could see immediately whether or not you have enough bricklayers for the job. It would not matter if you had overallocated one bricklayer so long as there was another available to lend a hand.

When you pool resources, overallocation of individual resources may not be shown. For example, imagine that you pool two resources each with an availability of 10. If you allocate 15 of one resource to a task, the histogram will not show any overallocation because the total availability is 20.


Customer Services

The following facilities are available as part of the Asta Development customer support programme in the UK:

Technical Support

Training

Product information

User Group

You can view our Web site at http://www.astadev.com for more information about Asta's products and services.

Technical Support

Asta Development Corporation Ltd operates an accessible Technical Support Department staffed by skilled and knowledgeable experts providing support on all of Asta's products

In all transactions, please have your product serial number to hand. You will find the serial number on Program Disk 1 of the PowerProject software, or you can view it on the About PowerProject dialog by selecting About from PowerProject's Help menu.

You can telephone Technical Support between the hours of 09:30 and 17:30 UK. Outside these hours you can leave a message on the answer machine and your query will be answered as quickly as possible.

Contact details	Telephone: 01844 261609
	Fax: 01844 261314
	Internet: support@astadev.com
	Compuserve account: 100700,1025 or astadev
	Postal address: Asta Development Corp Ltd Kingston House 5 Goodsons Mews Wellington Street Thame Oxfordshire, OX9 3BX
Training

Asta provides a comprehensive range of standard courses at its training centre in Thame, Oxfordshire. Courses can also be held at client premises. These courses can be tailored to clients' requirements.

For further details of course content, available training dates and prices, contact Asta's Training Department:

Contact details	Telephone: 01844 261700
	Fax: 01844 261314
	Internet: training@astadev.com
	Compuserve account: 100700,1025 or astadev
	Postal address: Asta Development Corp Ltd Kingston House 5 Goodsons Mews Wellington Street Thame Oxfordshire, OX9 3BX
Product information

For information on Asta's products, services and prices, contact the Sales Department:

Contact details	Telephone: 01844 261700
	Fax: 01844 261314
	Internet: sales@astadev.com
	Compuserve account: 100700,1025 or astadev
	Postal address: Asta Development Corp Ltd Kingston House 5 Goodsons Mews Wellington Street Thame Oxfordshire, OX9 3BX
User Group

A User Group operates in the UK. Regular meetings are held regionally and a quarterly newsletter - PowerLines - is produced. Meetings and PowerLines are available to any user who has a current support contract, as part of this is used to fund the User Group.

This independent body was formed and is run to provide a forum for discussion, to disseminate information, and as a pressure group to influence the development of PowerProject.

User Group meetings are held at:

Region	Town
South Coast of England	Fareham
London & SE England	London
SW England & S Wales	Bristol
Eastern England	Peterborough
Central England	Coventry
NW England & N Wales	Warrington
Scotland	Glasgow
To register your interest in attending a User Group please contact the Technical Support Department at: 01844 261609.


Setting up a project template

When you install PowerProject, a project template is copied into the directory in which you install PowerProject e.g. C:\WINDOWS\POWPROJ. When you run PowerProject and select New from the File menu, this project template is loaded as the starting point for your new project.

The project template supplied with PowerProject contains some calendars, resources, histogram reports, display and preference settings to help you get started. You can customise this project template so that it contains the information you use most often, or you can create your own project template from scratch.

Customising the project template supplied with PowerProject

To customise the project template supplied with PowerProject, first make a backup copy of TEMPLATE.PDB which is in your PowerProject directory. Select File - New to start a new project based on the project template. Make any changes you want such as changing the preferences and display settings, and adding the calendars, resources and codes that you use most often. Delete any items that you do not need then save the project as TEMPLATE.PDB in your PowerProject directory. When you next select File - New, your customised version of the project template will be loaded.

Creating your own project template from scratch

To create your own project template from scratch, rename TEMPLATE.PDB to something else so that it is not loaded when you select File - New. (TEMPLATE.PDB is in your PowerProject directory.) Start a new project by selecting File - New. A completely blank project is loaded. Set up the display and preference settings that you want, then add the calendars, resources, cost centres, reports, codes etc. that you use most often. When you have set up all the information you want, save the project in the normal way as TEMPLATE.PDB in your PowerProject directory. When you next select File - New, your project template will be loaded as the starting point so you do not have to set up all the information again.

If you change your project directory by entering a different path in the Project box on the System Defaults dialog you must copy your project template (TEMPLATE.PDB) into the specified directory otherwise it will not be loaded when you start a new project.


File - New menu command

This menu command lets you start a new project. The New Project Details dialog is presented.

The root chart for your new project is opened automatically.

The project at this stage is stored in the current or default directory. It is not given a permanent file name until you choose File - Save As.

This menu command is disabled until you save or close a new project. Once the new project has been saved, you can create another new project.

If there is a project template in your PowerProject directory, all new projects will be based on it. The project template supplied with PowerProject contains some calendars, resources, entries in the code libraries, histogram reports and has some display and preference options set differently from the default internal settings. You can customise this project template to your own requirements or you can set up your own project template from scratch.

For details of how to customise the project template or set up your own project template from scratch, see Setting up a project template.

If you want all your projects to start from a completely blank project, rename the project template so that PowerProject does not load it when you select File - New. The project template is called TEMPLATE.PDB and is located in your PowerProject directory.


File - Open menu command

This menu command allows you to open projects, including MPX files, that you have previously created and saved on disk. You can also open a baseline as a separate project. See the File - Baseline Manager menu command.

When you open a project that was created in an earlier version of PowerProject, a message appears informing you that PowerProject will backup the file before converting it into the new PowerProject file format. When you click on OK, a copy of the .PDB file is placed in the same directory as the original .PDB but with the file extension changed to indicate the version number of PowerProject in which the PDB file was created (another message box appears showing the exact directory path and filename of the backup project). The original .PDB is converted into the latest PowerProject format and opened. Once a project has been saved in latest version of PowerProject, it cannot be opened in earlier versions of the program.

The File Selector is presented. Through this you can choose any project file in any directory on any disk. PowerProject file names must end in the extension .PDB - standing for Project Data Base. MPX files take the .MPX file extension.

If you have entered a user name and/or password for this project, the Password dialog is presented and you are first prompted to enter the correct name and password. If you do not give the correct answers you cannot open the project.

Note: The steps involved in opening an MPX file differ slightly from those involved in opening a PowerProject file. See Importing an MPX file for more information.

PowerProject can have two projects open at the same time, so that you can copy or move bars, or copy libraries. To open another project simply repeat the above process.


Password dialog

If you have entered a user name and/or password for this project previously in Admin - User - Details, you must now enter these again correctly to gain access to the project.


File - Close menu command

This menu command allows you to leave the project.

If you have saved the project before and given it a file name, then the project data base file on disk is updated with the correct information.

If you have not saved the project before, you are presented with the File Selector to name this new project.


File - Save As menu command

This menu command allows you to:

save an existing project under a different file name

save a new project on disk, giving it a unique file name

save a project as an MPX file for use in another application.

The File Selector is presented, allowing you to enter the file name and choose the file format:

PowerProject project file names must end in the extension ".PDB" - Project Data Base

MPX files take the .MPX file extension.

The default directory is presented on the File Selector.You can put the project data base file in any directory on any disk.

 The Save Project button displays the Save File selector if the active project is untitled, or saves all open charts and histograms in the active project if the project has already been saved using File - Save As.

Once a project has been saved in this version of PowerProject, it cannot be opened in earlier versions of the program.

Note: Saving a project in MPX format is slightly different from saving a normal PowerProject project. For more information see Exporting an MPX file.


File - Select menu command

This menu command allows you to:

See the project file name.

Choose which project is the active one when you have more than one project open.

This menu command is only available if two projects are open, with all chart windows closed.

Only one of the projects can be a new project (i.e. unsaved).


File - Merge menu command

This menu command lets you merge an MPX file into the active project.

Select this command to display a file selector from which you can select the MPX file that you want to merge. When you have selected the file, the MPX Import/Merge Options dialog appears for you to choose various options about how the file is merged into the active project.

For full details about how to merge an MPX file into PowerProject, see Merging an MPX file.


File - Baseline Manager menu command

This menu command allows you to create new baselines for your project, using either the whole project or selected charts from the project, and to manage existing baselines. The Baseline Manager dialog is displayed, from which you can:

Create a new baseline.

Open an existing baseline.

Specify that you want PowerProject to automatically display a baseline every time you open a project.

Change the appearance of baseline bars.

Close a baseline.

Delete a baseline.

Display baseline file information.

Change the appearance of progress lines.


File - Export menu command

This menu command lets you output information about charts, bars or histograms to comma separated or spreadsheet files. Choose the type of item about which you want to output information

Chart

Bar

Histogram

Then choose the file format to which you want to export the information: comma separated or spreadsheet.


File - Export - Chart menu command

This command allows you to output information about charts in the current project, including filter charts, and about baseline charts as an export file.

You can choose to export chart information to files on disk, which can then be imported into spreadsheet and database programs. Choose the file format that you want to export the chart information as:

Comma separated

Spreadsheet


Export - Chart - Comma Separated menu command

This menu command allows you to output the active chart, branch or project as a text report with each field separated by commas in a TXT file on disk.

When you choose this command the Report Selector is presented. Click on the New button to display the Charts To Comma Separated dialog - where you can choose which items to export.

A file with .TXT extension is output to disk. You can use this file to import into other software packages, for example databases.


Export - Chart - Spreadsheet menu command

This menu command allows you to output the active chart, branch or project in a format compatible with spreadsheet programs.

When you choose this command the Report Selector is presented. Click on the New button to display the Charts To Spreadsheet dialog - where you can choose which items to export.

A file with .WKS extension is output to disk. You can use this file to import into spreadsheet programs which accept WKS files.


File - Export - Bar menu command

This menu command allows you to save information about bars in a project to an export file that can be imported into other programs, such as word processing and spreadsheet programs.

Choose the file format that you want to export the bar information as:

Comma separated

Spreadsheet

You can save information about bars in charts in the current project and about any baseline bars. You can also save information about bars contained in a filter chart - see File - Filter.


Export - Bar - Comma Separated menu command

This menu command allows you to output a bar as a textual report to a comma separated file.

When you choose this menu command the Report Selector is presented. Click on the New button to display the Bars To Comma Separated dialog - where you can choose which items to export.

A file with .TXT extension is output to disk. You can use this file to import into other software packages, for example databases.


Export - Bar - Spreadsheet menu command

This menu command allows you to output a bar in a format compatible with spreadsheet programs.

When you choose this command the Report Selector is presented. Click the New button to display the Bars To Spreadsheet dialog where you can choose which items to export.

A file with .WKS extension is output to disk. You can use this file to import into spreadsheet programs which accept WKS files.


File - Export - Histogram menu command

This menu command lets you output information about the active histogram to an export file that can be imported into other programs, such as word processing and spreadsheet programs.

Choose the file format that you want to export the histogram information as:

Comma separated

Spreadsheet


Export - Histogram - Comma Separated menu command

This menu command displays the Histogram To Comma Separated dialog which allows you to export histogram data as a text report to a comma separated file. You can import the comma separated file into a database program.


Export - Histogram - Spreadsheet menu command

This menu command displays the Histograms To Spreadsheet dialog, which allows you to export histogram data as a text report to a .WKS file. You can import the .WKS file into a spreadsheet program.


File - Filter menu command

This menu command displays the Filter Selector where you can choose to create a new filter, and to open, execute or delete an existing filter.

This menu is only available when a single project is open and all chart and histogram windows are closed.

A filter report is useful as normally you enter a scheme for a project as a bar chart, or series of bar charts. However, you may want to present and use the information in a different way to that shown on the bar chart(s). To do this you execute a filter to extract details meeting with a filter you set up, or sort the bars on your chart.

See also

Creating a filtered report


File - Preview menu command

This menu command lets you view the graphic in the active window - chart or histogram - as it will be printed on the selected printer. The graphic is displayed in the preview window which has a selection of buttons at the top. If the graphic extends across more than one page, a grid on the screen shows where the page breaks will be.

For more information see Print Preview window and Zooming a preview.


File - Print Graphics menu command

This menu command displays the Print dialog which lets you print the graphic that is currently selected in PowerProject e.g. a chart or histogram. An image of the whole chart is produced - not just the part you can see in a window.

You can choose to output the graphic in any of three ways:

by printing it to a printer, e.g. to present at meetings

by saving it as a file on disk, e.g. so that you can later load it into a report or other document that you have to produce about your project

by copying it to the Clipboard, e.g. so that you can immediately paste it into a report or other document that you have to produce about your project

As well as charts and histograms, you can also print calendars and chart hierarchies.


File - Print Text menu command

This menu command lets you create text reports containing information about bars and segments, links, charts and histograms. Click on the type of report that you want to create:

Bars and segments

Links (Local and X- Chart).

Charts (including baseline and filter charts)

Histograms

When creating bar, link, chart and histogram text reports you can specify:

The information you want to include in the report

The scope of the report, for bar, link and chart text reports

How to format the report

How to output the report

PowerProject remembers the settings you specify for bar, link and chart text reports and displays them the next time you create a report of that type.

Selecting information for text reports

Information presented on bar charts and histograms is also represented as text report tokens. For example, the title of bars on a chart is stored in the token "Bar Title". To specify the information you want to include in a text report, select the appropriate text report tokens.

In the bar and chart reports, there is also a "UserBlank" token available, which produces a blank column in the text report. You may want to use this token to improve the layout of your text report.

Specifying the scope of text reports

You can also choose the scope for the text report, for example, whether you want a report of the current chart or the whole project.

Formatting text reports

PowerProject allows you to specify how you want to format a text report, for example you can specify how many lines you want to appear on each page of a report. The formatting you can specify varies between the different types of text report.

Outputting text reports

You can output a text report to any of the following destinations:

A printer

The Windows Clipboard

A text file on disk

You can specify any combination of these destinations when outputting a text report.

Exporting text reports to other programs

You can also use text reports to produce files that are compatible with database and spreadsheet programs, so that you can import text report data created in PowerProject into such programs.

To ensure that chart and bar text reports contain the latest information, you should save the chart before executing the text report. This is because some tokens, especially those pertaining to work and progress, will only be up-to-date after the chart and its subcharts have been saved.


Print Text - Bar Report menu command

Use this command to print a text report containing information about bars or segments. This command is only available if there is an active chart window. The Report Selector is presented.

Click on the New button on the Report Selector to display the Bar Report dialog


Print Text - Link Report menu command

Use this command to print a text report containing information about local and X-chart links in the project. The Report Selector is presented.

Click on the New button on the Report Selector to display the Link Report dialog.


Print Text - Chart Report menu command

Use this command to print a text report containing information about charts in the current project and any baseline charts created from the current project. The Report Selector is presented.

Click on the New button on the Report Selector to display the Chart Report dialog.


Print Text - Histogram Report menu command

Use this command to print a text report containing information about a resource or a cost centre histogram. The Histogram Report dialog is presented.

This command is only available if a histogram is selected. The histogram can be displayed in a separate window or locked onto the bar chart.


File - Printer Setup menu command

Use this command to change the setup options for the current printer.The driver dialog for the current printer is displayed, listing the options available.

For more information on this dialog consult its Help.


File - Exit menu command

This menu command allows you to leave PowerProject.

If you have worked on a new project, on the Alert presented choose:

Yes to save the project

No to abandon the project

Cancel to continue working with the project instead of exiting

For a project which has already been saved this menu command acts exactly the same as File - Close, then exits from PowerProject and returns you to the desktop.


File - Recently opened files

The four commands after Exit in the File menu, list the four projects you have most recently opened in PowerProject. You can open these projects again by clicking on their filename listed in the menu, instead of using the Open command.


New Project Details dialog

This dialog is presented automatically when you select File - New.

If you later want to change the details you have enter here, use the Project tab on the Details dialog.

Project title

The project title is used throughout PowerProject for dialog and output titles.

It can be up to 40 characters, but cannot be blank, or made up of just spaces.

The project title is different from the file name under which the project data base is saved on disk.

Project start date

Any valid date can be used as the base date for the project.

The earliest date available is 1 January 1901 and the latest 31 December 2099.

Note: If the year is shown as 2 digits and you enter the year as 04, PowerProject interprets this as being 2004.

You can change the project start date later. However, this changes the dates for all the segments and holidays on calendars in the project. If the start of your project is delayed, the start of the root chart can be easily adjusted by setting the chart report date, or assigning start flags to the new start without changing the project start date.

For

This field is available to you to use as you like. For example, make notes about who the project is for. Any notes can be included in chart borders.

By

This field is available to you to use as you like. For example, make notes about who is carrying out the project. Any notes can be included in chart borders.

Note: In a multi­user project you will be unable to edit this dialog unless you have ALL Access Rights for the root chart.


Active Database dialog

This dialog lets you choose which project should be the active one, when two projects are open at once. It is called from the File - Select menu command.

The file names (and directory path name) of the two open projects are shown.

The highlighted file name is the active project.

The File - Filter menu command is not available when two projects are open.

To change the active project click on the project file name you require.

With two projects open at the same time you can copy or move bars, or copy libraries between projects.


Active project

When more than one project is open at once, the project which is currently selected is the active project. Chart windows can be opened from either project.

Any actions you perform or menu commands you choose only affect the active project.

You can change the active project in the following ways:

By using the Select Active Database dialog.

Via the Chart Selector.

When one or more chart windows are open, the project which owns the chart in the active window is automatically active.


Print Preview window

This window displays the current graphic as it will be printed to the selected printer. If the graphic extends across more than one page, a grid in the preview window shows where the page breaks will occur.

When you move the cursor over the graphic in the preview window, the cursor changes shape to a magnifying glass [image]. If you drag this cursor over an area of the graphic, the preview zooms in on that area. For more details about zooming in on previews see Zooming a preview.

The buttons along the top of the preview window have the following functions:

Print - to print the graphic in the preview window to the current printer. When you click on this button, a dialog is displayed showing you the progress of the print job then you are returned to the point from which you selected Preview.

Exit Preview - to return to the point from which you started Preview - without printing.

Print Graphics - to display the Print dialog on which you can change settings including: output destination, chart scaling, border file, page margins.

Printer Setup - to display the driver dialog of the selected printer so that you can change the setup options for that printer.

You can also preview calendars and chart hierachies before printing them. You print calendars from the Calendar dialog and chart hierachies from the Chart Selector.

Note: If you have changed the settings on the Print dialog before previewing the graphic, when you click on the Print button, the settings you changed will be abandoned and you will have to reset them when you next use the Print dialog. To print the graphic without losing your settings on the Print dialog, select Print on the Print dialog instead of using the Print button in the preview window.


Zooming in on a Preview

When you preview a graphic before printing it, you can zoom in on areas of the graphic to take a closer look. To do this:

1	Move the cursor over the graphic in the preview window. The cursor changes shape to a plus magnifying glass [image].

2	Drag the cursor over the area of the chart that you want to zoom in to. When you release the mouse button, that area of the chart is displayed enlarged in the Print Preview Zoom window.

Notice that the cursor is now a minus magnifying glass [image]. If you drag this cursor over the graphic you can zoom in even closer. If you click this cursor on the graphic, the zoom will close and the normal preview window will reappear.

3	Use the scroll bars to scroll around the graphic, having a close look at it before printing.

4	To close the zoom window, click the cursor anywhere within it.

The normal preview window is displayed again. For details of using the buttons in this window, see Print Preview window.


Print dialog

The Print dialog presents a range of options that you can choose from before sending your graphic (chart, histogram, calendar or chart hierarchy) to the printer. The options are presented on four tabs: Output, Border, Page and Options. Click on the name of a tab below to get information about the options on that tab. The buttons to the right of the tabs are explained in this topic.

Output

Border

Page

Options

Print

Click on Print to print the graphic and save the settings you have chosen.

Cancel

Click on Cancel to close the dialog without saving the settings that you have changed.

Preview

Click on Preview to preview the graphic before printing. The graphic is displayed in the preview window. See File - Preview for more information about previewing before printing.

Printer Setup

Click on Printer Setup to display the driver dialog for the selected printer. The driver dialog provides various options for setting up the printer. The options available vary depending on the printer you have selected. You can also access the printer driver dialog by selecting Printer Setup from the File menu.

Close

Click on Close to close the dialog without printing but saving the settings you have chosen. (This is the default button on this dialog.)

Load Defaults

Click on Load Defaults to allow PowerProject to select appropriate settings for the current tab.

Help

Click on Help to display this help topic, providing information on all the tabs and options on the Print dialog.


Output tab on Print dialog

The options on this tab let you choose which format the graphic is output in, how many pages of the graphic you want to print, how many copies you want to print, and the print quality and use of colours.

Output To box

Choose how you want to output the graphic, ie. to a printer, to the Clipboard or as a WMF file. You can check more than one option so you could print the graphic on paper and save it as a .WMF file at the same time.

If you select WMF File you must enter a name for the file. You can do this in either of the following ways:

Enter a directory path and filename in the box alongside the WMF File option

Click on the Browse button to display the Save File selector. Choose a directory path and enter a filename on the dialog then click on OK to return to the Print dialog. The filename you have entered is displayed on the tab.

Print Range box

If your graphic extends across more than one page, you can choose the range of pages that will be printed.

Select All to print all the pages. To print a particular range, select From Page then enter the appropriate page numbers in the From Page and To Page boxes.

Options box

No of Copies

Enter the number of copies you want to print. The default is 1.

Colours

In the Colours box enter the number of colours required on the output and supported by your printer or plotter. PowerProject regards white as a valid colour, so for example if you are printing a chart to a monochrome printer, the number of colours is 2 (black and white) and if you are printing to an 8 pen plotter, the number of colours is 9.

When printing to a black and white printer, PowerProject can dither the colour to simulate different colours (by creating different densities of shading). Dithering will only be attempted when the number of colours is set to 1.


Border tab on Print dialog

The options on this tab let you choose the border that you want to frame the graphic and how the border is scaled. Some of the options of this tab are only available when you are printing a chart; these options are indicated below.

Fit Border onto 1 Page

Select this option if you want the border and the chart to fill a single page of the current paper size.

Fit Border Around Chart (this option only available when printing charts)

Select this option if you want the border to be resized to fit around the chart which remains at its actual size. If the chart is larger than the paper size, it will be tiled over two or more pages when printed. The number of pages may vary depending on the orientation you select on the Page tab. The preview will indicate how many pages it will be printed over.

Use Border Without Scaling

Select this option if you do not want either the chart or the border to be scaled. If the border is larger than the pager size, then the printout is tiled over two or more pages. The number of pages may vary depending on the orientation you select on the Page tab. The preview will indicate how many pages it will be printed over.

Fit Border to n x n Pages (this option only available when printing charts)

Choose this option if you want to specify the scale of the printout. For example, if you have created a chart that would fit comfortably on a sheet of A5, but you want it enlarged for a presentation, you can specify how large you want it to be printed by entering the number of sheets of paper that you want it to be printed over. Remember to set the paper size you are printing to on the printer driver dialog which you can open by clicking on the Printer Setup button.

Preserve Aspect Ratio of Border

Check this box to prevent the border from being distorted by scaling. The original proportions of the border will be preserved if it is scaled. Clear the box if you do not mind whether or not the border is distorted. This option is not available when Use Border Without Scaling is selected

Expand horizontally to fill border (this option only available when printing charts)

Check this box so that if the chart is smaller than the border, the chart width will be extended so that it fills the border. This option is not available when Fit Border Around Chart is selected, or when the chart is larger than the border. Charts are automatically scaled down if they are larger than the border. The border is then shown in the Border Style box.

Chart Scaling - information only

This shows by how much your chart has been scaled. The first percentage represents the chart width and the second percentage represents the chart height.

Chart Scale

Click on the Chart Scale button if you want to change the vertical or horizontal scale of the chart before printing. The Customise Barchart View dialog appears with the Scale tab selected.

You can also access the Scale tab by clicking on the Chart Scale button on the Options tab of the Print dialog.

Browse Border

Click on this button to select a border that is not in the current directory. The Select Border dialog appears for you to choose the border that you want to use. When you select a border, its size and description are shown in the Border Description box on this dialog. Click on OK to load the border and return to the Print dialog.

Border Style box

This box lists the border files in the current directory. Select a border by dropping down the list box and clicking on the border you want. If a border is not listed, use the Browse Border button to find it. It will then be added to this list.

Note: If you scale a border by a large amount, any graphics or text in the border may not be scaled exactly as you expected. Where possible use a border the same size as the paper that you are printing to, or edit your border in the border-generating program to modify its size. For details of editing borders, see the Help supplied with the separate border-generating program.


Page tab on Print dialog

The options on this tab let you specify details about your page layout. These options are only used for printed output, they will not affect graphics sent to the Clipboard or a .WMF file.

Margins

Enter the size of any margins you want around the page. Choose the unit you want from the Units box. You should avoid setting any top and bottom margins if you are printing to continuous paper.

The margins can be up to one third of the paper size: the top and bottom margins can be a maximum of one third of the paper height, while the left and right margins can be a maximum of one third of the paper width.

Organiser Options

Use these options if you want the printout to fit into a personal organiser.

Organiser mode using N pages

Specify the number of organiser pages you want the chart to be printed over. PowerProject uses the most suitable format to fit the chart onto this number of organiser pages.

Draw organiser perforations

Check this box if you want PowerProject to draw dots along the top and bottom of the page where you should fold the paper concertina-style to fit it into a personal organiser.

Orientation

Portrait

Choose this orientation if you want the chart to be printed with the long edge of the paper vertical.

Landscape

Choose this orientation if you want the chart to be printed with the short edge of the paper vertical.

Landscape is often best for histograms - as they tend to be short and wide, rather than tall and thin.

Auto

Choose this option to let PowerProject select the most suitable orientation. The illustration in the Page layout box will show you the orientation that PowerProject chooses.


Options tab on Print dialog

This tab is only available when you are outputting a chart.

Output Options

Check the Show Legend box if you want a key of the codes used to be included on your printout. The library name is shown as the name of the key, and the names of the codes within the library are listed with their patterns and/or colours.

Check the Date Zone at Foot box if you want the date zone to be printed at the bottom of the chart as well as at the top. The order of the date zone lines is reversed.

Check the Process Mosaic Text box if your chart is tiled over more than one page and your printer does not support printing text across tiled pages. If your printer has no difficulties when printing text across tiled pages, clear this option because it may slow the printing process down.

Check the Use High-res Patterns box if your printer has difficulty producing quality output of the code and graph patterns used in PowerProject. This option may not have any effect when using some printers but it is known to improve output to DeskJets and InkJets.

Bar Titles

Select Auto Text Height if you want to let PowerProject choose how large the bar titles are on the printout. PowerProject uses the printer font closest to the output scale setting for the bar height. If PowerProject cannot find the closest font, it uses the next smallest font.

If you want to fix the size of the bar titles, select the Point box option and enter the point size you want in the box. There are 72 points per inch.

Check the Panel to Fit Text box if you want the panel width to be adjusted to the length of the longest bar title. This option does not affect the width of the bar titles panel on screen which is set from the Appearance tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog. (Checking this option has no effect if the column sheet is displayed.)

Driver Settings

These options provide some control over how your printer driver works with PowerProject. Both options are on by default and you should not change them unless advised to do so by Technical Support. (These options are set on a per printer basis so they can be set differently for each printer driver you have installed.)

These options were available in previous versions of PowerProject as INI file settings. If you have upgraded from an earlier version of PowerProject in which you had changed these INI file settings, then these options will be set on or off by default according to your INI file settings.

The PowerProject Orientation option determines whether or not orientation is set within PowerProject or derived from the printer driver setting. When this option is checked, you can set the orientation within PowerProject; when this option is cleared, PowerProject uses the orientation setting on the printer driver dialog.

The DVM option determines whether or not PowerProject initialises the printer's internal configuration. Most printer drivers prefer this to be done so the option is on by default. However, some older printer drivers (such as some DesignJets and InkJets) will only work correctly when this option is off.

Histogram Options

Depending on whether the Map Legend with Histogram option is on or off, the legend is scaled for output with either the window or the graphs. To prevent the legend from ever becoming excessively big or small on output, set the minimum and maximum point sizes for the text on output in the Legend font height between N and N points boxes. Values between 1 and 72 points are valid. This will constrain the total size of the legend as well as that of the fonts used.

Check the Vertically Rescale Histogram box if you want the histogram to be vertically rescaled before it is printed. When a histogram is vertically rescaled, the legend is automatically updated incase the multiplication factors of any of the graphs have changed. If you have made any changes to the histogram legend, such as changed the order of items in the legend, these changes will be lost. Clear this box if you do not want to lose your changes to the legend. (You can perform a vertical rescale manually by using the Histogram - Vertical Rescale menu command.)

Check the Map Legend with Histogram box if you want the legend to be printed at its position relative to the histogram graphs, rather than relative to the histogram window. This option is provided because the histogram is scaled for output. For example, supposing the legend is in the top right-hand corner of the window, also centred just above the peak of a certain graph. Due to scaling, it is unlikely that the legend could both be in the top right-hand corner and be centred just above the peak of the same graph on output. Checking Map Legend with Histogram ensures that PowerProject keeps the legend just above the peak of the graph on output. Clearing Map Legend with Histogram ensures that PowerProject keeps the legend in the top right-hand corner of the histogram window on output.

Scaling

Check the Set Date Zone Font Height To N % of Chart Height box if you want to specify how much space each line of the date zone should occupy on the printout. Enter the percentage of the chart height that you want each line to fill (according to its font height). This option is not available if you have chosen Fit Border Around Chart on the Border tab.

Click on the Chart Scale button if you want to change the vertical or horizontal scale of the chart before printing. The Customise Barchart View dialog appears with the Scale tab selected. (A Chart Scale button is also available on the Border tab of the Print dialog.)

The PowerPlot button is only available if you have PowerPlot installed on your computer and you have a plotter selected as the default printer.


PowerPlot

The PowerPlot button enables you to access PowerPlot. PowerPlot is a software extension to PowerProject, which enhances output sent to a plotter. The features of PowerPlot include:

Hidden line removal - This removes any hidden lines from your output, which means that the final plotted image is tidier.

Pen change optimisation - This means that the plotter changes pens as little as possible to improve the speed of your output

Pattern size - This allows you to specify the size at which patterns in your output are drawn by the plotter.

You cannot access PowerPlot if:

PowerPlot is not installed on your computer - If you would like to purchase a copy of PowerPlot, or would like more information, please contact your PowerProject supplier.

The PowerPlot installation was unsuccessful - If the installation was unsuccessful, try to re-install PowerPlot. The PowerPlot manual describes the installation procedure.


Importing an MPX file

To import an MPX file as a separate project:

1	Select Open from the File menu. The Open File Selector appears.

2	Drop-down the Files of Type box and select MPX files (*.MPX).

3	Locate the MPX file you want to open.

4	Click on the MPX file or enter its name in the File Name box, then click on OK. The MPX Import/Merge Options dialog appears.

5	Select the options you require. The Resource Merging Options are only valid when merging an MPX file into a project.

6	When you have made your selections, click on OK to continue.

After a few moments the MPX file is opened in PowerProject and you can begin working on it. Save the project as a PowerProject .PDB file. If later you want to take the project into another application, you can export it as an MPX file. For details of how to export an MPX file see Exporting an MPX file.

Note: PowerProject does not support every field available in the MPX file format. This means that when you import an MPX file in PowerProject, some items in the project may be lost or modified. For full details of the items which are lost or modified see Variations between PowerProject and the MPX file format.


Exporting an MPX file

You can export your projects in MPX format so that they can be loaded into other programs, e.g. risk-analysis or other project management programs. To export the active project as an MPX file:

1	Select Save As from the File menu. The Save File Selector appears.

2	Drop-down the Files of Type box and select MPX files (*.MPX).

3	Choose the directory into which you want to save the MPX file then enter a filename into the File Name box and click on OK. The MPX Export Options dialog appears.

4	Select the options you want. (If you choose to export resources and your PDB file is 5Mbytes or larger, see Exporting large PDBs to MPX files for advice on how to reduce the time taken to export the file.)

5	Click on OK to continue.

After a few moments the project is exported. If a baseline was open when you exported the project, it will be saved within the MPX file; if several baselines were open, only the first is saved within the MPX file.

When you export a project in MPX format, each task and each resource is given a unique number so that if you merge it back into the project (e.g. after editing the data in a risk-analysis program) the original tasks and resources are updated with the new information. (See Merging an MPX file for details of how to merge an MPX file back into a PowerProject project.)

Note: PowerProject does not support every field available in the MPX file format. This means that when you export a PowerProject file in MPX format, some items in the project may be lost or modified. For full details of the items which are lost or modified see Variations between PowerProject and the MPX file format.


Exporting large PDBs to MPX files

When you export a PDB file that is 5Mbytes or larger and you choose to export the resources in the .PDB file, you can reduce the export time by up to 90% by preventing resource totals (e.g. total cost, total allocation) from being exported to the MPX file.

To prevent resource totals from being exported, add the following line to your PPROJECT.INI file:

MPXExportResourceTotals=0

Remember to make a copy of your PPROJECT.INI file before editing it. You will need to close and restart PowerProject for your edits to take effect.


Merging an MPX file

Merging an MPX file into an existing project can be useful if, for example, you want to test a project in a risk analysis program then merge the results back into the project, or if several people are contributing plans to a project and haven't all used the same program to create their project.

To merge an MPX file into PowerProject:

1	Open the project that you want to merge the MPX file into.

2	Select Merge from the File menu. The Merge File Selector appears.

3	Drop down the Files of Type box and select MPX Files (*.MPX).

4	Locate the MPX file that you want to merge.

5	Select the MPX file or enter its name in the File Name box, then click on OK. The MPX Import/Merge Options dialog appears.

6	Select the options that you want then click on OK to close the dialog.

After a few moments the project will be updated to include the merged information.

Note: PowerProject does not support every field available in the MPX file format. This means that when you merge an MPX file into a PowerProject project, some items in the merged file may be lost or modified. For full details of the items which are lost or modified see Variations between PowerProject and the MPX file format.


Variations between PowerProject and the MPX file format

PowerProject does not support all the fields available in the MPX file format; similarly there are some features available in PowerProject which aren't supported by the MPX format. This means that when you exchange projects between PowerProject and MPX format, some information might be lost or modified.

Exporting a PowerProject file in MPX format

When exporting a PowerProject file in the MPX file format, the following features in your project will be lost or modified where appropriate:

consumable resource information is lost, although costs of consumable resources are retained as fixed costs

shape annotations and imported picture annotations, are lost. Text annotations can be exported by choice.

histograms are lost

text reports are lost

bar calendars are lost. MPX assumes the project has one calendar (your default calendar), plus those relating to permanent resources but not calendars for individual bars.

bar libraries and any graphical preferences you have set are lost except when you export in Graneda format.

resource profiles are flattened to a constant allocation on the task

cost centres are retained but are converted to budget codes

baselines - only the first open baseline is retained. When no baselines are open, one is created by copying the project.

chart hierarchies are converted into summary task structures

multiple segments per bar are changed into separate but linked tasks

links not connecting the ends of segments are modified to start and end at the end of segments, with lead or lag time added where possible to maintain the relationship

resource groups are expanded into individual resource allocations

the chart font is lost.

Importing/Merging an MPX file into PowerProject

When you import or merge an MPX file into PowerProject, the following features in the MPX file will be lost or modified where appropriate:

OLE links and links between projects are lost

recurring task details are lost; recurring tasks are brought into PowerProject as normal tasks.

task notes and resource notes are lost

task priorities are lost

lead time on tasks is lost, but where possible PowerProject links the tasks in such a way to retain the required offset.

time units of less than half a day get rounded up or down to the nearest half day

baselines cannot be merged.


MPX Import/Merge Options dialog

This dialog allows you to specify certain options about how the MPX file is opened, or merged into the active project.

Calendar Options

Specify the standard daily working hours to ensure that tasks with durations of hours and minutes are converted as accurately as possible to PowerProject's time units. Drop down the list boxes to choose the start and end time of the first half day (usually the morning), and the start and end time of the second half day (usually the afternoon).

Time Unit Rounding Options

Specify the smallest percentage of the working day that should be converted into a half day, and the smallest percentage of the working day that should be converted into a whole day. Adjust the percentage by clicking on the up and down buttons or type the percentage directly into the box.

Project Options

Check the Create Baseline box if you want a baseline of the project to be created when it is opened/merged.

Check the Reschedule box if you want to reschedule the project when it is opened/merged. If you choose not to reschedule the project, some tasks may not be placed in the correct position and consequently the critical path may not be accurate.)

Title Options

Choose whether you want the bar titles of the project to be taken from the task names or task descriptions. The MPX file format supports both task names and task descriptions but PowerProject does not, so you must choose which you want to appear in the bar titles column in PowerProject.

Click on Use Task Names if you want the bar titles to display the task names. (Task names may be codes, depending on which program you saved the MPX file in.)

Click on Use Task Descriptions if you want the bar titles to display the task descriptions.

Resource Allocation Options

These options let you choose whether resource allocations determine the duration of tasks, or are adjusted to the allocation required to complete the task at the duration you have specified.

Select Calculate duration, balance on effort to let task durations be determined by the resource allocation on the task.This option is chosen by default.

Select Calculate allocation to leave task durations as you have specified, and adjust the resource allocation to the amount required to complete the task in the time available.

Resource Merging Options

These options are only available when you are merging an MPX file into a project.

Check Delete all existing resource allocations if you want to replace the resource allocations in the project with the resource allocations in the MPX file. If you do not want to lose the resource allocations in the project, clear this box so that the resource allocations in the MPX file are added to those in the project instead of overwriting them.

Check the Update resource definitions box if you want the resource library information (including resource profiles) in the project to be overwritten by the resource definition information in the MPX file. If you do not want the resource library information to be overwritten, clear this box.


MPX Export Options dialog

This dialog allows you to specify certain options about how the MPX file is exported.

Format

Choose which MPX format you want to export the project as. Click on the format you want to use:

MPX 3.0 is a common format

MPX 4.0 is more recent than MPX 3.0

Graneda is the format supported by Graneda Project for Windows. Choose this format if you are going to open the MPX file in this program.

Options

Check the Export Resources box if you want to export resource library and resource allocation details. Only permanent resources can be exported.

Check the Do not save project box if you do not want to save the project before exporting it as an MPX file. If you intend merging the MPX file back into the project at a later date, you should leave this box clear so that the project is saved.

Check the Reschedule before export box if you want to reschedule the project before exporting it as an MPX file. If you choose not to reschedule, some MPX fields will remain empty because the appropriate figures have not been calculated or would be inaccurate (e.g. float and early start dates). Other programs may need the information in these fields to generate accurate reports.

Check the Export text annotations box if you want text annotations in the project to be included in the exported MPX file.

Calendar Options

Drop down the Project Calendar list box to select the calendar you want to retain as the project calendar.

Specify the standard daily working hours to ensure that task durations are converted as accurately as possible into the time units supported by MPX. Drop down the list boxes to choose the start and end time of the first half day (usually the morning), and the start and end time of the second half day (usually the afternoon).


PPROJECT.INI setting for printing grid lines

Some high-definition laser printers do not print the default 1st grid line on charts and histograms. If you encounter this problem, you can add a line in your PPROJECT.INI file to ensure that the 1st grid line is printed.

Open your copy of PPROJECT.INI. Opening, editing and saving your PPROJECT.INI file are explained in Editing PPROJECT.INI.

Add the following line to your PPROJECT.INI file:

CourserGridLines=1

This will ensure that the default line style of the 1st grid line is printed as a dashed black line instead of a dotted black line. Your screen display will not be affected.


Resources selector

This selector is presented when you choose the Edit - Resources menu command.

This selector allows you to:

Assign one or more resources present in the resource library to the tasks selected from the bar chart.

Specify the allocation for each resource; that is the number of each resource assigned to a task.

Model the assignment of resources to tasks, for example to specify whether you want the task duration to be taken from the duration on the bar chart or to depend on the amount of resources and effort required for the task.

Resource Type

Specify whether you want to assign permanent or consumable resources, by clicking on the Permanent or Consumable option. You can assign both permanent and consumable resources to a task, but you can assign only permanent or only consumable resources in a single operation.

Available

Depending on which option you have selected in the Resource Type panel of the selector, this list displays all the permanent or consumable resources in the resource library. Resource groups from the resource library are also displayed in this list.

To assign resources to a task, select the resources you want to assign from this list and click on the right arrow button to move them into the Selected list.

Selected

This list displays the permanent or consumable resources you have selected to assign to a task.

Allocation

Alongside each resource, the number of the resource assigned to a task is displayed in the Allocation column. The amount that appears in this column is the permanent resource default allocation or the consumable resource default allocation specified when you created the resource.

To change the allocation of a resource, click on the allocation next to the resource you want to edit to locate the text cursor and then enter a new value between 0 and 19999999.99.

PowerProject does not allow you to change the allocation of a resource in the following situations:

If you have specified an allocation profile for a permanent resource, PowerProject does not allow you to overwrite a profile with a fixed value from the Resources selector. You can only change an allocation profile back to a fixed value using the Allocation field on the Permanent Resource Modelling dialog. "Profile" is displayed in this column to indicate that the resource has been assigned using an allocation profile .

If you have modelled the resource assignment using the Fixed resource model, PowerProject does not allow you to change the amount of the resource allocated as you have specified that you want the calculation you entered on the Modelling dialog to be fixed. You can only change information about a fixed resource assignment from the Permanent Resource Modelling or the Consumable Resource Modelling dialogs. Selecting the value displayed in this column for a Fixed resource assignment displays "Fixed" to indicate that you cannot edit this value.

If you have modelled the resource assignment using the Proportional resource model with a Balancing parameter of Allocation. Specifying Allocation as the balancing parameter means that PowerProject automatically adjusts the allocation to take account of any changes made to the segment duration, therefore once the resource has been modelled in this way only PowerProject can change the allocation. Selecting the value displayed in this column for a resource assignment modelled in this way displays "Balanced" to indicate that you cannot edit this value.

To remove a resource from a task, select the resource in the Selected list and click on the left arrow button to move the resource back into the Available list.

Modelling button

To model the assignment of a resource, select the resource(s) from the Selected list and click on the Modelling button to display the Permanent Resource Modelling or the Consumable Resource Modelling dialog.

Link Resource button

Click on this button to display the Link Resource dialog. This dialog allows you to specify which resource's calendar you want to be used to calculate the position of links on segments that have modelled resource assignments on them.

Next and Previous buttons

These buttons are only available if you selected more than one segment from the bar chart.

Clicking on Next saves the information you have just entered about the resource assignments for a segment and displays the resource assignment details of the next segment selected.

Clicking on Previous saves the information you have just entered about the resource assignments for a segment and displays the resource assignment details of the previous segment selected from the bar chart.


Link Resource dialog

This dialog lists any permanent or consumable resources assigned to the selected segment that have been modelled.

You need to specify a link resource for a segment that has modelled resources, so that PowerProject can position links that start or end during the middle of a segment using the calendar of the resource you specify. By merging the bar calendar with the resource calendar, PowerProject ensures that links are not positioned during a resource or task weekend or holiday period. On segments that do not have modelled resources assigned, PowerProject uses only the task calendar when positioning links.

1	Select a resource from the list to specify which resource's calendar you want to be used for positioning links that are not at the start or end of a segment.

2	Click on OK to confirm and leave the dialog.

Note: Resource groups that are modelled on the selected segment do not appear on this dialog. You cannot select a resource group to be the link resource, as groups do not have a calendar of their own.


Fixed Costs selector

This selector is presented when you choose the Edit - Fixed Costs menu command.

This selector allows you to:

Assign fixed costs from one or more cost centres present in the cost centre library to the tasks selected from the bar chart.

Specify the allocation for each cost centre; that is the amount of money to be assigned to the selected task.

Specify whether the task is providing money to the cost centre (income) or whether it is using money from the cost centre (expenditure).

Available

This list displays all the cost centres in the cost centre library.

To assign a fixed cost to a task, select the cost centre that the fixed cost is associated with from this list and click on the right arrow button to move it into the Selected list.

Selected

This list displays the cost centres you have selected to assign to a task.

Alongside each cost centre, the allocation of money being assigned to the task is displayed in the Allocation column. The amount that appears in this column is the Default allocation specified when you created the cost centre.

To change the allocation, click on the allocation next to the cost centre you want to edit to locate the text cursor and then enter a new value between 0 and 19999999.99.

To remove a fixed cost from a task, select the cost centre from the Selected list and click on the left arrow button to move the cost centre back into the Available list.

Cost Type button

To specify whether you want the fixed cost to provide income to a cost centre or whether you want it to be expenditure from a cost centre, select the cost centre from the Selected list and click on the Cost Type button to display the Cost Type dialog.

Next and Previous buttons

These buttons are only available if you selected more than one segment from the bar chart.

Clicking on Next saves the information you have just entered about fixed costs for a segment and displays the fixed cost details of the next segment selected.

Clicking on Previous saves the information you have just entered about fixed costs for a segment and displays the fixed cost details of the previous segment selected from the bar chart.


Permanent Resource Modelling dialog

This dialog is presented if you click the Modelling button when assigning permanent resources and permanent resource groups from the Resources selector.

The expanded version of the dialog represents the resource assignment as a calculation. You supply the information you know about the resource assignment, for example you may have an estimate of how much effort a task requires and you may know how many resources you have available. When you have supplied this information, PowerProject can calculate the remaining information -- in this case the duration of the resource assignment.

This dialog allows you to specify the following:

Which, if any, resource model you want to use.

Which cost centre you want any resource costs associated with the resource to come from.

Calculate resource assignment information, using an effort based or work based calculation.

Whether you want to assign the modelled resource using a fixed or variable allocation.

Modelling

The options in this panel allow you to specify how you want the resource to work on the task. You can specify:

None

Click this option if you do not want to model this resource assignment. Not modelling a resource assignment means that the segment on the bar chart determines the length of time the resource works for. This is the default option.

Fixed

Click on this option if you want to model the resource assignment using the fixed resource model. In short, this means that the duration of the resource assignment is always a fixed amount of time, and resizing the segment does not change it.

Proportional

Click on this option if you want to model the resource assignment using the proportional resource model. In short, this means that the duration of the resource assignment is always proportional to the duration of the segment to which it is being assigned.

Resource Cost

This panel displays information about the cost of the resource on the task.

Cost

This field displays the cost of assigning the resource to this task. This field is for information only.

Cost centre

This is the cost centre that the resource cost is associated with

Next and Previous buttons

These buttons are only available if you selected more than one resource from the Selected panel of the Resources dialog.

Clicking on Next saves the information you have just entered about a resource and displays the details of the next resource selected.

Clicking on Previous saves the information you have just entered about a resource and displays the details of the previous resource selected.

Options button

Click on this button to display the expanded version of the dialog. The expanded version of the dialog. The expanded version of the dialog allows you to calculate resource assignment information, use the Fixed and Proportional resource models and to specify a variable allocation for a resource.

If you display the expanded version of this dialog, this button becomes the Hide Options button, which allows you to return to the unexpanded version of the dialog.

You can specify that you want all resource dialogs to be expanded by default by selecting an option on the General tab of the Options dialog.

Expanded Permanent Resource Modelling dialog

Calculation Type

The options in this panel allow you to specify whether you want to calculate the resource assignment based on effort or on work and to specify what information you want to calculate about the resource assignment. If you are modelling a resource using the Proportional model you can also specify a balancing parameter.

Effort based

Click this option if you want to model the resource assignment using an effort based calculation. This is the default option.

Work based

Click this option if you want to model the resource assignment using a work based calculation.

Calculated parameter

Select the information you want PowerProject to calculate from this list box.

For example, if you are using an effort based calculation and specify Allocation as the Calculated parameter you must supply information about the Duration and Effort of the resource assignment, so that PowerProject can calculate the amount of resources required to complete the task.

The formula that PowerProject uses to perform the calculation is displayed in the Calculation Type panel of the dialog.

Balancing parameter

Select the information you want PowerProject to recalculate if the segment on the bar chart later changes. You can only specify a balancing parameter if you are using the Proportional resource model.

Common Data

The information you can specify in this panel applies to all modelling calculations regardless of whether you are performing a work based or an effort based calculation.

Duration

If you did not specify Duration as the Calculated parameter, enter the duration of the resource assignment in this field.

If you did specify Duration as the Calculated parameter this field is disabled as PowerProject calculates this value.

Allocation

If you did not specify allocation as the Calculated parameter, enter the amount of the resource you want to allocate to the segment in this field.

Entering an amount in this field means that the same number of the resource work throughout the segment. If you want the amount of resources working on the segment to vary (a variable allocation) during the segment, click on the Profile button to display the profile editor to create a variable allocation profile.

The Profile button is also available for non-modelled resource assignments.

If you did specify allocation as the Calculated parameter this field is unavailable as PowerProject calculates this value. PowerProject calculates only fixed allocations. Therefore, if you create an allocation profile and then specify Allocation as the balancing parameter, PowerProject will overwrite the allocation profile with a fixed value.

Effort based data

The information you can specify in this panel only applies if you are performing an effort based resource calculation. Therefore, the option in this panel is only available if you selected Effort based from the Calculation Type panel of this dialog.

Effort

If you did not specify Effort as the Calculated parameter, enter the amount of effort required to complete work on the segment in this field.

If you did specify Effort as the Calculated parameter, this field is unavailable as PowerProject calculates the value in this field.

Work based data

The information you can specify in this panel only applies if you are performing a work based resource calculation. Therefore, the options in this panel are only available if you selected Work based from the Calculation Type panel of this dialog.

Work rate

If you did not specify Work rate as the Calculated parameter, enter the rate at which the resource works in this field.

If you did specify Work rate as the Calculated parameter, this field is unavailable as PowerProject calculates this value.

Work

If you did not specify Work as the Calculated parameter, enter the amount of work required to complete the segment in this field.

If you specified Work as the Calculated parameter, this field is unavailable as PowerProject calculates this value.


Consumable Resource Modelling dialog

This dialog is presented if you click the Modelling button when assigning consumable resources and consumable resource groups from the Resources selector.

The expanded version of the dialog represents the resource assignment as a calculation. You supply the information you know about the resource assignment, for example you may know the duration of the task and the amount of the resource to be consumed. When you have supplied this information and PowerProject can calculate the remaining information -- in this case the rate at which the resource is consumed.

This dialog allows you to specify the following:

Which, if any, resource model you want to use.

Which cost centre you want any resource costs associated with the resource to come from.

Whether you want the task to which the resource is being assigned to consume or supply the resource.

Calculate resource assignment information.

Whether you want to assign the modelled resource using a fixed or variable consumption/supply rate.

Modelling

The options in this panel allow you to specify how you want the resource to work on the task. You can specify:

None

Click this option if you do not want to model this resource assignment. Not modelling a resource assignment means that the segment on the bar chart determines the length of time the resource works for. This is the default option.

Fixed

Click on this option if you want to model the resource assignment using the fixed resource model. In short, this means that the duration of the resource assignment is always a fixed amount of time and resizing the segment does not change it.

Proportional

Click on this option if you want to model the resource assignment using the proportional resource model. In short, this means that the duration of the resource assignment is always proportional to the duration of the segment to which it is being assigned.

Type

The options in this panel allow you to specify whether you want the task to which the resource is being assigned to supply or consume the resource. The default is that a task consumes a consumable resource.

Consumes

Click this option if you want the task to which the resource is being assigned to consume the resource. This is the default option.

Supplies

Click this option if you want the task to which the resource is being assigned to supply the resource. If you have set up costing information for the consumable resource you are modelling, a resource cost is automatically assigned to the task as PowerProject costs consumable resources at supply.

Resource Cost

This panel displays information about the cost of the resource on the task.

Cost

This field displays the cost of assigning the resource to this task. This field is for information only and only displays a value if the resource is being supplied by the task.

Cost centre

This is the cost centre that the resource cost is associated with

Next and Previous buttons

These buttons are only available if you selected more than one resource from the Selected panel of the Resources selector.

Clicking on Next saves the information you have just entered about a resource and displays the details of the next resource selected.

Clicking on Previous saves the information you have just entered about a resource and displays the details of the previous resource selected.

Options button

Click on this button to display the expanded version of the dialog. The expanded version of the dialog. The expanded version of the dialog allows you to calculate resource assignment information and use the Fixed and Proportional resource models.

If you display the expanded version of this dialog, this button becomes the Hide Options button, which allows you to return to the unexpanded version of the dialog.

You can specify that you want all resource dialogs to be expanded by default by selecting an option on the General tab of the Options dialog.

Expanded Consumable Resource Modelling dialog

Calculation Type

Use the fields in this panel to specify the information you want PowerProject to calculate. If you are modelling a resource using the Proportional model you can also specify a balancing parameter.

Calculated parameter

Select the information you want PowerProject to calculate from this list box.

For example, if you specify Allocation as the Calculated parameter you must supply information about the Duration and Supply or Consumption Rate of the resource assignment, so that PowerProject can calculate the amount of resources required to complete the task.

The formula that PowerProject uses to perform the calculation is displayed in the Calculation Type panel of the dialog.

Balancing parameter

Select the information you want PowerProject to recalculate if the segment on the bar chart later changes. You can only specify a balancing parameter if you are using the Proportional resource model.

Data

Duration

If you did not specify Duration as the Calculated parameter, enter the duration of the resource assignment in this field.

If you did specify Duration as the Calculated parameter this field is disabled as PowerProject calculates this value.

Allocation

If you did not specify allocation as the Calculated parameter, enter the amount of the resource you want to allocate to the segment in this field.

If you did specify allocation as the Calculated parameter this field is unavailable as PowerProject calculates this value.

Rate

If you did not specify Rate as the Calculated parameter, enter the rate at which the resource is consumed or supplied during the task.

Entering an amount in this field means that the resource is consumed or supplied evenly throughout the task. If you want the resource to be consumed or supplied at a variable rate throughout a segment, click on the Profile button to display the profile editor to create a variable rate profile.

If you did specify Rate as the Calculated parameter, this field is unavailable as PowerProject calculates this value. PowerProject calculates only fixed consumption or supply rates. Therefore, if you create a rate profile and then specify Rate as the balancing parameter, PowerProject will overwrite the rate profile with a fixed rate.

Note: You can only specify a rate profile it you are modelling the resource.


Cost Type dialog

This dialog is presented when you select a cost centre from the Selected panel and click the Cost Type button from the Fixed Costs selector.

This dialog allows you to specify whether you want the fixed cost to provide income to the cost centre or whether you want the cost to be expenditure from the cost centre. The default is that fixed costs are expenditure from a cost centre.

Income

Click this option if you want the fixed cost to provide income to the cost centre.

Expenditure

Click this option if you want the fixed cost to use money from (expenditure) the cost centre. This is the default.

Next and Previous buttons

These buttons are only available if you selected more than one cost centre from the Selected panel of the Fixed Costs selector.

Clicking on Next saves the information you have just entered about a fixed cost assignment and displays the cost type details of the next cost centre selected.

Clicking on Previous saves the information you have just entered about a fixed cost assignment and displays the cost type details of the previous cost centre selected.


The Profile Editor

You can use the profile editor to create resource profiles or to edit a base graph from a histogram. The profile editor is displayed when you:

Click the Profile button on the Permanent Resource Details dialog to create an availability profile.

Click the Profile button on the Permanent Resource Modelling dialog to create an allocation profile.

Click the Profile button on the Consumable Resource Modelling dialog to create a supply or consumption rate profile.

Edit a base graph from a histogram.

Layout of the profile editor

The profile editor is displayed as a grid with a horizontal and a vertical axis. The vertical axis (Y-axis) shows the amount of the resource and the horizontal axis (X-axis) shows the time into the project or task.

Vertical axis

The amount shown on the vertical axis of the profile editor depends on the type of resource profile you are creating.

For permanent resource availability profiles it refers to the amount of the resource available.

For permanent resource allocation profiles it refers to the amount of the resource allocated.

For consumable resource supply/consumption rate profiles it refers to the amount of the resource being supplied or consumed.

Horizontal axis

The time shown on the horizontal axis of the profile editor depends on the type of resource profile you are creating:

For permanent resource availability profiles it refers to the elapsed amount of time into the project.

For permanent resource allocation profiles it refers to the amount of worked time into the task, to which the permanent resource is being assigned.

For consumable resource supply/consumption rate profiles it refers to the amount of worked time into the task, to which the resource is being assigned.

The numbering on these axis starts at 0 or 1 depending on the numbering preference set from the Numbering tab on the Options dialog

Nodes

The availability, allocation or consumption/supply rate of a resource at a particular point in time during the project or task is represented by a small black square, called a node. When a node is black it indicates that the node is selected. Single-click on a node to select it.

Below the profile grid are two editable fields. The names and contents of these fields depend on the type of resource profile you are creating:

For a permanent resource availability profile these fields show the Availability and the Elapsed time into the project.

For a permanent resource allocation profile these fields show the Allocation of the resource and the Worked time into the task to which the resource is being assigned.

For a consumable resource supply or consumption rate profile these fields show the Supply rate or Consumption rate and the Worked time into the task to which the resource is being assigned.

There is also an Elapsed date field. This field is for information only. It shows the elapsed time date for the currently selected node. For example, for a permanent resource availability profile where the project start date is 9th January 1995 if the Worked time field (using Days as the time unit) contains the value 10 days the elapsed time date (assuming that there are no weekends or holidays) would be 19-Jan-1995 into project

The value displayed in the Elapsed date field takes the current resource and task calendars into account. Therefore, if the calendars change or the task moves the elapsed date of the currently selected node may change.

Note: Permanent resource availability profiles use only the resource calendar as the profile is not assigned to a task.

Creating a profile

To create a resource profile complete the following steps:

1	Specify an appropriate scale for the profile. You increase and decrease the vertical and horizontal scales using the arrow buttons positioned at the top right corner of the profile editor. The scale you choose will depend on the amount of the resource and the duration of the project or task.

2	Specify the snapping you want to apply to the profile grid. Specifying snapping allows you to specify the degree of accuracy you want for the profile grid. Click the Snap button to display the Profile Editor Snapping dialog.

3	Enter the varying amounts of the resource during the project or task by positioning nodes on the profile grid. You can insert new nodes and select and move existing nodes.

4	When you have added and moved the nodes on the profile grid to create a resource profile, click on OK to confirm and leave the profile editor.

You can also paste numerical data from the Windows Clipboard into the profile editor to create a profile.

Moving nodes on the profile grid

You can move nodes on the profile grid using the profile editor fields or by using the mouse.

Using the mouse

To insert a new node, position the mouse pointer on the line representing the profile at the point you want to insert a new node, so that the mouse pointer changes to [image], then drag the pointer to the required position on the grid and release to insert a new node.

To move an existing node, select a node so that the mouse pointer changes to [image], then drag the pointer to the required position on the grid and release to move the node.

Notice that the values displayed in the fields underneath the profile editor change to reflect the current position of the node on the profile grid.

Using the profile editor fields

To enter the amount of a resource for a particular period of time in the project or task:

1	Select a node and enter the amount of the resource in the Availability, Allocation, Supply rate or Consumption rate field.

2	Enter the time at which this amount of resource is to be available, allocated, supplied or consumed in the Elapsed time or Worked time field.

3	When you have entered the appropriate values click the Move Node button to move the selected node to the position specified by the values you have just entered.

Note: In some cases you may not be able to position a node precisely with the mouse, depending on the snapping and the scale specified for the grid. However, you can position a node approximately using the mouse and then position the node more precisely using the profile editor fields and the Move node button.

Moving the first node of the profile

The profile editor always has to have a node a time 0 on the profile grid to show the availability, allocation or consumption/supply rate of the resource. Therefore if you select the node at time 0, you can only move it vertically.

Selecting one or more nodes

There are several ways to select nodes in the profile editor. These are:

Single-clicking on a node. This selects a single node. When a node is deselected it appears white and when it is selected it appears black. When a node is selected you can drag it or use the profile editor fields to move it to a different position on the grid.
Click on an empty area of the profile editor grid to deselect a node.

CTRL-clicking on a node. This allows you to select several nodes at a time. Once you have selected several nodes, position the pointer over one of the nodes and drag to move the selected nodes to the required position on the grid. All the nodes you have selected move together.

Clicking and dragging with the mouse. To select several consecutive nodes on the grid, click on a blank area of the grid and drag the mouse to form a "rubber band", make sure the "rubber band" surrounds all the nodes you want to select and release. Position the pointer over one of the selected nodes and drag to move them to the required position on the grid.

Note: If you select more than one node from the profile editor, and enter new values in the profile editor fields, PowerProject moves the last node selected to the values specified in these fields.

Pasting information into the profile editor

The profile editor allows you to include existing data in a profile by pasting data from the Windows Clipboard. For example, you may have the availability of a resource stored in numerical form in a spreadsheet or word processing program. You can import this information into the profile editor using the Clipboard.

The data you include from the Clipboard may contain text as well as numbers. In such cases, PowerProject extracts the numbers from the data you paste into the profile editor to make the resource profile. The numbers can be in any format, for example comma-separated or in columns. PowerProject uses the numbers in the order in which they appear. It takes the first number as a time unit and the second as an amount. It does this until there are no numbers left.

Click on the Paste button to include information currently stored in the Clipboard in the profile editor. Pasting information from the Clipboard overwrites any data in the profile editor. Confirm the alert presented to confirm that you want to paste the data from the Clipboard and overwrite any data in the profile editor.

Copying information from the profile editor

Just as you can paste data into the profile editor you can copy a profile to the Clipboard and then paste the information into another program. To copy the current profile to the Clipboard, click on the Copy button.

You can also use the Copy and Paste features of the profile editor to cut and paste base graphs between histograms.

Editing a base graph in the profile editor

When a histogram is active you can edit any base graph displayed on the histogram in the profile editor, by selecting the graph from the histogram and choosing the Histogram - Edit Base Graph menu command.

The base graph you select appears as a profile in the profile editor. To change any of the values of the graph, select and move nodes as you would if you were creating a resource profile until the nodes represent the values you want to be displayed on the histogram.

When you save the base graph as a profile, PowerProject turns the Auto Update link between the histogram and the bar chart off, as the histogram is no longer a true reflection of the resources or cost centres on the bar chart. If you turn the Auto Update link on any changes you have made to the graph using the profile editor will be lost and PowerProject regenerates the histogram so that it reflects the use of resources or cost centres on the bar chart.

Note: Any graphs displayed on the histogram that are derived from the base graph will also change to reflect any changes made to the base graph in the profile editor.


Profile Editor Snapping dialog

This dialog is presented when you click the Snap button from the profile editor. It allows you to specify snapping for the profile grid.

X Snapping

Select an option from this panel to specify the time unit you want values on the X-axis to snap to. The time unit you select is displayed after the Worked time field on the profile editor. The number of options available in this panel depends on the horizontal scale of the profile grid. The smaller the horizontal scale the fewer time unit options are available.

Y Snapping

The options in this panel allow you to specify whether you want to apply Y-snapping to the profile editor and if so, you can specify a snapping value.

None

Click this option if you do not want any Y-snapping to apply to the profile editor. This is the default option.

User

Click this option if you want to specify snapping for the Y-axis and enter a value in the edit field. The smallest and greatest values you can enter are displayed underneath this field. The smallest and largest values depend on the vertical scale of the profile grid.


Permanent resource availability profile

An availability profile allows you to specify a variable availability for a permanent resource in the Resource Library.

You specify the availability of a permanent resource from the Permanent Resource Details dialog. If you enter a value in the Availability field of this dialog this means that the resource has a fixed availability. For example, if you enter 3 in this field it means that you have 3 of this resource available throughout the project.

If you click the Profile button from the Permanent Resource Details dialog, the profile editor is presented. You can use the profile editor to specify a variable availability for a resource. For example, you may have 3 of a resource available for the first month of a project and 6 available for the second month of the project.


Permanent resource allocation profile

An allocation profile allows you to specify a variable allocation for a permanent resource assigned to a task.

You can specify an allocation profile for a permanent resource from the Permanent Resource Modelling dialog. You can specify an allocation profile for any permanent resource, whether it is modelled or not.

You can enter a fixed allocation for a resource in the Allocation column of the Resources dialog or from the Allocation field on the Permanent Resource Modelling dialog. Entering a fixed allocation means that the same number of a resource work for the duration of the resource assignment.

If you click the Profile button from the Permanent Resource Modelling dialog, the profile editor is presented. You can use the profile editor to specify a variable allocation for a resource. For example, if a task is 2 weeks long, you may want to assign 2 of a resource for the first week but only 1 for the second week.


Consumable resource supply/consumption rate profile

A supply or consumption rate profile allows you to specify a variable supply or consumption rate for a consumable resource assigned to a task.

You can specify a supply or consumption rate profile for a consumable resource only if you model the resource assignment from the Consumable Resource Modelling dialog. If you do not model the resource assignment, the resource has a fixed supply or consumption rate, which means that the resource is always supplied or consumed evenly across the task to which it is assigned.

If you click the Profile button from the Consumable Resource Modelling dialog, the profile editor is presented. You can use the profile editor to specify a variable supply or consumption rate for the resource. For example, if a task is 2 weeks long you may know that more of the resource will be supplied or consumed in the first week of the task than in the second week.


Fixed resource model

Any resources assigned using this model can have a direct effect on the duration of the task to which they are assigned. Therefore they are known as resource-driven assignments. Resources assigned using this model always work for a fixed amount of time, regardless of the duration of other resource assignments or the segment duration.

For example, you may want some resources to work only for one week on a task. When you assign resources using this model, the segment duration on the bar chart may change, as PowerProject always ensures that the segment duration is long enough for the longest modelled (using the Fixed or Proportional resource model) resource assignment duration to be able to complete their work on the segment.

If a segment has only fixed resource assignments or a combination of fixed and non-modelled assignments on it, the segment duration is determined by the fixed resource assignment that has the longest elapsed duration. PowerProject does not allow you to change the duration of such segments from the bar chart.

If a segment has a combination of fixed and proportional resource assignments, you can resize the segment, so that it is longer than the duration of the longest fixed resource assignment, but you cannot shorten the segment duration to be less than the longest fixed resource assignment. This ensures that the resources assigned always have enough time to complete their work on the segment.


Proportional resource model

Any resources assigned using this model can have a direct effect on the duration of the segment to which they are assigned. Resources can work for all or part of the segment duration, with the segment duration on the bar chart being determined by the longest modelled (using the Fixed or Proportional model) resource assignment duration for that segment.

If you later resize a segment that has proportional resource assignments, PowerProject re-calculates the duration of these assignments in proportion to the new segment duration. For example, if a proportional resource assignment duration is 2 days and the segment duration is 6 days then doubling the segment duration to 12 days means that PowerProject also doubles the proportional resource assignment duration to 4 days.

Balancing proportional resource assignments

As a result of re-calculating proportional resource assignment durations, PowerProject has to change some of the information about the resource assignment to compensate for the change in the assignment duration. PowerProject allows you to specify which information it should change as a balancing parameter. For example, if a proportional resource assignment duration doubles as a result of doubling the segment duration, you may want to:

Halve the number of resource allocated to the segment, as the resources now have twice as long to complete the same amount of work, so not as many resources are required. Do this by specifying Allocation as the balancing parameter.

OR

Double the amount of effort that is involved, as the same number of resources now have twice as much time to complete the task. Do this by specifying Effort as the balancing parameter.


Balancing parameters

You specify a balancing parameter only if you are modelling a resource assignment using the Proportional resource model.

PowerProject uses the balancing parameter if the duration of the segment that has proportional resource assignments on it changes. The balancing parameters available depend on the type of calculation used to perform the resource assignment calculation and on the type of resource.

As an example, if a proportional permanent resource assignment duration (calculated using a work based calculation) increases from 3 to 6 days, PowerProject must change one of the other figures used to calculate the resource assignment to compensate for the changed duration. You specify the information PowerProject would change by choosing one of the following balancing parameters:

Effort. Specifying effort would mean that PowerProject would double the amount of effort involved for the task. As the same amount of resource now have twice as long to complete the task, the task must involve more effort.

Allocation. Specifying allocation would mean that PowerProject would halve the allocation of the resource as the resource now has twice as long to complete the same amount of work.

Work. Specifying work would mean that PowerProject would double the amount of work to be completed by the segment. As the same amount of resources now have twice as long they can complete twice as much work.

Work rate. Specifying work rate would mean that PowerProject would reduce the work rate of the resource as the same amount of resources now have twice as long to complete the same amount of work they do not have to work at the same rate to complete the work on the segment. The balancing parameters available depend on the type of calculation you are performing and the type of resource you are modelling.


Resource assignment popup window

This window is displayed if you resize a segment that has resources assigned to it by:

Dragging the start or end of the segment using the pointer.

Clicking or CTRL-clicking on the Left or Right arrows of the Start or End panels of the status line.

The window contains information about every resource assignment on the segment and PowerProject updates this information as you change the duration of the segment on the bar chart. If you have a large number of resources assigned, PowerProject may not be able to display all the resources in the window. If this is the case, PowerProject displays a line at the bottom of the window which indicates how many resource assignments cannot be displayed.

This popup window enables you to see what effects, if any, resizing the segment has on any of the resources assigned to that segment. For example, if a resource is assigned using the Fixed resource model, the information about this assignment remains the same in the popup window, as fixed resource assignments do not change as a result of changes to the segment duration.

If you are using a colour monitor, any balancing parameters for proportional resource assignment appear in highlighted text in the window.

If you decide that you do not want to resize the segment after you have started to change its duration and you want to return the segment duration and the resource assignments to their original state do one of the following:

If you are resizing the segment using the mouse, press SHIFT before you release the mouse button.

If you are resizing the segment using the status line, press ESC while the Left or Right arrow button is still selected.


Duration-driven resource assignments

A duration-driven resource assignment is one that is not modelled. You can model a resource assignment when assigning a resource using the Resources selector. The default is that resource assignments are not modelled.

A duration-driven resource assignment means that the length of time the resource works for on the task is determined by the duration of the segment on the bar chart. The resource always works for the entire working duration of the segment (as far as the resource calendar allows). Therefore, if the segment is resized on the bar chart, the length of time the resource works for changes in accordance to the new segment duration.


Resource-driven resource assignments

A resource-driven resource assignment is one that is modelled. You can model a resource assignment when assigning a resource using the Resources selector.

A resource-driven resource assignment means that you specify the length of time the resource has to work on a task to complete their work. When you have done this and assign the resource to a task, PowerProject checks that the segment duration is long enough to enable all the modelled resource assignments to be able to complete their work. If it is not, PowerProject changes the segment duration.

You can model resource-driven resource assignments using the Fixed or Proportional resource model. Both models allow you to specify the resource assignment duration, but differ in the way they treat modelled resource assignment durations if the duration of the segment is later resized on the bar chart.

Fixed resource assignment durations remain the same regardless of any changes to the new segment duration. Note that you cannot resize a segment duration to be less than the longest fixed resource assignment duration on that segment.

Proportional resource assignment durations change in proportion to the new segment duration.

PowerProject displays a Resource assignment popup window if you resize a segment that has resources assigned to it. This window displays information about the resource assignments and updates this information as the segment is resized, so that you can see any effects of resizing the segment on the resource assignments.


Chart Selector

The Chart Selector dialog displays the tree structure of the active project. Through this you can choose any chart available in any open project.

You can choose and modify how the project structure should be displayed using the window frame features and Chart Selector menu commands.

The Chart Selector also shows you how many charts there are in the project, how many are selected and what levels of chart are displayed from the project.

If you want to change the chart hierarchy, use the Chart - Chart Manager menu command.

The Chart Selector is made up of a:

Chart Pane - showing a picture of the hierarchical structure of the project.

Bar Viewpane - where the contents of a selected chart can be seen.

Menu commands - which control the appearance and operation of the Selector.

Message line - giving feedback on operations and the contents of the Selector.

Exit buttons - to Open the selected (this button is also labelled Execute or Select depending where the Chart Selector was called from) charts, or Cancel the operation.

Window frame features - to control the moving, closing and sizing of the Selector.

The functions of the Chart Selector are detailed in:

Opening a single chart.

Opening and selecting more than one chart

Changing the project.

Windows features.

Printing menu  - gives access to the common print and preview dialogs through which the project hierarchy can be printed and enclosed in a border

Display menu - to control the appearance for the screen and printing.

Options menu - to control the how the Selector behaves.

The Chart Selector appears when you do any of the following:

Choose the Chart - Open menu command.

After Executing a filter.

Click the Entry Chart button on the Options dialog.

When specifying the scope of a new baseline.

When specifying the scope of a chart text report.

When specifying the scope of a chart text report exported to a comma separated file.

When specifying the scope of a chart text report exported to a WKS file.

When specifying the scope of a resource or cost center histogram report.

Note: If you are working in a multi-user project, access to charts, and what constitutes the whole project for you may be limited by your Chart Scope.


Chart Pane

This area of the Chart Selector shows a picture of the hierarchical structure of the active project. There is a scroll bar to enable display of large projects. You can select a single chart to open, or several if you are executing a filter or a histogram. See also Changing the project and Bar Viewpane.


Opening a single chart

To find and open a chart in the active project:

1	If the chart you require is not shown in the Chart Pane, use the scroll bar to display it.

2	Click on a chart to select it. The bar titles for the chart you have selected are displayed in the Bar Viewpane.

3	Press the Open button to open the chart.


Opening more than one chart

You can only select more than one chart in the active project when you have arrived at the Chart Selector from the File - Filter menu, Histogram Report dialog, Chart Report dialog, New Baseline dialog or the Histogram Report Filter dialog

1	If the chart(s) you require are not shown in the Chart Pane, use the scroll bar to display them.

2	Click on a chart to select it. The bar titles for the chart you have selected are displayed in the Bar Viewpane.

3	To select further charts, hold down the CTRL key and click on the required charts.


Changing the project

If the chart you want to see is in an open, but inactive project, you can change the project. Click the Project list box at the foot of the Selector and select the project containing the chart you want to open. The display in the Chart Pane changes to show the structure of the new project.


Printing the project structure

The Print menu gives access to the print preview window, Print Graphics and printer driver dialogs via the menu commands. These are identical to the commands available on the main PowerProject File menu. For more details see File - Preview, File - Print Graphics and File - Printer Setup.

The way the structure is printed depends on what you have chosen to display.


Window features

The Chart Selector has features which you can control using the pointer:

If the Bar Viewpane is displayed, you can change its width - by pointing to the centre of the double line between the Chart Pane and Viewpane where the pointer changes to shape to a [image] and dragging to a new position.


Chart Selector - Display menu

The Display menu commands allow you to control various aspects of how the Chart Pane and Bar Viewpane of the Chart Selector appear. This affects the screen and output appearance.

Display - Font

You can change the font face and font size used in the Chart Pane. The Font Selector is presented.

Using a smaller font shows more information.

Display - Set Levels

You can control the number of chart hierarchy levels within the project which are displayed in the Chart Pane. For example, if you wanted to look at the root chart and any owning bars on the root, you should choose Minimum level 1 and Maximum level 2.

Display - Joining Lines

You can decide whether or not you need lines to connect each chart to the next level in the Chart Pane.


Chart Selector - Options menu

The Options menu allows you to control aspects of the Bar Viewpane and the operation of the Chart Selector.

Options - Bar Viewpane

You can choose whether to display the bar titles for a single selected chart in the Bar Viewpane. For example, you may need to see the bar titles before opening a chart if you are not sure from the chart title exactly what the chart contains. The command is ticked, and the Selector is divided by a double vertical line.

You can scroll the Viewpane if the selected chart has more than a window-full of bar titles.

You can alter the width of the Viewpane by pointing to the centre of the double line between the Chart Pane and Viewpane - the pointer changes shape on the junction to a [image] - then dragging to a new position.

If you want to close the Viewpane altogether, deselect so the menu command is not ticked.


File Selector

The standard Windows File Selector is presented whenever you wish to open files or save files to disk.

The File Selector differs slightly depending on whether you are using Windows 3.x or Windows 95:

In Windows 3.x, use the Drives and Directories list boxes to locate the directory you want.

In Windows 95, use the Look In drop-down list box to locate the directory you want.

The open folder icon shows which sub-directories are being viewed. Click on one of the directory icons to see other directories.

File Name

Type or select the filename you want to open. This box lists files with the extension you select in the Files of Type box.

To see a list of files with a particular extension, type an asterisk (*), a period, and the three-character extension. For example, if you want to see all files with a .WMF extension in a directory, type "*.WMF".

Files of Type

Select the type of file you want to open:

(*.PDB) - for Projects and baselines.

(*.MPX) - to open or merge an MPX file.

or save:

(*.PDB) - for Projects

(*.WMF) - for graphic output

(*.TXT) - for text reports

(*.WKS) - for WKS export.

(*.MPX) - to save a project in the MPX format


Link Selector

This Selector is presented when you click on a link position to select a link and more than one link starts or ends at that point. Through this Selector you can choose which link you wish to select.

The chart, bar and segment title and the time unit and date of the other end of each link are shown. If the link is a X-chart link, the chart title is different from the chart you are working on. For a local link, it is the same. The Selector shows local links listed first, followed by any X-chart links.

Use the spin control to move through the links until you reach the one you want to select.


Multiple Selector

This Selector presents a list of available items. You can choose several items from the list.

Click to select a single item from the list.

SHIFT-click on an item to extend the selection of an item. This works if you already have at least one item selected. The selection is extended from the item already selected to the item just selected using SHIFT-click (including all the items in between these two selections).

CTRL-click to select multiple items that are scattered throughout the list.

Drag to select continguous items in the list.

When all the items you require are highlighted, click on OK.

When the list is long, scroll the list down to see all the contents.

Multiple selection using the keyboard

To select items using the keyboard, press SHIFT F8 and use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to move the dotted selection box to the item you want to select.

Use SPACEBAR to toggle the selection state of an item.

Use SHIFT SPACEBAR to extend the selection of an item

Use CTRL SPACEBAR to select items scattered throughout the list.


Name Selector

This Selector allows you to enter a name for an item to add to the list of existing items.

Type any name on the Selection: line. It must be at least 1 character and cannot be the same as any existing item in the list.

The item is always referred to by this name throughout the rest of the project.


Single Selector

This Selector presents a list of available items. You can only choose one item from the list.

To select an item from this list do either of the following:

Click on the item to highlight it and click on OK.

Double-click on the item.

You will be returned to where you called the Selector from with the item you required.

When the list is long, scroll the list down to see all the contents.


Font Selector

The Font Selector is displayed whenever you wish to change the font appearance of:

A text annotation, via the Font button on the Text Details dialog.

All bar charts and histograms.

The Chart Selector.

The Chart Manager.

The printer font used to print text reports, via the Font button on the Output Destination dialog.

You can also use the [image] [image] [image] buttons on the toolbar to change the font style of any selected text annotations.

To choose a new font:

1	Choose a Font from the scrollable list.

2	Choose a Font Style from the scrollable list.

3	Choose a Font Size from the scrollable list.

The font appearance is illustrated in the Sample panel.

Refer to your Microsoft Windows documentation for details of installing fonts for use in Windows.


Shortcuts

PowerProject has several shortcuts which allow you to activate features without selecting a menu command or clicking on a button. There are also toolbar buttons to speed up some features. As you become familiar with PowerProject, you will find that using the shortcuts means that you can work more quickly.

This section summarises the shortcuts available in PowerProject.

Window features	- about closing windows and scrolling.
Double-clicking	- to open charts and make quicker choices.
CTRL-drag	- to copy a bar or annotation.
SHIFT-drag	- to move a bar or group of bars.
DEL key	- to delete selected items.
INS key	- to insert a bar.
ESC key	- to re-draw the screen.
F1 key	- to open Help.
SHIFT F1	- to open Help using the help pointer.
F9 key	- presents token list for a text annotation.
SHIFT-click	- to select a bar.
CTRL-click	- to move a selected segment via the status line.
CTRL SHIFT-click	- to select a group of bars.
CTRL -	- to toggle the ruling lines on a chart or histogram on and off.
CTRL+ letter	- to turn various attributes of one chart or histogram on and off.
CTRL SHIFT+ letter	- to turn various attributes of all open charts or histograms on and off.
ALT-click	- to display the Segment tab on the Details dialog.
ALT+ letter	- to choose a menu command or dialog option.
ALT-drag	- to move an attached annotation.


Window features

Double-clicking on a window Close button [image] saves and closes the current window - PowerProject bar chart or histogram. If information has been changed, you are asked whether to save or not.

If the chart has an owning chart, then the step up button [image] is displayed in the window title bar. Clicking on the step up button is similar to the window Close button, in that the information is saved, but the current chart is replaced by the parent chart in the same window. This is a quick way to step up the tree of charts.

Pressing the ENTER key, when using the bar chart, is the same as clicking on the down arrow of the window. It scrolls the chart window by one bar line.

The following shortcuts enable you to scroll around the PowerProject window without having to use the mouse.

PGUP scrolls the chart window up by one screen

PGDN scrolls the chart window down by one screen

CTRL PGUP scrolls to the first bar in the chart

CTRL PGDN scrolls to the last bar in the chart

HOME scrolls the window horizontally to bring the project start date into view

END scrolls the window horizontally to bring the project end date into view

CTRL HOME scrolls to the first bar on the chart at the project start date

CTRL END scrolls to the last bar on the chart at the project end date

The UP arrow scrolls up one bar

The DOWN arrow scrolls down one bar

The LEFT arrow scrolls the window 2cms left

The RIGHT arrow scrolls the window 2cms right

CTRL + the LEFT arrow scrolls the window left by one screen

CTRL + the RIGHT arrow scrolls the window right by one screen

ALT + UP arrow/ALT + LEFT arrow scolls the window up one bar and 2cms left

ALT + DOWN arrow/ALT + RIGHT arrow scrolls the window down one bar and 2cms right


Double-clicking

Double-clicking is when you click the left mouse button twice in quick succession.

Double-click on Selectors to choose a single item. The first click selects an item, and the second confirms your choice by OK. When there is a choice of actions, double-clicking is the same as choosing the Edit action.

Double-clicking on a segment on a chart is a quick way to expand bars into further subordinate, child charts to step down the tree of charts. This is equivalent to clicking on a segment - to select it, and choosing the Task - Expand. Double-clicking on a summary bar expands and collapses it.

Double-click an item on dialogs when you need to select a single option. This is the same as choosing an option, by a click - to select, and OK - to confirm your choice and leave the dialog.

Double-click on the window Close button to save any changes and close the active window.

Double-click on the Auto Update indicator in the top left corner of a histogram to turn the Auto Update link on and off.


CTRL-drag

CTRL-drag is when you hold down the CTRL key and at the same time press the left mouse button and move the pointer.

CTRL-drag on charts is the shortcut for selecting a bar (using CTRL - click) and then CTRL-dragging it to copy the bar. You can also use CTRL-drag to copy annotations.


SHIFT-drag

SHIFT-drag is when you hold down the SHIFT key and at the same time press the left mouse button while moving the pointer.

SHIFT-drag on charts is the shortcut for selecting a bar (using SHIFT-click) and then SHIFT-drag it to move the bar.


CTRL-click

CTRL-click is when you hold down the CTRL key and at the same time click the left mouse button, the screen display of the chart is affected.

CTRL-click on bars and segments on the bar chart to select more than one bar or segment.

CTRL-click on the Start or End panel arrows of the status line to move any selected segment one current time unit left or right.

CTRL-click on selectors that allow you to select more than one item to select items that are scattered throughout the list.


SHIFT-click

SHIFT-click is when you hold down the SHIFT key and at the same time click the left mouse button, the screen display of the chart is affected.

The SHIFT-click shortcut works on the bar chart and on the status line.

SHIFT-click on a segment, or bar title, on the bar chart to select a whole bar.

SHIFT-click on the Title panel of the status line, with a segment selected, to select a bar.

SHIFT-click on selectors that allow you to select more than one item to select items that appear in consecutive order in the list.


Delete [DEL] key

Pressing the DEL key with items selected has the same effect as choosing the Edit - Delete menu command from the chart.


Insert [INS] key

Pressing the INS key with items selected has the same effect as choosing the Edit - Insert menu command from the chart.


Escape [ESC] key

Pressing the ESC key has the effect of refreshing or re-drawing the entire screen.


F1 key

Press F1 when a window is open to start the Help. When a dialog is open and you press F1, the Help displays information about the open dialog.

You can search the Help to look up particular subjects, and move around the Help to jump to related topics. Select Using Help from the Help menu for more information about how to use the Help.


SHIFT F1

Pressing SHIFT F1 or clicking [image] when a window is open, turns the cursor into the Help pointer [image]. With the Help pointer you can click on any menu command, or part of the active window to get Help about the item under the pointer.

If you click on a segment, a popup box will appear displaying information about the segment you clicked on. Press ESC or click on an empty area of the bar chart to clear the Help pointer and close the popup box.


CTRL -

Press CTRL - to toggle the display of chart ruling lines and/or histogram ruling lines on and off.


CTRL+letter

CTRL+letter shortcut is when you hold down the CTRL key and at the same time press a letter on the keyboard (for example CTRL S) at the same time, the screen display of the active chart and/or active histogram is affected.

This is the same as choosing one of the options on the Appearance or Display tabs on the Customise Barchart View dialog.

Some of the shortcuts, such as the date zone shortcuts apply to charts and histograms. Using shortcuts that apply to histograms is the same as choosing one or more choices from the Display tab on the Customise Histogram View dialog.

The CTRL+letter shortcuts alternate, or toggle, between On and Off. If an attribute is On and you choose a shortcut, it is turned Off. If the attribute is Off, it is turned On.

The following are the shortcuts to affect the chart and/or histogram display:

Key	Action
CTRL A	switches between all four code libraries (Bar and Segment) for selection of bar and segment appearance.
CTRL B	Bar Titles panel.
CTRL C	critical segment and link.
CTRL D	Date Zone days line on charts and histograms.
CTRL E	segment title.
CTRL F	free float.
CTRL G	chart grids and/or histogram grids. .
CTRL H	switches between the two different holiday types and all holidays off.
CTRL I	title column numbers left.
CTRL J	title column numbers right.
CTRL K	bar numbers left.
CTRL L	local links.
CTRL M	Date Zone months line on charts and histograms.
CTRL N	number subheadings.
CTRL O	overtime display (colour only).
CTRL P	progress marking for segments and Chart report date line.
CTRL R	reflected link.
CTRL S	Start Flag.
CTRL T	total float.
CTRL U	Date Zone units line on charts and histograms.
CTRL V	Annotations on charts and histograms.
CTRL W	weekends.
CTRL X	X-chart link.
CTRL Y	Date Zone year line on charts and histograms.
CTRL Z	bar numbers right


CTRL SHIFT+letter

CTRL SHIFT+letter is when the CTRL key and the SHIFT keys are pressed at the same time, and the next action is to press a letter on the keyboard, at the same time, the screen display of all open PowerProject windows are affected.

The difference between CTRL+ letter and CTRL SHIFT+letter is that more than one window display is affected.


CTRL SHIFT-click

CTRL SHIFT-click is when the CTRL key and the SHIFT keys are pressed at the same time, and the next action is to click the left mouse button all at the same time, the screen display of the chart is affected.

The additional CTRL extends the selection state of the SHIFT-click, to allow more than one bar to be selected at once.


ALT-click

ALT-click is when you hold down the ALT key and click the left mouse button at the same time, and the pointer is on segment the Segment tab on the Details dialog is presented.

The ALT-click shortcut works on the bar chart and on the status line.

ALT-click on a segment on the chart to reach the Segment tab on the Details dialog.

ALT-click on the Title panel of the status line, with a segment selected, to reach the Segment tab on the Details dialog.


ALT+letter

On menu commands and dialogs there is one letter of a word underlined. The ALT key used in conjunction with the underlined letter has the same effect as clicking on the option/button/field with the mouse pointer.

This shortcut is particularly useful when editing dialogs to keep both hands on the keyboard and not have to reach for the mouse in the middle of typing.


F2 key

Pressing the F2 key on the bar chart or histogram will double the current chart scale or current histogram scale.

Inactive when at the largest scale.


F3 key

Pressing the F3 key on the bar chart will halve the current chart scale or the current histogram scale.

Inactive when at the smallest scale.


Column tab on Customise Barchart View dialog

This tab is available when you select Chart - Customise. You can use the options on this tab to set up and edit the layout of the column sheet in the active window.

You add a column to the layout by selecting the token that you want to be displayed in a new column. You can also remove existing columns or change their attributes.

To edit an existing column, click on it in the Column Layout list box before changing the settings on this tab.

Type

Select Bar or Segment depending on whether you want the column to display information about whole bars or individual segments.

Category

The tokens you can display in a column are grouped into the four categories listed in this box. Click on the category which contains the token you want to use. The tokens available in the selected category are then shown in the scroll box above the left and right arrow buttons.

Token list box

A scrollable list box contains all the available tokens in the selected category. To select a token, scroll through the list available then click on the one you want.

For more information about any of the tokens available, click on a topic below:

Bar Tokens

Bar Fixed Cost Tokens

Bar Permanent Resource Tokens

Bar Consumable Resource Tokens

Segment Tokens

Segment Fixed Cost Tokens

Segment Permanent Resource Tokens

Segment Consumable Resource Tokens

Detail

The options in the Detail group box let you choose which project, baseline, resource or cost centre the selected token should refer to. The drop-down list boxes available will vary depending on which token you have selected.

To select a project, baseline, resource or cost centre, drop down the appropriate list box and select the item that you want.

->

Click on the -> button to add the selected token to the Current Layout box which lists the columns that are currently set up. The token will be added to the bottom of the list unless an existing token in the Current Layout box was already selected, in which case the new token will be inserted above the selected token. (To deselect a token in the Current Layout box, CTRL-click on it.)

Each line in the Current Layout box represents a separate column. The token name is followed by the column heading which is displayed in single quotation marks.

<-

To remove a column from the current layout, select the appropriate token in the Current Layout box, then click on <-. To remove several columns, repeat this procedure for each.

Current Layout

This list box shows the columns that are set up for the current column layout.

Column Attributes

This button is enabled when you select a token in the Current Layout box. Click on the Column Attributes button to change features of the column such as its title, width and alignment. The Column Attributes dialog appears.

Cut, Copy, Paste

Use these buttons to change the order of columns in the Current Layout list box, or to copy and paste columns from one column sheet to another. CTRL click on the columns that you want to cut or copy from the Current Layout list box, then click on Cut or Copy as appropriate.

To paste the columns back into the Current Layout list box, click on Paste. The columns will be added to the bottom of the list unless an existing column in the Current Layout box was already selected, in which case the columns will be inserted above the selected column.

Column Layout Options

Clicking on this button opens the Column Layout Options dialog which provides options for you to change the way the columns are displayed and printed.

Note: To save the layout of the column sheet in the active window, use the Chart - Column Layout Manager menu command.


Column tab on Details dialog

This tab is available when one or more columns are selected on the column sheet when you choose the Edit - Details command.

It lets you change the information displayed in the selected column, and attributes of the column such as its alignment and width, and lets you add blank columns to the left or right of the current column.

Token

This box displays the name of the token displayed in the selected column. It is for information only and cannot be edited.

Title

This box shows the column's title. You can change the title by editing it in this box.

Type

Bar or Segment will already be selected depending on whether the column is displaying information about whole bars or individual segments. You can select the other option if you want to change what is displayed in the column.

Category

This box lists the four categories of tokens that are available. One category will already be selected but you can select a different category if you want to change what is displayed in the column. The tokens available in the selected category are shown in the scroll box on the right of this tab.

Token list box

A scrollable list box contains all the available tokens in the selected category. The token currently displayed in the column will be selected. You can select a different token if you want to change the information displayed in the column.

For more information about any of the tokens available, click on a topic below:

Bar Tokens

Bar Fixed Cost Tokens

Bar Permanent Resource Tokens

Bar Consumable Resource Tokens

Segment Tokens

Segment Fixed Cost Tokens

Segment Permanent Resource Tokens

Segment Consumable Resource Tokens

Detail

The options in the Detail group box let you choose which project, baseline, resource or cost centre the selected token refers to. The drop-down list boxes available will vary depending on which token you have selected.

You can change your selection by dropping down the appropriate list box and selecting the item that you want.

Insert Blank Before/Insert Blank After

Click on these buttons to insert a blank column before or after the current column. You can then use the Next and Previous buttons to move to the new blank columns and set up their details.

Column Attributes

Click on the Column Attributes button to change features of the column such as its title, width and alignment. The Column Attributes dialog appears.

Previous/Next

When more than one column is selected, use the Next and Previous buttons to move through the columns, making any changes you need.


Column Attributes dialog

This dialog appears when you click on the Column Attributes button on the Column tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog or the Column tab of the Details dialog. It provides options letting you change the display of the column that you are setting up.

Token

This box displays the name of the token displayed in the selected column. It is for information only and cannot be edited.

Title

This box shows the column's title. You can change the title by editing it in this box. The column title can be up to 63 characters long.

Layout

This group box provides options to change the formatting of the column.

Drop down the Alignment list box to select the alignment option that you want.

In the Width box, enter the width for the column. (You can also change column widths directly on the column sheet - see Changing the width of columns.)

Style & Colour

This group box lets you choose the colour and style in which you want information in the column to be displayed. Click on the colour you want, and check the boxes of any styles you want to apply. The colour and style you choose is previewed in the sample panel.

Segment

This group box is enabled when you have selected Segment in the Type group box on the Column tab of the Details dialog or on the Column tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog. The options in this box let you choose whether the information displayed in the column refers to selected segments, all the segments on every bar, or a specific segment on every bar.

Select Selected or All if you want the column to display information only about segments that are selected on each bar. If no segments are selected, information about all the segments on a bar will be shown in the column. The segment details will be separated by commas in the column.

Select All if you want the column to display information about all the segments on each bar. The segment details will be separated by commas in the column.

Select Specific and enter the segment number if you want the column to only display information about a specific segment on each bar.

Display

This group box contains options that affect how information is displayed in the column. The options that are available will vary depending on which token is selected.

Check the Use Bar Title Style box if you want the information to be displayed in the same colour and style that is used for the bar title.

Check the None for Subheadings box if you do not want column data to be displayed for empty lines and subheadings.

Check the Print at Screen Width box if you want the column to be printed at the width shown on screen rather than at its ‘best fit width’. If this option is disabled, the column will be printed at its screen width by default.

Check the Round to Nearest box if you want numbers to be rounded up or down to the nearest whole number. Clear this box if you want numbers to be calculated up to two decimal places.This option is only available when the selected column contains cost or resource information.

Check the Ignore Zeros box if you do not want values of zero to be displayed in cells.

Check the Ignore System Calendar box if you to not want the System calendar to be displayed in any cells showing the calendar name.

Check the Ignore Default Libraries box if you do not want the Default bar and segment codes to be displayed in cells showing code names.

OK/Cancel

Click on OK to save your changes; click on Cancel to abandon them.


Column Layout Options dialog

This dialog appears when you click the Column Layout Options button on the Column tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog. The options on this dialog let you control how the column sheet in the active chart window is displayed and printed.

3D Effect

Check the Screen box if you want the column sheet in the active chart window to be displayed in 3D. Clear this box if you prefer the column sheet to be shown in 2D.

Check the Output box if you want the column sheet in the active window to be output in 3D. Clear this box if you prefer the column sheet to be output in 2D.

Text Point Sizes

Enter the point sizes that you want column text to be on both Screen and Output. You must enter values between 1 and 72 points.

Printing

Select Displayed Columns if you want the columns that are in view on screen to be printed.

Select All Columns if you want all the columns in the sheet to be printed.

Check the Column Widths Print At Best Fit box if you want column widths to be adjusted to best fit the column data. Checking this box only affects column widths on printing; column widths on screen remain unchanged. If you check this option, you can still specify that individual columns are printed at their width shown on screen using the Print at Screen Width option on the Column Attributes dialog.

OK/Cancel

Click on OK to save your changes; click on Cancel to abandon them.


Column Layout Manager

This dialog appears when you select the Chart - Column Layout Manager menu command. The options on this dialog let you save and delete column layouts, and change the column layout that is assigned to the active chart.

Current Layout

Enter a name for the column layout that you have set up, then click on Save As to save it. If you do not save the layout, it will not be available when you next open this project.

Available Layouts

The column layouts that you have already set up and saved within this project are listed in the Available Layouts box.

To assign a different column layout to the active chart, drop down the Available Layouts list box and select the layout you want to use then click on Apply. The selected layout is applied immediately to the active chart.

To delete a column layout, select it from the Available Layouts drop-down list box then click on Delete. If you delete a column layout which is assigned to open charts, a message appears warning you that charts displaying the column layout will revert to the default column layout if you continue.

Close

Click on Close to close the Column Layout Manager.


Working with the column sheet

The column sheet can be turned on or off. When the column sheet is displayed, the left side of the chart window takes on a spreadsheet-like appearance.

At the far left of the chart window is the bar numbers column. To the right of the bar numbers column are the columns that you can set up individually for each chart. Above the columns are the column headings.

The arrangement of columns that you set up can be saved as a column layout. You can add and remove columns, change the information in the columns, change the width of each column and change the area occupied by the whole column sheet. When you first display the column sheet for a chart, the default column layout will be displayed.

Click on a topic below for more information about using column layouts.

Displaying the column sheet

Adding columns

Removing columns

Changing the information in a column

Changing the width of columns

Changing the width of the column sheet

Copying and moving columns

Multi editing columns

Saving and deleting column layouts

Choosing how the column sheet is displayed and printed

Editing data in columns


Displaying the column sheet

You can choose to work with or without the column sheet. When the column sheet is off, you can work with the bar titles panel. To turn the column sheet on and off:

1	Select Chart - Customise then click on the Display tab on the Customise Barchart View dialog

2	In the Miscellanous group box, check the Column sheet box to turn the column sheet on, or clear the Column sheet box to turn it off.

3	Click on OK to close the Customise Barchart View dialog, saving your changes.

The active chart window will be redrawn with or without the column sheet.

You can also toggle between displaying the column sheet or the bar titles panel by pressing F4 or by clicking on the [image] button.

When you first turn the column sheet on for a chart, the default column layout will be displayed. You can easily add and delete columns and change the information displayed in them.

If you have already set up and saved several column layouts in a project, you can choose which layout to display in the active chart:

1	Select Chart - Column Layout Manager to display the Column Layout Manager.

2	Drop down the Available Layouts list box and select the column layout that you want.

3	Click on Apply. The chart window is redrawn with the chosen column layout.

4	Click on Close to close the Column Layout Manager.

You can apply different column layouts to the active chart as often as you wish.

See also

Adding columns

Removing columns

Changing the information in a column


Adding columns

To add a column to the column layout of the active chart:

1	Select Chart - Customise then click on the Column tab to bring it to the front of the Customise Barchart View dialog.

2	Select the token that you want to be displayed in the new column.

3	To add the new column to the end of the sheet, ensure that no columns are selected in the Current Layout list box then click on ->. (The Current Layout list displays all the columns in the current column layout.)

To add the new column between two existing columns, from the Current Layout list box, select the column that you want to appear after the new column, then click on ->.

When the new column is listed in the Current Layout box, you can change attributes of the column by selecting it in the Current Layout box then clicking on the Column Attributes button. The Column Attributes dialog appears, presenting you with various options.

4	You can continue to add more columns by selecting the tokens you want to display and clicking on the -> button.

5	When you have added all the columns you want, close the Customise Barchart View dialog by clicking on OK to save you changes. To abandon your changes, click on Cancel.

Your chart window will be redrawn with your new columns. The information displayed in each column can be changed at any time.

You can also add columns by doing any of the following:

right-click on a column heading and select Insert Blank from the popup menu that appears. A blank column is then inserted in front of the selected column.

click on a column heading to select the column, then press INS. A blank column is inserted in front of the selected column.

display the Column tab on the Details dialog for a selected column, then use the Insert Blank Before/Insert Blank After buttons to insert blank columns before or after the selected column.

Once you have inserted blank columns into the column sheet, you can select a blank column then use the [image] button to set up the information that you want to display in the column.

You can save the column layout so that it can be applied to other charts in the same project, and you can set up several different layouts for each chart with each layout displaying different information.

See also

Changing the information in a column

Removing columns

Saving and deleting column layouts


Removing columns

To remove a column from the column layout of the active chart:

1	Select Chart - Customise then click on the Column tab to bring it to the front of the Customise Barchart View dialog.

2	From the Current Layout list box, select the column that you want to remove.

3	Click on <-. The column is removed from the Current Layout list box. You can continue to remove more columns by selecting them in the Current Layout box and clicking on the <- button.

4	Close the Customise Barchart View dialog by clicking on OK to save you changes. To abandon your changes, click on Cancel.

The column sheet alongside the active chart will be redrawn without the columns that you have removed.

You can also remove columns by doing any of the following:

right-click on a column heading and select Delete from the popup menu that appears.

click on a column heading to select the column, then press DEL.

click on a column heading to select the column, then select Delete from the Edit menu.

See also

Saving and deleting column layouts


Changing the information in a column

You can change the information displayed in each column, and some attributes of the column.

To change a column:

1	Right-click on the heading of the column that you want to change, then select Details from the popup menu that appears. The Column tab on the Details dialog appears.

2	Select the token that you want to be displayed in the column.

3	Click on the Column Attributes button to change attributes including the column's title, alignment, width, display options and segment options. The Column Attributes dialog appears for you to make your changes.

4	Close the Details dialog by clicking on OK to save your changes to the column.

The column will be redrawn, reflecting the changes you have made. Save the column layout if you want it to be available in the future.

To edit a column's attributes without displaying the Details dialog, right-click on the column's heading then select Attributes from the popup menu that appears. The Column Attributes dialog is displayed for you to make any changes you want.

You can use the [image] [image] [image] buttons to change the style of text displayed in a column. Select a column, then click on the button of the style that you want to apply.

See also

Saving and deleting column layouts


Changing the width of columns

There are several ways to change the width of a column:

drag the right-hand edge of the column heading so that you can see the column width as it changes. Release the mouse button when the column is the width that you want.

display the Column Attributes dialog and enter a specific column width in the Width box.

right-click on the column heading and select Make Best Fit from the popup menu that appears. The column is resized so that it is wide enough to display all its information.

double-click on the right-hand edge of the column heading. This is a shortcut for selecting Make Best Fit as explained in the point above.

You can also change the width of the whole column sheet.

See also

Changing the width of the column sheet


Changing the width of the column sheet

You can change the width of the whole column sheet, making it occupy more or less space in the chart window.

There are two ways to change the width of the column sheet:

by dragging the divider bar (which separates the bar chart from the column sheet) in the column heading area. Using this method you can change the width to whatever size you want.

by dragging the divider bar in the main column area. Using this method, the width of the sheet snaps to column edges.

When you save a column layout, the width of the sheet is saved within the layout.

See also

Saving and deleting column layouts


Copying and moving columns

The easiest way to move or copy a single column within a column sheet is to drag it.

To move a column from one position to another:

Click and hold down the mouse pointer on the column heading. After a few moments the pointer changes to [image]. When the cursor changes to this shape, drag the column left or right along the column sheet and release it when it is at the position you want it.

To copy a column within a column sheet:

Hold down CTRL and click on the column heading. When the pointer changes to [image], release CTRL and drag the column along the column sheet until it is at the position you want, then release.

If you want to move or copy columns from one column sheet to another, you will need to use the Cut, Copy and Paste commands as explained below. Similarly, if you want to move or copy more than one column, you will need to use Cut, Copy and Paste.

Cutting, copying, pasting and deleting columns

You can cut, copy and delete individual columns by right-clicking on the column heading and selecting the command you want. If you want to cut, copy, or delete more than one column, select the columns then use the appropriate command in the Edit menu.

When you have cut or copied columns to the Clipboard, you can paste them into the column sheet in the active window by right-clicking on a column and selecting Paste from the popup menu that appears. The columns will be inserted in front of the selected column. If you want to add the columns to the end of the column sheet, ensure that no columns are selected then use the Paste command in the Edit menu.

Once you have cut or copied columns to the Clipboard, you can paste them into another program such as Notepad or Microsoft Excel. This is useful for transferring columns of data from PowerProject to other programs.


Multi editing columns

When you want to make the same change to a number of columns, for example change their alignment, width or colour, you can multi edit the columns to make all the changes at once.

To multi edit a number of columns:

1	CTRL click on the headings of the columns that you want to edit. To select a group of adjacent columns, you can drag the pointer across the column headings.

2	With the columns selected, select Multi Edit from the Edit menu. The Multiple Column Edit dialog appears.

As you select items on the dialog, the check boxes are marked to show your choices. To cancel a choice, clear its corresponding check box.

3	When you have made your selections, click on OK to confirm them or Cancel to abandon them.


Multiple Column Edit dialog

This dialog appears when you have selected one or more columns on the column sheet, then selected the Edit - Multi Edit menu command. Use this dialog when you want to make the same changes to a number of columns.

Title

In the Title box you can enter a heading that you want to apply to each selected column. For example, you could enter any text that has to appear in each column heading, then later edit the columns individually to add the remaining text.

You can use the +, - and = characters to add, remove and replace strings in column headings in the same way that you can multi edit bar titles.

Style Control

To make the columns take the colour and style of the bar titles, select Use Bar Title Style. Select Use Column Style if you want the columns to take the colour and style that you have set up for each column.

Column Style

You can override the colour and style of the individual columns by clicking on the Column Style button. Choose the colour and text styles that you want to apply to all the selected columns.

Alignment

Drop down the Alignment list box and choose the alignment that you want to apply to all the selected columns.

Width

In the Width box, enter the width that you want all the selected columns to be.

Segment

If any of the selected columns display segment information rather than information about whole bars, you can choose whether those columns display information on selected segments, all the segments or specific segments on each bar.

Select Selected or All if you want the columns to display information about segments that you select on the bar chart. If no segments are selected on a bar, the columns will display information about all the segments on that bar.

Select All if you want the columns to display information about all the segments on each bar of the chart. The segment details will be separated by commas.

Select Specific if you want the columns to display information about a specific segment on each bar. Enter the segment number in the box that becomes available.

Rounding

Select Round to Nearest if you want numbers to be rounded up or down to the nearest whole number. If you select No Rounding, numbers will be calculated up to two decimal points. This option only applies to columns containing resource or cost information.

Suppression

Select Ignore Defaults if you do not want default values (such as the default calendar and default bar or segment codes) to be displayed in any of the selected columns. Select Display Defaults if you want default values to be displayed.

Printing Width

Select Best Fit Width if you want the widths of all the selected columns to be adjusted to the best width for the column data for printing and previewing. The column headings will wrap around to fit into the new column width. Select Screen Width if you want the columns to be printed with the widths that are displayed on screen.

Subheadings

If you want the selected columns to display information for empty bars and subheadings, select Display Contents. If you do not want the columns to display information for empty bars and subheadings, select Hide Contents.

Prj/Baseline

To change the project or baseline to which tokens in the columns refer, drop down the Prj/Baseline list box and select the project or baseline that you want. (You can only select baselines that are open in the current project.)

OK/Cancel

Click on OK to confirm your changes. To abandon your changes, click on Cancel.


Saving & deleting column layouts

You can save the column layouts that you set up. This lets you create a number of column layouts for a chart with each layout containing different information. You can change the layout assigned to a chart as often as you want. You can also create a column layout for one chart then use it with another chart in the same project.

To save the column layout of the active chart:

1	Select Chart - Column Layout Manager to display the Column Layout Manager.

2	Enter a name for the layout in the Current Layout box, then click on Save As. The column layout is added to the list in the Available Layouts list box.

3	Click on Close to close the Column Layout Manager.

If you make changes to the column layout, you should save it again if you want the changes to be permanent.

To delete a column layout:

1	Select Chart - Column Layout Manager to display the Column Layout Manager.

2	Drop down the Available Layouts list box and select the one that you want to delete.

3	Click on Delete. The column layout is removed from the list of Available Layouts.

If you delete a column layout which is assigned to open charts, when you click on Delete a message appears warning you that charts displaying the column layout will revert to the default column layout if you continue.

4	Click on Close to close the Column Layout Manager.

Column layouts are saved within a project, so the layouts you create in one project will not be available in another unless you set them up again, copy columns from a chart in one project to a chart in another, or set up the column layouts in the template project.


Choosing how the column sheet is displayed and printed

You can control how the column sheet is displayed and which columns are printed when you print the chart. To choose how the column sheet is displayed and printed:

1	Select Chart - Customise and click on the Column tab, then click on the Column Layout Options button to display the Column Layout Options dialog.

2	From the 3D Effect group box, check the Screen box to display the column sheet in 3D and check the Output box to output the column sheet in 3D. Clear these boxes if you want the column sheet to be displayed and printed in 2D.

3	In the Text Point Sizes group box, enter the point sizes that you want column text to be on both Screen and Output. You must enter values between 1 and 72 points.

4	Choose whether you want only the columns visible in the chart window to be printed, or all the columns in the column sheet.

5	Check the Column Widths Print At Best Fit box if you want column widths to be adjusted to best fit the column data. Checking this box only affects column widths on printing; column widths on screen remain unchanged. If you check this option, you can still specify that individual columns are printed at their width shown on screen (using the Column Attributes dialog).

6	Click on OK to close the dialog, saving your changes. To abandon your changes, click on Cancel.


Editing data in columns

You can click on individual cells in a column to select them. The contents of most cells cannot be edited but you can edit cells in columns that display:

bar titles

segment titles

Work Breakdown Numbering (WBN) codes

user text strings and user numbers.

To edit the contents of a cell, click on the cell to select it then make the edits you want. When you have finished editing, press ENTER to confirm the edits and select the cell below for editing, or click on the bar chart to deselect the cell and finish editing.

If you edit a cell containing information that is displayed on the bar chart as an annotation token (e.g. a bar title), the annotation is updated to reflect your edits.

When a cell is selected, you can move up and down the cells in that column by pressing the up and down arrow keys. To move left and right into the adjacent columns, press CTRL <- and CTRL ->.

When editing cells containing segment information, if there is more than one segment on the bar, a vertical scroll bar appears at the right-hand end of the cell and the number of the current segment is shown, e.g. 1:. Move through the segments one at a time by clicking on the down arrow of the scroll bar or by pressing PGDN when the cell is selected. To move back to earlier segments on the bar, click the up arrow on the scroll bar or press PGUP.

If you edit a cell containing information that is displayed on the bar chart as an annotation token, the annotation is updated to reflect your edits.

Editing bar titles

When you click on a cell containing a bar title, you can edit the bar title directly on screen. If you want to change the title’s style and colour, right-click on the unselected cell to display the Bar Title dialog. Make your edits on the dialog then click on OK to confirm and return to the bar chart. If you right-click on a selected cell, a standard Windows 95 popup menu appears enabling you to cut, copy or paste the contents of the cell.

Editing WBN codes

If you edit the WBN code of a bar, you may want to ensure that the WBN code is not renumbered if you later renumber the work breakdown. You do this using the Don’t Renumber option on the Bar tab of the Details dialog.

Editing user text and user numbers

You can enter various strings of text and digits that you want to associate with bars and segments. To enter user text and user numbers, display the appropriate token in a column then enter the information you want toassociate with each bar or segment. The user text and number tokens available are listed below.

Token	Maximum Number of Characters	Notes
Bar User Text1	40
Bar User Text2	20
Bar User Real Number		This can be a decimal number.
Segment User Text1	12	You can also enter this string on the Segment tab of the Details dialog.
Segment User Text2	16
Segment User Num1	11	You can also enter this string on the Segment tab of the Details dialog.
Segment User Num2	11	You can also enter this string on the Segment tab of the Details dialog.
Segment User Real Number		This can be a decimal number.
Segment Permanent Resource Allocation User Text Resource name	20	The selected resource must be assigned to the segment before you can enter this user text on the column sheet.
Segment Consumable Resource Allocation User Text Resource name	20	The selected resource must be assigned to the segment before you can enter this user text on the column sheet.
Segment Fixed Cost Allocation User Text Cost Centre name	20	A fixed cost from the selected cost centre must be assigned to the segment before you can enter this user text on the column sheet.
User text and user numbers can be displayed in annotation tokens and can be selected for text reports.


Make Best Fit shortcut

This command is available when you right-click on a column heading. Select this command to adjust the column's width so that all the information in the column can be viewed.

Column titles may wrap round when you use this command.

See Changing the width of columns for information about other ways to adjust the width of columns.


Column Attributes shortcut

This command is available when you right-click on a column heading. Select this command to change attributes of the column such as its title, width, alignment and colour.

The Column Attributes dialog appears when you select this command.


Column sheet settings for PPROJECT.INI

There are some settings that you can add to your PPROJECT.INI file to control the way that the column sheet works in certain situations. These settings are explained below.

Always make a backup copy of PPROJECT.INI before editing it. PPROJECT.INI should be edited in a text editing program such as Notepad, and should be saved as plain text.

SpreadsheetBarchartDividerSmooth

This can be set to 0 or 1. (It is set to 1 by default.) This command controls how the column sheet is updated when you adjust its width using the divider bar. Set this command to 1 if you want the column sheet to be redrawn dynamically as you adjust its width. Set this command to 0 if you do not want the column sheet to be redrawn until you stop dragging the divider bar. If you computer is slow, you may prefer to have this command set to 0.

SpreadsheetColumnSizeSmooth

This can be set to 0 or 1. (It is set to 1 by default.) This command controls how columns are updated when you adjust their width by dragging. Set this command to 1 if you want columns to be redrawn dynamically as you adjust their width. Set this command to 0 if you do not want columns to be redrawn until you stop dragging. If you computer is slow, you may prefer to have this command set to 0.

SpreadsheetIncomePrefix

This can be set to any character but the default is - (the minus symbol). This command specifies the character than prefixes any negative cost (i.e. income).

ExportMorningStart	(defaults to 0900)

ExportMorning Finish	(defaults to 1230)

ExportAfternoonStart	(defaults to 1330)

ExportAfternoonFinish	(defaults to 1730)

These commands set the times used when copying information from date fields in the column sheet to the Clipboard in BIFF format (MS Excel format). If your working hours differ from the default, change the time parameters in these command lines. Enter times according to the 24 hour clock, and do not use any characters (e.g. colons) to separate the digits.


Text reports

Text reports contain information from bar charts or histograms in a textual format. PowerProject allows you to create text reports based on:

Bars and segments from the Bar Report dialog.

Local and X-chart links from the Link Report dialog.

Charts from the Chart Report dialog.

Histograms from the Histogram Report dialog.

You specify which information you want to include in a text report by selecting tokens, which represent information displayed on bar charts and histograms.

When you have selected the information you want to include in a text report you can output it to any of the following destinations:

A printer.

The Windows Clipboard.

A text file on disk.

When you have specified the information for a bar, link or chart text report, you can execute the report immediately or you can save it for future use and edit, execute or delete the report whenever you wish from the Report Selector. You cannot save histogram text reports for future use. The scope of a histogram text report is always the currently active histogram, which is displayed as a result of executing a histogram report.

To ensure that chart and bar text reports contain the latest information, you should save the chart before executing the text report. This is because some tokens, especially those pertaining to work and progress, will only be up-to-date after the chart and its subcharts have been saved.

You can also export a text report to a file that allows for transfer to database and spreadsheet programs, so that you can import text report data created in PowerProject into such programs.

You can export information to a comma separated file which can then be imported into a database program. You can export text reports based on:

Bars and segments from the Bars To Comma Separated dialog.

Charts from the Charts To Comma Separated dialog.

Histograms from the Histograms To Comma Separated dialog.

You can also export information to a .WKS file which can then be imported into spreadsheet programs. You can export text reports based on:

Bars and segments from the Bars To Spreadsheet dialog.

Charts from the Charts To Spreadsheet dialog.

Histograms from the Histograms To Spreadsheet dialog.


Report Selector

The Report Selector allows you to create, edit, execute and delete bar, link or chart text reports.

This selector is presented when you choose any of the following menu commands:

File - Print Text - Bar Report to create a bar text report.

File - Print Text - Link Report to create a link text report.

File - Print Text - Chart Report to create a chart text report.

File - Export - Chart - Comma Separated to export a chart text report to a TXT file on disk.

File - Export - Chart - Spreadsheet to export a chart text report to a WKS file on disk.

File - Export - Bar - Comma Separated to export a bar text report to a TXT file on disk.

File - Export - Bar - Spreadsheet to export a bar text report to a WKS file on disk.

The Report Selector allows you to:

Create a new text report, by clicking on the New button to display the appropriate dialog.

Edit existing text reports, by selecting a report from the selector and clicking on the Edit button.

Execute an existing text report, by selecting a report and clicking on the Execute button.

Delete an existing text report, by selecting a report and clicking on the Delete button.

Click on the Close button to close the Report Selector.


Bar Report dialog

This dialog is presented when you choose the New or Edit buttons from the Report Selector. The Report Selector is presented when you choose the File - Print Text - Bar Report menu command. The Bar Report dialog allows you to create a text report containing information about bars and segments in a project.

Bar text reports contain information about any bars or segments in charts that fall within the scope of the text report. You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens. Tokens you can select for bar text reports include:

The title and number of bars or segments.

Various dates and durations of bars or segments, such as their start and end dates.

Any resource and cost information applied to bars or segments.

Bar text report tokens are available for bars or segments from the current project and from any baseline open within the current project.

You can create bar text reports from bar charts or filter charts. Creating a text report from a filter chart can be useful if you want to create a text report from a subset of bars or segments.

Format of bar text reports

Bar text reports are presented in a tabular format with rows and columns. Each token you select for inclusion in a text report has an associated column and each bar or segment included in the report is represented as a row.

Report name

Enter a name for the text report. You only need to enter a name for the report if you want to save it for future use.

Scope

Specify the scope of the text report, by clicking on Chart, Branch or Project.

Select a single chart, a branch of the tree of charts, or the whole project:

Chart

This means that only the bars in the current chart are included in the text report.

Branch

This means that bars in the current chart and in any of its subordinate charts are included in the text report. This option is only available if the active chart contains one or more subordinate charts.

Project

This means that all bars in the project are included in the text report.

Note: If you are creating a bar report from a filter chart, only the options Chart and Whole report are available. Chart means that bars displayed on the current filter chart are included in the bar report. Use Whole report, if all the bars in the filter cannot be displayed on a single chart.

Format

Specify how you want to format the text report. You can specify how you want chart titles, page headings, lines, durations and bar tokens to appear in the report.

Chart Titles

Choose whether to include chart titles or the whole pathname of the chart in the text report.

Insert

Check this box to include chart titles in the text report.

Whole pathname

Check this box to include the whole pathname of a chart. The whole pathname of a chart contains the path used to access a chart. For example, Office Relocation>New office refit is the whole pathname of the New office refit subordinate chart.

Page

These options allow you to specify if you want to include headings in the text report and how many lines you want to appear on a page.

Headings

Check this box to include text report headings on each page.

Lines

To specify the maximum number of lines on a page, enter a number in the Lines box or click on the box arrows. PowerProject does not let you enter a number that is smaller than the minimum number of lines required for the text report.

Durations

You can specify that you want any durations in your text report to be calculated and displayed as working or elapsed durations:

Working durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include only working periods.

Elapsed durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include weekends and holidays as well as working periods.

Report width/Printer width

The current width of the text report is displayed. The width of the report depends on how many tokens you have selected and the column width of those tokens. Each time you move a token into the Selected list, the report width changes.

The current width that can be printed on a page by your currently selected printer is displayed alongside the current report width. You should make sure that the report width does not exceed the printer width, as this means that not all of the information included in the report will be printed.

To reduce the width of a text report you can:

Change the printer font used to print the text report from the Output Destination dialog.

Remove some of the tokens from the Selected list to reduce the number of tokens and the width of the report.

Alter the column width (if permitted) of some of the tokens.

Specify a different time unit.

Time unit

Specify a different time unit if required. Time units affect the width of date and duration tokens. For example, any date tokens included in a report that has a time unit of Half days require 11 characters, as they include am or pm in the date. However, if the time unit is Days the date tokens require only 9 characters.

Tokens for Inclusion

You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens.

Available

Specify which tokens you want to include in the text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on the right arrow button to move tokens into the Selected list. If you want to see information about a particular token before including it in a text report, double-click on the token when it is in the Available list to display the Details On Token dialog.

Right Arrow Button

Click on the right arrow button to move a token you have selected from the Available list into the Selected list.

Selected

The Selected list contains all the tokens you have selected from the Available list.

When a token is displayed in the Selected list, its associated column heading is also displayed. To view or change the column headings of tokens, double-click on the token in the Selected list. The Edit Column Details dialog is presented.

To remove a token from the Selected list, select the token and click on the left arrow button.

Left Arrow Button

Click on the Left arrow button to remove a selected token from the Selected list.

For more information on using:

Baseline bar tokens, see Using baseline bar tokens.

Bar start and end date tokens, see Using bar start and end date tokens.

Resource tokens, see Using resource tokens.

Difference

You can include tokens that contain the difference between any two date or any two duration tokens in a text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on the Difference button. The Select The Order For Subtraction dialog is displayed.

Output To

You can output a text report to any of the following destinations:

A printer.

The Windows Clipboard.

A text file on disk.

You can specify any combination of these destinations when outputting a text report.

Click on the Output To button to display the Output Destination dialog.

Executing and saving bar text reports

If you want to execute the text report immediately, click on the Execute button to output the report to the output destinations selected from the Output Destination dialog.

If you want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the OK button to save the text report under the name specified in the Report name field. Once you have saved a bar text report you can edit, execute or delete it at any time from the Report Selector.

If you do not want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the Cancel button to abandon the dialog.


Using baseline tokens in bar reports

Tokens containing information about baseline bars and segments are displayed for any baseline that is open within the current project. If there are no baselines for a project, or no baselines are open, no baseline tokens are displayed.

Baseline bar and segment tokens from the same baseline are grouped together under the subheading:

Baseline <baselinetitle> bar/seg tokens

The title of the baseline displayed on a text report dialog, depends on whether you have set your preference option to refer to baselines by their filename or by their summary.

Each baseline token is prefixed by the letter "B" and a number to identify the baseline. When you include a baseline token in the text report by moving it into the Selected list, "Bn" is expanded in the column heading for the token into the name or summary of the baseline.


Using bar start and end date tokens

When you include start and end date tokens for bar text reports, PowerProject calculates and outputs the required date. The calculation of early, free and late dates depends on the selection of ASAP and ALAP for each bar, which is set on the Bar tab of the Details dialog.


Using resource tokens in bar reports

Tokens that contain resource and cost centre information appear in the Available list for any resources or cost centres in the Resource and Cost Centre libraries for that project.

The Bar Report dialog displays tokens for both fixed and variable allocations of permanent resources and for fixed or variable consumption rates of consumable resources. For example, a permanent resource may have a fixed allocation on one task and a variable allocation on another. If you include a token that is not applicable for a resource assignment, for example you include the token "Resource Allocation Average <resourcename>" for a resource that has only been assigned using a fixed allocation, PowerProject places "N/A" in the appropriate column of the text report.

Similarly, the assignment of a permanent resource may be modelled using an effort based or a work based calculation. Therefore, the Bar Report dialog displays tokens for both types of resource assignment. If you include a token that is not applicable for a resource assignment, PowerProject places "N/A" in the appropriate column of the text report.


Link Report dialog

This dialog is presented when you choose the New or Edit buttons from the Report Selector. The Report Selector is presented when you choose the File - Print Text - Link Report menu command.

The Link Report dialog allows you to create a text report that contains information about any local and X-chart links in the project. You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens. Tokens you can select for link text reports include:

The title of segments where a link starts and ends.

The titles of charts where a link starts and ends. This is useful for X-chart links.

The start and end dates of links.

Like bar text reports, link text reports are presented in a tabular format with rows and columns. Each token you select for inclusion in a link report has an associated column and each link starting from a bar or segment is represented as a row.

A segment may have one or more local and X-chart links. If a segment has more than one link, the text report outputs the links in the order in which you created them in the project.

If you include both local and X-chart links in a link report, any local links for a segment are output before X-chart links.

You can also create link reports from a filter chart. Although links between bars are not displayed on filter charts, link reports created using a filter chart contain information about links to and from the bars as they appear on the bar chart.

Report name

Enter a name for the text report. You only need to enter a name for the report if you want to save it for future use.

Scope

Specify the scope of the text report, by clicking on Chart, Branch or Project.

Select a single chart, a branch of the tree of charts, or the whole project:

Chart

This means that only the links in the current chart are included in the text report.

Branch

This means that links in the current chart and in any of its subordinate charts are included in the text report. This option is only available if the active chart contains one or more subordinate charts.

Project

This means that all links in the project are included in the text report.

Note: If you are creating a link report from a filter chart, only the options Chart and Whole report are available. Chart means that links displayed on the current filter chart are included in the bar report. Use Whole report, if all the bars (and their links) in the filter cannot be displayed on a single chart.

Format

Specify how you want to format the text report. You can specify how you want chart titles, page headings, lines and durations to appear in the report and which link types you want to include.

Chart Titles

Choose whether to include chart titles or the whole pathname of the chart in the text report.

Insert

Check this box to include chart titles in the text report.

Whole pathname

Check this box to include the whole pathname of a chart. The whole pathname of a chart contains the path used to access a chart. For example, Office Relocation>New office refit is the whole pathname of the New office refit subordinate chart.

Page

These options allow you to specify if you want to include headings in the text report and how many lines you want to appear on a page.

Headings

Check this box to include text report headings on each page.

Lines

To specify the maximum number of lines on a page, enter a number in the Lines box or click on the box arrows. PowerProject does not let you enter a number that is smaller than the minimum number of lines required for the text report.

Durations

You can specify that you want any durations in your text report to be calculated and displayed as working or elapsed durations:

Working durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include only working periods.

Elapsed durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include weekends and holidays as well as working periods.

Link Types

Specify which types of links you want to include in the report.

Local

Check this box to include local links in the text report.

X-Chart

Check this box to include X-Chart links in the text report.

Report width/Printer width

The current width of the text report is displayed. The width of the report depends on how many tokens you have selected and the column width of those tokens. Each time you move a token into the Selected list, the report width changes.

The current width that can be printed on a page by the selected printer is displayed alongside the current report width. You should make sure that the report width does not exceed the printer width, as this means that not all of the information included in the report will be printed.

To reduce the width of a text report you can:

Change the printer font used to print the text report from the Output Destination dialog.

Remove some of the tokens from the Selected list to reduce the number of tokens and the width of the report.

Alter the column width (if permitted) of some of the tokens

Specify a different time unit.

Time unit

Specify a different time unit if required. Time units affect the width of date and duration tokens. For example, any date tokens included in a report that has a time unit of Half days require 11 characters, as they include am or pm in the date. However, if the time unit is Days the date tokens require only 9 characters.

Tokens for Inclusion

You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens.

Available

Specify which tokens you want to include in the text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on the right arrow button to move tokens into the Selected list. If you want to see information about a particular token before including it in a text report, double-click on the token when it is in the Available list to display the Details On Token dialog.

Right Arrow Button

Click on the right arrow button to move a token you have selected from the Available list into the Selected list.

Selected

The Selected list contains all the tokens you have selected from the Available list.

When a token is displayed in the Selected list, its associated column heading is also displayed. To view or change the column headings of tokens, double-click on the token in the Selected list. The Edit Column Details dialog is presented.

To remove a token from the Selected list, select the token and click on the left arrow button.

Left Arrow Button

Click on the Left arrow button to remove a selected token from the Selected list.

Difference

You can include tokens that contain the difference between any two date or any two duration tokens in a text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on the Difference button. The Select The Order For Subtraction dialog is displayed.

Output To

You can output a text report to any of the following destinations:

A printer.

The Windows Clipboard.

A text file on disk.

You can specify any combination of these destinations when outputting a text report.

Click on the Output To button to display the Output Destination dialog.

Executing and saving link text reports

If you want to execute the text report immediately, click on the Execute button to output the report to the output destinations selected from the Output Destination dialog.

If you want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the OK button to save the text report under the name specified in the Report name field. Once you have saved a link text report you can edit, execute or delete it at any time from the Report Selector.

If you do not want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the Cancel button to abandon the dialog.


Chart Report dialog

This dialog is presented when you choose the New or Edit button from the Report Selector. The Report Selector is presented when you choose the File - Print Text - Chart Report menu command.

This dialog allows you to create a text report containing information about charts in the current project and any baseline charts created from the current project. You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens. Tokens that you can select for chart text reports include:

The chart title.

The revision number and the author of a chart.

The start and end dates of a chart

The difference between the start date of a chart in the current project and the start date of a baseline chart.

Chart text reports have a similar format to bar text reports. The report is presented in a tabular format with the tokens being represented as columns and each bar chart or baseline chart is represented as a row.

You can also create chart text reports from filter charts. Because you cannot create baselines from filter charts you cannot include any baseline information in chart text reports created from a filter chart.

Report name

Enter a name for the text report. You only need to enter a name for the report if you want to save it for future use.

Scope

Specify the scope of the text report, by clicking on Current chart, Selected charts or Project.

Select a single chart, selected charts from the tree of charts, or the whole project:

Current chart

This means that only the current chart is included in the text report.

Selected charts

This means that you can choose which charts from the project you want to include in the report. When you select this option, the Select button becomes available. Click on this button to display the Select Charts To Include dialog. This dialog is similar to the Chart Selector.

Project

This means that all charts in the project are included in the text report.

Note: If you are creating a chart report from a filter chart, only the options Current chart and Whole report are available. Current chart means that the current filter chart is included in the report. Use Whole report, if all the bars in the filter cannot be displayed on a single chart and their is more than one chart in the filter.

Available Baselines

Select a baseline from the list.

Any baselines created for the current project appear here. You can select one or more baselines from the list by CTRL-clicking. The baseline(s) you select apply to any tokens referencing baseline information that have been included in the report.

This list is not available if you are creating a chart text report from a filter chart

Format

Specify how you want to format the text report. You can specify how you want page headings, lines and durations to appear in the report.

Page

These options allow you to specify if you want to include headings in the text report and how many lines you want to appear on a page.

Headings

Check this box to include text report headings on each page.

Lines

To specify the maximum number of lines on a page, enter a number in the Lines box or click on the box arrows. PowerProject does not let you enter a number that is smaller than the minimum number of lines required for the text report.

Durations

You can specify that you want any durations in your text report to be calculated and displayed as working or elapsed durations:

Working durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include only working periods.

Elapsed durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include weekends and holidays as well as working periods.

Report width/Printer width

The current width of the text report is displayed. The width of the report depends on how many tokens you have selected and the column width of those tokens. Each time you move a token into the Selected list, the report width changes.

The current width that can be printed on a page by the selected printer is displayed alongside the current report width. You should make sure that the report width does not exceed the printer width, as this means that not all of the information included in the report will be printed.

To reduce the width of a text report you can:

Change the printer font used to print the text report from the Output Destination dialog.

Remove some of the tokens from the Selected list to reduce the number of tokens and the width of the report.

Alter the column width (if permitted) of some of the tokens

Specify a different time unit.

Time unit

Specify a different time unit if required. Time units affect the width of date and duration tokens. For example, any date tokens included in a report that has a time unit of Half days require 11 characters, as they include am or pm in the date. However, if the time unit is Days date tokens require only 9 characters.

Tokens for Inclusion

You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens.

Available

Specify which tokens you want to include in the text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on the right arrow button to move tokens into the Selected list. If you want to see information about a particular token before including it in a text report, double-click on the token when it is in the Available list to display the Details On Token dialog.

Right Arrow Button

Click on the right arrow button to move a token you have selected from the Available into the Selected list.

Selected

The Selected list contains all the tokens you have selected from the Available.

When a token is displayed in the Selected list, its associated column heading is also displayed. To view or change the column headings of tokens, double-click on the token in the Selected list. The Edit Column Details dialog is presented.

To remove a token from the Selected list, select the token and click on the left arrow button.

Left Arrow Button

Click on the Left arrow button to remove a selected token from the Selected.

Difference

You can include tokens that contain the difference between any two date or any two duration tokens in a text report by selecting the tokens from the Available and clicking on the Difference button. The Select The Order For Subtraction is displayed.

Output To

You can output a text report to any of the following destinations:

A printer.

The Windows Clipboard.

A text file on disk.

You can specify any combination of these destinations when outputting a text report.

Click on the Output To button to display the Output Destination dialog.

Executing and saving chart text reports

If you want to execute the text report immediately, click on the Execute button to output the report to the output destinations selected from the Output Destination dialog.

If you want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the OK button to save the text report under the name specified in the Report name field. Once you have saved a chart text report you can edit, execute or delete it at any time from the Report Selector.

If you do not want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the Cancel button to abandon the dialog.


Histogram Report dialog

This dialog is presented when you choose the File - Print Text - Histogram Report menu command.

This dialog allows you to create a text report about a resource histogram or a cost centre histogram. A histogram text report always refers to the active histogram. You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens.

The tokens available for inclusion in a histogram text report depend on the graphs and resources/cost centres included in the histogram report. Tokens are available only for those graphs and resources/cost centres that have been included in the histogram report.

Format of histogram text reports

Unlike bar and chart text reports, the column headings for histogram text report tokens appear as rows and not columns. The number of columns in the text report depends on the time unit you select from this dialog. The time unit for histogram text reports refers to how the histogram data is divided, for example into Days or Weeks, and not to dates and durations, as for bar, link and chart text reports.

For example, if the histogram shows 15 days and the time unit specified on this dialog is Days, the histogram report contains 15 columns. However, if you change the time unit to Half days, the histogram report then contains 30 columns.

Note: You cannot specify the scope of a histogram text report as a histogram text report always uses the active histogram.

Report name

Enter a name for the text report. This field is optional. If you enter a title for the report, it will appear as part of the text report heading.

Page

These options allow you to specify if you want to include headings in the text report and how many lines you want to appear on a page.

Headings

Check this box to include text report headings on each page.

Lines

To specify the maximum number of lines on a page, enter a number in the Lines box or click on the box arrows. PowerProject does not let you enter a number that is smaller than the minimum number of lines required for the text report.

Report width/Printer width

The current width of the text report is displayed. The width of the report depends on how many tokens you have selected and the column width of those tokens. Each time you move a token into the Selected list, the report width changes.

The current width that can be printed on a page by the selected printer is displayed alongside the current report width. You should make sure that the report width does not exceed the printer width, as this means that not all of the information included in the report will be printed.

To reduce the width of a histogram text report you can:

Change the printer font used to print the text report from the Output Destination dialog.

Remove some of the tokens from the Selected list to reduce the number of tokens and the width of the report.

Specify a reporting period from the Report Between dialog.

Specify a different time unit to reduce the number of columns in the report.

Report Between

Click on this button to display the Report Between dialog

The Report Between dialog allows you to specify a reporting period for the histogram text report. You specify two dates and PowerProject includes only those graph values that fall within the specified dates in the histogram text report.

If you have a long histogram, specifying a reporting period allows you to exclude any information you are not interested in and also allows you to reduce the width of the text report.

Time unit

Specify a different time unit if required.

The time unit for histogram text reports refers to how the data contained in the report should be divided, for example days or weeks. This also determines the number of columns contained in the histogram report. For example, if the histogram shows 15 days and the time unit specified on this dialog is Days, the histogram report contains 15 columns. However, if you change the time unit to Half days, the histogram report then contains 30 columns.

The time unit you specify here also applies to any "each time unit" tokens included in the histogram. For example, if your histogram shows the "Available resource each week" graph you can include a text report token to represent the information shown by this graph. If you do include any "each time unit" tokens, you must make sure that the time unit you specify from this dialog is equal to or smaller than the time unit specified for the histogram from the Graph Types dialog.

Tokens for Inclusion

You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens.

Available

Specify which tokens you want to include in the text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on the right arrow button to move tokens into the Selected list. If you want to see information about a particular token before including it in a text report, double-click on the token when it is in the Available list to display the Details On Token dialog.

For more information about resources included in the histogram that are members of a group or resources or cost centres that have a histogram filter associated with them, see Resource group and filter tokens.

Tokens are available only for those graphs and resources included in the histogram report.

Right Arrow Button

Click on the right arrow button to move a token you have selected from the Available list into the Selected list.

Selected

The Selected list contains all the tokens you have selected from the Available list.

When a token is displayed in the Selected list, its associated column heading is also displayed. To view or change the column headings of tokens, double-click on the token in the Selected list. The Edit Column Details dialog is presented.

To remove a token from the Selected list, select the token and click on the left arrow button.

Left Arrow Button

Click on the Left arrow button to remove a selected token from the Selected list.

Difference

This button is not available for histogram text reports, as there are not date or duration tokens available for inclusion in a histogram text report.

Output To

You can output a text report to any of the following destinations:

A printer.

The Windows Clipboard.

A text file on disk.

You can specify any combination of these destinations when outputting a text report.

Click on the Output To button to display the Output Destination dialog.

Executing histogram text reports

To execute the histogram report to the output destinations selected from the Output Destination dialog, click on the Execute button.

If you want to abandon the text report definition, click on the Cancel button to abandon the dialog.


Report Between dialog

This dialog is presented when you click on the Report Between button from the following dialogs:

Histogram Report dialog.

Histogram To Comma Separated dialog.

Histogram To Spreadsheet dialog.

Use the fields on this dialog to specify a reporting period for the histogram text report. Only graph values that fall within the period specified are included in the report.

Left date is the start of the reporting period. Any graph values which fall before this date are excluded.

Right date marks the end of the reporting period. Any graph values that fall after this date are excluded.

Note: You must include am/pm as part of the date. The date format is set on the Date Format tab of the Options dialog.

When you are happy with the dates you have entered, confirm by OK. Cancel leaves the dialog without specifying a reporting period.


Resource group and filter tokens

When you include resources in a histogram report, PowerProject allows you to:

Include resource groups. If you do this PowerProject generates a graph to indicate the usage of each member of the group only when it is assigned as part of a group.

Include the same resource or cost centre more than once. This is useful if you want to apply filters to a resource or cost centre included in a histogram. For example, you may want PowerProject to generate a graph of the usage of a resource only when it is assigned to bars that are critical.

To enable you to distinguish between different occurrences of the same resource or cost centre when selecting tokens for a histogram text report, PowerProject uses the following conventions:

Histogram text report tokens contain a 'G' if the token represents a graph that shows the usage of the resource only when it is assigned as a member of a group. For example, "Allocated effort to date for (G) John Brown" indicates that the token represents the "Allocated effort to date" graph for the resource John Brown only when assigned as a member of a particular resource group.

Histogram text report tokens contain a 'F' if the graph represents the usage of a resource or cost centre when a filter has been applied. For example "Allocated effort to date (F)John Brown" indicates that the token represents the "Allocated effort to date" graph for John Brown when a filter has been applied.

If applicable, both 'G' and 'F' appear in parentheses in between the graph name and the resource name.

To obtain more information about the token, for example to see which group the resource is a member of or the name of the filter that has been applied, double-click on the token when it is in the Available list to display the Details On Token dialog.

Tokens representing more than one graph value

If you include a token that represents a resource or cost centre graph at a time when the graph shows two different values, for example when supplying a consumable resource instantly to a project using a milestone, the token always represents the highest graph value at that time.


Details On Token dialog

This dialog is presented when you double-click on a text report token when it is in the Available list.

The details displayed on the dialog are for information only and therefore you cannot edit any of the information on the dialog. The following details about a text report are displayed:

Description

This is a short description of the information referenced by the token.

Format

This indicates the format of the information referenced by the token. For example a token may contain text, a date, a duration or a number (integer).

Column width

The width of the column that will contain the information referenced by this token.

Alongside the column width is the text Alterable or Non alterable, this indicates whether you can change the column width for this token. Some tokens, such as date tokens, have a fixed column width as they always contain the same number of characters. Other tokens, however, such as text tokens can have a variable column width.

You can only change the column width of a token if you include it in a text report. When you have included a token in a text report, double-click on the token when it is in the Selected list to display the Edit Column Details dialog.

If you are viewing details about a token in a histogram text report the following information is also displayed on this dialog:

Filter applied

This displays the name of any filter associated with the resource or cost centre that the token represents. If no filter has been applied "None" is displayed.

From group

If the token represents a resource only when it is assigned as a member of a group, this field displays the name of the resource group. If the token does not represent the resource when assigned as part of a resource group, "Not grouped" is displayed.


Edit Column Details dialog

This dialog allows you to edit the column heading for any token you have selected for inclusion in a text report.

Note: The format of histogram text reports is different from bar, chart and link reports. Each token you select is represented by a row and the number of columns in the report depends on the time unit selected from the Histogram Report dialog. Therefore, you cannot alter the column width for histogram text reports.

Heading

Edit the heading as desired.

If you are running Windows version 3.0, the vertical bars that appear in column headings on the dialog show where a column heading wraps onto a new line; if you are running a version of Windows later than version 3.0, the vertical bars do not appear, and you should press RETURN to specify that the heading should go onto a new line.

When you return to the text report dialog, vertical bars appear in the token when it is in the Selected list. Make sure that the column heading for a token does not exceed the column width, by inserting vertical bars where appropriate. If a column heading is wider than the column width, the text is truncated.

Any changes you make to column headings are used until you deselect the token by moving it back into the Available list.

Width

Specify a new column width for the token, by entering a number directly into the Column width box, or by clicking on the box arrows.

If a token has a fixed column width, for example date tokens, the Column width box is displayed in disabled text. Some tokens have a fixed width so that you do not lose important information from the text report. For example, any date tokens have a fixed width, so you do not lose information, such as the "am" and "pm" from the date if you have selected Half days as the time unit.

You can alter the column width of tokens that contain information of variable width, such as bar titles. To find out which columns widths you can alter, double-click on tokens in the Available list to display the Details On Token dialog.

Output of bar tokens

Each segment of a bar appears on a different row of the text report. When you include bar tokens, such as "Bar Title" "Bar Number", "Bar Work Done", in a bar text report you can specify whether you want the information in the token to be repeated for each segment or to appear only for the first segment of the bar. The default is that the information only appears for the first segment of a bar.

Show for each segment of bar

Click on this option if you want bar token information to be repeated for each segment of a bar.

Show only on first segment of bar

Click on this option if you want bar token information to appear on for the first segment of each bar.

These options are only available for bar reports.


Select The Order For Subtraction dialog

This dialog is displayed if you select two date or duration tokens from the Available list and click on the Difference button. This button is available from the following dialogs:

Bar Report dialog.

Chart Report dialog.

Link Report dialog.

Bars To Comma Separated dialog.

Bars To Spreadsheet dialog.

Charts To Comma Separated dialog.

Charts To Spreadsheet dialog.

Using this dialog you can subtract any two date or any two duration tokens and include the result of the subtraction as a token in a text report.

The dialog enables you to specify the order of subtraction of date or time tokens. Click on the order of subtraction you want to use. If you confirm by OK, a token representing the difference between the two tokens appears in the Selected list, and the date or duration tokens you selected remain in the Available list.

In some cases subtracting two tokens may result in a negative value. This depends on the tokens selected and the order of subtraction. For example "Bar Start Date" minus the "Bar End Date" will always result in a negative number as the start date of a bar is always earlier than its end date.


Output Destination dialog

This dialog is presented when you click on the Output To button. You specify the destination for the text report using this dialog. This button is available from the following dialogs:

Bar Report dialog

Chart Report dialog

Link Report dialog

Histogram Report dialog

Bars To Comma Separated dialog

Charts To Comma Separated dialog

Histogram To Comma Separated dialog

Output To

Specify where to output the report. You can specify any combination of the three destinations.

Printer

Check this box to output the text report to a printer. The report is output to the default printer if you have one selected.

Clipboard

Check this box to output the text report to the Windows Clipboard.

TXT File

Check this box to output the text report to a text file. You must specify a filename for the TXT file in the TXT Filename field before you can check this box.

TXT Filename

If you want to save a text report to a TXT file, you must supply a filename before you can confirm and leave the dialog with OK.

Browse

Click on this button to view current text files and to specify a filename. See File Selector.

Printer Options

The printer options allow you to specify which font you want to use for printing a text report, for example you may want to reduce the font size used so that more information can be printed. To specify a different font, style or size, click on the Font button to display the Font Selector.

The maximum number of characters that can be printed using the currently selected font is displayed in this panel if you are creating bar, link, chart or histogram text reports. The maximum number of characters is not displayed for comma separated reports. This is because data in comma separated text reports is separated by commas and not tabulated like text reports, therefore lines in comma separated text reports do not have a fixed width.

Use extended ASCII characters

Any text report has a text report frame. PowerProject can use characters from the extended ASCII character set, such as [image], when outputting this frame. Using this character set produces a higher quality text output.

To be able to use characters from the extended ASCII character set, you must have fonts installed that support this character set. The fonts supplied with Windows do not support this character set. Therefore, unless you have fonts installed which do support this character set, make sure the Use extended ASCII characters for text report frame box is cleared before printing a text report or pasting the report from the Clipboard into another Windows program. If you have a printer selected as an output destination for a text report, this box is cleared by default.

MS-DOS does support the extended ASCII character set.


Charts To Comma Separated dialog

This dialog is presented when you choose the New or Edit buttons from the Report Selector. The Report Selector is presented when you choose the File - Export - Chart - Comma Separated command.

Report name

Enter a name for the text report. You only need to enter a name for the report if you want to save it for future use.

Scope

Specify the scope of the text report, by clicking on Current chart, Selected charts or Project.

Select a single chart, selected charts from the tree of charts, or the whole project:

Current chart

This means that only the current chart is included in the text report.

Selected charts

This means that you can choose which charts from the project you want to include in the report. When you select this option, the Select button becomes available. Click on this button to display the Select Charts To Include dialog.

Project

This means that all charts in the project are included in the text report.

Note: If you are creating a chart report from a filter chart, only the options Chart and Whole report are available. Chart means that the current filter chart is included in the bar report. Use Whole report, if all the bars in the filter cannot be displayed on a single chart and there is more than one chart in the filter report.

Available Baselines

Select a baseline from the list. Any baselines created for the current project appear here. You can select one or more baselines from the list by CTRL-clicking. The baseline(s) you select apply to any tokens referencing baseline information that have been included in the report.

This list is not available if you are creating a comma separated chart report from a filter chart.

Durations

You can specify that you want any durations in your text report to be calculated and displayed as working or elapsed durations:

Working durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include only working periods.

Elapsed durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include weekends and holidays as well as working periods.

Time unit

Specify a different time unit if required. Time units affect the width of date and duration tokens. For example, any date tokens included in a report that has a time unit of Half days require 11 characters, as they include am or pm in the date. However, if you had a time unit of Days any date tokens only required 9 characters.

Tokens for Inclusion

You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens.

Available

Specify which tokens you want to include in the text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on the right arrow button to move tokens into the Selected list. If you want to see information about a particular token before including it in a text report, double-click on the token when it is in the Available list to display the Details On Token dialog.

Right Arrow Button

Click on the right arrow button to move a token you have selected from the Available list into the Selected list.

Selected

The Selected list contains all the tokens you have selected from the Available list.

When a token is displayed in the Selected list, its associated column heading is also displayed. To view or change the column headings of tokens, double-click on the token in the Selected list. The Edit Column Details dialog is presented.

To remove a token from the Selected list, select the token and click on the left arrow button.

Left Arrow Button

Click on the Left arrow button to remove a selected token from the Selected list.

Difference

You can include tokens that contain the difference between any two date or any two duration tokens in a text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list.

Output To

You can output a text report to any of the following destinations:

A printer.

The Windows Clipboard.

A text file on disk.

You can specify any combination of these destinations when outputting a text report.

Click on the Output To button to display the Output Destination dialog.

Executing and saving charts to comma separated reports

If you want to execute the text report immediately, click on the Execute button to output the report to the output destinations selected from the Output Destination dialog.

If you want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the OK button to save the text report under the name specified in the Report name field. Once you have saved a chart text report you can edit, execute or delete it at any time from the Report Selector.

If you do not want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the Cancel button to abandon the dialog.


Charts To Spreadsheet dialog

This dialog is presented when you choose the New or Edit buttons from the Report Selector. The Report Selector is presented when you choose the File - Export - Chart - Spreadsheet menu command.

Report name

Enter a name for the text report. You only need to enter a name for the report if you want to save it for future use.

Scope

Specify the scope of the text report, by clicking on Current chart, Selected charts or Project.

Select a single chart, selected charts from the tree of charts, or the whole project:

Current chart

This means that only the current chart is included in the text report.

Selected charts

This means that you can choose which charts from the project you want to include in the report. When you select this option, the Select button becomes available. Click on this button to display the Select Charts To Include dialog.

Project

This means that all charts in the project are included in the text report.

Note: If you are creating a chart report from a filter chart, only the options Chart and Whole report are available. Chart means that the current filter chart is included in the bar report. Use Whole report, if all the bars in the filter cannot be displayed on a single chart and the filter report contains more than one chart.

Available Baselines

Select a baseline from the list. Any baselines created for the current project appear here. You can select one or more baselines from the list by CTRL-clicking. The baseline(s) you select applies to any tokens referencing baseline information that have been included in the report.

This list is not available if you are creating a spreadsheet chart report from a filter chart.

Format

Specify how you want to format the report. you can specify how you want to format column headings and durations to be formatted.

Column Headings

These options allow you to specify how you want any column heading in the text report to appear when it is imported into a spreadsheet program.

On

Check this box to include the column headings. This means that the column headings are only displayed at the top of each column of the worksheet.

Locked to top

Check this box to "lock" the headings to the top of a column. This means that when you scroll down through the report, the column headings appear on the top of the data being displayed.

Durations

You can specify that you want any durations in your text report to be calculated and displayed as working or elapsed durations:

Working durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include only working periods.

Elapsed durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include weekends and holidays as well as working periods.

Time unit

Specify a different time unit if required. Time units affect the width of date and duration tokens. For example, any date tokens included in a report that has a time unit of Half days require 11 characters, as they include am or pm in the date. However, if the report had Days as the time unit any date tokens would only required 9 characters.

Tokens for Inclusion

You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens.

Available

Specify which tokens you want to include in the text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on the right arrow button to move tokens into the Selected list. If you want to see information about a particular token before including it in a text report, double-click on the token when it is in the Available list.

Right Arrow Button

Click on the right arrow button to move a token you have selected from the Available list into the Selected list.

Selected

The selected list contains all the tokens you have selected from the Available list.

When a token is displayed in the Selected list, its associated column heading is also displayed. To view or change the column headings of tokens, double-click on the token in the Selected list. The Edit Column Details dialog is presented.

To remove a token from the Selected list, select the token and click on the left arrow button.

Left Arrow Button

Click on the Left arrow button to remove a selected token from the Selected list.

Difference

You can include tokens that contain the difference between any two date or any two duration tokens in a text report by selecting the tokens from the Available listand clicking on this button to display the Select The Order For Subtraction dialog.

Browse

If you want to import a text report into a spreadsheet program, you must save the text report to a .WKS file on disk.

Click on the Browse button to view current .WKS files and to specify a filename. See File Selector.

Executing and saving charts to spreadsheet reports

If you want to execute the text report immediately, click on the Execute button to output the report to the WKS file selected.

If you want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the OK button to save the text report under the name specified in the Report name field. Once you have saved a chart text report you can edit, execute or delete it at any time from the Report Selector.

If you do not want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the Cancel button to abandon the dialog.


Bars To Comma Separated dialog

This dialog is presented when you choose the New or Edit buttons from the Report Selector. The Report Selector is presented when you choose the File - Export - Bar - Comma Separated command.

Report name

Enter a name for the text report. You only need to enter a name for the report if you want to save it for future use.

Scope

Specify the scope of the text report, by clicking on Chart, Branch or Project.

Select a single chart, a branch of the tree of charts, or the whole project:

Chart

This means that only the bars in the current chart are included in the text report.

Branch

This means that bars in the current chart and in any of its subordinate charts are included in the text report. This option is only available if the active chart contains one or more subordinate charts.

Project

This means that all bars in the project are included in the text report.

Note: If you are creating a bar report from a filter chart, only the options Chart and Whole report are available. Chart means that bars displayed on the current filter chart are included in the bar report. Use Whole report, if all the bars in the filter cannot be displayed on a single chart.

Durations

You can specify that you want any durations in your text report to be calculated and displayed as working or elapsed durations:

Working durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include only working periods.

Elapsed durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include weekends and holidays as well as working periods.

Time unit

Specify a different time unit if required. Time units affect the width of date and duration tokens. For example, any date tokens included in a report that has a time unit of Half days require 11 characters, as they include am or pm in the date. However, if the report had Days as the time unit any date tokens would only required 9 characters.

Tokens for Inclusion

You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens.

Available

Specify which tokens you want to include in the text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on the right arrow button to move tokens into the Selected list. If you want to see information about a particular token before including it in a text report, double-click on the token when it is in the Available list to display the Details On Token dialog.

Right Arrow Button

Click on the right arrow button to move a token you have selected from the Available list into the Selected list.

Selected

The Selected list contains all the tokens you have selected from the Available list.

When a token is displayed in the Selected list, its associated column heading is also displayed. To view or change the column headings of tokens, double-click on the token in the Selected list. The Edit Column Details dialog is presented.

To remove a token from the Selected list, select the token and click on the left arrow button.

Left Arrow Button

Click on the Left arrow button to remove a selected token from the Selected list.

Difference

You can include tokens that contain the difference between any two date or any two duration tokens in a text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on this button to display the Select The Order For Subtraction dialog.

For more information on using:

Baseline bar tokens, see Using baseline bar tokens.

Bar start and end date tokens, see Using bar start and end date tokens.

Resource tokens, see Using resource tokens.

Output To

You can output a text report to any of the following destinations:

A printer.

The Windows Clipboard.

A text file on disk.

You can specify any combination of these destinations when outputting a text report.

Click on the Output To button to display the Output Destination dialog.

Executing and saving bar to comma separated reports

If you want to execute the text report immediately, click on the Execute button to output the report to the output destinations selected from the Output Destination dialog.

If you want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the OK button to save the text report under the name specified in the Report name field. Once you have saved a bar text report you can edit, execute or delete it at any time from the Report Selector.

If you do not want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the Cancel button to abandon the dialog.


Bars To Spreadsheet dialog

This dialog is presented when you choose the New or the Edit buttons from the Report Selector. The Report Selector is presented when you choose the File - Export - Bar - Spreadsheet command.

Report name

Enter a name for the text report. You only need to enter a name for the report if you want to save it for future use.

Scope

Specify the scope of the text report, by clicking on Chart, Branch or Project.

Select a single chart, a branch of the tree of charts, or the whole project:

Chart

This means that only the bars in the current chart are included in the text report.

Branch

This means that bars in the current chart and in any of its subordinate charts are included in the text report. This option is only available if the active chart contains one or more subordinate charts.

Project

This means that all bars in the project are included in the text report.

Note: If you are creating a bar report from a filter chart, only the options Chart and Whole report are available. Chart means that bars displayed on the current filter chart are included in the bar report. Use Whole report, if all the bars in the filter cannot be displayed on a single chart.

Format

Specify how you want to format the text report. You can specify how you want chart titles, column headings, lines, and durations to appear in the report.

Chart Titles

Choose whether to include chart titles or the whole pathname of the chart in the text report.

Insert

Check this box to include chart titles in the text report.

Whole pathname

Check this box to include the whole pathname of a chart, . The whole pathname of a chart contains the path used to access a chart. For example, Office Relocation>New office refit is the whole pathname of the New office refit subordinate chart.

Column Headings

These options allow you to specify how you want any column heading in the text report to appear when it is imported into a spreadsheet program.

On

Check this box to include the column headings. This means that the column headings are only displayed at the top of each column.

Locked to top

Check this box to "lock" the headings to the top of a column. This means that when you scroll down through the report, the column headings appear on the top of the data being displayed.

Durations

You can specify that you want any durations in your text report to be calculated and displayed as working or elapsed durations:

Working durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include only working periods.

Elapsed durations

Click on this option to specify that durations include weekends and holidays as well as working periods.

Time unit

Specify a different time unit if required. Time units affect the width of date and duration tokens. For example, any date tokens included in a report that has a time unit of Half days require 11 characters, as they include am or pm in the date. However, if the time unit was Days any date tokens would only require 9 characters.

Tokens for Inclusion

You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens.

Available

Specify which tokens you want to include in the text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on the right arrow button to move tokens into the Selected list. If you want to see information about a particular token before including it in a text report, double-click on the token when it is in the Available list to display the Details On Token dialog.

Right Arrow Button

Click on the right arrow button to move a token you have selected from the Available list into the Selected list.

Selected

The Selected list contains all the tokens you have selected from the Available.

When a token is displayed in the Selected list, its associated column heading is also displayed. To view or change the column headings of tokens, double-click on the token in the Selected list. The Edit Column Details dialog is presented.

To remove a token from the Selected list, select the token and click on the left arrow button.

Left Arrow Button

Click on the Left arrow button to remove a selected token from the Selected list.

Difference

You can include tokens that contain the difference between any two date or any two duration tokens in a text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on the Difference button. The Select The Order For Subtraction dialog is displayed.

For more information on using:

Baseline bar tokens, see Using baseline bar tokens.

Bar start and end date tokens, see Using bar start and end date tokens.

Resource tokens, see Using resource tokens.

Browse

If you want to import a text report into a spreadsheet program, you must save the text report to a .WKS file on disk.

Click on the Browse button to view current .WKS files and to specify a filename. See File Selector.

Executing and saving bars to spreadsheet reports

If you want to execute the text report immediately, click on the Execute button to output the report to the WKS file selected.

If you want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the OK button to save the text report under the name specified in the Report name field. Once you have saved a chart text report you can edit, execute or delete it at any time from the Report Selector.

If you do not want to save the text report definition you have created, click on the Cancel button to abandon the dialog.


Histogram To Comma Separated dialog

This dialog is presented when you choose the File - Export - Histogram - Comma Separated command.

Report name

Enter a name for the text report. This field is optional. If you enter a title for the report, it will appear as part of the text report heading.

Report Between

Click on this button to display the Report Between dialog.

The Report Between dialog allows you to specify a reporting period for the histogram text report. You specify two dates and PowerProject includes only those graph values that fall within the specified dates in the histogram text report.

If you have a long histogram, specifying a reporting period allows you to exclude any information you are not interested in and also allows you to reduce the width of the text report.

Time unit

Specify a different time unit if required. The format of histogram text reports is different to bar, chart and link text reports in that the time unit specified here refers to how the histogram data is divided, for example into days or weeks, and not to the date and duration tokens as for bar, link and chart reports. The time unit you select for the report also affects the number of columns you have in your report.

The time unit you specify here also applies to any "each time unit" tokens included in the histogram. For example, if your histogram shows the "Available resource each week" graph you can include a text report token to represent the information shown by this graph. If you do include any "each time unit" tokens, you must make sure that the time unit you specify from this dialog is equal to or smaller than the time unit specified for the histogram from the Graph Types dialog.

Tokens for Inclusion

You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens.

Available

Specify which tokens you want to include in the text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on the right arrow button to move tokens into the Selected list. If you want to see information about a particular token before including it in a text report, double-click on the token when it is in the Available list to display the Details On Token dialog.

Right Arrow Button

Click on the right arrow button to move a token you have selected from the Available list into the Selected list.

Selected

The Selected list contains all the tokens you have selected from the Available.

When a token is displayed in the Selected list, its associated column heading is also displayed. To view or change the column headings of tokens, double-click on the token in the Selected list. The Edit Column Details dialog is presented.

To remove a token from the Selected list, select the token and click on the left arrow button.

Left Arrow Button

Click on the Left arrow button to remove a selected token from the Selected list.

Difference

This button is not available for histogram text reports as you cannot included date and duration tokens in a histogram text report.

Output To

You can output a text report to any of the following destinations:

A printer.

The Windows Clipboard.

A text file on disk.

You can specify any combination of these destinations when outputting a text report.

Click on the Output To button to display the Output Destination dialog.

Executing histogram to comma separated reports

To execute the histogram report to the output destinations selected from the Output Destination dialog, click on the Execute button.

If you want to abandon the text report definition, click on the Cancel button to abandon the dialog.


Histogram To Spreadsheet dialog

This dialog is presented when you choose the File - Export - Histogram - Spreadsheet command.

Report name

Enter a name for the text report. This field is optional. If you enter a title for the report, it will appear as part of the text report heading.

Format

Specify how you want column headings to appear in the report.

Column Headings

These options allow you to specify how you want any column heading in the text report to appear when it is imported into a spreadsheet program.

On

Check this box to include the column headings. This means that the column headings are only displayed at the top of each column.

Locked to top

Check this box to "lock" the headings to the top of a column. This means that when you scroll down through the report, the column headings appear on the top of the data being displayed.

Report Between

Click on this button to display the Report Between dialog

The Report Between dialog allows you to specify a reporting period for the histogram text report. You specify two dates and PowerProject includes only those graph values that fall within the specified dates in the histogram text report.

If you have a long histogram, specifying a reporting period allows you to exclude any information you are not interested in and also allows you to reduce the width of the text report.

Time unit

Specify a different time unit if required. The format of histogram text report is different to bar, chart and link text reports in that the time unit specified here refers to the date zone of the histogram and not to the date and duration tokens. The time unit you select for the report also affects the number of columns you have in your report.

The time unit you specify here also applies to any "each time unit" tokens included in the histogram. For example, if your histogram shows the "Available resource each week" graph you can include a text report token to represent the information shown by this graph. If you do include any "each time unit" tokens, you must make sure that the time unit you specify from this dialog is equal to or smaller than the time unit specified for the histogram from the Graph Types dialog.

Tokens for Inclusion

You specify the information you want to include in the text report, by selecting the appropriate tokens.

Available

Specify which tokens you want to include in the text report by selecting the tokens from the Available list and clicking on the right arrow button to move tokens into the Selected list. If you want to see information about a particular token before including it in a text report, double-click on the token when it is in the Available list to display the Details On Token dialog

Right Arrow Button

Click on the right arrow button to move a token you have selected from the Available list into the Selected list.

Selected

The Selected list contains all the tokens you have selected from the Available list.

When a token is displayed in the Selected list, its associated column heading is also displayed. To view or change the column headings of tokens, double-click on the token in the Selected list. The Edit Column Details dialog is presented.

To remove a token from the Selected list, select the token and click on the left arrow button.

Left Arrow Button

Click on the Left arrow button to remove a selected token from the Selected list.

Difference

This button is not available for histogram text reports as you cannot include date and duration tokens in a histogram text report.

Browse

If you want to import a text report into a spreadsheet program, you must save the text report to a .WKS file on disk.

Click on the Browse button to view current .WKS files and to specify a filename. See File Selector.

Executing histogram to spreadsheet reports

Click on the Execute button to output the report to the WKS file selected.

If you do not want to output the text report to a WKS file, click on the Cancel button to abandon the dialog.


Text report headings

When you output a text report, the following headings appear on the first page of the text report:

Page 1	Chart title

Report title

Reporting date

For

By

(All durations in Working Days)

The page number and chart title are repeated on each page of the text report. The other headings appear only on the first page of the report.

The (All durations in Working/Elapsed Time unit) heading indicates whether the report is using working or elapsed durations for dates and durations included in the report and also the time unit for dates and durations, for example Half days, days, weeks. This heading does not appear on histogram text reports, as there are no date or duration tokens available for histogram text reports.

If the project you are using to create a text report has been saved, the text report also contains a reference to this project. This appears at the end of the text report and cannot be changed.


Toolbar buttons

There are two toolbars in PowerProject: the main toolbar and the annotation toolbar. You can turn them on and off independantly using the Admin - Toolbars menu command.

The main toolbar

The annotation toolbar


New project

Click this button [image] to start a new project. The New Project Details dialog appears for you to enter a project title and start date.

This button is a shortcut for using the File - New menu command.


Open project

Click this button [image] to open a project that you have previously created and saved. The Open File selector appears for you to locate the project that you want to open.

This button is a shortcut for using the File - Open menu command.


Save project

Click this button [image] to save the project with a unique filename. The Save As file selector appears for you to choose a location and enter a filename for the project.

Clicking the button is a shortcut for using the File - Save As menu command.


Print graphic

Click this button [image] to output the graphic (chart or histogram) in the active window. The Print dialog appears for you to select your output options.

This button is a shortcut for using the File - Print Graphics menu command.


Preview graphic

Click this button [image] to preview the graphic (chart or histogram) in the active window before outputting it. The graphic is displayed in the preview window.

This button is a shortcut for using the File - Preview menu command.


Bold

Click this button [image] to change the style of text in the selected bars, text annotations or columns to Bold.


Italic

Click this button [image] to change the style of text in the selected bars, text annotations or columns to Italic.


Underline

Click this button [image] to change the style of text in the selected bars, text annotations or columns to Underline.


Toggle column sheet/bar titles panel

Click this button [image] to toggle between displaying the column sheet or the bar titles panel.

This button is a shortcut for the Column sheet option on the Display tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog.

You can also toggle between displaying the column sheet and bar titles panel by pressing F4.


Details

Click this button [image] to display information about the project and items (charts, bars, segments, links, histograms, columns, annotations) in the project. The tabbed Details dialog appears. The tabs available on this dialog depend on the items that are selected (if any) when you click the Details button.

When an annotation is selected, clicking the Details button displays the appropriate annotation Details dialog instead of the tabbed Details dialog.

This button is a shortcut for using the Edit - Details menu command.


Text annotation tool

Click this button [image] to create a text annotation on the active chart or histogram. The cursor changes shape to a crosshair with a T at the bottom right-hand corner. Click this cursor on the chart or histogram then type the text you want.

This button is available in both the main toolbar and annotation toolbar. It is a shortcut for the Annotation - Add Text menu command.


Resources

Click this button [image] to assign consumable or permanent resources to the selected segments. The Resources dialog appears.

This button is a shortcut for using the Edit - Resources menu command.


Fixed costs

Click this button [image] to assign fixed costs to the selected segments. The Fixed Costs dialog appears for you to choose a cost centre and specify an amount.

This button is a shortcut for using the Edit - Fixed Costs menu command.


Set/Delete Start Flag

Click this button [image] to set a start flag on the selected segment(s). If all the selected segments already have start flags, clicking this button will remove them.

This button is a shortcut for the Task - Set/Delete Start Flag menu command.


Double scale

Click this button [image] to approximately double the horizontal scale of the active chart or histogram.

To set the horizontal scale accurately, use Chart - Customise or Histogram - Customise as appropriate.


Halve scale

Click this button [image] to approximately halve the horizontal scale of the active chart or histogram.

To set the horizontal scale accurately, use Chart - Customise or Histogram - Customise as appropriate.


Calendar library

Click this button [image] to create, edit or delete a calendar. The Calendar Library selector appears.

This button is a shortcut for using the Admin - Calendar Library menu command.


Reschedule

Click this button [image] to reschedule the active chart. When the chart contains expanded bars, the Reschedule Scope dialog appears for you to choose whether to reschedule just the active chart, or the branch of charts.

This button is a shortcut for using the Task - Reschedule - Chart menu command.


Insert Summary Bar

Click this button [image] to insert a summary bar above the selected bars. (You must select neighbouring bars. If you select bars that are dispersed throughout the chart, this option will not be available.)

When you click this button, the selected bars are indented to show that they form a summary group, and a summary bar is inserted above the group.

This button is a shortcut for using the Task - Insert Summary Bar menu command.


Indent

Click this button [image] to move the selected bars into the summary group above. (You must select neighbouring bars that are immediately below a summary group. If you select bars that are dispersed throughout the chart, this option will not be available.)

When you click this button, the selected bars are indented to the level of the summary group above and the position and duration of the summary bar is adjusted to include the new bars.

This button is a shortcut for using the Task - Indent menu command.


Outdent

Click this button [image] to remove the selected bars from the current summary group. (You must select neighbouring bars within the summary group. If you select bars that are dispersed throughout the summary group, this option will not be available.)

When you click this button, the selected bars are moved below the summary group from which they have been outdented. If the summary group was nested within another summary group, the bars will still be indented at the level of the current summary bar.

This button is a shortcut for using the Task - Outdent menu command.


Outline On/Off

Click this button [image] to toggle between displaying the active chart in outline or in full. When the chart is displayed in outline, only summary bars and bars on the root of the chart will be displayed.

This button is a shortcut for using the Chart - Outline menu command.


Show Tasks

Click and hold down this button [image] to temporarily display any hidden tasks in the chart. When you release this button, the hidden tasks are removed from view again.


Help pointer

Click this button [image] to invoke the Help pointer which you can click anywhere in the PowerProject window to obtain Help about the item you have clicked on.

You can also invoke the Help pointer by pressing SHIFT F1.


Box annotation

Click this button [image] to create a box annotation on the active chart or histogram. Move the pointer over the chart or histogram, then click and drag the pointer to draw the box.

You can change attributes of a box annotation such as its colour and scale settings, by selecting the annotation and clicking the [image] button.


Rounded box annotation

Click this button [image] to create a rounded box annotation on the active chart or histogram. Move the pointer over the chart or histogram, then click and drag the pointer to draw the rounded box.

You can change attributes of a rounded box annotation such as its colour and scale settings, by selecting the annotation and clicking the [image] button.


Ellipse annotation

Click this button [image] to create an ellipse annotation on the active chart or histogram. Move the pointer over the chart or histogram, then click and drag the pointer to draw the ellipse.

You can change attributes of an ellipse annotation such as its colour and scale settings, by selecting the annotation and clicking the [image] button.


Line annotation

Click this button [image] to create a line annotation on the active chart or histogram. Move the pointer over the chart or histogram, then click and drag the pointer to draw the straight line.

You can change attributes of a line annotation such as its colour and scale settings, by selecting the annotation and clicking the [image] button.


Polygon annotation

Click this button [image] to create a polygon annotation on the active chart or histogram. Move the pointer over the chart or histogram, then continue dragging and releasing the pointer to draw the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon.

You can change attributes of a polygon annotation such as its colour and scale settings, by selecting the annotation and clicking the [image] button.


Admin - User menu command

The User menu commands let you control the number of users that have access to a project and what their access rights are. By setting certain access rights, you can prevent some users from viewing or editing charts whilst allowing other users full access to edit the whole project.

Use New to add new users to a project

Use Open to view and edit the details of a subordinate user

Use Details to view your own user details

Use Delete to remove users from the project


User - New menu command

This menu command allows you to introduce a new user to the project and set their Password, Access Rights and Scope. The User Setup dialog is presented.

This menu is only active when a user name and/or password has been entered for the first user to the project.


User - Open menu command

This menu command allows you to view and edit a user's Password, Access Rights and Scope. The User Selector is presented. Through this you can choose any user you have introduced, or any subordinate user.

This menu is only active when a user name and/or password has been entered for the first user to the project.

After choosing a user, the User Setup dialog for this user is presented. Through this you can view and edit information for the user.

You can see the name and password if a user has forgotten the name or password and is locked out of a project.

You can change the user name and password. Be sure to tell the user the new name and password.

You can change the Access Rights and Scope - within your own limits.


User - Delete menu command

This menu command allows you to remove a user from the project. The User Selector is presented to select the user for deletion.

This menu command is only active when a user name and/or password has been entered for the first user to the project

You cannot delete the first user.


User - Details menu command

This menu command allows you to see what Access Rights and Scope you have, and to enter or change your user name and password.

The User Details dialog is presented.


Admin - Options menu command

The Options menu command allows you to set the defaults PowerProject uses for your project. Even if you are the only user, you should enter your preference options, so that you can use PowerProject quickly. When you select this command, the Options dialog appears.


Options dialog

This dialog appears when you select Options from the Admin menu. The settings on the Options dialog are divided across six tabs. Click on a tab below for more details about the options on that tab.

Bar defaults

Numbering

Date format

Progress

Reschedule

General

The buttons to the right of the tabs are explained below.

OK

Click this button to close the dialog, saving any selections you have made.

Cancel

Click this button to close the dialog, abandoning any selections you have made.

Entry Chart button

Click this button to choose the chart you want to appear when you first open the project.

The Chart Selector is presented. Through this you can choose any chart in the project which is in scope. The currently selected chart is highlighted on the Chart Selector. If you do not select any chart, then no chart window will be opened when you open the project.

Chart Display

Click this button to choose which chart features are displayed and which are not. The Customise Barchart View dialog appears with the Appearance and Display tabs available. You can also access the Customise Barchart View dialog by selecting Customise from the Chart menu.


User Setup dialog

This dialog is called from the Admin - User - New and Admin - User - Open menu commands.

Name

The name by which this user is known throughout PowerProject.

Type any 16 characters. Each user name must be unique. The name must contain at least one letter and cannot be made up of just spaces.

A user can later change this name on the User Details dialog. Remember to tell a new user the name you have assigned - they need it to gain entry to the project.

Password

The password is required, in addition to the user's name, to gain entry to a project.

The user can fill in their own password later on the User Details dialog. The password may be blank, or you may enter any combination of letters and numbers up to 8 characters long.

If you set a password, be sure to tell the user - or they cannot gain entry to the project.

Access Rights

Access Rights control which areas of the project are available to the user.

NONE - access denied.

VIEW - user may only view information, but not change it.

EDIT - user may change information.

You can only assign the same, or lower, rights as yourself. For example, if your rights are EDIT, you can assign any Access Right to this user. If your rights are VIEW, you cannot assign EDIT to this user. Access Rights which are not applicable are disabled. Click on the appropriate button for each of the possible options.

Chart Scope

The Access Rights for charts are different and are detailed on the Select Access Rights dialog.

If no chart is assigned, then the user is denied access to all charts in the project.

Adding a chart to the list

To add a chart to the Charts Accessible list - click on the New button. The Chart Selector is presented. You may add as many charts to the list as you wish. Each chart in the list is known as a head chart.

On adding a new chart to the list, the lowest Access Right of VIEW is assigned. If you want to assign a higher Access Right you can edit the new entry.

You cannot choose a chart if its parent is already in the list, or if one of its subordinate charts is already in the list.

You must add a new chart to the list of head charts before you can set the Chart Scope - see below.

Changing scope for existing chart

Double-click on the chart to present the Select Access Rights dialog.

Removing a chart from the list

To remove an existing chart from the Charts Accessible list enter the Select Access Rights dialog and choose the Delete button.


Select Access Rights dialog

This dialog allows you to choose one of the chart Access Rights. This dialog is called from User Setup dialog when double-clicking on a chart in the Charts Accessible list.

The possible Access Rights are:

VIEW - user may only view information. No changes are possible.

EDIT - user may change information in the chart, but is unable to add or delete X-chart links or delete segments with X-chart links.

X-CHART - user may create and delete X-chart links only.

ALL - user may change information in the chart and can change X-chart links.

You cannot assign an Access Right greater than your own - these options are disabled.

Removing a chart from the list

To remove an existing chart from the Charts Accessible list on the User Setup dialog choose the Delete button.


User Details dialog

This dialog is called from the Admin -User - Details menu command.

If you are the first user and enter a name or password when none existed before:

You are warned that this will result in you being asked for the details the next time you enter this project.

The Admin - User - New menu is activated and you can introduce other users to the project.

To remove password protection and multi-user capabilities, simply remove the name and password of the first user on this dialog after deleting all other users.

Name

Each user name must be unique. The name must contain at least one letter and cannot be made up of just spaces. The name you enter is requested the next time you start the project.

Password

The name you enter is requested the next time you start the project.

To remove password protection, simply blank out the entry.

Access Rights

You can only see your Access Rights and Chart Scope here, you cannot change them. See User Setup dialog for more details.


Date Format tab on Options dialog

This tab allows you to choose how dates will be entered and displayed in all areas of this project.

Separator

Type the symbol to be used to separate the day, month and year in a date.

Am/pm

Prefix dates are in the format am15 Dec 97

Suffix format is 15 Dec 97am.

Month

Select Number if the month is to be shown as a number, for example 08, 09, 10

Select Text to display the first three letters of the month name, for example, Aug, Sep, Oct.

Year

This controls how many digits display the year on PowerProject dialogs. The year is always displayed as two digits on the status line.

Select 4 Digits to display the year in the format 1995.

Select 2 Digits to display the year in the format 95.

Arrangement

Select DD MM YY for day, month, year - 15 Dec 1995.

Select MM DD YY for month, day, year - Dec 15 1995.

Select YY MM DD for year, month, day - 1995 Dec 15.


Bar Defaults tab on Options dialog

Every time you create a new bar, PowerProject assigns values to certain items depending on your choice on this tab.

Title appearance

You can set the colour and style of the text you enter for the bar titles. Click on the Title Appearance button if you want to change the title appearance, and the Select Title Appearance dialog is presented.

Position

Select ASAP if you want the bar segments to be positioned in their earliest possible position, after a reschedule.

Select ALAP if you want the bar segments to be positioned in their latest position - using up any available free float, after a reschedule.

Segment locking

Segment locking can affect the occurrence of link loops.

Select Lock if you want the segments of a bar to be kept together.

Select Unlock if you want the segments of a bar to be allowed to move independently.

Bar Library 1 and Bar Library 2

Seg Library 1 and Seg Library 2

These titles reflect the names you have given to the libraries on the Admin menu.

You can choose a code from each or any of these libraries. The bar library codes are used whenever you create a new bar. The segment library codes are used every time you draw a new segment - on a new or existing bar. You do not need to select from all the libraries - if you don't make a selection, the default code is used. The code displayed on the chart depends on your current selection on the Appearance tab of the Customise Barchart View dialog. For more details - see Admin - Code libraries

Click on the appropriate list box and choose a code. The list box is disabled if your Access Right for codes is NONE.

Calendar

Choose this option to select a calendar to be used for any new bars you draw.

Click on the list box and choose any calendar in the project. The list box is disabled if your Access Right for calendars is NONE.

Segment title

Segment titles are displayed in the body of each segment on the chart.

Type any 8 characters or leave blank, for the title of any new segments created. Segment titles can contain the special symbols, the "#" and "%" character.

Modelled Segments

These options determine how resource allocations are recalculated when you resize a segment with modelled resources by dragging the start or end date.

Choose Size Allocations to make PowerProject adjust the resource allocation on the segment, then calculate the segment’s duration according to the new resource allocation. This is the default option.

Choose Size Durations to make PowerProject adjust the segment’s duration one half day at a time and recalculate the resource allocation according to the new segment duration. This method gives a more accurate resource allocation but it can result in very small allocations which may be unrealistic. (When you increase a segment’s duration using the status line, this method is used to calculate the resource allocations on the segment.)


Progress tab on Options dialog

The options on this tab let you control the way the chart report line is drawn on your charts and the type of progress displayed on expanded bars.

The progress is only displayed on your chart if you have selected the Progress option for chart display.

Progress line

The progress line marks the chart report date. It is drawn vertically down your chart. You can control whether the line should be jagged or straight.

Choose Jagged if you want the line to highlight the segments which are behind or ahead of schedule. The line appears jagged because it passes behind uncompleted segments, and in front of those which are completed.

Choose Straight to draw a vertical line down the chart to mark the chart report date.

Expanded bars

Expanded, or owning bars display the progress from their subchart. You cannot set progress directly on expanded bars.

Choose Percent if you want the progress marking to represent the subchart's Work completed percentage. Use the Chart tab on the Details dialog for the subchart to see the Work completed percentage.

Choose Report date to set the progress marking on an expanded bar to the subchart's report date. On each chart in a tree, the line reflects the chart report date on the immediately subordinate chart.


Numbering tab on Options dialog

The options on this tab affect the way the time units are displayed on the status line and the unit line in the date zone.

Unit type

You use this option to set the unit display as one of two types:

Annual time units are numbered from the start of a calendar year .For example, the first week of a new year is week No. 1.

Sequential time units are numbered from a date of your choice (see Sequential Numbering - Unit zero/One date below) and do not restart with a new year.

Which unit type you choose affects which options are then available - see below.

Sequential Numbering

If you choose Annual Unit Type (above), this option is disabled.

Include zero

If you want to number time units from 0 - the first day/week/etc. of the project is marked 0.

Skip zero

To number time units from 1 - the first day/week/etc. of the project is marked 1.

Unit zero/one date

If you choose Include zero, this option appears as 'Unit zero'.

If you choose Skip zero, this option appears as 'Unit one'.

This option allows you to enter a start point for sequential numbering. Initially the project start date is displayed. Enter a different start date for unit numbering by changing the date displayed.

The date can be earlier, or later, than the project start date. If it is later, the units displayed before your chosen Unit zero/one date are negative.

The date you use to start numbering can be on any day of the week. For example, if the numbering day is a Wednesday, then all week boundaries fall on a Wednesday. This will affect the position of grids lines on the chart.

Annual Numbering

If you choose Sequential Unit Type (above), this option is disabled.

Annual numbering always starts on a Monday.

You can choose to prefix the date with the last digit of the year. You can also separate the year and date with any character. For example, if you choose a '|' as the separator, and select Prefix year, the date appears in the format 5|35 (1995, week 35). If you choose to Omit year, the date appears as 35.

Date Zone Format

This option allows you to affect the appearance of the day and unit line of the date zone. The appearance of these lines can also be affected by the chart scale.

Time unit

The Time unit list box allows you to choose which time unit will be used for the Unit line of the date zone.

Choosing Work Units will match the date zone time unit to the unit being used on the bar chart.

Week Marking

This setting allows you to select Week commencing or Week ending to affect the dates shown on the day line in the date zone.

For the annual unit type, the weeks always start on a Monday. For the sequential unit type, the day of the week on which boundaries occur depends on the project start date.

For example, if the project starts on a Monday and you choose Week commencing, the date of the Monday of each week is placed to the right of the divisions. If you choose Week ending, the Sunday of each week is placed to the left of the divisions.

Sequential Units

This settings allows you to choose between:

Including holidays - for displaying the unit number for all time units since the project start - including holidays and weekends.

Excluding holidays - for displaying only the time units which are worked since the project start - excluding holidays and weekends.

This option is only active if the Sequential Unit Type (above) is active.


Reschedule tab on Options dialog

The options on this tab allow you to set certain options which control how the reschedule behaves at certain points.

Progress

This option governs how completed and uncompleted segments and links are positioned after a reschedule.

Move completed segments

This option governs how completed segments are positioned after a reschedule.

Check the box to position completed segments behind the chart report date (ie. in the past because they have been completed), and uncompleted segments after it (ie. in the future because they still have to be carried out).

Clear the box to leave uncompleted segments unaffected by the reschedule and stay just where you place them - even after the chart report date. Uncompleted segments can lie before the chart report date and are only affected by links and start flags.

Move part completed links

This option is useful in maintaining the logic of a plan when out-of-sequence progress occurs.

When a link starts on an uncompleted segment and ends on a completed one (hence "part completed links") and a part of the end segment remains to be carried out, then you may wish to carry the link from the completed segment to the next uncompleted one of the same bar.

Check the box when you want part completed links to be automatically carried along to the next uncompleted segment. This implies that the initial logic of the linkage may have been wrong.

Clear the box when you want part completed links to remain unaffected.

Float

This option is useful in restricting the overall duration of a chart, or when considering one chart as a self-contained project.

The float for a segment is calculated by using the project start and end date, or by using the start/end date of the chart.

When segments have lots of float they will set the chart end to the latest finish date.

Select Project and the project start and end dates are used as the basis for calculating float. This may mean that charts are wide. So wide that they may make chart images larger than you wish. On output, float passing the chart start/end is truncated.

Select Chart and the chart start and end dates are used as the basis for calculating float. For charts containing bars in the ALAP position, the chart duration may be less than if the project end date had been used. Some segments may become critical when the chart end date is used to calculate float, which were not critical when the project end date was used.

Unlinked Segments

Segments with no links at all are kept in their original position, unless they affect the start or end of the project. With this option you can determine if they should be moved by the reschedule when they set the project start or end date.

Max

If you select Max, two effects can occur

Unlinked segments are only moved if they affect the start or end of a project, or chart.

Unlinked segments on a bar with linked segments are moved back by the maximum amount to their earliest possible position. However, when the bar position is set to ALAP, the unlinked segments are positioned at their latest possible position despite having Max selected.

Min

When this preference is active two effects can occur.

Unlinked segments are only moved if they affect the start or end of a project, or chart. This is the same as the Max setting.

Unlinked segments on a bar with linked segments are moved back by the minimum amount so that they do not delay any linked segment on the same bar line. (The Min setting is unaffected by either the ASAP or ALAP bar position.)

Do not move

Select Do not move when you want unlinked segments to remain in the position you set. You would choose this option if they set the project start and end date. This option is also useful if you have several milestones on the same bar line that supply consumable resources to a project, as once you have set delivery dates you may not want PowerProject to move them during a reschedule. Also use this option if you want to use PowerProject for bar chart drafting.


First user

When you create a new project you are the first user and the project is accessible to all. This is all you require if you have the sole use of the computer on which you work.

However, PowerProject lets you add user names and passwords to provide security for your project. You can do this so that no one else may look at your project - if you share the computer you work on with others.

As the project grows in size you may wish to introduce other users to the project, so they can plan their work with PowerProject as well - all coordinated into a single project.

Before you can introduce other users you must complete the name and/or password on the User Details dialog. The Admin - User - New menu command will then become available and the project becomes multi-user.

The first user is removed - and the system reverts back to a single user system - by deleting the name and password of the first user on the User Details dialog, after all other users have been deleted.

If someone gets to know your user name and password, they could open a project and, by changing the password lock you out of your own project!


Password protection

Password protection prevents unwanted access to a project. Passwords are entered on the User Details dialog.

If a password has been entered, then the next time you open a project you will have to supply the correct password before the project will be opened.

If you don't want password protection do not enter a password when you are the first user.

Do not tell others your password.

Keep a record of your password in a safe place.

If you forget your password and:

You are the first user then you are locked out of the project. Other users you may have introduced can still use the project, but certain parts may be forever inaccessible. If this happens, contact your software supplier for assistance.

You are not the first user, then the person who introduced you to the project is able to view the password on the User Setup dialog.

Password protection is not infallible. Determined people with the time and effort to spend, could break your password and gain entry to a project.


Subordinate user

A subordinate user is one who has been introduced to the project by a user whom you introduced.


Why more than one user?

PowerProject allows more than one person - or user - to work on a project.

Each user can have their own preferences for the appearance of charts and the layout of bar chart and calendar windows. Each user can customise the appearance of the project without affecting the choice of others.

Each user can be restricted to a different part of a project. They can work on the parts which they are responsible for and be denied access to parts which may be confidential or of no interest.

With more than one user you can:

Delegate work with confidence that PowerProject can make sense of the whole.

Coordinate between different parts of a project, by cooperation on setting X-chart links between different areas.

Re-plan your own work without affecting others providing you do not affect the position of X-chart links or the chart boundaries. This allows you to reschedule your own work without affecting anyone else.


General tab on Options dialog

This tab allows you to specify various options including whether you want to refer to baselines by filename or by summary, and whether you want resource and histogram dialogs with extra options to be expanded by default.

Baselines

Choose an option from this panel to specify how you want to refer to baselines within the project. Any dialogs that display baseline information will display the baseline name according to the option you select here:

File Name

Click on File Name to specify that you want to refer to baselines by their filename. This is the default. You specify a filename for a baseline when you create the baseline using the New Baseline dialog.

Summary

Click on Summary to specify that you want to refer to baseline by their summary comment. You specify a summary comment for a baseline when you create a baseline using the New Baseline dialog. You can add a summary comment later or edit an existing one from the Baseline Manager dialog whether you want to refer to baselines by their filenames or by summary.

Resources

Expand dialogs by default

Check this box if you want dialogs to be expanded by default. The default is that dialogs are not expanded by default, which means you need to click the Options button to display the expanded version of the dialog.

Calendar

Specify the default calendar for resources. The calendar you specify here appears by default on the Permanent Resource Details and Consumable Resource Details dialogs when you create a new resource.

End Dates

Check the Show Earlier Date box if you want task end dates to be shown as the end of the last working day, instead of the following morning. Task end dates appear in text reports, export files, bar and segment annotation tokens and on bar and segment Details dialogs.

Annotation Tokens

Check the Show Decimal Places box if you want figures after the decimal point in a token annotation to be displayed. Tokens are only calculated up to two decimal places.

International

PowerProject takes its currency symbol from the setting in the Regional Settings in Windows 95 (International settings in Windows 3.x). You can override the symbol used in Windows by entering an alternative in the Currency Symbol box on this tab. PowerProject will then use this currency symbol on all related dialogs and tokens.

Barchart popups

These options determine whether popup information boxes are displayed while you work on a bar chart. When an option is checked, the corresponding popup box will appear.

Move

Check this box to have a popup box displayed when you move a segment. The information shown in the popup box is the bar or segment name, the segment start date and the segment end date.

Edit

Check this box to have a popup box displayed when you lengthen or shorten a segment. The information shown in the popup box is the bar or segment title, the segment start date, end date and duration, and any resource allocations assigned to the segment.

Scroll

Check this box to have a popup box displayed when you move around the chart window by dragging the scroll box in either the vertical or horizontal scroll bars. The popup will show the current chart view in relation to the rest of the chart, and the first bar title (when dragging the vertical scroll box) or first date (when dragging the horizontal scroll box) that will be visible in the chart window when you stop dragging the scroll box.

Progress

Check this box to have a popup box displayed when you assign progress to a segment using the mouse pointer. The information shown in the popup box is the bar or segment title and the amount and % of the segment that you are marking as being complete.

Chart Path Names

These options determine whether chart path names are displayed as bar title paths or WBN paths.

Bar Titles

Select this option to display chart paths using bar titles, e.g. Office Relocation>Pack and Move.

Bar WBN

Select this option to display chart paths using WBN codes, e.g. ORL007/P&M012.